JP2020000378A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine characteristic of control of a DC motor.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a rotor setting display sections of symbols; a DC motor to be a driving source of the rotor; DC motor control means; and game progress control means. The game progress control means transmits rotation instruction information to the DC motor control means. The rotation instruction information instructs rotation of the rotor for one piece. The game progress control means transmits to the DC motor control means speed instruction information instructing rotation speed of the rotor. The game progress control means transmits to the DC motor control means rotation instruction means at regular intervals when it rotates the rotor for two pieces or more. The DC motor control means rotates the rotor for one piece every time the rotation instruction information is received. The DC motor control means rotates the rotor for another piece while continuing to rotate the rotor when the rotary instruction information is received when it rotates the rotor. The DC motor control means rotates the rotor at the rotation speed instructed by the speed instruction information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 89

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine, a slot machine (pachislot machine), and an enclosed gaming machine.

  BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, a DC motor may be used as a power source of a movable body of a game console, and a game console including control means (IC or the like) for controlling the drive of the DC motor has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). .

JP-A-2006-202226

  However, conventional game consoles have room for improvement in controlling the DC motor.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming table having a feature in controlling a DC motor.

According to the present invention,
A rotating body in which the display section of the symbol is set by a plurality of frames along the rotating direction,
A DC motor serving as a drive source of the rotating body;
DC motor control means for controlling the DC motor to rotate the rotating body,
Game progress control means for controlling game progress,
A gaming table with
The game progress control means is means for transmitting rotation instruction information for rotating the rotating body to the DC motor control means,
The rotation instruction information is information for instructing rotation of one frame of the rotating body,
The game progress control means is means for transmitting speed instruction information for instructing the rotation speed of the rotating body to the DC motor control means,
The game progress control means is means for transmitting the rotation instruction information to the DC motor control means at predetermined intervals when rotating the rotator by two frames or more,
The DC motor control means is means for rotating the rotating body by one frame each time the rotation instruction information is received,
The DC motor control unit is a unit that, when receiving the rotation instruction information while rotating the rotating body, continues rotating the rotating body and further rotates the rotating body by one frame. ,
The DC motor control unit is a unit that, upon receiving the speed instruction information, rotates the rotating body at the rotation speed indicated by the speed instruction information.
A game console characterized by the above is provided.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in controlling a DC motor.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the rear side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1 and the stop symbol of special figure 2, (b) is a decorative symbol. (C) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of a main control part main processing of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption processing of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a flow chart. 1 shows a flow of a sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows a flow of a first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows a flow of an image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a flowchart. 2 shows the flow of the sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is an external view of a gaming board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the rear side. It is the external view which removed the accessory unit 820 from the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention, and was seen from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball passage unit 700 used by the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from the back side (back side). It is the perspective view which looked at the ball passage unit 700 used by the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from the back side (back side). FIG. 3 is a rear view of the ball passage unit 700 used in the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the rear side (rear side). It is the external view which looked at the accessory unit 820 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 820 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a logo accessory 900 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an external view of the logo combination 900 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side. FIG. 2 is an external view of a logo combination 900 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the rear side. 1 is an exploded perspective view of an upper front decoration accessory 1000 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of an upper front decoration accessory 1000 and an upper rear decoration accessory 1100 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of an upper front movable body 1002 of an upper front decoration accessory 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an external view of an upper front decoration accessory 1000 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side. 1 is an external view of an upper front decoration accessory 1000 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of an upper rear decoration accessory 1100 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of an upper rear movable body 1102 of an upper rear decoration accessory 1100 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is the external view which looked at the upper decoration accessory 1100 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a part of an upper right side accessory 1200 and a lower right side accessory 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the other part of the lower right side thing 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is the appearance figure which looked at the upper right side thing 1200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment from the front side, and the appearance figure which looked at the upper right side thing 1200 from the back side. It is the external view which looked at the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side part 1200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the external view which looked at the lower right side thing 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from right side. 1 is an external perspective view of a lower right side accessory 1400 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the lower right side accessory 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the rear. It is a figure showing the modification of guidance part 1452 of lower right side thing 1400 of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of central lower part 1600 of pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is the appearance figure which looked at the central lower part 1600 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from right side. It is a figure (the 1) which shows production example 1 of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows the effect example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 3) showing production example 1 of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of effect of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example 3 of effect of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example 4 of effect of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 2000 as a game table by the modification of one Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure showing information display button 2046 of slot machine 2000 as a game machine by a modification of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows another example of the prize-winning means provided under the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3, (a) is a front view of the prize-winning means 717, (b) is a broken line A in (a). It is a figure which expands and shows the surrounding part, and (c) is A'-A 'sectional drawing of (b). 47A is a rear perspective view of the winning unit 717 shown in FIG. 47, wherein FIG. 47A is a diagram showing the decoration unit 715 removed, and FIG. 47B is a diagram showing the decoration unit 715 and the solenoid 717e removed. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 different from FIG. FIG. 50 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a motor control IC 719 illustrated in FIG. 49. 50A is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of the motor control IC 719 illustrated in FIG. 50, FIG. 50A is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of the motor control IC 719, and FIG. It is. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a movable body that rotates and a movable body that linearly moves, and is an external view of the accessory unit 820 illustrated in FIG. 16 as viewed from the front side. It is a figure explaining control of movable body 1401 which carries out linear operation, and (a)-(c) is a lower right side accessory which shows a state of movement of movable body 1401 from an initial position to a target position step by step. 1400 is a schematic illustration of the right side of 1400. (A) shows information for controlling the operation 1 for the lower right side accessory 1400 shown in FIG. 53, (b) shows information for controlling the operation 2 following the operation 1, and (c) FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating information for controlling operation 3 following operation 2 and FIG. 7D is a diagram illustrating information for controlling operation 4 following operation 3. (A) shows information for controlling the operation 1 for the lower right side accessory 1400 shown in FIG. 53, (b) shows information for controlling the operation 2 following the operation 1, and (c) FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating information for controlling operation 3 following operation 2 and FIG. 7D is a diagram illustrating information for controlling operation 4 following operation 3. (A) shows the information for controlling the operation 1 for the circular object 1607 (see FIG. 37) of the central lower part 1600 shown in FIG. 52, and (b) shows the control for the operation 2 following the operation 1 FIG. 7C is a diagram showing information to be performed, (c) shows information for controlling operation 3 following operation 2, and (d) is a diagram showing information for controlling operation 4 following operation 3. (A) is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a register A in a register 719b, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a specification of a motor rotation speed based on the setting of the register A illustrated in (a). (A), (b), (c) is a diagram showing the configuration of the register B in the register 719b. (A), (b), (c) is a diagram showing the configuration of the register C in the register 719b. (A), (b), (c) is a diagram showing the configuration of the register D in the register 719b. (A), (b), (c) is a diagram showing the configuration of the register E in the register 719b. (A), (b) is a figure which shows the structure of the register F in the register 719b. (A), (b) is a figure which shows the structure of the register G in the register 719b. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration of a register H in a register 719b, and (b) is a diagram showing a configuration of a register I in a register 719b. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration of a register J in a register 719b, (b) is a diagram showing a configuration of a register K in the register 719b, and (c) is a diagram of a register L in the register 719b. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration. (A)-(f) is the schematic which shows the example of an effect using the control by the motor control IC719. (A)-(h) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect using control by motor control IC719. (A)-(l) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect using the control by the motor control IC 719. (A)-(h) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect using control by motor control IC719. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect using control by motor control IC719. (A)-(h) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect using control by motor control IC719. (A)-(h) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect using control by motor control IC719. It is a perspective view showing the appearance of the slot machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the slot machine in the state where the front door was opened. Explanatory drawing of a symbol position. FIG. 4 is a partially exploded perspective view of the reel drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a reel and peripheral components. It is a figure which expands and shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol provided to each reel in planar view. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) is a diagram showing a combination of a combination, a symbol combination corresponding to each combination, and the number of awards given when a combination is won, and (b) is a transition diagram of a game state of a main control unit. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a main control unit main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a flowchart showing a first sub-control unit main process, (b) a first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) is a flowchart showing a first sub-control unit timer interrupt process. (A) is a second sub-control unit main process, (b) is a second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) is a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a second sub-control unit. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of an image control process. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram illustrating a main control unit and a motor control board. 3A is a diagram illustrating a circuit example of a setting board, and FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating a register example of a control IC 201. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of types of setting information. It is a figure showing an example of communication information of a main control part and a control IC. 5 is a timing chart illustrating an example of control information and state information. (A) is a timing chart explaining a problem at the time of acceleration, and (b) is a timing chart showing an example of acceleration control. 5 is a timing chart illustrating an example of control information and state information. 5 is a timing chart illustrating an example of control information and state information. It is a figure showing an example of a step. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the set amount of adjustment rotation amount. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the example of an effect by a reel.

  Hereinafter, an example of a gaming table using a DC motor will be described. The following description is roughly divided into the embodiment A and the embodiment B, but each embodiment and the examples and modifications included in each embodiment can be appropriately combined with each other. Note that reference numerals indicating the components are used in the embodiment A or B only, unless otherwise specified. Therefore, for example, the same reference numerals as those in the embodiment A may be used in the embodiment B as the codes indicating other configurations.

<Embodiment A>
Hereinafter, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine, a spinning game machine such as a slot machine, or an enclosed game machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a firing device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a vertical or rectangular wooden or metal frame member to be fixed to an installation place (island facilities or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104 is a member which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertical rectangular game machine base shaft body which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 has a lock function by the lock unit 105 and is attached via a hinge 112 to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable, and is configured in a frame shape. Thus, the door member has an opening 116 on the inside. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are mounted on the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door open sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  Further, the front frame door 106 has a passage below the opening 116 in which a plurality of game balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “balls”) can be stored and the game balls are guided to the launching device 110. Is provided, a lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be completely stored in the upper plate 126, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 126 is discharged to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box), and a launch device 110 by a player's operation Ball launching handle 134 for launching the game ball guided to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the chance button 1 for changing the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player. 6, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 capable of performing various settings and the like by operation of a setter (for example, a player or a game store clerk), and a card unit ( A ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to the CR unit), a return operation button 142 for giving a player a balance return instruction to the card unit, and the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are displayed. And a ball lending display unit (not shown). Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104 and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The setting operation unit 137 includes, as push-button switches that can be pressed by a setter, an OK (OK) button, an upper button located above the enter button, a lower button located below the enter button, and an enter button. It has a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the enter button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and the operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied. May be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side. In the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening opening upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. And a tank rail 154 for guiding a ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket temporarily holds the game balls flowing down into the payout device 152 through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Accordingly, the game balls temporarily staying are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 4). The game balls that have passed through the payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. Pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that forms a main control section 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and effects related to effects based on processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control section 400 for performing the control processing, and a second sub-control section 400 for performing control processing relating to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-controller 500, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, are configured to cancel an error by operation of a game clerk. A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with an error release switch 168 and a firing control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to firing of game balls are configured. And a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by operation of a game clerk, and a power switch 178 that is operated when the power is turned on. Accordingly, a power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 including an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control section 300, and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit. And, is arranged.

  The main board 156, the first sub-board 160, the second sub-board 164, and the like need to be changed for each model, so they are provided on the back of the game board 200. The payout board 170, the firing board 174, the power board 182, and the like It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200, and a game area 124 on which a game ball can roll is defined. At a substantially center of the game area 124, an effect device 206 is provided. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center. The rendering device 206 includes a logo accessory 900, an upper front ornament accessory 1000, an upper rear ornament accessory 1100 (not shown in FIG. 3), an upper right side accessory 1200, an upper left side accessory 1300, and a lower right side accessory. 1400, a lower left side item 1500, and a lower center item 1600 (hereinafter, these items may be collectively referred to as "various items") to perform an effect. The details will be described later. I do.

  The game board 200 of this example is a so-called right-handed game board. In the right-hitting machine, by changing the launching strength of the game ball by operating the ball firing handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side of the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side of the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, the ease of entering a ball into the ordinary symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230, the second special symbol starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, etc., which will be described later, is determined by the game ball falling on the right route. And game balls that fall down the left path.

  With respect to each of the ordinary symbol opening 228, the second special symbol opening 232, and the variable winning opening 234, the ordinary symbol opening 228, the second special symbol opening 232, and the variable winning opening 234 are arranged on the right route. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right route, and relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left route. On the other hand, regarding the first special symbol starting port 230, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the left path due to the arrangement pattern of the game nails (not shown) and the presence of the warp device 242 and the like. Yes, it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball falling on the right route. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the position and size of each of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative design display device 208, it is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and it is sufficient if it can be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  Below the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, , An ordinary symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "common symbol", the special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol", the first special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 2".

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image. In the present embodiment, the general-purpose display device 210 includes a seven-segment LED. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7-segment LEDs.

  The general figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure changing games (details will be described later) that are held, and in the present embodiment, the general figure changing game is held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special figure changing games (details will be described later) that are held. (For example, four) can be reserved. The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high-probability state, and changes the game state from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. It turns on when the state is changed to the probability state, and turns off when the state is changed from the high state to the low state.

  In addition, around the effect device 206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a general drawing starting opening 228, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, a variable winning opening. 234 and a second outlet 241 are provided. The details of the second outlet 241 will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are provided on the gaming board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (not shown). When a prize is won, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with such a configuration, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the game ball includes a ball to be paid out to a player as a value for winning (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “prize ball”) and a ball to be lent to a player (hereinafter, “ball rental”). May be included).

  The general-purpose starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged on the route. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the normal figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the general-purpose starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general-purpose change game using the general-purpose display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The special figure variable game (hereinafter, may be referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric tuy), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter the ball, and the prize fluctuating game is won. When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The special figure variable game (hereinafter, may be referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided on the right-hand flow path of the gaming board 200. The variable winning opening 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is not possible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol by winning the special figure changing game. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds, a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Note that the ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members (not shown) called windmills and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are arranged near the winning opening and the starting opening. In the lowermost part, after guiding a ball that did not enter any winning opening, starting port or second out port 241 to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out port 240 for discharging to the gaming island side is provided. Provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle of the player, and sets the firing rod 146 and The shot hammer 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and strikes the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by a hitting ball direction changing member, a game nail, or the like, and has a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or a starting opening (special opening opening). 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232), a second out port 241 or a prize port or a starting port without any prize port. The vehicle reaches the out port 240 without entering the ball 241 or passing only through the ordinary start port 228.

  Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in a region where the game ball can be rolled, and various characters are arranged in a region where the game ball cannot roll. Has been established. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 is located behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and various accessories. The warping device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp entrance 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp exit 242b. The front stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b, a ball riding on a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and a ball passing therethrough is located at the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the ball 230 is provided. The various accessories will be described later.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling a central part of the game, and a main effect of the production in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-controller 400 for performing control, a second sub-controller 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400, and a main controller in response to a command transmitted by the main controller 300. A payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, A counter timer 312 for measuring the number and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit incorporates two counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting opening, a winning opening, a variable winning opening, and a front frame door opening. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a bottom plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for controlling display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the special figure 1 display apparatus 212 and the special figure 2 display apparatus 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general-purpose reserve lamp 216, the special-purpose reserve 1 lamp 218, the special-purpose reserve 2 lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the probable lamp 222, etc., and various solenoids for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234. And a driving circuit 334 for controlling the 332. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. And store it in the register. Similarly, when the signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232 is received, the random value generating circuit 318 also latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 at that timing. Then, the latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 communicates with the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, a game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (a main control unit main process described later is started).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with one sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although the signal is configured to be transmitted, the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by two-way communication.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the whole of the first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. Yes. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138). A variety of movable body sensors 430 for detecting the current position of various movable bodies 550 (various movable bodies 550 will be described later) included in various accessories, and a chance button sensor 426 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136; An operation unit sensor (not shown) that detects pressing of each button of the operation unit 137, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from these sensors to the basic circuit 402, and stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. The read image data and the like are read, a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436, and the decoration map is displayed. It is connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the display device 208, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. are doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of the various movable bodies 550, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game frame lamp 542. A frame drive lamp drive circuit 540 for performing the control of; a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 540; Are connected. In the present embodiment, the second sub-control unit 500 controls the operation of the various movable members 550, but the first sub-control unit 400 controls the operation of the various movable members 550. Alternatively, a movable body control unit may be provided separately from the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the movable body control unit may control the operation of the various movable bodies 550. In the present embodiment, the various movable body sensors 430 are connected to the sensor circuit 428 provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes the position detection of the various movable bodies 550. However, the various movable body sensors 430 are connected to a predetermined sensor circuit provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 executes the position detection of the various movable bodies 550. The movable body sensor 430 may be connected to a predetermined sensor circuit provided in the movable body control unit, and the movable body control unit may perform position detection of the various movable bodies 550. It may be.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental game. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. The payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. When the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is performed by two-way communication, the various sensors 320 detect the opening of the front frame door 106 by a front frame door opening sensor. The detection result of 107 may be transmitted to the payout control unit 600 without transmitting to the sensor circuit 322, and the payout control unit 600 may output the received detection result to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stop of firing, which is output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 driving the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 supplying the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on a control signal instructing the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the DC power to a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is configured to supply power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off (for example, a power storage circuit (for example, , Capacitors). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device via another power supply path.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 5A to 5C, the special figure 1 display unit 212, the special figure 2 display unit 214, the decorative design display unit 208, and the general figure display unit 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary figures will be described. FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figures 1 and 2. The special figure 1 fluctuating game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and it is determined that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the 2 starting port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” in which the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment are repeated. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” in which all the seven segments are lighted and the central one segment is repeatedly lit. . The “variable display of the special figure 1” and the “variable display of the special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol variable display according to the present embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 starts. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, or the start of the “variable display of the special figure 2”, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 is changed. The process until the stop display is equivalent to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, after the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays up to this point is referred to as symbol change stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows ten types of special figures “special figure A” to “special figure J” as the stop symbols in the symbol change stop display of the special figures 1 and 2. In FIG. 5A, a white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and a black portion indicates the location of the segment to be turned on. "Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special big hit design, and "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of the jackpot in the special figure variable game is performed by lottery of a hardware random number, and the determination of the special jackpot is performed by lottery of a software random number. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference between the special figure change game after the end of the big hit game and the high (special big hit) or low (big hit) probability of winning the big hit. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure probable change” or simply “probable change”). Called a low probability state. Also, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and the end of the 15R jackpot game, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “typical probability change”), and the state not in the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure low probability state. The "Special Figure A", which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a symbol that is in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game, and the "R Special Figure B", which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure after the big hit game is over. It is a symbol that is in a low-probability ordinary-high-probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are patterns in which the advantage for the player becomes relatively large.

  The “special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a symbol in which a special figure high probability general figure high probability state is set after the big hit game ends. In other words, the difference is that “special figure C” is 2R as compared with “special figure A” which is 15R. The "special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called a sudden reduction in time, and is a pattern which becomes a special figure low probability general figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. The “special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called “latency probability change” or “hidden probability change”, and is a symbol which becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state after the end of the big hit game. The “special figure F” is a 2R big hit symbol that is suddenly called a normal, and is a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state after the big hit game ends.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and after the small hit game ends, the game state before the small hit game is executed is maintained. "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, and after the small hit game ends, the gaming state before the small hit game is executed is maintained. Further, the “special figure I” is the first outlier symbol, and is a symbol in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively small. The “special figure J” is a second out-of-design and has a relatively small advantage for the player.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decoration patterns of this embodiment, “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numerals “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second entrance sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting slot 232. In the symbol display area, the display is switched in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

  Then, when notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special figure A” and the 15R jackpot of “special figure B”, a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1- "Decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. In the case of explicitly notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special figure A”, a symbol combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, “decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3” or “decorative 7-decorative 7”) -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a 2R jackpot called “Tokuzu E”, which is called a latent probability change (hidden probability change), a “Tokuzu F” suddenly called a 2R big hit, or a “Tokuzu G” or “Tokuzu H” small hit When notifying the hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying the 2R jackpot called "sudden probability change" of "Tokuzu C" and the 2R jackpot called "sudden time saving of" Tokuzu D "," decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5 "is stopped and displayed. . On the other hand, in the case of notifying the loss of the "special figure I" and the "special figure J", symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5B are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of the stop display mode of the general symbol of the present embodiment, namely, a general symbol "Picture A" and a non-standard symbol "Picture B". Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the general-purpose starting port 228, the general-purpose display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs “Picture change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the normal figure variable game, the “standard figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the loss of the general figure changing game, “the general figure B” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 5C as well, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal performs a reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes a main process of the main control unit according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and setting of the WDT 314 Operation permission and setting of initial values are performed. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set to WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 subsequent to step S101, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, it is determined whether the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low-voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power-off), the process returns to step S103. If the low-voltage signal is off (the CPU 304 does not detect the power-off), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. It should be noted that even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later for each period in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the (output port to one sub-control unit 400), a setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the power supply returns to the state before power interruption (before power interruption). If the power supply does not return to the state before power interruption (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of setting to the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is ON (indicating that an operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is required. If the RAM clear signal is ON (if the RAM clear is required), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating a suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Accordingly, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). When the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the result of the checksum is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out, and the stack pointer is reset (actually set). In addition, at the time of power failure, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, reset to each register, and then, setting of interruption permission is performed. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction following the (predetermined in step S115) instruction executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main controller 300 has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power interruption. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400 Sent to

  In step S113, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, the normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power restoration command, the command setting transmission process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, after setting interrupt prohibition, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of three random value counters for generating a general figure winning random number value, a special figure 1 random number value, and a special figure 2 random number value, respectively. Update the random number counter for generation. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure 1 random number counter and a random number counter for generating the initial value thereof, a special figure 2 random number counter and a random number counter for generating the initial value thereof, and a general figure winning random number counter and the initial value thereof are provided. A generation random number counter is provided. In step S115, the initial values of three of these initial value generation random number counters are updated. For example, assuming that the range of the initial value generation random number counter that can be taken is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the obtained value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is obtained. To memorize. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. After the basic random number initial value updating process is completed, interrupt permission is set. The random number counter for initial value generation is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the execution of the timer interrupt process started every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms). At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 subsequent to step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the count value of WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (in order not to detect a processing abnormality). Typically (in this example, once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt), a restart is performed.

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-described front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower plate full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence or absence of the detection signal is monitored by input, and the detection signal is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320 in the RAM 308. To explain the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the last two timer interrupt processes (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. The information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the detection signal storage area before and after the second detection provided separately for each ball detection sensor. The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above) is read out from the present detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out in the above-described previous detection signal storage area. To memorize. Further, the detection signals of the respective ball detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information of the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals from the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process is repeated several times at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal twice before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last time, presence of previous detection signal, presence of current detection signal) ), A variable winning opening 234, a special figure 1 starting port 230, and a special figure 2 starting port 232, or a general figure starting port 228 It is determined that there is. That is, it is determined that there is a winning in these winning ports 226, 234 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, if information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above winning determination pattern information, there is no winning in the general winning opening 226. Is determined, and the following processes associated with winning in the general winning opening 226 are performed. If the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals of the past three times does not match the winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize once, it is not determined that there is a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches the pattern information, it is determined whether or not the pattern information matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S205, when the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is configured to be performed by two-way communication, the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 It monitors the presence / absence of a door open detection signal output from the payout control unit 600 that has received the detection result from the server, and stores it in a door detection signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S207 following step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the general-purpose winning random number value, special figure The three random value counters for generating the one random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, assuming that the value range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a general-purpose winning random number value counter for generating the general-purpose winning random number provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is set to 1 Is added and stored in the original general-purpose winning random number counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original general-purpose winning random number counter. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, when it is determined that the general-purpose winning random number counter has completed one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the general-purpose winning random number counter is obtained. Then, it is set to the regular figure winning random number counter.

  For example, a value obtained from a general-purpose winning random number value counter that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 is obtained, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 in the previous time. When the value is equal to the set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating an initial value corresponding to the general-purpose winning random number counter, and is set in the general-purpose winning random number counter. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the ordinary figure winning random number counter has made one round next. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area, an initial value storage area for determining that the special figure 1 random number counter and the special figure 2 random value counter have made one round is provided in the RAM 308, respectively. In the present embodiment, a counter for obtaining the special figure 1 random value and a counter for obtaining the special figure 2 random value are provided separately. However, the same counter may be used. The same initial value generation random number counter and initial value storage area may be used.

  In step S211 subsequent to step S209, an effect random number update process is performed. In the effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used in the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuating time determination random value counter for determining the symbol fluctuating time in the special figure 1 fluctuating game or its initial value is updated, and the symbol fluctuating in the special figure 2 fluctuating game is updated. The value of the random number counter for fluctuating time determination for determining time is updated or its initial value is updated. In addition, the value of the random number counter for determining the figure variation time for determining the symbol variation time in the figure variation game or the initial value thereof is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a general symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the general symbol display device 210, and measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the special figure 1 display device 212. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for the special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time to fluctuate / stop the symbol on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined time Update various timers including a timer for measuring a closing time of a predetermined time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In the winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is achieved in the winning opening 226, 234 or the starting opening 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 stores a winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 subsequent to step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception processing, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the result of determination as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number value generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special figure 1 winning random number generated by subjecting the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register to predetermined processing is acquired, and the special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308 is obtained. One random value is obtained, a special figure 1 variable time determining random number value is obtained from the special figure 1 variable time determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of a special figure 1 winning random number, a special figure 1 random number, and a random number for determining a special figure 1 fluctuating time (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 1 start information”) in the special figure 1 random number storage area is a special figure. Only the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the 1 reservation number storage area is stored. In the special figure 1 random number storage area, every time the number of special figure 1 reservations is reduced by one, the data of the special figure 1 start information of the highest order (earliest) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 start information is deleted. The processing is performed so that the information data holding order is moved up by one. Also, every time the number of reserved special figure 1 is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 start information is written in the next reserved rank of the special figure 1 start information having the lowest (last) priority.

  If the special figure 2 starting port 232 has a prize and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number generated by applying a predetermined process to the value stored in the value storage register is obtained, and the special figure 2 random number value is obtained from the special figure 2 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, a special figure 2 variable time determining random number value is obtained from the special figure 2 variable time determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of a special figure 2 winning random number, a special figure 2 random number, and a random number for determining a special figure 2 fluctuating time (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2 start information”) in the special figure 2 random number storage area is a special figure. The same number as the special figure 2 suspension number stored in the 2 suspension number storage area is stored. In the special figure 2 random number storage area, the data of the special figure 2 start information having the highest reservation order is deleted and the data of the remaining special figure 2 start information is deleted every time the special figure 2 reservation number is reduced by one. Processing is performed so that the pending order is moved up by one. Also, every time the special figure 2 reservation number increases by one, new data of the special figure 2 start information is written in the next reservation order of the data of the special figure 2 start information having the lowest reservation order.

  If there is a prize in the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a general figure winning random number value from the general figure winning random number generation random number counter. In the corresponding general-purpose random value storage area. When there is a winning in the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234.

  In step S219 subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, one byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicating that data is set) and the bit 6 , Power-on information (in the case of ON, this indicates that the command is transmitted for the first time after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

  In step S221 subsequent to step S219, a general-purpose state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state update processing performs one of a plurality of processings corresponding to the ordinary figure state. For example, in the general figure state updating process during the general figure change display (the value of the general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / lighting of the seven-segment LED constituting the general figure display device 210 is repeatedly performed. Turn off drive control is performed. By performing this control, the general-figure display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the general-figure (floor fluctuating game).

  In the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the ordinary figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (when the value of the ordinary figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the ordinary figure hit flag is on, the winning symbol The 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the general-purpose display device 210 has a display mode. The on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the ordinary state updating process. In this case, the above-mentioned lighting / light-off driving control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the ordinary symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the unreachable symbol (the ordinary symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Further, thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a general-purpose stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the ordinary figure fluctuating game is notified to the player.

  In addition, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the general figure hit flag is turned on. When the ordinary figure hit flag is ON, in the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is updated. The setting area is set to the normal operation state, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) is provided to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232. A signal for holding the 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general-state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in a storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general-state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (timing when the value of the blade closing-time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to the non-operating state. I do. Further, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is out of order, the general figure hit flag is turned off. When the general figure hit flag is OFF, the general figure state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the general figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting is made to set the non-operating state of the ordinary drawing. In the ordinary figure state updating process in the case where the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general drawing related lottery process, the general figure variable game and the opening / closing control of the special figure 2 start port 232 are not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the number of the general figure variable game held is Is greater than or equal to one, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure changing game is a winning or a non-winning by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the general figure random number storage area described above. A decision to hit is made. In the case of winning, the flag of the general figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and in the case of non-winning, the flag of the general figure is set to OFF. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the above-described general-purpose variation time determination random number value is acquired as the general-purpose variation time determination random number value, and based on the acquired general-purpose variation time determination random number value. One of the plurality of fluctuating times is used to select one of the times for fluctuating and displaying the general figure on the general-figure display device 210, and this fluctuating display time is used as the general-figure fluctuating display time. To memorize. It should be noted that the number of reserved general-purpose floating games is stored in the general-purpose reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this ordinary figure reserved number storage area. Further, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. When the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation number storage area increases, the special figure prefetch processing pre-reads the start information relating to the increased reservation, and selects the special symbols relating to the stop symbols of the special figure changing game, etc. It is determined in advance before the determination of success or failure in the processing.

  For example, in the special figure pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the current control state is a power support state (a state in which one of the normal figure change, the general figure change, and the electric chu spread is set, details will be described later). When it is determined that the power is being supported, it is determined whether or not a prize has been received in the special figure 2 starting port 232, and when it is determined that a prize has been received in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the winning special figure 2 starting information is displayed. The special figure 2 winning random number value, the special figure 2 random number value, and the special figure 2 variation time determination random number value are read in advance. Next, prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pre-read special figure 2 winning random number value, and a hit / fail judgment table (not shown) are used. A preliminary determination is made as to whether the hit determination is a big hit. Next, using the pre-read special figure 2 random number value and the special figure 2 symbol determination table (not shown), a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the special figure 2 variable game is determined in advance. Next, the fluctuating time of the special figure 2 fluctuating game is preliminarily determined using the stop symbol determined in advance, the special figure 2 fluctuating time determination random value, and a special figure 2 fluctuating display time determination table (not shown). Next, the pre-determination results (whether or not, the stop symbol, the fluctuation time) obtained by the pre-determination are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 stores the result of determination of the special figure 2 fluctuating game, the stop symbol, and the fluctuating time as the special figure 2 prefetch result in the forefront free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. Has become. In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit can store up to four special figure 2 prefetch results, for example.

  Further, in the RAM 308, there is provided a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 2 prefetching number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new information of the special figure 2 prefetching result in the next order of the information of the lowest (last) special figure 2 prefetching result. In the present embodiment, the prefetching process is performed only for the increment of the suspension, but the special figure prefetching process may be performed for all suspensions each time.

  In the special figure pre-reading process, for example, when the main control unit 300 determines that it is not in the power support state, it executes the same special figure pre-reading processing as the special figure 2 start information for the special figure 1 start information. Note that the special figure pre-reading processing is executed by referring to the validity / non-permission determination table and the special figure determining table used in the validity / non-permission determination, but a special determination table may be used for the pre-reading processing. Note that the special figure pre-reading process may be executed in the winning reception process (step S217).

  Next, the special figure state updating processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, and first, the special figure state updating processing (the special figure 2 state updating processing) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update processing, one of the following plurality of processings is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update processing during the special figure 2 change display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED included in the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is repeated. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (a special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 stores a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure. Flags such as a probability variation flag are provided. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in a special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R big hit flag is turned on, and the special figure When the probability variation flag is on and the general figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A and the 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5A are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the general figure probability variation flag is on. In the case, the special figure B, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability change flag is on, and the general figure probability change flag is on, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability change flag is off, Tokuzu D, 2R big hit flag is on when Tokuzu probability variation flag is on, Tokuzu probability change flag is on, Tokuzu E, 2R large flag is on when Tokuzu probability variation flag is off , Special map probability fluctuation flag is off The special figure F when the ordinary figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, and the first off flag The 7-segment LED included in the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the special figure I is in the ON state and the special figure J is in the second off flag in the ON state. In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting indicating that the special figure 2 is being stopped is displayed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 confirms and displays any one of the special figures A to J.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the special figure 2 which is fixed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time savings stored in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time savings. If not, turn off the time reduction flag. Furthermore, the time reduction flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state). Further, if the number of times of change stored in the number of times of change of probability stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of change in probability. Turn off.

  In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later, and then the process is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). To set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image that informs the player of the start of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Then, information indicating a winning effect period is set in a storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 (until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in a storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Information indicating the closed period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2), and the state updating of the special figure 2 is started at the end timing. In the processing, the RAM 308 is provided in order to set a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer. If the normal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the number of time savings (for example, 100 times) is set in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the RAM 308 is provided at the same time when the big hit game ends. Turns on the saved time saving flag. If the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to off, the number of times saved is not set in the number of times saved storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The term “time saving” as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. If the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is a state of high probability of general figure (probable change of general figure). In the high probability figure state, the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation game is higher than in the low probability state. In addition, the fluctuating time of the fuji fluctuating game is shorter in the fuji high probabilities state than in the fuji low probabilities state (fuji fuji short). Furthermore, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is more likely to be longer in the high-tumor state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open in the state of high probability in the normal state than in the state of low probability in the general state. The state in which any one of the normal figure change, the general figure change, and the electric power spread is set is referred to as an electric support (starting opening winning support by an electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the ordinary figure low probability state is maintained. This means that if the game is in the high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable prize ports 234 are set in the special figure 2 starting port 232 during the jackpot game until the game balls enter the ball. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases when the ball hits and the gambling property is increased, and this is to solve this problem.

  If the special map probability variation flag is set to ON, the number of times of the probability change (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the outlier flag is ON, the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, a special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (a special figure 1 state update process) is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update processing is the same as the processing described in the above-described special figure 2 state update processing in which “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing is performed for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Here also, the special figure-related lottery processing for the special figure 2 (the special figure-related lottery processing) is performed first (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure-related lottery processing for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1-related lottery processing) Is performed (step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the special game 1 and the special figure 2 are not performing the floating game, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive and are suspended. Assuming that the number of fluctuating games is one or more, the execution is performed using the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 random value storage area. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the special game 1 and the special figure 2 do not perform the floating game, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive and are suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 random value storage area, on condition that the number of the variable games is 1 or more.

  Also in these special figure related lottery processes, the main controller 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 1 variable game does not start to change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. In addition, when the reserved number of the special figure 2 variable game is one or more, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the reservation of the special figure 1 variable game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the determination of the success / failure of the special figure fluctuating game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided. This is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game having a high degree of advantage (for example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a special figure variable game having a low degree of advantage (for example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special drawing 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 obtains the special drawing 2 start information from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special drawing 2 random number storage area. Then, based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., a big hit is determined by using the hit / fail judgment table stored in the ROM 306. Is determined, a small hit is determined, or a miss is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 determines a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol 2 using a special symbol 2 symbol determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306 and stored in the ROM 306. The variable time of the special figure 2 variable game is determined using the specified special figure 2 variable display time determination table (not shown).

  After extracting the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 subtracts 1 from the special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variable game having a low degree of advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reservation of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority change is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started before the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 The special figure 1 priority change which is digested prior to the reservation may be used. In addition, without giving priority to either the special figure 2 variable game or the special figure 1 variable game, the starting figure winning game which starts the special figure changing game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the starting order is won. It may be a forward change. In the starting opening winning order change, since the upper limit of the number of reservations is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, comparison with the priority change in which the upper-limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of reservations can be increased.

  Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the floating game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed in accordance with the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. The process and the special drawing related lottery process may be performed independently for each of the special drawings 1 and 2 so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously varied. In the case where a plurality of special figures are simultaneously changed in this way, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided in the decorative symbol display device 208, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special figures may be displayed in one area. Further, when the fluctuations relating to a plurality of special figures are simultaneously performed, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may influence the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 subsequent to step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in the present embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a big hit round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, a pre-read result information command Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission processing described above. If the command type is a special figure symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, various small hit flags, various missed flags, special figure probability change flags, and special figure related. Includes information indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the lottery process, and in the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, various big hit flags, various small hit flags, various loss flags, special figure probability fluctuations Including the value of the flag, etc., in the case of the prize production start command and the end production start command, it includes the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and in the case of the big hit round designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag , And information indicating the number of jackpot rounds. When the command type indicates the basic command, the command data includes device information, presence / absence of a prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of a prize in the variable winning port 234, and the like. Is included. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figures 1 and 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area to be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit is used as command data. Included.

  In the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, various small hit flags, various losing flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, and special figure 1 related lottery processing. And the information which shows the fluctuation | variation time of the special figure variable game selected by the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable game or special figure 2 variable game, etc. are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, various small hit flags, various losing flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag A value, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games are set. In the end effect setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag A value, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games are set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set information indicating such as. In the above described special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set information indicating such as.

  In addition, in this step S233, a general command special figure reservation increasing process is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating the special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the command information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, and advance notice information (advance notice information, false information) Prior notice information or no prior notice information).

  The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 subsequent to step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In a step S237 subsequent to the step S235, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full error is monitored. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 through the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When the low-voltage signal is on (when the power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243. When the low-voltage signal is off (when the power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S301 in FIG. 8A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303 subsequent to step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for a timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, effect data updating processing is performed.

  In step S311, following step S309, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the chance button 136 is detected, the process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button 136 is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137 is detected, the process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137. I do.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, an image control process is performed. In the image control process, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the VDP 434, the command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315 subsequent to step S313, a sound control process is performed. In the sound control processing, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317 subsequent to step S315, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, when the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the various lamps 418, the command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319 following step S317, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

  FIG. 8B is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 8C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt triggers the timer interrupt processing to a predetermined time. Run in cycles. In step S501 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-controller main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. I do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 following step S501, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other update processing of the effect random number value And so on.

  FIG. 8D is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the image control process (step S313) of the first sub-controller main process. In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. Thereby, the one-frame image stored in the display area not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on a command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603 following step S601, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S605; Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S605, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 obtains information on the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axes of the VRAM 436, the image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607 following step S605, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609 following step S607, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 434 based on the end of image rendering. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S711; Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S701. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. . In step S705, 0 is substituted for a timer variable.

  In step S707 following step S705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709 following step S707, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when effect data needs to be updated, effect data updating processing is performed.

  In step S711 subsequent to step S709, a lamp control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713 subsequent to step S711, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the various movable bodies 550, the command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S703.

  FIG. 9B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 9C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt triggers the timer interrupt processing to a predetermined time. Run in cycles. In step S901 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 following step S901, an effect of updating the random number value for effect is performed.

  Next, the gaming board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, in the description using FIGS. 10 to 12 and FIGS. 13 to 44 described below, the vertical direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) or the horizontal direction is a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility. Refers to the vertical or horizontal direction. Similarly, the left-right direction indicates the left-right direction toward the gaming board 200 among the horizontal directions. The front-rear direction is a direction perpendicular to the game board 200 (the substrate surface of the transparent game board 810) in the horizontal direction, a direction from the game board 200 toward the transparent plate member 118 is a front direction, and the reverse is a rear direction. Call.

  In FIG. 10 to FIG. 38, both arrows with “up” and “down” indicate a vertical direction, “up” indicates a vertical upper direction, and “lower” indicates a vertical lower direction. Also, in FIGS. 10 to 38, the double-headed arrow with “Left” and “Right” indicates the left-right direction, “Left” indicates the left direction, and “Right” indicates the right direction. Also, in FIGS. 10 to 38, the double-headed arrows with “front” and “rear” indicate the front-rear direction, “front” indicates the front direction, and “rear” indicates the rear direction.

  FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the gaming board 200 is viewed from the upper right front to the lower left rear. The game board 200 has a three-layer structure including a rail decoration member 800, a transparent game board 810, and an accessory unit 820.

  The rail decoration member 800 includes an outer rail member 802, an outer frame member 804, a center decoration member 806, and a game board decoration member 808. The outer rail member 802 is integrally formed of, for example, a resin material, and has a left base 802a and an upper base 802b. The left side base portion 802a has an arc shape centered on the vicinity of the center of the game board 200, with the inside edge from the bottom to the top. The upper base portion 802b is formed to extend rightward from the upper end of the left base portion 802a, and has an arcuate shape centered around the center of the gaming board 200, with the inner side edge going from left to right. The outer rail member 802 is molded so that the inner edge of the left base 802a and the inner edge of the upper base 802b are continuous. An outer rail 202 is disposed on inner side edges of the left base 802a and the upper base 802b. The outer end of the game area 124 is defined by the outer rail 202 of the outer rail member 802.

  The outer frame member 804 is molded of, for example, a resin material, and has a curved shape in which an inner edge from right to lower right matches a curve of a lower right edge of the game area 124. The game area 124 is surrounded by the outer rail member 802 and the outer frame member 804.

  The center decoration member 806 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material. The center decoration member 806 has an annular shape with a predetermined contour, and the entire inner surface of the annular shape is open. The center decoration member 806 includes the warp device 242 and the front stage 244 shown in FIG. The center decoration member 806 may be provided with a wall on the rear side of the front stage 244 so that a game ball that has entered the front stage 244 does not fall to the rear side.

  The game board decoration member 808 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has an outer edge having an arc shape centered around the center of the game board 200. An inner rail 204 is arranged on the outer edge of the game board decoration member 808. In addition, on the front side inside the inner rail 204 of the game board decoration member 808, a general winning opening 226, a special figure 1 starting port 230, and a special figure 2 starting port 232 shown in FIG. 3 (the blade member 232a is not shown). , A variable winning port 234, an out port 240, and a second out port 241 are provided. Further, a decorative pattern with irregularities is provided on the front side of the game board decorative member 808.

  The transparent game board 810 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a thin plate shape. The outer rail member 802 and the outer frame member 804 are fixed to the front surface of the transparent game board 810 with screws, and are arranged so as to surround the game area 124. On the front side of the transparent game board 810, a plurality of game nails (not shown) and a hitting direction changing member (not shown) are arranged. Further, the transparent game board 810 has an opening 810a which is opened at the center according to the contour shape of the center decoration member 806. The center decoration member 806 is fitted into the opening 810a and fixed to the transparent game board 810 with screws. Further, the transparent game board 810 has an opening 810b opened in a predetermined shape at the lower right of the opening 810a, and has openings 810c and 810d opened in a predetermined shape at the lower left of the opening 810a. I have. The openings 810c and 810d are formed in this order from the left side of the transparent game board 810. The special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the variable winning opening 234, and the out port 240 correspond to the opening 810b, and the second out port 241 and one below the second out port 241. The game board decoration member 808 is fixed to the transparent game board 810 with screws so that the general winning port 226 corresponds to the opening 810c and the two general winning ports 226 correspond to the opening 810d. In addition, a ball passage unit (not shown) is disposed on the rear side (rear side) of the openings 810b, 810c, 810d of the transparent game board 810, and the general winning opening 226, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 2 starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, the out port 240, or the game ball that has entered the second out port 241 is discharged to the island facility.

  The accessory unit 820 has a unit body 822 molded of a transparent resin material. The unit main body 822 has a substantially rectangular shape on the front side, and has an opening 822a that is opened in a substantially long rectangular shape in the center in a substantially horizontal direction. In the unit body 822, the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 can be visually recognized from the player side through the opening 822a. In addition, a logo main body 900, an upper front decoration main body 1000, an upper rear decoration main body 1100 (not shown in FIG. 10), an upper right side main body 1200, and an upper left side main body are provided on the unit main body 822 of the main body unit 820. An object 1300, a lower right side item 1400, a lower left side item 1500, and a central lower item 1600 are attached. These various accessories will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  An upper right end 822b, a lower right end 822c, a lower left end 822d, and an upper left end 822e are provided at four corners on the front side of the unit main body 822, respectively. The upper right end 822b, the lower right end 822c, the lower left end 822d, and the upper left end 822e are formed on the same virtual plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The transparent game board 810 is fixed to the upper right end 822b, the lower right end 822c, the lower left end 822d, and the upper left end 822e of the unit main body 822 with screws. In addition, various accessories are attached to the rear of a virtual plane including the upper right end 822b, the lower right end 822c, the lower left end 822d, and the upper left end 822e. This prevents the transparent game board 810 from coming into contact with various kinds of accessories.

  FIG. 11 is an external view of the gaming board 200 as viewed from the rear side (back side). Through the opening 822a of the unit main body 822, the center decoration member 806, the upper front decoration accessory 1000, the upper rear decoration accessory 1100, the upper right side accessory 1200, the upper left side accessory 1300, and the lower right side accessory 1400. , The lower left side object 1500 and a part of the rear side of the center lower object 1600 are visually recognized.

  FIG. 12 is an external view of the game board 200 when the accessory unit 820 is removed from the game board 200 shown in FIG. FIG. 12 shows the ball passage unit 700 connected to the second out port 241 and the three general winning ports 226.

  Next, the ball passage unit 700 used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ball passage unit 700 is formed on the rear side (rear side) of the transparent game board 810 shown in FIG. 10 so as to form a ball path through which game balls entering the general winning opening 226 and the second out opening 241 can pass. It is provided in.

  FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 700 used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the upper right rear to the lower left front. In FIG. 13, the up-down direction of the paper indicates a vertical up-down direction, the direction extending from the upper right to the lower left of the paper indicates the left-right direction, and the direction extending from the upper left to the lower right of the paper indicates the front-rear direction. FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 700 viewed from the upper left rear to the lower right front. In FIG. 14, the up-down direction of the paper represents the vertical up-down direction, the direction extending from the upper right to the lower left of the paper represents the front-rear direction, and the direction extending from the lower right to the upper left of the paper represents the left-right direction. Thick broken lines shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 show an example of a trajectory of a game ball rolling down in the ball passage of the ball passage unit 700. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the ball passage unit 700 viewed from the rear toward the front. In FIG. 15, the up-down direction of the paper represents a vertical up-down direction, and the left-right direction of the paper represents the left-right direction toward the front of the transparent gaming board 810. A solid line with an arrow in the figure shows an example of a trajectory of a game ball rolling down the ball passage of the ball passage unit 700. In FIGS. 13 to 15, the coordinates indicated by the double-headed arrows in the figures indicate the ball passage when the pachinko machine 100 to which the ball passage mechanism including the ball passage unit 700 is installed is installed in an island facility or the like of a game arcade. This shows the installation state of the unit 700. 13 to 15, the ball passage unit 700 is shown transparently to facilitate understanding of the structure of the ball passage unit 700.

  A game board decoration member 808 arranged on the front side (front side) of the transparent game board 810 to which the ball passage unit 700 is attached on the rear side has an out port 240 provided at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204 as shown in FIG. In addition, a second out port 241 is provided. The second out opening 241 is provided on the upper left side in the vicinity of the uppermost general winning opening 226 of the three general winning openings 226. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, since the second out port 241 is located at a position higher than the general winning port 226, the out ball can be discharged using the back side of the gaming area 124 in some cases. is there. The ball passage unit 700 is used to discharge game balls entering the second out port 241 and the three general winning ports 226 to the game island side at the rear side (back side) of the transparent game board 810.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, a front wall W1 is disposed on the front side of the ball passage unit 700. The front wall W1 has a flat plate shape parallel to a plane including the left-right direction and the up-down direction (a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction). The ball passage unit 700 is attached to the rear surface of the transparent game board 810 with the front wall surface of the front wall W1 facing the rear face of the transparent game board 810 as shown in FIG. In the front wall W1, three, for example, circular openings 701A, 701B, and 701C that are opened to a size that allows game balls to pass are arranged corresponding to the arrangement positions of the three general winning openings 226. The opening 701B is located at the lower right of the opening 701A. The opening 701C is located near the lower right of the opening 701B. In addition, for example, a circular opening 702A that is opened to a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough is arranged above the opening 701A of the front wall W1 corresponding to the arrangement position of the second out port 241. The ball passage unit 700 has a transparent game board such that the opening 701A and the opening 702A are arranged in the opening 810c of the transparent game board 810, and the openings 701B and 701C are arranged in the opening 810d of the transparent game board 810. 810 is screwed to the back surface.

  In the ball passage unit 700 of this example, four openings 701A to 701C and 702A are provided corresponding to the three general winning openings 226 and one second out opening 241 respectively. Can be changed according to the number of winning ports and the number of second out ports. The opening shapes of the openings 701A to 701C and 702A are not limited to a circle, but may be a triangle, a square, or a polygon having a square or more.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, a rear wall W2 is arranged behind the front wall W1 in parallel with the front wall W1. The rear wall W2 has a flat plate shape parallel to a plane including the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W2 has a length longer than at least one game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the outlines (outer peripheries) of the front wall W <b> 1 and the rear wall W <b> 2 viewed in the front-rear direction are substantially the same and overlap in the overall view. The outer contours of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 include side walls (for example, upper walls 701au, 701bu, etc.) that connect the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 substantially perpendicularly to the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2. Is provided. The side wall is arranged so as to substantially follow the outer contours of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, and surrounds the outer contours of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 except for a ball discharge port 703E for discharging game balls.

  Further, in the internal space formed by the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, and the side wall surrounding the outer contour of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the internal space is further divided into three spaces. A side wall (for example, a lower side wall 701ad, a left side wall 701al, or the like) that connects the W1 and the rear wall W2 substantially perpendicularly to the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 is provided. The three spaces respectively function as a first ball passage 701, a part of the second ball passage 702, and a third ball passage 703 through which a game ball flows.

  The first ball passage 701 is used to flow a game ball that has passed through the openings 701A, 701B, and 701C of the front wall W1 from the front to the back and guide the game ball to the third ball passage 703. The second ball passage 702 is used to cause a game ball that has passed through the opening 702A of the front wall W1 from the front to the back to flow down and to be guided to the third ball passage 703. The third ball passage 703 is used to join a game ball that has passed through the first ball passage 701 and a game ball that has passed through the second ball passage 702 to flow down, and to guide the ball to a ball discharge port 703E.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the first spherical passage 701 includes six side walls (a right side wall 701ar, an upper side wall 701au, an oblique side wall 701bu, and a right side wall 701br) that partially surround the outer contours of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2. , Lower wall 701bd, left side wall 701cl) and five side walls (left side wall 701al, lower side wall 701ad, left side wall 701bl, lower side wall 701bd ', right side wall 701cr) which define an internal space.

  The right side wall 701ar and the left side wall 701al extend downward from the opening 701A in parallel with each other. The right side wall 701ar and the left side wall 701al are connected at the upper part of the opening 701A. The width in the left-right direction of the left side wall of the right side wall 701ar and the right side wall of the left side wall 701al from the opening 701A has a length longer than at least one game ball.

  The lower end of the right side wall 701ar is connected to the left end of the upper side wall 701au. The upper side wall 701au is inclined gently downward to the right, and the right end is connected to the upper left end of the oblique side wall 701bu. On the other hand, the lower end of the left side wall 701al is connected to the left end of the lower side wall 701ad among the side walls branched into two hands. The lower side wall 701ad is inclined downward to the right and the right end is connected to the upper end of the left side wall 701bl. The width between the lower wall surface of the upper wall 701au and the upper wall surface of the lower wall 701ad has a length longer than the diameter of one game ball at least.

  In the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the right side wall 701ar and the left side wall 701al, and the upper side wall 701au and the lower side wall 701ad, the game ball entering from the opening 701A flows downward and further downwardly to the lower right. A passage 701a is configured.

  The oblique side wall 701bu is inclined downward to the right at an inclination angle of about 45 °, and the lower right end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 701br. The right side wall 701br extends downward and then gently bends to the left, with the left end connected to the right end of the lower side wall 701bd. The lower side wall 701bd is gently inclined downward to the left and the left end is connected to the right end of the lower side wall 701bd '. The lower side wall 701bd 'is gently inclined to the lower left and the left end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 701cr. On the other hand, the left side wall 701bl is sloped steeply to the left and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the left side wall 701cl.

  A space defined by the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the oblique side wall 701bu, the right side wall 701br, the lower side wall 701bd, the lower side wall 701bd ', and the left side wall 701bl is a spherical passage 701b. A plane parallel to the front wall W1 of the ball passage 701b has an area where the game balls can sufficiently roll. The opening 701B is disposed on the front wall W1 near the center of the oblique side wall 701bu of the spherical passage 701b. The opening 701C is arranged on the front wall W1 near the center of the right side wall 701br of the spherical passage 701b. Therefore, game balls from the openings 701B and 701C directly enter the ball passage 701b, and game balls from the opening 701A reach the ball passage 701b through the ball passage 701a.

  The right side wall 701cr extends downward and has a lower end located at the boundary with the third spherical passage 703. The left side wall 701cl extends downward and has a lower end connected to an upper end of the left side wall 731al at a boundary with the third spherical passage 703. The width in the left-right direction of the left side wall surface of the right side wall 701cr and the right side wall surface of the left side wall 701cl has a length longer than at least one game ball. On the rear wall W2 near the lower end of the right side wall 701cr, there is disposed an opening X701 that is rectangular and has a size that allows the ball detection sensor S to penetrate and that opens in the front-rear direction. The lower end side of the opening X701 is located at the boundary with the third spherical passage 703. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13 by a broken-line rectangle, at the boundary with the third spherical passage 703, the lower side of the right wall 701cr and the lower side of the opening X701, the rear wall of the front wall W1 and An opening Y713 that opens vertically is formed by the right side wall surface of the left side wall 731al.

  The front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, and the right side wall 701cr and the left side wall 701cl constitute a ball passage 701c through which game balls can flow downward. As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15, an opening Y713 leading to the third spherical passage 703 is provided at the lower end of the spherical passage 701c. The opening Y713 is a boundary between the first spherical passage 701 and the third spherical passage 703. As described above, the first spherical passage 701 has the spherical passages 701a to 701c.

  The sphere detection sensor S is disposed between the right side wall 701cr and the left side wall 701cl near the upper part of the opening Y713. The ball detection sensor S is inserted in the front-rear direction through the opening X701 of the rear wall W2, and is disposed with the tip of the ball detection sensor S abutting the rear wall surface of the front wall W1. The ball passage port (detection port) of the ball detection sensor S is provided in the ball path 701c of the first ball path 701 above the opening Y713, and the game ball reaches the third ball path 703. The game ball can be detected before playing. The ball passage opening (detection opening) of the ball detection sensor S is opened in a substantially circular shape having an inner diameter through which a game ball can pass. When the distance from the ball passage opening of the ball detection sensor S to the tip is long, an opening is provided by opening the front wall W1 at a position where the tip abuts, and the tip of the ball detection sensor S is You may make it penetrate an opening part.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game balls entered into the plurality of general winning ports 226 all have the same number of prize balls and pass through the first ball passage 701, so that the first ball passage There is a case where the game balls can be collectively discharged only by providing one ball detection sensor S in the 701. In addition, since the number of the ball detection sensors S can be reduced, the cost may be reduced.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, a rear wall W3 is arranged behind the rear wall W2 in parallel with the rear wall W2. The rear wall W3 has a flat plate shape parallel to a plane including the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the rear wall W2 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W3 has a length longer than at least one game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 15, a game ball is connected to the rear wall W2 by connecting a space formed between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 and a space formed between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. Two, for example, rectangular openings X702b and X702d opened to a size that can pass therethrough are arranged. The opening X702b is located below the opening 702A. The opening X702d is located on the right side of the ball detection sensor S.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the outer (outer peripheral) contour of the rear wall W <b> 3 as viewed in the front-rear direction has a shape that gradually slopes downward to the right in a general view and then bends downward. The outer contour of the rear wall W3 includes three side walls (upper side walls 702bu, 702cu, and lower side wall 702cd) that connect the rear wall W3 and the rear wall W2 substantially perpendicularly to the rear wall W3 and the rear wall W2. , A lower rear wall 702 dbd connecting the rear wall W3 and the rear wall W2 in an arc shape, and six side walls connecting the rear wall W3 and the front wall W1 substantially perpendicular to the rear wall W3 and the front wall W1. (Lower left side walls 702bldf, 702bldb, right side walls 702drf, 702drb, left side walls 702dlf, 702dlb) are provided. The wall thickness of the front wall W1, the rear wall W2, and the rear wall W3 may be the same or different from each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the second spherical passage 702 has a spherical passage 702a, a spherical passage 702b, a spherical passage 702c, and a spherical passage 702d.

  The spherical passage 702a includes a front wall W1 and a rear wall W2, and a right side wall 702ar and a left side wall 702al. The left side wall 702al and the right side wall 702ar are arranged to extend downward and parallel to each other from the opening 702A to the left, and then extend downward and parallel to each other. The left side wall 702al and the right side wall 702ar are connected at an upper part of the opening 702A.

  The left side wall 702al extends to the vicinity of the opening X702b of the rear wall W2, and has a lower end connected to an upper end of the lower left side wall 702bldf. The right side wall 702ar extends to the vicinity of the opening X702b of the rear wall W2, and has a lower end connected to an upper end of the right side wall 702br. The width in the left-right direction of the right side wall of the left side wall 702al and the left side wall of the right side wall 702ar below the opening 702A has a length longer than at least one game ball.

  The ball passage 702a has the same position in the front-rear direction as the first ball passage 701. That is, the ball passage 702a is in a space formed between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, like the first ball passage 701.

  The section of the right side wall 702ar of the ball passage 702a is the same as the left side wall 701al of the ball passage 701a in a section up to a branch point where the right side wall 702ar extends downward and branches into two hands. The side wall and the left side wall 701al of the spherical passage 701a of the passage 701 are shared.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, a part of the ball passage 701a of the first ball passage 701 and a part of the ball passage 702a of the second ball passage 702 are adjacent to each other and share a partition wall. Since the wall of the thick ball passage is shared in the left-right direction, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved. In addition, the sharing of the side walls means that the partition wall of the portion where the ball passages are adjacent is shared.

  The lower end of the ball passage 702a is connected to the ball passage 702b. The ball passage 702b changes the course of the game ball flowing downward in the ball passage 702a backward, passes the game ball through the opening X702b arranged on the rear wall W2, and sends the ball to the subsequent ball passage 702c. It is provided for. In other words, the ball passage 702b connects the ball passage 702a provided between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 and the ball passage 702c provided between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. Are provided in the front-rear direction.

  The spherical passage 702b includes a front wall W1, a rear wall W3, a right side wall 702br, a lower left side wall 702bldf, 702bldb, and an upper side wall 702bu.

  The front end of the lower left side wall 702bldf is connected to the front wall W1. The rear end of the lower left side wall 702bldb is connected to the rear wall W3. The rear end of the lower left side wall 702bldf is connected to the front end of the lower left side wall 702bldb, and the lower left side wall 702bldf and the lower left side wall 702bldb are included in one plane parallel to the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 15, the lower left side wall 702bldf and the lower left side wall 702bldb are curved in a downwardly convex arc shape from the upper left end to the lower right end in the front-rear direction while ensuring a sufficient area for a game ball to pass. It is formed. The length of the radius of the arc is longer than the length of one game ball. The width of the lower left side wall 702bldf in the front-rear direction is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W2. The width in the front-rear direction of the lower left side wall 702bldb is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the rear wall W2 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W3. Note that the shape of the lower left side wall 702bldf and the lower left side wall 702bldb as viewed in the front-rear direction may not be an arc shape, and may be, for example, a shape where a wall surface extending downward from the upper left end and a wall surface extending leftward from the lower right end intersect. Is also good. At this time, the angle between the two wall surfaces may be a right angle or an obtuse angle wider than that.

  The upper left end of the lower left side wall 702bldf is connected to the lower end of the left side wall 702al. The lower right end of the lower left side wall 702bldf is connected to the lower end of the right side wall 702br. On the other hand, the upper left end of the lower left side wall 702bldb is connected to the left end of the upper side wall 702bu. The lower right end of the lower left side wall 702bldb is connected to the left end of the lower side wall 702cd. The upper side wall 702bu is gently inclined downward to the right, and the right end is connected to the left end of the upper side wall 702cu.

  Since the lower left side walls 702bldf and 702bldb of the ball passage 702b are arranged substantially perpendicular to the rear wall W3 and the front wall W1, the inside of the passage is not inclined in the front-rear direction. The connection between the lower left side wall 702bldb and the rear wall W3 is at a right angle in the vertical direction. Direction changing projections Z1 and Z2 are provided in the ball passage 702b so that smooth flow of the game ball is not hindered. As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, when the opening X702b is viewed from the rear to the front, the direction changing protrusion Z1 extends downward from a portion of the front wall W1 located substantially at the center of the opening X702b and extends to the lower left. It has a plate shape connected to a corner of the side wall 702bldf. In addition, the direction changing projection Z1 has a slope from the upper front to the lower rear at an inclination angle of about 45 ° when viewed in the left-right direction. The game ball that has flowed down the ball passage 702a by the direction changing projection Z1 rolls down the slope of the direction changing projection Z1 to change the rolling direction to the rear, and passes through the opening X702b. Note that the upper side wall 702bu may be arranged somewhat higher upward to secure a sufficient passage of the game ball in the ball passage 702b. In addition, when the lower left side walls 702bldf and 702bldb have an inclined surface inclined downward from the front to the rear so that the game ball that has passed the ball passage 701a can roll downward in the ball passage 701b, The direction changing projection Z1 may not be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, when the opening X702b is viewed from the rear to the front, the direction changing projection Z2 extends leftward from a portion of the rear wall W3 located slightly below the center of the opening X702b and extends to the lower left. It has a plate-like shape connected to the side surface of the side wall 702bldf. The direction changing projection Z2 has a slope from the front left to the rear right at an inclination angle of about 45 ° when viewed in the up-down direction. The game ball that has passed through the opening X702b by the direction changing protrusion Z2 changes the rolling direction to the right while rolling on the slope of the direction changing protrusion Z2, and passes through the ball passage 702b. When the lower left side wall 702bldb has an inclined surface that is inclined downward from left to right to the extent that it can roll down in the ball passage 701b rightward, the direction changing projection Z2 is not required. Good.

  In the ball passage 702b shown in FIG. 15, a double circle in which the inner circle is painted black indicates that the game ball advances from the front to the rear. In FIG. 15, illustration of the direction changing projections Z1 and Z2 is omitted.

  The lower end of the ball passage 702b is connected to the ball passage 702c. The ball passage 702c is provided to change the backward course of the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 702b to the lower right direction. The spherical passage 702c includes a rear wall W2 and a rear wall W3, and an upper wall 702cu and a lower wall 702cd.

  The upper side wall 702cu is gently inclined downward to the right, then bends downward and extends, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 702drb. The lower side wall 702cd is gently inclined downward to the right, then bends downward and extends, and a lower end is connected to an upper end of the left side wall 702dlb. The width of the inner facing surfaces of the upper side wall 702cu and the lower side wall 702cd has a length longer than at least the diameter of one game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the ball passage section defined by the left side wall 701bl and the lower wall 701bd ′ of the first ball passage 701 of the ball passage 702c of the second ball passage 702 has a This is a portion that overlaps with one ball passage 701. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, since the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702 partially overlap in the front-rear direction on the back side of the transparent gaming board 810, a gaming table having a characteristic ball passage is provided. Can be provided. In some cases, game balls that have entered the general winning opening 226 and game balls that have entered the second out opening 241 can be passed through different ball paths. Furthermore, since a plurality of ball passages are provided in the front-rear direction, space saving in the left-right direction and the up-down direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved.

  The site is located on the rear side of the first spherical passage 701, that is, in the space formed between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, a part of the second ball passage 702 overlaps the rear side of the first ball passage 701. As a result, the layout (arrangement) of the first ball passage 701 is not hindered by the second ball passage 702, so that game balls passing through the first ball passage 701 are promptly discharged (the ball detection sensor S detects the game ball). ) May be able to.

  In addition, in this portion, the front wall of the second spherical passage 702 is the same as the rear wall of the first spherical passage 701. That is, at the relevant portion, the rear wall W2 is shared by the first spherical passage 701 and the second spherical passage 702. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, since the thick rear wall W2 is shared in the front-rear direction, the space in the front-rear direction can be saved in addition to the space saving in the left-right direction and the up-down direction of the ball passage unit 700. May be possible. Note that the front wall W4 may be separately provided in the second spherical passage 702 so that the rear wall W2 is not shared by the first spherical passage 701 and the second spherical passage 702. By doing so, there are cases where molding of the constituent members of the ball passage unit 700 is facilitated. In some cases, manufacturing of the ball passage unit 700 can be facilitated and cost can be reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the safe ball passes through the first ball passage 701 and the out ball passes through the second ball passage 702, so that the safe ball and the out ball are discharged separately. Can be. In addition, since the safe sphere moves only in the space formed between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the safe sphere is also discharged more quickly than the out sphere moving in the space formed between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. May be possible.

  The lower end of the ball passage 702c is connected to the ball passage 702d. The ball passage 702d changes the course of the game ball that has flowed downward from the ball passage 702c forward, passes the game ball through the opening X702d arranged on the rear wall W2, and passes through the third ball passage 703 that follows. It is provided for sending out. In other words, the ball passage 702d includes a ball passage 702c provided between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3, and a third ball passage 703 provided between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2. It is provided in the front-back direction for connection.

  The spherical passage 702d includes a front wall W1, a rear lower wall 702dbd, right side walls 702drf, 702drb, and left side walls 702dlf, 702dlb.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the rear lower wall 702 dbd bends from the rear upper end toward the front lower end in a left-to-right downwardly convex arc shape while securing an area through which the game ball can pass, as viewed in the left-right direction. Is formed. The length of the radius of the arc is longer than the length of one game ball. The rear upper end of the rear lower wall 702dbd is connected to the lower end of the rear wall W3. The front lower end of the rear lower wall 702dbd is connected to the lower end of the opening X702d of the rear wall W2. The shape of the rear lower wall 702dbd as viewed in the left-right direction does not have to be arcuate, and may be, for example, a shape where a wall surface extending downward from the rear upper end and a wall surface extending rearward from the front lower end intersect. At this time, the angle between the two wall surfaces may be a right angle or an obtuse angle wider than that. Further, a projection for changing the direction in which the flowing direction of the game ball flows forward may be provided on the inner wall surface of the rear lower wall 702dbd.

  As shown by the broken diamond shape in FIG. 13, an opening vertically opened by the front lower end of the rear lower wall 702dbd, the lower end of the right side wall 702drf, the lower end of the left side wall 702dlf, and the rear side wall surface of the front wall W1. Y723 is formed. The game ball that has passed through the ball passage 702d falls at the opening Y723 and reaches the third ball passage 703. The opening Y723 is a boundary between the second spherical passage 702 and the third spherical passage 703.

  The front end of the left side wall 702dlf is connected to the front wall W1. The upper end of the left side wall 702dlf is connected to the right side wall of the right side wall 701cr. The upper end of the left side wall 702dlb is connected to the lower end of the lower side wall 702cd. The rear upper end to the front lower end of the left side wall 702dlb are connected to the left side of the rear lower wall 702dbd following the arc shape of the rear lower wall 702dbd. The rear end of the left side wall 702dlf is connected to the front end of the left side wall 702dlb, and the left side wall 702dlf and the left side wall 702dlb are included in a plane parallel to the front-rear direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 702dlf is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W2.

  The front end of the right side wall 702drf is connected to the front wall W1. The upper end of the right side wall 702drf is connected to the lower side walls 701bd and 701bd '. The upper end of the right side wall 702drb is connected to the lower end of the lower side wall 702cu. The rear upper end to the front lower end of the right side wall 702 dbb are connected to the right side of the rear lower wall 702 dbd following the arc shape of the rear lower wall 702 dbd. The rear end of the right side wall 702drf and the front end of the right side wall 702drb are connected, and the right side wall 702drf and the right side wall 702drb are included in one plane parallel to the front-rear direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the right side wall 702drf is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W2.

  In the ball passage 702d shown in FIG. 15, a circle with an inward cross indicates that the game ball advances from the rear to the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the third spherical passage 703 includes five side walls (an upper side wall 703au, a right side wall 703br, a left side wall 731al) surrounding a part of the outer contour of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2. It has a lower side wall 703ad and a left side wall 703bl).

  The upper end of the left side wall 731al is connected to the lower end of the left side wall 701cl. The left side wall 731al extends downward, turns rightward, slopes gently downward to the right, and has a right end connected to the left end of the lower wall 703ad.

  In the front wall W1, the rear wall W2, and the left side wall 731al, a ball passage 713 in which a game ball passing through the first ball passage 701 and passing through the opening Y713 further flows downward, and a second ball passage 702 are formed. A ball passage 723 is formed in which the game balls that have passed and passed through the opening Y723 further flow downward. The vertical width of the ball passage 713 and the ball passage 723 has a length equal to or greater than the sum of the diameters of the two game balls.

  The right end of the ball passage 713 is connected to the ball passage 723. A game ball that has passed through the first ball passage 701 provided with the ball detection sensor S and has flowed down the ball passage 713 and a game ball that has passed through the second ball passage 702 and has flowed down the ball passage 723 are ball passages. Merges near the merging position J712 in 723 and passes through the following spherical passage 703a.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the safe ball and the out ball can be discharged separately. In addition, by joining the out ball and the safe ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor S in the third ball passage 703, the third ball passage 703 for the safe ball and the third ball passage 703 for the out ball are separated. Need not be provided. Thereby, space saving of the third ball passage 703 may be achieved.

  The left end of the upper side wall 703au is connected to the lower end of the right side wall 702drf. The upper side wall 703au is inclined gently downward to the right and then extends downward, with the lower end connected to the upper end of the right side wall 703br. The lower side wall 703ad inclines gently downward to the right and then extends downward to have a lower end connected to the upper end of the left side wall 703bl.

  The right end of the ball passage 723 is connected to the ball passage 703a. The spherical passage 703a includes a front wall W1 and a rear wall W2, and an upper wall 703au and a lower wall 703ad. The vertical width of the ball passage 703a is equal to or longer than the sum of the diameters of the two game balls.

  The upper end of the right side wall 703br is connected to the lower end of the upper side wall 703au. The right side wall 703br extends downward. The upper end of the left side wall 703bl is connected to the lower end of the lower side wall 703ad. The left side wall 703bl extends downward. The ball outlet 703E includes a lower end of the front wall W1 and a lower end of the rear wall W2, and a lower end of the right side wall 703br and a lower end of the left side wall 703bl. The width in the left-right direction of the ball passage 703b is equal to or longer than the sum of the diameters of the two game balls.

  The lower end of the ball passage 703a is connected to the ball passage 703b. The spherical passage 703b includes a front wall W1 and a rear wall W2, and a right side wall 703br and a left side wall 703bl. The game ball that has passed through the ball passage 703b is guided to the ball outlet 703E. The lower end of the ball passage 703a may be used as the ball outlet 703E without providing the ball passage 703b.

  In each of the first to third ball passages 701 to 703, a cross-sectional opening (hereinafter, referred to as a “passage cross-section”) cut along a plane perpendicular to the downflow direction of the game ball (closed by the inner wall surface). The size (opening area) of the region may differ depending on the position of each cross-section of the first to third spherical passages 701 to 703. A cross-sectional opening 701O indicated by a dashed square in FIG. 13 indicates the size of the cross-sectional opening in the passage cross section at the lower end position of the spherical passage 701a of the first spherical passage 701. Similarly, the cross-section opening 702O indicates the size of the cross-section opening in the passage cross-section substantially at the center position of the spherical passage 702c of the second spherical passage 702. Similarly, the cross-sectional opening 703O indicates the size of the cross-sectional opening in the passage cross section substantially at the center position of the spherical passage 703a of the third spherical passage 703. The size of the sectional opening 701O of the first spherical passage 701 is substantially the same as the size of the sectional opening 702O of the second spherical passage 702. On the other hand, the size of the sectional opening 703O of the third spherical passage 703 is larger than the size of the sectional opening 701O of the first spherical passage 701. Further, the size of the sectional opening 703O of the third spherical passage 703 is larger than the size of the sectional opening 702O of the second spherical passage 702.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the cross-sectional openings of the ball passage 703a and the ball passage 703b of the third ball passage 703 after the game balls passing through the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702 merge. The opening area of 703O is larger than the opening area of the sectional opening 701O of the spherical passage 701a or the sectional area of the sectional opening 702O of the spherical passage 702c before the merging, for example. This may prevent the game balls from being clogged in the third ball passage 703 (particularly, the ball passage near the merging position J712) after merging.

  The front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the left side wall 701ad and the left side wall 701bl, the right side lower wall 702ar and the right side wall 702br below the branch point branched into two hands, and the lower right end of the lower left side wall 702bldf and the upper end of the left side wall 701cl. The region surrounded by the connecting lower wall (not shown) is a hollow region. This cavity region can be variously modified. For example, an open end may be provided without providing a lower wall connecting the lower right end of the lower left side wall 702bldf and the lower end of the left side wall 701bl. The cavity may be filled with a resin material to fill the cavity. Further, the front wall W1 of the hollow area may be opened. Further, a portion of the rear wall W2 of the hollow region other than the region shared as the front wall of the spherical passage 702c may be opened.

  Further, the left side wall 701ad and the left side wall 701bl may not be provided. By doing so, one wide-area spherical passage connected to the spherical passage 701c can be formed instead of the configuration of the spherical passage 701a and the spherical passage 701b. The wide-area spherical passage includes front wall W1 and rear wall W2, right side wall 701ar, side wall 701au, oblique side wall 701bu, right side wall 701br, lower side wall 701bd, lower side wall 701bd ', left side wall 701al, right side wall 702br, and left lower side wall 702bldf. It is configured by a space defined by a lower side wall (not shown) connecting the lower right end and the upper end of the left side wall 701cl. Note that the lower end of the left side wall 701al is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 702br.

  In addition, the width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W2 may have a length equal to or greater than the sum of the diameters of the two game balls. Further, the width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the rear wall W2 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W3 may have a length equal to or greater than the sum of the diameters of the two game balls. In addition, since the front wall W1, the rear wall W2, the rear wall W3, and each side wall are formed of a transparent resin material, a clerk of an amusement store or the like can clean the inside of the ball passage during maintenance of the ball passage unit. Is easy to grasp. In addition, the front wall W1, the rear wall W2, the rear wall W3, and each side wall may be formed of an opaque resin material. Further, a linear groove or a linear protrusion may be formed on the inner wall in the ball passage along the direction in which the game ball flows down. By doing so, the friction between the inner wall of the ball passage and the game ball may be reduced, and the game ball may be smoothly and quickly rolled. Further, a step may be provided on the slope of the ball passage, or a slit may be provided on the wall of the ball passage. By doing so, the flow speed of the game ball can be adjusted in some cases.

  Next, the movement of a game ball passing through the ball passage of the ball passage unit 700 will be described. The game ball guided to the opening 701A flows down through the ball passage 701a and further flows down diagonally to the lower right. Next, it moves to the lower right through the ball passage 701b and flows down further to the lower left. Next, it falls downward through the ball passage 701c and passes through the ball detection sensor S. Next, it passes through the opening Y713 and flows down further through the ball passage 713. Next, it passes through the merging position J712 and flows down the right through the ball passage 703a. Next, it flows down through the ball passage 703b and is discharged from the ball discharge port E. The operation of the game ball guided to the openings 701B and 701C is the same as that of the case of the opening 701A, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The game ball guided to the opening 702A flows downward through the ball passage 702a. Next, the rolling direction is changed backward by the direction changing projection Z1 provided in the ball passage 702b through the ball passage 702b to pass through the opening X702b. Next, the rolling direction is changed to the right by the direction changing projection Z2. Next, it moves to the lower right through the ball passage 702c and flows down further. Next, it moves forward and downward through the ball passage 702d and passes through the opening X702d. Next, it passes through the opening Y723 and flows further downward through the ball passage 723. Next, it passes through the merging position J712 and flows down the right through the ball passage 703a. Next, it flows down through the ball passage 703b and is discharged from the ball discharge port E.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15 again.
(A1)
A plurality of passages (for example, a first ball passage 701, a second ball passage 702, and a third ball passage 703) through which game balls discharged from a game region (for example, the game region 124) can pass at least are provided. Gaming table,
At least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter, referred to as a “second passage” (for example, a second spherical passage 702)) is different from the second passage of the plurality of passages. At least one (hereinafter, referred to as a “first passage” (for example, a first spherical passage 701)) and at least a portion in the front-rear direction (for example, a left wall 701bl of the first spherical passage 701 of the spherical passage 702c) And a lower passage 701bd ').

According to the above-mentioned gaming table, a part of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 overlap in the front-rear direction on the back side of the transparent game board 810, so that a game table having a characteristic ball path can be provided. In some cases, game balls that have entered the general winning opening 226 and game balls that have entered the second out port 241 can be passed through different ball paths. Furthermore, since a plurality of ball passages are provided in the front-rear direction, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved.
(A2)
The gaming table according to the above (A1),
A part of at least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter, referred to as a “third passage” (for example, a third ball passage 703)) includes a game ball that has passed through the first passage and the third passage. A gaming table, which is a path (for example, a ball path 703a, a ball path 703b) after the game balls that have passed through the two paths merge.

  According to the gaming table, the safe ball and the out ball can be discharged separately.

The gaming table according to the above (A2),
The first passage is a passage provided with at least a game ball detection unit (for example, a ball detection sensor S),
The first passage and the second passage are passages where game balls join at a first position (for example, a joining position J712),
The first position is a position that is at least downstream (for example, below the opening Y713) from a position (for example, near the upper part of the opening Y713) where the game ball detecting means is provided. A gaming table.
(A3)
The gaming table according to the above (A2),
The first passage is a passage provided with at least a game ball detection unit (for example, a ball detection sensor S),
A prize ball providing means (for example, a payout device 152) capable of providing at least a prize ball (for example, a ball to be paid out to a player based on a winning) in connection with the detection of a game ball by the game ball detecting means. Prepare
The first passage is a passage through which a game ball that has entered a first area (for example, a general winning opening 226) can pass,
The second passage is a passage through which a game ball that has entered a second area (for example, the second out port 241) can pass,
The game ball that has entered the second area is guided to the third passage without being detected by the game ball detection means,
A gaming table, wherein the game ball that has entered the first area is guided to the third path after being detected by the game ball detection means.

According to the above-described gaming table, the out ball and the safe ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor S are joined in the third ball passage 703, so that the third ball passage 703 for the safe ball and the third ball for the out ball are joined. It is not necessary to provide the ball passage 703 separately. Thereby, space saving of the third ball passage 703 may be achieved. Further, since the safe sphere moves only in the space formed between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the safe sphere is also discharged more quickly than the out sphere moving in the space formed between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. May be done.
(A4)
The gaming table according to (A3),
The first area is an area provided in the game area,
The second area is an area provided in the game area,
The gaming table, wherein the second area is an area provided above the first area (for example, above a general winning opening 226).

According to the gaming table, the second out port 241 is located at a position higher than the general winning port 226, so that the out ball can be discharged using the back side of the game area 124 in some cases.
(A5)
The gaming table according to (A3) or (A4),
The first passage is a passage through which a game ball that has entered a plurality of regions (for example, three general winning openings 226) can pass,
At least one of the plurality of regions is the first region (for example, a general winning opening 226 that guides a game ball to the opening 701A),
At least one of the plurality of regions is a third region (for example, a general winning opening 226 for guiding a game ball to the opening 701B, a general winning opening 226 for guiding a game ball to the opening 701C),
The second region is a region not included in the plurality of regions,
The game ball detection means is means provided only in the first passage,
The game ball detection unit is a unit that can at least detect a game ball that has entered the first area,
The game ball detecting means is means capable of at least detecting a game ball that has entered the third area,
The prize ball providing means is means capable of providing the same number (for example, 10) of prize balls when a game ball enters the first area and when a game ball enters the third area. A gaming table characterized by the following.

According to the above-mentioned gaming table, the game balls entered into the plurality of general winning openings 226 all have the same number of prize balls and pass through the first ball passage 701, so that one In some cases, the game balls can be collectively discharged simply by providing two ball detection sensors S. In addition, since the number of the ball detection sensors S can be reduced, the cost may be reduced.
(A6)
The gaming table according to any one of (A2) to (A5),
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the first passage (for example, the cross-sectional opening 701O) is a first size,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the second passage (for example, the cross-sectional opening 702O) is a second size,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the third passage (for example, the cross-sectional opening 703O) is a third size,
The third size is larger than the first size,
The gaming table, wherein the third size is larger than the second size.

  According to the gaming table, the opening of the cross-section opening 703O of the ball passage 703a and the ball passage 703b of the third ball passage 703 after the game balls passing through the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702 merge. The area is larger than the opening area of the sectional opening 701O of the spherical passage 701a and the opening area of the sectional opening 702O of the spherical passage 702c before the merging, for example. This may prevent the game balls from being clogged in the third ball passage 703 (particularly, the ball passage near the merging position J712) after merging.

The gaming table according to (A6),
The gaming table, wherein the first size is a size of the cross-sectional opening of a region through which only the game ball that has entered one of the plurality of regions at the most upstream can pass.
(A7)
The gaming table according to any one of (A1) to (A6),
The second passage is a passage constituted by a plurality of portions (for example, a ball passage 702a, a ball passage 702b, a ball passage 702c, and a ball passage 702d),
At least one of the plurality of portions (hereinafter, referred to as a “first portion” (for example, a ball passage 702a)) has a position in the front-rear direction at the same position as the first passage (for example, a front portion). (In the space created between the wall W1 and the rear wall W2),
At least one of the plurality of portions (hereinafter, referred to as a “second portion” (for example, a spherical passage 702c)) is located at a position overlapping the first passage in the front-rear direction (for example, a rear wall W2). And a space formed between the rear wall W3).
The second passage is provided in at least a part of the first portion (for example, a ball passage section extending to a branch point where the right side wall 702ar of the ball passage 702a extends downward and branches into two hands). The passage and the side wall are shared (for example, the portion of the right side wall 702ar of the section is the same as the left side wall 701al of the spherical passage 701a and the side walls are shared),
The second passage is formed in at least a part of the second portion (for example, a ball passage section defined by a left side wall 701bl and a lower wall 701bd ′ of the first ball passage 701 of the ball passage 702c). A rear wall of the first passage (for example, a rear wall W2 behind the front wall W1) and a front wall of the second passage (for example, a rear wall W2 in front of the rear wall W3) are shared. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming table, a part of the ball passage 701a of the first ball passage 701 and a part of the ball passage 702a of the second ball passage 702 are adjacent to each other and share a partition wall. Since the wall of the thick ball passage is shared in the left-right direction, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved. In addition, the sharing of the side walls means that the partition wall of the portion where the ball passages are adjacent is shared.

  Further, according to the gaming table, since a part of the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702 overlap in the front-rear direction on the back side of the transparent gaming board 810, a gaming table having a characteristic ball passage is provided. it can. Furthermore, since a plurality of ball passages are provided in the front-back direction, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved.

The ball passage section defined by the left side wall 701bl and the lower wall 701bd ′ of the first ball passage 701 of the ball passage 702c of the second ball passage 702 is the first ball passage 701 when viewed in the front-back direction. It is a part which overlaps. At this point, the front wall of the second spherical passage 702 is the same as the rear wall of the first spherical passage 701. That is, at the relevant portion, the rear wall W2 is shared by the first spherical passage 701 and the second spherical passage 702. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, since the thick rear wall W2 is shared in the front-rear direction, space saving in the front-rear direction can be achieved in addition to space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700. There is.
(A8)
The gaming table according to any one of (A1) to (A7),
The second passage has at least a portion (for example, a ball passage section defined by a left side wall 701bl and a lower wall 701bd ′ of the first ball passage 701 of the ball passage 702c) after the first passage. A gaming table, characterized by a passage overlapping the side.

According to the gaming table, a part of the second ball passage 702 overlaps the rear side of the first ball passage 701. As a result, the layout (arrangement) of the first ball passage 701 is not hindered by the second ball passage 702, so that game balls passing through the first ball passage 701 are quickly discharged (the ball detection sensor S detects the game ball). ) May be able to.
(A9)
The gaming table according to any one of (A1) to (A8),
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  For example, a configuration in which three or more passages overlap in the front-rear direction may be employed.

  Both the first passage and the second passage may be safe ball passages, or both may be out-ball passages.

  At least one of the first passage and the second passage may be a passage mounted on an entry area without a prize winning device or a prize ball.

  A configuration in which the first passage overlaps the rear side of the second passage may be adopted, or a configuration in which both passages alternately overlap front and rear with each other.

  If both the first passage and the second passage are safe ball passages and the number of winning balls at the time of winning is the same, a configuration in which game ball detection means is provided in the third passage may be adopted.

  The size of the opening area (cross-sectional opening) of the first passage and the second passage in the passage cross section may be larger than the opening area of the third passage in the passage cross section. By doing so, in some cases, the game balls can be quickly guided to the third passage and then guided and aligned in the third passage.

  Another game ball detecting means may be provided in the third passage. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a count switch is used to count the total number of game balls that have passed through all the paths (used for grapes in the game area and effect switching by counting).

  The second out opening may be located lower than the general winning opening.

  The passage (rear side) overlapping behind may be a safe ball passage.

  The passage at which the game ball discharged from the game area can pass at least includes not only the game table but also the path of the part discharged from the game table itself and supplied to the ball tank of the game table again, such as island equipment. It may be. That is, the space efficiency of the path of the game ball may be improved by making the ball path unit of the present invention applicable to the game island itself including the game table.

  In addition, the case where the first passage and the second passage overlap in the front-back direction and the case where the passages three-dimensionally cross each other may be included in the case where the passages overlap in the front-back direction.

  It should be noted that the configuration described as “at least... Possible” in the above embodiment can be interpreted by replacing the relevant part with “only... Possible”. For example, the game ball detecting means described as "can detect at least the game ball that has entered the first winning area" is replaced with a game ball detecting means capable of "detecting only the game ball which has entered the first winning area". Can also be interpreted.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration described as “possible” is interpreted by replacing the corresponding portion with “may or may not be included”. You can also. For example, the configuration described as "at least a game ball that has entered the first prize area" may be described as "may not detect a game ball that has entered the first prize area, or Means including a configuration for always detecting ".

The present invention according to the above embodiment is summarized as follows.
(Appendix a1)
A game table provided with a plurality of passages through which at least game balls discharged from the game area can pass,
At least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter, referred to as a “second passage”) is at least one other than the second passage (hereinafter, “first passage”) of the plurality of passages. A game console which is at least partially overlapped with the "passage" in the front-rear direction.
(Appendix a2)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a1, wherein
At least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter, referred to as a "third passage") is partially joined by game balls passing through the first passage and game balls passing through the second passage. A game console, which is a passage after the game.
(Appendix a3)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a2,
The first passage is a passage provided with at least game ball detection means,
A prize ball providing means capable of providing at least a prize ball in connection with that the game ball is detected in the game ball detecting means,
The first passage is a passage through which a game ball that has entered the first area can pass,
The second passage is a passage through which a game ball that has entered the second area can pass,
The game ball that has entered the second area is guided to the third passage without being detected by the game ball detection means,
A gaming table, wherein the game ball that has entered the first area is guided to the third path after being detected by the game ball detection means.
(Appendix a4)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a3,
The first area is an area provided in the game area,
The second area is an area provided in the game area,
The gaming table, wherein the second area is an area provided above the first area.
(Appendix a5)
The gaming table according to appendix a3 or a4,
The first passage is a passage through which a game ball that has entered a plurality of areas can pass,
At least one of the plurality of regions is the first region,
At least one of the plurality of regions is a third region,
The second region is a region not included in the plurality of regions,
The game ball detection means is means provided only in the first passage,
The game ball detection unit is a unit that can at least detect a game ball that has entered the first area,
The game ball detecting means is means capable of at least detecting a game ball that has entered the third area,
The prize ball providing means is a means capable of providing the same number of prize balls when a game ball enters the first area and when a game ball enters the third area. A gaming table to play.
(Appendix a6)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a2 to a5,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the first passage is a first size,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the second passage is a second size,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the third passage is a third size,
The third size is larger than the first size,
The gaming table, wherein the third size is larger than the second size.
(Appendix a7)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a6,
The second passage is a passage constituted by a plurality of parts,
At least one of the plurality of portions (hereinafter, referred to as a “first portion”) is a portion in which a position in the front-rear direction is at the same position as the first passage,
At least one of the plurality of portions (hereinafter, referred to as a “second portion”) is a portion located at a position overlapping the first passage in the front-rear direction,
In the second passage, the first passage and the side wall are shared at least in part of the first portion,
The game console according to claim 2, wherein the second passage shares a rear wall of the first passage and a front wall of the second passage in at least a part of the second portion.
(Appendix a8)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a7,
The gaming table, wherein the second passage is a passage at least partially overlapping a rear side of the first passage.
(Appendix a9)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a8,
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  Next, various accessories used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 is an external view of the accessory unit 820 as viewed from the front side (front side). In FIG. 16, the upper right end 822b, the lower right end 822c, the lower left end 822d, and the upper left end 822e of the unit main body 822 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 16, various accessories are arranged around the opening 822a of the unit main body 822. The logo combination 900 is arranged above the opening 822a. Also, the logo role 900 has a logo movable body 902 that can move in the vertical direction. In the state shown in FIG. 16, the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position. The initial position of the logo movable body 902 is above the upper side of the rectangular image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the decorative symbol display device 208 is installed on the back side of the unit main body 822. When the logo accessory 900 is located at the initial position, at least a part of the logo accessory 900 may overlap the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-back direction, or the entire logo symbol 900 may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the image display area in the front-back direction. When the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, at least a part thereof is located at a position higher than the decorative design display device 208. The logo movable body 902 can move upward and downward from the initial position. When the logo movable body 902 moves upward from the initial position, it moves away from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when the logo movable body 902 moves downward from the initial position, at least a part thereof overlaps the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-back direction.

  An upper front decoration accessory 1000 is arranged behind the logo accessory 900, and an upper rear decoration accessory 1100 (not shown in FIG. 16; see FIG. 17) is arranged behind the upper front decoration accessory 1000. . Also, the upper front decoration accessory 1000 has an upper front movable body 1002 that can move in the vertical direction, and the upper rear decoration accessory 1100 has an upper rear movable body 1102 that can move in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 26 and 28). have. In the state shown in FIG. 16, the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial positions. In this state, the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the upper rear movable body 1102 is hidden by the logo role 900 and the upper front decoration role 1000 and is forward. Not visible from the side. In the present embodiment, after the logo movable body 902 moves upward, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move downward. After the upper rear movable body 1102 moves downward, it becomes visible from the front side.

  Also, the order of the front and rear decorations 1000, the upper front decorations 1000, and the upper decorations 1100, the upper rear decorations 1100, and the logo 900, from the front, is from the front. Or the order of the upper and lower decorations 1100, the logo 900 and the upper front decoration 1000, or the logo and the upper and lower decorations 1100 and the front and upper. The order may be the decoration accessory 1000, the upper front decoration accessory 1000, the logo decoration 900, and the upper rear decoration 1100, or the upper rear decoration accessory 1100, the upper front decoration accessory. The order may be 1000, then the logo combination 900.

  An upper right side item 1200 is arranged on the right side of the logo item 900, and an upper left side item 1300 is arranged on the left side of the logo item 900. FIG. 16 shows a state in which the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side accessory 1200 moves to the lower left, and the upper left side movable body 1301 of the upper left side accessory 1300 is located at the initial position. . Note that the initial positions of the upper right side movable body 1201 and the upper left side movable body 1301 in the vertical direction are the same.

  Further, a lower right side accessory 1400 is disposed at the lower right of the opening 822a, and a lower left side accessory 1500 is disposed at the lower left of the opening 822a. In addition, a central lower part 1600 is disposed at a lower center part of the opening 822a and between the lower right side part 1400 and the lower left side part 1500.

  At the right end of the unit main body 822, a decorative member 830 is arranged. The decorative member 830 is molded with a resin material, has a shape imitating the head of a beast, and is molded with, for example, a resin material. A decoration member 832 molded of a resin material is disposed at the left end of the unit main body 822.

  FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 820 shown in FIG. FIG. 17 shows a state where the accessory unit 820 is viewed from the upper right front to the lower left rear. In FIG. 17, the upper right end 822b, the lower right end 822c, the lower left end 822d, and the upper left end 822e of the unit main body 822 are not shown as in FIG.

  The upper front decoration accessory 1000 and the upper rear decoration accessory 1100 are attached to a common upper accessory base 850. The upper accessory base 850 is fixed to the upper part of the unit main body 822 with screws. In addition, the logo accessory 900 is arranged in front of the upper front decoration accessory 1000, and the accessory base 966 of the logo accessory 900 is fixed to the unit body with screws.

  The base 1254 of the upper right side accessory 1200 is fixed to the front base 1456 and the middle base 1460 of the lower right side accessory 1400 with screws. The middle base 1460 is fixed to the right end of the unit main body 822 with a screw. As a result, the upper right side item 1200 and the lower right side item 1400 are attached to the unit main body 822.

  Similarly, the base 1354 of the upper left side accessory 1300 is fixed to the front base 1556 and the middle base 1560 of the lower left side accessory 1500 with screws. The middle base 1560 is fixed to the left end of the unit main body 822 with a screw. Thus, the upper left side accessory 1300 and the lower left side accessory 1500 are attached to the unit main body 822.

  The base portion 1662 of the central lower part 1600 is fixed to the lower part of the center of the unit main body 822 with screws.

  A decorative member 830 is fixed to the right end of the unit main body 822 with a screw. A decorative member 832 is fixed to the left end of the unit main body 822 with a screw.

  Logo accessory 900, upper front ornament accessory 1000, upper rear ornament accessory 1100, upper right side accessory 1200, upper left side accessory 1300, lower right side accessory 1400, lower left side accessory 1500, and lower center The accessory 1600 is provided with a movable body, and performs various effects using each movable body. As an effect using each movable body, an effect of a special figure variable game, an effect of a normal figure variable game, an effect of a big hit game, a demonstration effect, and the like can be given. More specifically, a preview effect for the special figure variable game being executed (the relevant preliminary effect), a preliminary notice effect for the reserved special figure variable game (a look-ahead preliminary notice effect), a reach effect, a special figure 1 small hit effect, a special effect FIG. 2 shows a small hit effect, a general winning selection effect, a look-ahead notice effect, a 2R big hit game effect, a 15R special big hit game effect, and an effect related to the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation of the setting operation section 137. Hereinafter, various accessories will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the logo combination 900 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the logo combination 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the logo role 900. FIG. 18 shows a state where the logo role 900 is viewed from the upper right front to the lower left rear. As shown in FIG. 18, the logo combination 900 is roughly divided into a logo movable body 902, a base 904, and a driving unit 906.

  The logo movable body 902 has a character decoration portion 902a and a rotation link mechanism 902b. The character decoration portion 902a is arranged at the forefront of the logo combination 900. The character decoration portion 902a has a first character portion 910, a second character portion 912, a third character portion 914, a fourth character portion 916, a fifth character portion 918, a sixth character portion 920, and a seventh character portion 922. ing. The first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 are arranged in this order from the left.

  The configuration of the first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 will be described using the first character portion 910 as an example. The first character portion 910 includes a dial 910a, a decorative plate 910b, an LED substrate 910c, and a rear cover 910d. The dial 910a, the decorative plate 910b, the LED substrate 910c, and the rear cover 910d are arranged in this order from the front.

  The dial 910a is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a concave and convex shape representing a predetermined character (in this example, a character shape representing the character “C”, see FIG. 19) on the front side. A decorative plate 910b is arranged behind the dial 910a. The decorative plate 910b is molded of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a decorative pattern formed by unevenness on the front side. The decorative pattern of the decorative plate 910b is visible from the front side through the dial 910a, and decorates the dial 910a. An LED board 910c is arranged behind the decorative plate 910b. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted on the LED substrate 910c, and the logo movable body 902 can emit light in the first character portion 910 using the plurality of LEDs. The LEDs on the LED board 910c are included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 4, and are driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530. A rear cover 910d is disposed behind the LED board 910c. The rear cover 910d is formed of, for example, a resin material, and a dial 910a, a decorative plate 910b, and an LED board 910c are fixed to the rear cover 910d with screws.

  Like the first character portion 910, the second character portion 912 to the seventh character portion 922 include a dial, a decorative plate, an LED board, and a rear cover. In this example, an irregular shape representing the character “R” is formed on the dial of the second character portion 912, and an irregular shape representing the lightning symbol is formed on the dial of the third character portion 914. The letter plate of the fourth character portion 916 has an uneven shape representing the character “yo”, and the letter plate of the fifth character portion 918 has an uneven shape representing the character “shi”. The letter plate of the character portion 920 has an uneven shape representing the character "mu", and the letter plate of the seventh character portion 922 has an uneven shape representing the character "ne" (see FIG. 19). .

  As described above, the character decoration portion 902a of the logo movable body 902 has a character shape representing “CR (lightning sign) Yoshimune” which is the model name of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

  The character decoration portion 902a has column-shaped metal guide bars 924, 926, 928, 930, and 932 extending in the vertical direction. The guide rods 924 to 932 are arranged in parallel with each other.

  A guided portion 912d1 is provided at the left end of the rear cover of the second character portion 912, and the rear cover of the second character portion 912 is slidably attached to the guided portion 912d1 around the guide rod 924. Have been. An upper end fixing portion 910d1 for fixing the upper end of the guide bar 924 is provided at the upper right end of the rear cover 910d of the first character portion 910, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide bar 924 at the lower right end of the rear cover 910d. 910d2 are provided. The upper end of the guide rod 924 is fixed to the upper end fixing part 910d1, and the lower end of the guide rod 924 is fixed to the lower end fixing part 910d2. Thus, the first character portion 910 and the second character portion 912 are connected via the guide bar 924. Further, the upper end fixing portion 910d1 functions as a mechanical end of the second character portion 912. The function of the mechanical end will be described later.

  Similarly, a guided portion 914d1 is provided at the left end of the rear cover of the third character portion 914, and the rear cover of the third character portion 914 slides around the guide rod 926 when the guided portion 914d1 surrounds the guide rod 926. Mounted as possible. An upper end fixing portion 912d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide bar 926 is provided at the upper right end of the rear cover of the second character portion 912, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide bar 926 at the lower right end of the rear cover. 912d3 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 926 is fixed to the upper end fixing part 912d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 926 is fixed to the lower end fixing part 912d3. Thus, the second character portion 912 and the third character portion 914 are connected via the guide bar 926. Further, the upper end fixing portion 912d2 functions as a mechanical end of the third character portion 914.

  Similarly, a guided portion 916d1 is provided at the left end of the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916, and the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916 slides around the guide rod 928 when the guided portion 916d1 slides around the guide rod 928. Mounted as possible. An upper end fixing portion 914d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide bar 928 is provided at the upper right end of the rear cover of the third character portion 914, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide bar 928 at the lower right end of the rear cover. 914d3 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 928 is fixed to the upper end fixing part 914d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 928 is fixed to the lower end fixing part 914d3. Thus, the third character portion 914 and the fourth character portion 916 are connected via the guide rod 928. Further, the upper end fixing portion 914d2 functions as a mechanical end of the fourth character portion 916.

  An oval guide hole 916d2 extending in the vertical direction (parallel to the guide rods 924 to 932) is provided at the right end of the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916. A cylindrical guided portion 918d1 is provided on the rear side of the rear cover of the fifth character portion 918. The rear cover of the fifth character portion 918 is attached to the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916 so that the guided portion 918d1 can move in the guide hole 916d2. For this attachment, for example, a screw with a washer is used. The washer portion of the screw with washer is larger than the width of the guide hole 916d2, and prevents the guided portion from detaching from the guide hole 916d2.

  A guided portion 918d2 is provided at the right end of the rear cover of the fifth character portion 918, and the rear cover of the fifth character portion 918 can slide with the guided portion 918d2 surrounding the guide rod 930. Attached to. An upper end fixing portion 920d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide bar 930 is provided at the upper left end of the rear cover of the sixth character portion 920, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide bar 930 at the lower left end of the rear cover. 920d3 are provided. The upper end of the guide rod 930 is fixed to the upper end fixing part 920d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 930 is fixed to the lower end fixing part 920d3. Thus, the fifth character portion 918 and the sixth character portion 920 are connected via the guide rod 930. Further, the upper end fixing portion 920d2 functions as a mechanical end of the fifth character portion 918.

  Similarly, a guided portion 920d1 is provided at the right end of the rear cover of the sixth character portion 920, and the rear cover of the sixth character portion 920 slides around the guide rod 932 when the guided portion 920d1 surrounds the guide rod 932. Mounted as possible. An upper end fixing portion 922d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide rod 932 is provided at the upper left end of the rear cover of the seventh character portion 922, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide rod 932 is provided at the lower left end of the rear cover. 922d3 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 932 is fixed to the upper end fixing part 922d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 932 is fixed to the lower end fixing part 922d3. Thus, the sixth character portion 920 and the seventh character portion 922 are connected via the guide rod 932. Further, the lower end fixing portion 922d3 functions as a mechanical end of the sixth character portion 920.

  As described above, in the character decoration portion 902a, adjacent character portions are connected to each other. At the time of the moving operation of the logo movable body 902, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 are guided by the guide rods 924 to 932 and the guide hole portion 916d2 and can move in parallel in the vertical direction. I have.

  Next, the rotation link mechanism 902b disposed on the rear side of the character decoration portion 902a will be described. Rotational motion by a motor 970 described later is transmitted as linear motion to the character decoration portion 902a via the rotary link mechanism 902b. The rotation link mechanism 902b has a left crank 940, a right crank 942, and a link member 944.

  The left crank 940 has a left crank base 940a and a left crank cover 940b. The left crank base 940a is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a length in the left-right direction that is about half the length of the character decoration portion 902a. The right end of the left crank base 940a is formed in an arc shape that protrudes rightward, and a gear 940a1 is formed on the right end. Further, a left crank cover 940b is fixed to the rear side of the left crank base 940a with screws, and each of the second character portion 912 and the third character portion 914 is provided between the left crank base 940a and the left crank cover 940b. The wiring (not shown) connected to the LED board can be accommodated.

  The left crank 940 is formed with three oval guide holes (for example, guide hole 940a2, see FIG. 20). On the rear side of each of the rear covers of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, and the fourth character portion 916, a cylindrical guided portion is provided. The rear covers of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, and the fourth character portion 916 are attached to the left crank 940 so that the guided portion can move in the guide hole. For this attachment, for example, a screw with a washer is used. The washer portion of the screw with washer is larger than the width of the guide hole, and prevents the guided portion from being detached from the guide hole.

  The right crank 942 has a right crank base 942a and a right crank cover 942b. The right crank base 942a is molded of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a length of about half of the character decoration portion 902a in the left-right direction. The left end side of the right crank base 942a is formed in an arc shape convex to the left, and a gear 942a1 is formed on the left end side. Further, a right crank cover 942b is fixed to the rear side of the right crank base 942a with screws, and each of the fourth character portion 916 to the sixth character portion 920 is provided between the right crank base 942a and the right crank cover 942b. The wiring (not shown) connected to the LED board can be accommodated.

  The right crank 942 is formed with three elliptical guide holes. A cylindrical guided portion is provided on the rear side of each of the rear covers of the fourth character portion 916, the fifth character portion 918, and the sixth character portion 920. The rear covers of the fourth character portion 916, the fifth character portion 918, and the sixth character portion 920 are attached to the right crank 942 so that the guided portion can move in the guide hole. For this attachment, for example, a screw with a washer is used. The washer portion of the screw with washer is larger than the width of the guide hole, and prevents the guided portion from being detached from the guide hole.

  The gear 940a1 of the left crank base 940a and the gear 942a1 of the right crank base 942a are meshed with each other at the center. The left crank 940 and the right crank 942 are formed of, for example, a resin material, and are connected by an elongated link member 944 that is long in the left-right direction. A circular fixing hole is formed at the left end of the link member 944, and the link member 944 is screwed to the left crank base 940a through the fixing hole. The link member 944 has an oval guide hole extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left. On the rear side of the right crank 942, a columnar guided portion is provided. The link member 944 is attached to the right crank 942 so that the guided portion can move in the guide hole. For this attachment, for example, a screw with a washer is used. The washer portion of the screw with washer is larger than the width of the guide hole, and prevents the guided portion from being detached from the guide hole. The link member 944 connects the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 so that the gear 940a1 of the left crank 940 and the gear 942a1 of the right crank 942 are not disengaged or disengaged. Thus, the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 can perform a stable interlocking operation.

  Next, the base 904 of the logo combination 900 will be described. The base 904 is disposed on the rear side of the rotary link mechanism 902b, and has a central decoration member 960, a left decoration member 962, a right decoration member 964, and a accessory base portion 966.

  The central decorative member 960 is molded of, for example, a resin material, has a curved shape that is upwardly convex as a whole, and is provided with a predetermined pattern by unevenness. The left decorative member 962 and the right decorative member 964 are formed of, for example, a resin material and have shapes that are bilaterally symmetric. The accessory base portion 966 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a predetermined pattern formed on the surface by unevenness. The center decorative member 960, the left decorative member 962, and the right decorative member 964 are fixed to the front side of the accessory base 966 with screws. The accessory base portion 966 is fixed to the unit main body 822 shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 with screws. The edge of the central lower end of the accessory base 966 is formed in a semicircular shape that is concave upward. When various accessories are attached to the unit main body 822, an upper front decoration accessory 1000 to be described later is arranged below a central lower end of the accessory base 966.

  A first character portion 910 is fixed to the left side of the accessory base portion 966 with a screw, and a seventh character portion 922 is fixed to the right side of the accessory base portion 966 with a screw. Therefore, the first character portion 910 and the seventh character portion 922 do not move even when the logo movable body 902 moves.

  Next, a driving unit 906 for driving the logo movable body 902 will be described. The driving unit 906 is arranged on the rear side of the accessory base 966 of the base 904. The drive unit 906 includes a motor 970, a base member 972, a spur gear 974, a sector gear 976, a left substrate 980, a right substrate 982, and a photo sensor 984.

  The motor 970 is a driving source for executing the moving operation of the logo movable body 902. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 970. The rotation shaft of the motor 970 extends in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole for passing the rotation shaft of the motor 970 is formed in the base member 972. The motor 970 is fixed to the rear side of the base member 972 with screws so that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. Further, a spur gear 974 housed on the front side of the base member 972 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 970.

  A sector gear 976 is arranged below the spur gear 974 and is accommodated in the base member 972. The sector gear 976 is used to transmit the power of the motor 970 to the rotary link mechanism 902b via the spur gear 974. The sector gear 976 has a gear portion 976a and a mounting portion 976b that are integrally formed. The gear portion 976a is meshed with the spur gear 974. The mounting portion 976b is disposed below the gear portion 976a, and is fixed to the left end of the left crank base 940a of the left crank 940 with a screw. In addition, a circular through hole is formed substantially at the center of the mounting portion 976b. Similarly, circular through holes are also formed at the left end of the left crank base 940a and at the lower left of the accessory base 966. A cylindrical metal rod 990 extending in the front-rear direction is disposed in the through holes of the attachment portion 976b, the left crank base 940a, and the accessory base portion 966. The metal rod 990 has a front end fixed to the rear cover 910 d of the first character portion 910, and a rear end fixed to the base member 972 of the drive section 906. The left crank 940 and the sector gear 976 are integrally rotatable about a metal bar 990 as a center of rotation. Accordingly, in association with the rotation of the sector gear 976, the left crank 940 can rotate by a predetermined angle in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction with the metal rod 990 as the center of rotation.

  A circular through hole is formed at the right end of the right crank base 942a of the right crank 942. A cylindrical metal rod 992 extending in the front-rear direction is arranged in the through hole. The metal rod 992 has a front end fixed to the rear cover of the seventh character portion 922, and a rear end fixed to the lower right of the accessory base 966 of the base 904. Further, as described above, since the gear 940a1 of the left crank base 940a and the gear 942a1 of the right crank base 942a are engaged with each other, the right crank 942 rotates the metal rod 992 in conjunction with the rotation of the left crank 940. It is rotatable by a predetermined angle in a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction with respect to the center.

  A torsion coil spring 994 is arranged between the right crank 942 and the accessory base 966. A metal rod 992 passes through the coil center of the torsion coil spring 994. One end of the torsion coil spring 994 is fixed to the right crank cover 942b of the right crank 942, and the other end is fixed to the accessory base portion 966. When the right crank 942 rotates counterclockwise, a force acts on the torsion coil spring 994 in a direction in which the spring is wound. The torsion coil spring 994 rotates clockwise to the right crank 942 when the right crank 942 rotates clockwise. A torque is applied to assist the right crank 942 to rotate right.

  A left substrate 980 is fixed to the left rear surface of the accessory base 966 with screws, and a right substrate 982 is fixed to the right rear surface of the accessory base 966 with screws. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side of the left substrate 980 and the right substrate 982, and the base 904 can emit light using the LEDs. These LEDs are included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 4, and are driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

  Further, to the left substrate 980, the motor 970 and the respective LED substrates of the first character portion 910 to the third character portion 914 are connected by wiring (not shown). The motor 970 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 via the left substrate 980, and each LED substrate of the first character portion 910 to the third character portion 914 is driven by the game board lamp drive shown in FIG. Connected to circuit 530. Further, the LED substrates of the fourth character portion 916 to the seventh character portion 922 are connected to the right substrate 982 by wiring (not shown). The LED boards of the fourth character portion 916 to the seventh character portion 922 are connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 shown in FIG. As a result, the moving operation of the logo movable body 902 of the logo combination 900 and the light emitting operation of the LED (light emitting unit) are controlled by the second sub control unit 500. Also, the wiring between the logo accessory 900 and the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 can be consolidated.

  Further, a photo sensor 984 is fixed to the base member 972 with a screw. The photo sensor 984 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photo sensor 984 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that are arranged to face each other in the up-down direction with a space portion interposed therebetween. A light-shielding piece (not shown) made of, for example, a black resin material is provided on the rear side of the gear portion 976a of the sector gear 976. When the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost movable position, the light shielding piece enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the photo sensor 984. In this embodiment, the photosensor 984 detects the presence or absence of the light shielding piece of the sector gear 976, and the first sub-controller 400 determines that the logo movable body 902 is in the uppermost position when the photosensor 984 detects the light shielding piece. When the photo sensor 984 does not detect the light shielding piece, it is determined that the logo movable body 902 is located at a position other than the uppermost position.

  Next, the operation of the logo movable body 902 of the logo combination 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is an external view of the logo combination 900 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 20 is an external view of the logo combination 900 as viewed from the rear side.

  FIG. 19A and FIG. 20A show a state where the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, the first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 of the character decoration portion 902a are substantially aligned in the left-right direction. Also, as shown in FIG. 20A, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, the longitudinal directions of the left crank 940, the right crank 942, and the link member 944 of the rotating link mechanism 902b are directed to the left and right. It has become. Further, the gear 940a1 of the left crank 940 and the gear 942a2 of the right crank 942 mesh with each other at the center.

  FIGS. 19B and 20B show a state in which the logo movable body 902 moves upward from the initial position and is located at the uppermost position in the movement range. The logo movable body 902 can be driven by the motor 970 of the drive unit 906 to perform an operation of moving from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  When moving the logo movable body 902 upward, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 970 to rotate the rotation axis of the motor 970 clockwise toward the plane of FIG. 19 (toward the plane of FIG. 20). To the left). As a result, the spur gear 974 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 970 rotates clockwise, and the sector gear 976 meshed with the spur gear 974 rotates counterclockwise. Further, the left crank 940 fixed to the sector gear 976 rotates counterclockwise, and the right crank 942 including the gear 942a2 meshed with the gear 940a1 of the left crank 940 rotates clockwise. Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, the guided portion provided on the rear side of the right crank 942 has an oval guide hole portion of the link member 944 corresponding to the leftward displacement of the right crank 942. To the left (to the right as viewed in FIG. 20). The link member 944 also moves upward in accordance with the operation of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942.

  Next, the movement operation of the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 of the character decoration portion 902a during the upward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 will be described using the fourth character portion 916 as an example. As shown in FIG. 20, the fourth character portion 916 has a guided portion 916d4 provided on the rear side of the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916, and an oval guide hole provided on the left crank base 940a. The portion 940a2 is attached to the left crank base 940a so as to be movable.

  An imaginary straight line passing through the long axis of the elliptical guide hole 940a2 passes through the rotation center of the left crank 940. Similarly, an imaginary straight line passing through the long axes of the two oblong guide holes provided in the left crank 940 passes through the rotation center of the left crank 940. Similarly, an imaginary straight line passing through the major axes of the two oblong guide holes provided in the right crank 942 passes through the center of rotation of the right crank 942.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 940a2 is directed to the upper left (in FIG. 20, the upper right as viewed in the drawing). ing. When the upward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed, the left crank 940 rotates counterclockwise (in FIG. 20, clockwise in FIG. 20), and the guide hole 940a2 is a circle centered on the rotation axis of the left crank 940. It moves upward and left (upper right in FIG. 20 toward the plane of the paper) in an arc-shaped movement locus. At this time, the guided portion 916d4 moves upward by being guided by the guide hole 940a2. In addition, the fourth character portion 916 is moved upward by being guided by a guide rod 928 extending in the vertical direction shown in FIG. In addition, as described above, the upper end fixing portion 914d2 of the guide bar 928 of the third character portion 914 functions as a mechanical end of the fourth character portion 916. The guided portion 916d1 of the fourth character portion 916 sliding on the guide rod 928 contacts the upper end fixing portion 914d2 of the third character portion 914, so that the fourth character portion 916 stops. As shown in FIG. 20B, the fourth character portion 916 stops before the guided portion 916d4 comes into contact with the right end (the left end as viewed in the drawing in FIG. 20) of the guide hole 940a2.

  As described above, the rotational movement of the motor 970 is transmitted to the fourth character portion 916 via the guide hole 940a2 provided in the left crank 940 as a linear motion in the vertical direction. The operating principle of the second character part 912, the third character part 914, the fifth character part 918, and the sixth character part 920 is the same as that of the fourth character part 916. The rotational motion of the motor 970 is transmitted as linear motion to the second character portion 912 and the third character portion 914 via the left crank 940, and linearly transmitted to the fifth character portion 918 and the sixth character portion 920 via the right crank 942. It is transmitted as exercise. As a result, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 linearly move upward. Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 are guided by guide rods 924 to 932 arranged in parallel with each other, and therefore move upward in parallel with each other. In addition, since the first character portion 910 and the seventh character portion 922 are fixed to the accessory base portion 966 as described above, they do not move.

  As described above, when the upward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed, the second character part 912 to the sixth character part 920, which are a plurality of parts of the logo movable body 902, move upward in parallel with each other.

  Further, the left crank 940 performs a rotation operation when the upward movement of the logo movable body 902 is performed, and the operation amount is larger in a portion far from the center of rotation than in a portion near the rotation center. In this example, a first character portion 910 to a fourth character portion 916 are attached from the side closer to the rotation center of the left crank 940. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 19B, the amount of movement when the upward movement of the logo movable body 902 is performed increases in the order of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, and the fourth character portion 916. Has become.

  Similarly, the right crank 942 performs a rotation operation when the upward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed, and the operation amount is larger in a portion far from the center of rotation than in a portion near the rotation center. In this example, a sixth character portion 920 and a fifth character portion 918 are attached from the side closer to the rotation center of the right crank 942. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 19B, the amount of movement when the upward movement of the logo movable body 902 is performed increases in the order of the sixth character portion 920 and the fifth character portion 918.

  In addition, the absolute values of the rotation angles of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 when the upward movement of the logo movable body 902 is performed are substantially equal, and the third character portion 914 disposed next to the fourth character portion 916 and the third character portion 914 The operation amount of the five character portion 918 is substantially equal, and the operation amount of the second character portion 912 and the sixth character portion 920 are substantially equal. The movement amount of the fourth character portion 916 is the largest in the logo movable body 902.

  Next, an operation of moving the logo movable body 902 from the initial position to the lowermost position in the movement range will be described. FIGS. 19C and 20C show a state where the logo movable body 902 is located at the lowermost position. The logo movable body 902 can be driven by a motor 970 of a drive unit 906 to perform an operation of moving from an initial position to a lowermost position.

  When driving the logo movable body 902 to perform the downward movement operation, the second sub control unit 500 drives the motor 970 to rotate the rotation axis of the motor 970 counterclockwise toward the paper surface of FIG. (Clockwise as viewed in FIG. 20). Accordingly, the spur gear 974 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 970 rotates counterclockwise, and the sector gear 976 meshed with the spur gear 974 rotates clockwise (counterclockwise as viewed in the plane of FIG. 20). . Further, the left crank 940 fixed to the sector gear 976 rotates clockwise, and the right crank 942 including the gear 942a2 meshed with the gear 940a1 of the left crank 940 rotates counterclockwise. Also, as shown in FIG. 20C, the guided portion provided on the rear side of the right crank 942 has an oval guide hole portion of the link member 944 corresponding to the leftward displacement of the right crank 942. To the right (to the left as viewed in FIG. 20). The link member 944 also moves downward in accordance with the operation of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942.

  Next, the movement operation of the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 of the character decoration portion 902a when the movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed below will be described by taking the fourth character portion 916 as an example. When the moving operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed downward, the left crank 940 rotates clockwise (in FIG. 20, counterclockwise as viewed in the drawing), and the guide hole 940a2 is a circle centered on the rotation axis of the left crank 940. It moves downward and leftward (downward and rightward in FIG. 20 toward the paper surface) with an arc-shaped movement locus. At this time, the guided portion 916d4 moves downward by being guided by the guide hole 940a2. The fourth character portion 916 is moved downward by being guided by a guide rod 928 extending in the vertical direction shown in FIG.

  When the moving operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed downward, the guide hole 940a2 functions as a mechanical end of the fourth character portion 916. When the guided portion 916d4 of the fourth character portion 916 comes into contact with the right end (the left end in FIG. 20 as viewed in the drawing) of the guide hole 940a2, the fourth character portion 916 stops.

  As described above, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 940a2 is directed to the upper left (in FIG. 20, the upper right as viewed in the drawing). For this reason, when performing the downward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 that rotates the left crank 940 clockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 20), the left crank 940 rotates counterclockwise (in FIG. The moving distance of the guided portion 916d4 is smaller than when the moving operation of the logo movable body 902 rotating clockwise (upward) is performed. Therefore, when the moving operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed downward, the rotation angle of the left crank 940 is smaller than when the moving operation is performed upward, and the operation amount of the fourth character portion 916 is also smaller.

  The operating principle of the second character part 912, the third character part 914, the fifth character part 918, and the sixth character part 920 is the same as that of the fourth character part 916. As shown in FIG. 20C, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 are guided by guide rods 924 to 932 arranged in parallel with each other, and move downward in parallel with each other. In addition, since the first character portion 910 and the seventh character portion 922 are fixed to the accessory base portion 966 as described above, they do not move.

  Further, since the left crank 940 performs a rotating operation when the moving operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed downward, as shown in FIG. 19C, the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, and the fourth character portion 914 are formed. The motion amount increases in the order of the character portion 916.

  Similarly, since the right crank 942 performs a rotation operation when the moving operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed downward, as shown in FIG. 19C, the sixth character portion 920 and the fifth character portion 918 are arranged in this order. The operation amount increases.

  Further, the absolute values of the rotation angles of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 when the moving operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed downward are substantially equal, and the third character portion 914 arranged next to the fourth character portion 916 and the third character portion 914 The operation amount of the five character portion 918 is substantially equal, and the operation amount of the second character portion 912 and the sixth character portion 920 are substantially equal. The movement amount of the fourth character portion 916 is the largest in the logo movable body 902.

  As described above, when the downward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920, which are a plurality of portions of the logo movable body 902, move downward in parallel with each other.

  The initial position of the logo movable body 902 is a position that is located after the operation confirmation of the logo movable body 902 is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, the logo movable body 902 moves to the lowermost position shown in FIG. 19C, then moves to the uppermost position shown in FIG. 19B, and then moves to FIG. It moves to the initial position shown in FIG. It should be noted that the upper front decoration accessory 1000, the upper rear decoration accessory 1100, the upper right side accessory 1200, the upper left side accessory 1300, the lower right side accessory 1400, the lower left side accessory 1500, and the central lower accessory 1600. The operation of the movable bodies included in is also checked when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, and these movable bodies stop at the initial position after the operation is confirmed.

  In the present embodiment, the amount of movement of the logo movable body 902 from the initial position to the uppermost position is larger than the amount of movement from the initial position to the lowermost position. More specifically, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920, which are a plurality of movable portions of the logo movable body 902, are more likely to move from the initial position to the lowermost position than to the uppermost position from the initial position. The moving amount before moving to is larger. Note that, compared with the same movable part among the plurality of movable parts of the logo movable body 902, the movement amount from the initial position to the uppermost position is smaller than the movement amount from the initial position to the lowermost position. It just needs to be bigger. Further, the whole of the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 which are a plurality of portions of the logo movable body 902 may be movable in parallel with each other, or the second character portion 912 which is a plurality of movable portions. A part of the sixth character portion 920 may be movable in parallel with each other.

  The uppermost position of the logo movable body 902 is a position away from the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lowermost position of the logo movable member 902 is a position overlapping the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the amount of movement of logo movable body 902 to the uppermost position away from decorative symbol display device 208 is larger than the amount of downward movement to approach decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the movable amount of the logo movable body 902 in the direction away from the decorative symbol display device 208 may be smaller than the amount of movement in the direction approaching the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, the logo movable body 902 may include a sub-display device smaller than the decorative design display device 208. Other displays including a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector include a sub-display device. Devices can be used. Further, the sub-display device may be controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500, and may be controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500. A separate display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  In addition, the logo movable body 902 may be configured such that the first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 are rotatable, may be rotatable after moving upward, or may be rotatable after rotating. It may move, may be rotatable after the downward movement, or may be downward after the rotation.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may be movable to a position lower than the lower end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a downward movement operation.

  In the present embodiment, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, the logo movable body 902 overlaps the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction. When the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, the logo movable body 902 does not have to overlap in the front-rear direction of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the entire logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, it may be located above the upper end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may be an integrated movable body having a plurality of movable parts. For example, a movable portion including the sub-display device and another movable portion movable near the sub-display device may be formed as an integral movable body.

  Further, logo movable body 902 of the present embodiment has a shape of a character representing a title logo including at least a part of a model name of a game console or the like. In addition, the logo movable body 902 may include, as characters other than the title logo, for example, a characteristic character related to the characteristics of the game console or the title or motif of the game console (if the game console has a latent probability change in the gaming state, “ If it is a game console with a motif of historical drama, such as "submarine" or "monster", "war" or "fight" can be mentioned. The number of characters may be one character or two or more characters.

  In addition, the logo movable body 902 may be capable of emitting light of a single color, or may be capable of emitting light of a plurality of colors. Further, the light emitting means may not be provided in the logo movable body 902. Further, at least one of the first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 may emit light.

  In addition, the logo movable body 902 is configured not to perform the multi-step operation, and may be capable of simply moving.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may be capable of executing at least a movement operation in the front-back direction. In this case, the logo movable body 902 may include a front-rear drive unit 1004 described below. The logo movable body 902 may be movable in the front-rear direction when located at the initial position, may be movable in the front-rear direction when located at the uppermost position, or may be located at the lowermost position. May be movable in the front-back direction.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used for motor 970, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a motor is used as a drive source of logo movable body 902, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various actuators such as a solenoid may be used as a driving source of the logo movable body 902.

  Next, the upper front decorative accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the upper front decoration accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22 while referring to FIG. 21 and 22 are exploded perspective views of the upper front decoration accessory 1000. FIG. FIGS. 21 and 22 show a state in which the upper front decoration accessory 1000 is viewed from the upper right front to the lower left rear. FIG. 22 shows a part of an upper rear decoration accessory 1100 described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the upper front decoration accessory 1000 is roughly divided into an upper front movable body 1002, a front / rear drive unit 1004, a vertical drive unit 1006, and an upper front movable body base unit 1008. I have.

  First, the upper front movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIG. The upper front movable body 1002 has a lens movable body 1002a and a base portion 1002b. The lens movable body 1002a has a front decorative portion 1010, an outer decorative portion 1012, an inner decorative portion 1014, a lower decorative portion 1016, and a lens 1018, and is disposed at the forefront of the upper front decorative accessory 1000. The lens movable body 1002a is movable forward with the base portion 1002b as a starting point.

  The front decoration 1010 has ten movable parts 1010a to 1010j. The movable portions 1010a to 1010j are individually molded of, for example, a transparent resin material, have the same size and the same shape, and are arranged in an annular shape. In addition, decorations with irregularities are provided on the front side of the movable parts 1010a to 1010j.

  The outer decorative portion 1012 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, has a circular shallow bowl shape, is arranged so that the bottom surface faces forward, and is decorated with unevenness on the surface. The outer decorative portion 1012 has a circular opening 1012a at the center of the bottom surface. Further, the outer decorative portion 1012 can accommodate an inner decorative portion 1014 to be described later.

  The inner decorative portion 1014 has a base 1014a, a rotating disk 1014b, and a long holed disk 1014c. The base 1014a, the rotating disk 1014b, and the long holed disk 1014c are formed of, for example, a resin material, have a thin annular shape, and have substantially equal inner and outer diameters. The base 1014a, the rotating disk 1014b, and the long holed disk 1014c are arranged in this order from the rear so that the centers of the openings coincide with each other. In addition, a circular opening 1014d is arranged so as to be surrounded by the base 1014a, the rotating disk 1014b, and the long holed disk 1014c.

  The base 1014a, the rotating disc 1014b, and the disc 1014c with a long hole are accommodated in the outer decorative portion 1012. The base 1014a and the disc 1014c with a long hole are fixed to the outer decorative portion 1012 with screws, and the outer decorative portion 1012 is fixed to the right-hand moving member 1038 and the left-hand moving member 1044 described later with screws. For this reason, the base 1014a and the disc 1014c with a long hole cannot rotate. The rotating disc 1014b is sandwiched between the base 1014a and the disc 1014c with a long hole, is not fixed with screws or the like, and is rotatable within a predetermined angle range around the center of the opening 1014d as the center of rotation. I have. In addition, the rotating disc 1014b has a relatively small contact area with the base 1014a and the disc 1014c with a long hole, so that the frictional force between the base 1014a and the disc 1014c with a long hole is reduced.

  A gear 1014b1 is provided on the right rear surface of the rotating disk 1014b. The gear portion 1014b1 is formed so that teeth having the same shape and carved at the same pitch are arranged circumferentially and face rearward. A notch (not shown) is provided on the outer periphery of the base 1014a in accordance with the operating range of the gear 1014b1. This prevents the gear portion 1014b1 and the base portion 1014a from coming into contact with each other and hindering the rotation of the rotating disk 1014b, and allows the gear portion 1014b1 to mesh with the spur gear 1024 disposed behind. .

  The rotating disk 1014b has a guide hole 1014b2 (not shown in FIG. 21, see FIG. 23). The guide hole 1014b2 has an elliptical shape that extends obliquely from upper left to lower right with respect to an imaginary circumference passing through the middle between the inner edge and the outer edge of the rotating disk 1014b. The rotating disk 1014b has nine guide holes (not shown) similar to the guide holes 1014b2. These guide holes are arranged at equal intervals.

  Further, the disc 1014c with a long hole has an oval-shaped long hole 1014c1 extending in the radial direction of the outer circumferential circle of the disc 1014c with a long hole. Also, the long holed disc 1014c has nine long holes similar to the long hole 1014c1. These long holes are arranged at equal intervals.

  The lower end of the guide hole of the rotating disk 1014b and the elongated hole of the disk 1014c with a long hole are disposed so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. For example, the guide hole portion 1014b2 of the rotating disk 1014b and the long hole portion 1014c1 of the long holed disk 1014c are arranged with their lower ends overlapping in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the inner decorative portion 1014 further has a movable portion support portion 1014e. The movable portion support portion 1014e has a thin plate shape as a whole, and is arranged such that the plate surface is orthogonal to the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the movable portion support portion 1014e is integrally formed of, for example, a resin material, and is integrally formed of a resin material. And a guided portion 1014e2 protruding in a columnar shape. Further, the inner decorative portion 1014 has nine movable portion support portions similar to the movable portion support portion 1014e.

  The mounting portion 1014e1 protrudes forward from the opening 1012a of the outer decorative portion 1012, and is fixed to the lower end of the rear surface of the movable portion 1010a disposed in front of the outer decorative portion 1012 with a screw. Similarly, the movable portions 1014b to 1014j are fixed to the nine movable portion support portions other than the movable portion support portion 1014e one by one with screws.

  Further, the movable portion support portion 1014e is attached so that the guided portion 1014e2 can move in the guide hole portion 1014b2 of the rotating disk 1014b and in the long hole portion 1014c1 of the long holed disk 1014c. For this attachment, for example, a screw with a washer is used. The washer portion of the screw with washer is larger than the width of the guide hole portion 1014b2 and the long hole portion 1014c1, and prevents the guided portion 1014e2 from separating from the guide hole portion 1014b2 and the long hole portion 1014c1. Similarly, nine movable part supports other than the movable part support 1014e are washers so that the guided part can move in the guide hole of the rotating disk 1014b and in the long hole of the disk 1014c with a long hole. Attached with attached screws. The rotating disk 1014b, the disk 1014c with a long hole, and the movable portion support portion 1014e are used for operating the movable portions 1010a to 1010j.

  A lower decorative portion 1016 is fixed to a lower end of the outer decorative portion 1012 with a screw. The lower decorative portion 1016 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material and is decorated with irregularities.

  A lens 1018 is fixed to the rear side of the base 1014a of the inner decorative portion 1014 with a screw. The lens 1018 has a substantially circular shape, and the center of the lens 1018 and the center of the openings 1012a and 1014d overlap in the front-back direction. In the present embodiment, a convex lens is used as the lens 1018, but a concave lens may be used.

  An LED board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is arranged behind the base 1014a. The LED substrate has the same annular shape as the base 1014a, and is arranged such that the central opening overlaps the opening 1014d. The lens movable body 1002a can emit light using the plurality of LEDs. The plurality of LEDs are included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 4, and are driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

  A base portion 1002b is arranged behind the lens movable body 1002a. The base portion 1002b is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has an upper base 1002b1, a lower base 1002b2, a right base 1002b3, a left base 1002b4, and an opening 1002b5. The upper base 1002b1 is arranged above the base 1002b, and the lower base 1002b2 is arranged below the base 1002b. The upper base 1002b1 and the lower base 1002b2 are disposed in the same plane whose front surfaces are orthogonal to the front-rear direction.

  The right base 1002b3 and the left base 1002b4 are arranged to face each other in the left-right direction with the upper base 1002b1 and the lower base 1002b2 interposed therebetween. The right base 1002b3 extends rearward from the right rear end of the upper base 1002b1 and the lower base 1002b2. The left base 1002b4 extends rearward from the left rear end of the upper base 1002b1 and the lower base 1002b2.

  The lower end of the upper base 1002b1 is formed in a shape conforming to the upper contour of the lens 1018, and the upper end of the lower base 1002b2 is formed in a shape conforming to the lower contour of the lens 1018. An opening 1002b5 having the same contour as the contour of the lens 1018 is arranged so as to be surrounded by the upper base 1002b1 and the lower base 1002b2. The lens movable body 1002a is disposed in front of the base 1002b such that the lens 1018 and the opening 1002b5 overlap in the front-back direction. The openings 1012b and 1014d, the lens 1018, and the opening 1002b5 form a visible region in which the rear of the lens movable body 1002a can be visually recognized, and the lens 1018 is arranged in the visible region. This allows the rear of the upper front movable body 1002 to be visible from the front side through the openings 1012b and 1014d, the lens 1018, and the opening 1002b5.

  Further, a lower end side of the lower base portion 1002b2 is formed in a shape that matches the upper surface of the lower decorative portion 1016. When the lens movable body 1002a is attached to the base portion 1002b, the lower decorative portion 1016 is located below the lower base portion 1002b2, and the base portion 1002b hinders the front and rear movement of the lens movable body 1002a. Not to be.

  Next, the front-rear drive unit 1004 will be described. The front-rear drive unit 1004 is used for moving the lens movable body 1002a in the front-rear direction. The front / rear drive unit 1004 includes a drive source unit 1004a, a right drive unit 1004b, a left drive unit 1004c, and a movable unit drive unit 1004d.

  The drive source unit 1004a includes a motor 1020, a mounting member 1022, a spur gear 1024, a shaft 1026, and spur gears 1028, 1030, and 1032. The motor 1020 is a driving source for executing the moving operation of the lens movable body 1002a in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as motor 1020. The motor 1020 is arranged such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction.

  The attachment member 1022 is formed of, for example, a resin material, and is used to attach the motor 1020 to the right side surface of the right base portion 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b. The attachment member 1022 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1020 passes. The motor 1020 is fixed to the right side surface of the mounting member 1022 with a screw so that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. The mounting member 1022 is fixed to the right side surface of the right base 1002b3 with a screw.

  Further, a spur gear 1024 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1020. The spur gear 1024 is disposed on the left side of the motor 1020 and between the mounting member 1022 and the right base 1002b3. A metal-made cylindrical shaft 1026 extending in the left-right direction is rotatably attached to the upper base 1002b1 of the base 1002b. The shaft 1026 has substantially the same length as the length of the upper base 1002b1 in the left-right direction, and a spur gear 1028 is fixed to the right end. The spur gear 1028 is meshed with a spur gear 1024 to which the rotation shaft of the motor 1020 is fixed. A spur gear 1032 is fixed to the left end of the shaft 1026.

  A spur gear 1032 is rotatably mounted on the left side surface of the left base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b. The spur gear 1032 meshes with a spur gear 1030 fixed to the left end of the shaft 1026. The spur gear 1032 is arranged so that the position of the spur gear 1024 in the vertical direction is the same as that of the spur gear 1024.

  The spur gears 1024, 1028, 1030, and 1032 are arranged so that the rotation axis is in the left-right direction. Further, the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 have the same pitch circle diameter, the same shape, and the same number of teeth. Further, the spur gear 1028 and the spur gear 1030 have the same pitch circle diameter, the same shape, and the same number of teeth. The spur gears 1024 and 1032 have a larger pitch circle diameter and a larger number of teeth than the spur gears 1028 and 1030. The tooth ratio between the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1028 and the tooth ratio between the spur gear 1030 and the spur gear 1032 are equal and less than one.

  Therefore, the rotational motion of the motor 1020 is transmitted to the spur gear 1028 via the spur gear 1024 at an increased rotational speed at a predetermined ratio. Further, the spur gear 1028 and the spur gear 1030 are fixed to the shaft 1026, and therefore rotate in the same direction at the same rotation speed. Further, the rotational movement of the spur gear 1030 is transmitted to the spur gear 1032 at a reduced rotational speed at a predetermined ratio. Thus, the rotation speed of the spur gear 1032 becomes equal to the rotation speed of the spur gear 1024. The rotation directions of the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 are the same. The drive source unit 1004a can transmit the rotational motion of the motor 1020 to the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 in the same rotation direction and the same rotation speed.

  Next, the right driver 1004b and the left driver 1004c will be described. The right driving unit 1004b and the left driving unit 1004c are used to convert the rotational motion of the motor 1020 into a linear motion and transmit the linear motion to the lens movable body 1002a.

  The right driving unit 1004b includes a right guide bar 1034, a right guide bar fixing member 1036, and a right moving member 1038. The right guide bar 1034 is made of metal and has a columnar shape, and is arranged to extend in the front-rear direction. The front end of the right guide bar 1034 is fixed to the right front of the right base 1002b3 of the base 1002b, and the rear end is fixed to the right rear of the right base 1002b3 by the right guide bar fixing member 1036.

  The right moving member 1038 is disposed on the right side of the right base 1002b3 and below the spur gear 1024. The right side moving member 1038 is formed of a resin material, has a thin plate rectangular shape as a whole, and is disposed so that the longitudinal direction is parallel to the front-back direction and the plate surface is orthogonal to the left-right direction. A rack portion 1038a in which teeth of the same shape are carved at the same pitch and arranged in the front-rear direction is provided at an upper end side of the right-side moving member 1038. The rack part 1038a is meshed with the spur gear 1024. A guided portion 1038b having a cylindrical through hole is provided on the right side surface of the right side moving member 1038. The right moving member 1038 has a guided portion 1038b slidably mounted around the right guide bar 1034. The right-side moving member 1038 receives the rotational movement of the spur gear 1024 at the rack portion 1038a, converts the rotational movement into linear movement, and is guided by the right guide bar 1034 so as to be capable of linear movement in the front-rear direction.

  Further, a front groove 1038c and a rear groove 1038d extending in the vertical direction are provided on the right side surface of the right moving member 1038. The front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d extend in parallel with the same length. The functions of the front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d will be described later.

  The left driving unit 1004c includes a left guide rod 1040, a left guide rod fixing member 1042, and a left moving member 1044. The left guide bar 1040 is made of metal and has a columnar shape, and is arranged to extend in the front-rear direction. The left guide bar 1040 is disposed parallel to the right guide bar 1034 at the same vertical position as the right guide bar 1034. The front end of the left guide rod 1040 is fixed to the left front part of the left base 1002b4 of the base part 1002b, and the rear end is fixed to the left rear part of the left base 1002b4 by the left guide rod fixing member 1042.

  The left moving member 1044 is arranged on the left side of the left base 1002b4 and below the spur gear 1032. The left moving member 1044 is molded of a resin material, has a thin rectangular shape as a whole, and is disposed so that its longitudinal direction is parallel to the front-back direction and the plate surface is orthogonal to the left-right direction. The left moving member 1044 has the same vertical position and the front-rear position as the right moving member 1038, and is arranged in parallel with the right moving member 1038. On the upper end side of the left-side moving member 1044, a rack portion 1044a in which teeth of the same shape are carved at the same pitch and arranged in the front-rear direction is provided. The rack portion 1044a is meshed with the spur gear 1032. A guided portion (not shown) similar to the guided portion 1038b is provided on the left side surface of the left moving member 1044. The left moving member 1044 is slidably mounted so that the guided portion surrounds the left guide bar 1040. The left moving member 1044 receives the rotational movement of the spur gear 1032 by the rack portion 1044a, converts the rotational movement into a linear movement, and is guided by the left guide rod 1040 so as to be linearly movable in the front-rear direction.

  The right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 have the same size. The rack portion 1038a and the rack portion 1044a have the same shape, and have the same tooth pitch and number of teeth. When the motor 1020 is driven, the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 rotate in the same direction at the same rotation speed. Since the rack portion 1038a is meshed with the spur gear 1024 and the rack portion 1044a is meshed with the spur gear 1032, when the motor 1020 is driven, the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 move in the same direction at the same speed. The linear motions are made parallel to each other in the front-back direction.

  A right rear surface of the base 1014a of the inner decorative portion 1014 of the lens movable body 1002a is fixed to a front end of the right moving member 1038 with a screw. Similarly, the left rear surface of the base 1014a of the inner decorative portion 1014 of the lens movable body 1002a is fixed to the front end of the left moving member 1044 with a screw. Therefore, the lens movable body 1002a linearly moves in the front-rear direction in conjunction with the linear movement of the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044.

  When the lens movable body 1002a moves forward starting from the base portion 1002b, the front end of the guided portion 1038b of the right moving member 1038 comes into contact with the front end of the right base 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b. Similarly, when the lens movable body 1002a moves forward starting from the base 1002b, the front end of the guided portion of the left moving member 1044 comes into contact with the front end of the left base 1002b4 of the base 1002b. I have. Thus, the guided portion 1038b of the right moving member 1038 and the guided portion (not shown) of the left moving member 1044 function as a mechanical end of the lens movable body 1002a.

  Next, the movable unit driving unit 1004d will be described. The movable section driving section 1004d is used to drive the movable sections 1010a to 1010j of the front decorative section 1010 when the lens movable body 1002a moves in the front-back direction.

  The movable section drive unit 1004d includes a guided member 1050 with a rack, a guided shaft 1052, a slide bearing 1054, a spur gear 1056, a mounting member 1058, and a decorative member 1060 with a guide groove.

  The guided member 1050 with a rack is integrally formed of a resin material, and has a mounting portion 1050a and a rack portion 1050b. The mounting portion 1050a has a thin plate shape and is arranged such that the plate surface is orthogonal to the left-right direction. Also, a front groove 1038c and a rear groove 1038d extending in the vertical direction are provided on the right side surface of the right moving member 1038, and two projections (not shown) are provided on the left side surface of the mounting portion 1050a. The guided member 1050 with a rack is attached to the right moving member 1038 such that one protrusion is slidable in the front groove 1038c and the other guided part is slidable in the rear groove 1038d. Thus, the guided member 1050 with a rack can move vertically along the front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d of the right moving member 1038.

  Further, a rack portion 1050b is arranged at the front end of the attachment portion 1050a. The rack portion 1050b is carved with the same shape teeth at the same pitch, and the tooth tips face forward.

  The left end of a guided shaft 1052 made of a columnar metal and extending in the left-right direction is fixed to the right side surface of the mounting portion 1050a. At the right end of the guided shaft 1052, a cylindrical resin-made sliding bearing 1054 is attached.

  A spur gear 1056 is attached to the right side surface of the right side moving member 1038 so as to be rotatable in a plane parallel to the front-rear direction. The spur gear 1056 is arranged in front of the rack portion 1050b so that the rotation axis is oriented in the left-right direction, and is engaged with the rack of the rack portion 1050b.

  A mounting member 1058 is arranged on the right side of the guided member with rack 1050 and the spur gear 1056. The attachment member 1058 is integrally molded with a light-shielding piece 1058a made of, for example, a black resin material. The attachment member 1058 is fixed to the right-side moving member 1038 by a screw penetrating a circular opening at the center of the spur gear 1056.

  The spur gear 1056 is meshed with the gear part 1014b1 of the inner decoration part 1014. Thus, when the spur gear 1056 rotates, the rotating disk 1014b of the inner decorative portion 1014 rotates in conjunction with the rotation.

  In addition, a decorative member 1060 with a guide groove molded of, for example, a transparent resin material is fixed below the right side surface of the right base portion 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b with screws. A guide groove 1060a (not shown in FIG. 21, see FIG. 23) is provided on a surface (left side surface) of the decorative member 1060 with a guide groove facing the right base 1002b3. The guide groove 1060a is formed to extend from the lower rear to the upper front. A slide bearing 1054 is slidably provided in the guide groove 1060a. A slide bearing 1054 is fixed to one end of the guided shaft 1052, and a guided member 1050 with a rack is fixed to the other end of the guided shaft 1052, and the guide groove 1060a controls the moving direction of the guided member 1050 with the rack. You can be guided.

  When the right moving member 1038 moves forward from the initial position, the guided member 1050 with the rack is guided by the guide groove 1060a, and moves upward along the front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d. As a result, the spur gear 1056 meshed with the rack of the rack portion 1050b of the guided member 1050 with a rack rotates, and the rotating disk 1014b of the inner decorative portion 1014 provided with the gear portion 1014b1 meshed with the spur gear 1056. Rotates. The movable portions 1010a to 1010j operate in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating disk 1014b. The operation principle will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A photo sensor 1062 is fixed to the mounting member 1022 with screws. The photo sensor 1062 is used to detect the position of the lens movable body 1002a. The photo sensor 1062 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photo sensor 1062 has a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that are arranged to face each other in the up-down direction with a space portion interposed therebetween.

  Further, a light-shielding piece 1058a formed of, for example, a black resin material is provided on the attachment member 1058 fixed to the right-side moving member 1038 that operates integrally with the lens movable body 1002a. Note that the entire mounting member 1058 may be integrally formed of a black resin material. When the lens movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position starting from the base portion 1002b, the light shielding piece 1058a enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the photo sensor 1062. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 1062 detects the presence or absence of the light shielding piece 1058a that moves integrally with the lens movable body 1002a, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether the photo sensor 1062 detects the presence of the light shielding piece 1058a when the photo sensor 1062 detects the light shielding piece 1058a. It is determined that the movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position, and when the photo sensor 1062 does not detect the light shielding piece, it is determined that the lens movable body 1002a is located at a position other than the rearmost position.

  A substrate 1064 is fixed to the left side surface of the left base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b with screws. The motor 1020, the LED board (not shown) provided in the inner decoration portion 1014, and the photosensor 1062 are connected to the board 1064 by wiring (not shown). The motor 1020 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 via the board 1064, the LED board is connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 shown in FIG. 4 via the board 1064, and the photo sensor 1062 is connected via the board 1064. Connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. Thus, the wiring connecting the upper front decoration accessory 1000 and the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 can be integrated.

  The upper front movable body 1002 having the lens movable body 1002a and the base portion 1002b is attached to the upper front movable body base portion 1008. The upper front movable base 1008 is integrally formed of metal and has a left base 1008a and an upper base 1008b. The left base 1008a extends in the up-down direction and is disposed on the left of the base 1002b. The upper base 1008b extends rightward from the upper end of the left base 1008a. The upper base 1008b is arranged above the base 1002b.

  Also, a cylindrical metal guide rod 1066 extending in the vertical direction is attached to the left base 1008a. An upper end fixing portion 1008a1 is provided at an upper end of the left base portion 1008a, and a lower end fixing portion 1008a2 is provided at a lower end of the left base portion 1008a. The upper end of the guide rod 1066 is fixed to the upper end fixing part 1008a1, and the lower end of the guide rod 1066 is fixed to the lower end fixing part 1008a2. The lower end fixing portion 1008a2 functions as a mechanical end of the upper front movable body 1002.

  On the left side surface of the left base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b, for example, a decorative member 1068 with a guided portion molded of a transparent resin material is fixed with screws. A guided portion 1068a is provided above the decorative member 1068 with a guided portion, and the guided portion 1068a is slidably attached to the guide rod 1066. The upper front movable body 1002 is driven by a vertical drive unit 1006 described below, and is guided by a guide rod 1066 so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

  The upper front movable body base 1008 to which the upper front movable body 1002 is attached is fixed to the upper accessory base 850 with screws as shown in FIG. The upper accessory base 850 is used to attach the upper front decoration accessory 1000 and an upper rear decoration accessory 1100 described later to the unit main body 822. The upper accessory base 850 is integrally formed of, for example, a resin material, and has a right base 850a, a center base 850b, and a left base 850c. Specifically, the left base 1008a of the upper front movable base 1008 is fixed to the right end of the left base 850c of the upper accessory base 850 with screws, and the upper base 1008b of the upper front movable base 1008 is It is fixed to the left side of the upper end of the right base 850a of the accessory base 850 with a screw.

  Next, the vertical drive unit 1006 will be described with reference to FIGS. The vertical drive unit 1006 is used to move the upper front movable body 1002 in the vertical direction. The vertical drive unit 1006 has a motor 1070, a spur gear 1072, a power transmission unit 1074, an outer rail 1078, an upper photo sensor 1084, and a lower photo sensor 1086, as shown in FIG. It has a rack mounting member 1076, an inner rail 1080, and tension coil springs 1082r and 1082l.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the motor 1070, the spur gear 1072, the power transmission unit 1074, the outer rail 1078, the upper photo sensor 1084, and the lower photo sensor 1086 are attached to the right base 850a of the upper accessory base 850.

  The motor 1070 is a drive source for performing the vertical movement of the upper front movable body 1002. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1070. The motor 1070 has a rotating shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a spur gear 1072 fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1070 is arranged behind the motor 1070. The spur gear 1072 is rotatably attached to the right base 850a.

  The power transmission unit 1074 is used to convert the rotational motion of the motor 1070 into a linear motion and transmit the linear motion to the upper front movable body 1002. The power transmission unit 1074 includes a rack 1074a, a guided member 1074b, a rack cover 1074c, and spur gears 1074d1 to 1074d3. The rack 1074a is formed of a resin material, has an elongated shape, and has flexibility that can be bent. The rack 1074a has a core wire (not shown) extending in the length direction embedded therein to obtain a required strength. In the present embodiment, the rack 1074a is used by being bent so as to draw an upwardly convex arc-shaped curve. The same-shaped teeth are carved at the same pitch inside the rack 1074a bent so as to be convex upward, and the rack 1074a is meshed with the spur gear 1072.

  A guided member 1074b formed of, for example, a resin material and provided with a rack having the same shape and the same pitch as the rack 1074a is attached to the lower right end of the rack 1074a. The guided member 1074b and the rack 1074a are engaged with each other, and the rack 1074a and the guided member 1074b operate integrally.

  The rack cover 1074c is molded of, for example, a resin material, and has a shape in which the character “shi” is inverted up, down, left, and right when viewed from the front. A guide groove (not shown) extending along the shape of the rack cover 1074c is provided on the rear side (middle side) of the rack cover 1074c, and the rack 1074a and the guided member 1074b are accommodated in the guide groove. I have. The guided member 1074b is movably arranged while being guided by the guide groove. The rack 1074a is movable along the shape of the rack cover 1074c in conjunction with the guided member 1074b. The rack cover 1074c is fixed to the right base 850a with screws, and covers the rack 1074a and the guided member 1074b so as not to come off from the right base 850a.

  The spur gears 1074d1, 1074d2, and 1074d3 are rotatably attached to the right base 850a, and are covered by the rack cover 1074c. The spur gears 1074d1, 1074d2, and 1074d3 are arranged along guide grooves in the rack cover 1074c, and are meshed with the rack 1074a. The spur gears 1074d1, 1074d2, and 1074d3 are used to allow the rack 1074a to move smoothly along the guide grooves. A roller may be used to allow the rack 1074a to move smoothly along the guide groove in the rack cover 1074c.

  The lower left end of the rack 1074a is exposed from the rack cover 1074c, and is fixed to the right side surface of the right base portion 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b by a rack mounting member 1076 shown in FIG. Thus, the power transmission unit 1074 converts the rotational motion of the motor 1070 transmitted via the spur gear 1072 into linear motion by the rack 1074a, and transmits the linear motion to the base unit 1002b of the upper front movable body 1002.

  As shown in FIG. 22, a metal outer rail 1078 extending in the vertical direction is fixed to the left end of the right base 850a with a screw. As shown in FIG. 21, a metal inner rail 1080 extending in the vertical direction is fixed to the rear surface of the right base 1002b3 of the base 1002b with screws. Inner rail 1080 is mounted inside outer rail 1078 movably along outer rail 1078. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are arranged on the rail contact surface between the outer rail 1078 and the inner rail 1080 so that the friction between the rails is reduced and the inner rail 1080 can slide smoothly. The outer rail 1078 and the inner rail 1080 are used to guide the upper front movable body 1002 in the vertical direction. The upper and lower ends of the outer rail 1078 function as mechanical ends of the upper front movable body 1002.

  As described above, the upper front movable body 1002 converts the rotational motion of the motor 1070 into a linear motion via the spur gear 1072 and the rack 1074a and transmits the linear motion, and is guided by the guide rod 1066, the outer rail 1078, and the inner rail 1080. Thus, a linear motion in the vertical direction is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the tension coil spring 1082r has an upper end fixed to the upper base 1008b of the upper front movable base 1008 so that it can expand and contract in the up-down direction, and a lower end to the right base 1002b3 of the base 1002b. It is fixed to the back side of. Similarly, the tension coil spring 1082l has an upper end fixed to the upper base 1008b of the upper front movable base 1008 and a lower end fixed to the rear side of the left base 1002b4 of the base 1002b so that it can expand and contract in the vertical direction. You.

  The extension coil springs 1082r and 1082l have a natural length when the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position (initial position), and have a natural length when the upper front movable body 1002 is located below the initial position. It will be longer than the length. The tension coil springs 1082r and 1082l use the restoring force to assist the power of the motor 1070 for returning the upper front movable body 1002 to the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 22, an upper photosensor 1084 and a lower photosensor 1086 are fixed to the right base 850a on the right side of the outer rail 1078 with screws. The upper photo sensor 1084 is arranged so that the upper end of the outer rail 1078 is substantially the same in the vertical direction, and the lower photo sensor 1086 is arranged so that the lower end of the outer rail 1078 is substantially the same in the vertical direction. . The upper photo sensor 1084 and the lower photo sensor 1086 are used to detect the position of the upper front movable body 1002. The upper photo sensor 1084 and the lower photo sensor 1086 are included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG.

  The upper photosensor 1084 and the lower photosensor 1086 have a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction with a space part interposed therebetween. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a light-shielding piece (not shown) formed of a light-impermeable member is provided on a mounting member 1022 fixed to the base portion 1002b of the upper front movable body 1002. When the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position (initial position), the light shielding piece enters between the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit of the upper photo sensor 1084, and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position. When it is located at the position, the light shielding piece enters between the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit of the lower photosensor 1086. In this embodiment, the position of the upper front movable body 1002 is detected by the upper photo sensor 1084 and the lower photo sensor 1086. When the upper photo sensor 1084 detects the light shielding piece provided on the mounting member 1022, the first sub control unit 400 determines that the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, and the lower photo sensor 1086 When the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position.

  The board 1088 is fixed to the right base 850a with screws. The motor 1070, the upper photo sensor 1084, and the lower photo sensor 1086 are connected to the substrate 1088 by wiring (not shown). The motor 1070 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 via the substrate 1088, and the upper photosensor 1084 and the lower photosensor 1086 are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The wiring that connects the board 1088 to the first sub-controller 400 or the second sub-controller 500 is housed in a wiring cover 850a1 that is fixed to the right base 850a with a screw on the rear side of the right end. Thus, the wiring connecting the upper front decoration accessory 1000 and the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 can be integrated.

  Next, operations of the lens movable body 1002a and the movable parts 1010a to 1010j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 shows a state in which the upper front movable body 1002 is viewed from the upper right front to the lower left rear. In FIG. 23, the upper front movable body 1002 is disassembled into a lens movable body 1002a and a base part 1002b, and the lens movable body 1002a is further exploded into an outer decorative part 1012 and an inner decorative part 1014. Also, in FIG. 23, the movable portion 1010a and the movable portion support portion 1014e are shown detached from the inner decorative portion 1014. In FIG. 23, the operation principle of the movable parts 1010a to 1010j will be described using the movable part 1010a and the movable part support 1014e as an example.

  FIG. 23A shows a state where the lens movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position in the movement range. The lens movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position in the initial state. The lens movable body 1002a is driven by the front / rear drive unit 1004, and can move forward from the rearmost position. Further, the movable parts 1010a to 1010j can move in conjunction with the movement of the lens movable body 1002a. When the lens movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position, the movable parts 1010a to 1010j are located at the initial positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23A, when the lens movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position, the front part of the rack portion 1038a of the right-side moving member 1038 meshes with the spur gear 1024. Similarly, the front portion of the rack portion 1044a of the left moving member 1044 is engaged with the spur gear 1032. The guided member 1050 with the rack is located at the lowermost end, and the upper part of the rack portion 1050b is engaged with the spur gear 1056. The lower end portions of the guide hole portion 1014b2 of the rotating disk 1014b and the long hole portion 1014c1 of the long holed disk 1014c overlap in the front-rear direction. When the movable portion 1010a is located at the initial position, the guided portion 1014e2 of the movable portion support portion 1014e is located at the lower end of the guide hole portion 1014b2 of the rotating disk 1014b and the lower end of the long hole portion 1014c1 of the elongated disk 1014c. It comes into contact.

  FIG. 23B illustrates a state where the lens movable body 1002a has moved to the forefront position in the movement range. The lens movable body 1002a is configured so that the rotational movement of the motor 1020 is converted into a linear movement and transmitted, so that the lens movable body 1002a can linearly move in the front-rear direction.

  Specifically, the motor 1020 is driven, and the rotating shaft of the motor 1020 and the spur gear 1024 fixed to the rotating shaft rotate clockwise as viewed from right to left. As a result, the right moving member 1038 having the rack portion 1038a meshed with the spur gear 1024 is guided by the right guide bar 1034 and moves forward. Further, the spur gear 1028 meshed with the spur gear 1024, the shaft 1026 and the spur gear 1030 rotate counterclockwise. A spur gear 1032 meshes with the spur gear 1030, and a rack portion 1044 a of the left moving member 1044 meshes with the spur gear 1032. Therefore, the left moving member 1044 is guided by the left guide bar 1040 and moves forward.

  The right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 move forward at the same speed in parallel with each other. Further, a lens movable body 1002a is fixed to the front end of the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044. For this reason, the lens movable body 1002a can move forward in conjunction with the forward movement of the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044.

  Also, with the rightward moving member 1038 moving forward, the racked guided member 1050 attached to the rightward moving member 1038 moves upward while moving forward. Specifically, the slide bearing 1054 attached to the guided member with rack 1050 via the guided shaft 1052 is guided by the guide groove 1060a of the decorative member with guide groove 1060 and moves. Since the decorative member with guide groove 1060 is fixed to the base portion 1002b, it does not move without interlocking with the movement of the lens movable body 1002a in the front-rear direction. The guide groove 1060a extends obliquely from the lower rear to the upper front. Therefore, the sliding bearing 1054 moves upward while being guided by the guide groove 1060a. Along with this moving operation, the guided member 1050 with the rack moves upward along the front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d provided in the right moving member 1038 and extending in the front-rear direction. When the guided member with rack 1050 moves upward, the spur gear 1056 meshed with the rack portion 1050b of the guided member with rack 1050 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from right to left. Thus, the rotating disk 1014b including the gear portion 1014b1 meshed with the spur gear 1056 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front.

  In conjunction with the clockwise rotation of the rotating disk 1014b, the movable parts 1010a to 1010j move linearly toward the outer periphery of the inner decorative part 1014. Next, the operation principle of the movable units 1010a to 1010j will be described using the movable unit 1010a as an example. The movable section 1010a is fixed to the movable section support section 1014e as described above.

  Due to the clockwise rotation of the rotating disk 1014b, the guide hole 1014b2 of the rotating unit 1010b moves clockwise. Guided by the guide hole 1014b2 extending obliquely from the upper left to the lower right with respect to the virtual circumference passing through the middle between the inner edge and the outer edge of the rotating disk 1014b, the guided portion 1014e2 is guided by the guide hole 1014b2. Move from bottom right to top left. At this time, the movable portion supporting portion 1014e is provided on the disk 1014c with a long hole which is fixed to the outer decoration portion 1012 and does not rotate, and extends along the long hole 1014c1 extending in the radial direction on the outer periphery of the disk 1014c with the long hole. The inner decorative portion 1014 moves from the inner peripheral side to the outer peripheral side. As a result, the movable portion 1010a fixed to the movable portion support portion 1014e moves from the inner peripheral side to the outer peripheral side of the inner decorative portion 1014. As described above, in conjunction with the clockwise rotation of the rotating disk 1014b, the movable portion support 1014e linearly moves toward the outer periphery.

  Similarly, the movable portions 1010b to 1010j move from the inner peripheral side to the outer peripheral side of the inner decorative portion 1014 in conjunction with the clockwise rotation of the rotating disk 1014b. As described above, in conjunction with the forward movement of the lens movable body 1002a, an opening operation in which the front decorative portion 1010 opens an umbrella can be performed. The operation principle of the front decorative portion 1010 is the same as the operation principle of the movable body 1425 shown in FIG. 30 and described later.

  Naturally, the lens movable body 1002a can move backward from the position shown in FIG. 23B to the position shown in FIG. In this case, the motor 1020 and the spur gears 1024, 1028, 1030, and 1032 rotate in a reverse direction to the case where the lens movable body 1002a moves forward, and the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 move rearward. Further, the guided member 1050 with the rack moves downward, and the spur gear 1056 and the rotating disk 1014b rotate in a direction opposite to the case where the lens movable body 1002a moves forward. Thereby, the movable parts 1010a to 1010j return to the initial position.

  Next, the vertical movement of the upper front movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is an external view of the upper front decoration accessory 1000 as viewed from the front side. The upper front movable body 1002 is driven by an up / down drive unit 1006 and is capable of moving in the up / down direction. Further, as described above, the lens movable body 1002a is included in the upper front movable body 1002.

  FIG. 24A shows a state where the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position (upper position). The initial position of the upper front movable body 1002 is the uppermost position in the moving range of the upper front movable body 1002.

  FIG. 24B shows a state in which the upper front movable body 1002 has moved to an intermediate position between the uppermost position and the lowermost position. When the upper front movable body 1002 moves downward, the rotation axis of the motor 1070 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side. As a result, the spur gear 1072 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1070 rotates counterclockwise, the lower right end of the rack 1074a meshed with the spur gear 1072 rises, and the lower left end falls. At this time, the rack 1074a includes a part that is guided and moved linearly and a part that is guided and moved in an arc shape. Since the lower left end of the rack 1074a is fixed to the upper front movable body 1002, the upper front movable body 1002 is guided downward by the guide rod 1066, the outer rail 1078, and the inner rail 1080 in conjunction with the operation of the rack 1074a. Moving.

  FIG. 24C shows a state where the upper front movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. The lower end fixing portion 1008a2 for fixing the guide rod 1066 functions as a mechanical end, and the upper front movable body 1002 is stopped.

  Further, naturally, the upper front movable body 1002 can move upward from the lowermost position shown in FIG. 24C to the uppermost position (initial position) shown in FIG. When the upper front movable body 1002 moves upward, the rotating shaft and the spur gear of the motor 1070 rotate clockwise as viewed from the front side, so that the lower right end of the rack 1074a descends and the lower left end rises. In conjunction with this, the upper front movable body 1002 moves upward while being guided by the guide rod 1066, the outer rail 1078, and the inner rail 1080. When the upper front movable body 1002 moves upward, the upper end of the outer rail 1078 functions as a mechanical end.

  Next, operations of the upper front movable body 1002 and the lens movable body 1002a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is an external view of the upper front decoration accessory 1000 as viewed from the front side.

  In order to avoid contact with the above-described logo movable body 902, the lens movable body 1002a moves in the front-rear direction when the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position. It is designed to move. FIG. 25 shows a state in which the lens movable body 1002a has moved forward similarly to the state shown in FIG. As described above, as the lens movable body 1002a moves forward, the movable parts 1010a to 1010j of the front decorative part 1010 move in the outer peripheral direction of the lens movable body 1002a, and the front decorative part 1010 is opened. Thereby, it is possible to show the player that the lens movable body 1002a is enlarged.

  In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used for the motors 1020 and 1070, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used.

  In the present embodiment, a motor is used as a drive source of the lens movable body 1002a and the upper front movable body 1002, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various actuators such as solenoids may be used as driving sources of the lens movable body 1002a and the upper front movable body 1002.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a convex lens (biconvex lens) is used as the lens 1018, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various lenses such as a plano-convex lens, a positive meniscus lens, a concave lens (a biconcave lens), a plano-concave lens, and a negative meniscus lens can be used.

  Further, a transparent resin plate (for example, an acrylic plate) or a glass plate may be provided instead of the lens 1018.

  Further, instead of the tension coil springs 1082r and 1082l, an elastic member such as a spiral spring, a plate spring, or rubber may be used.

  Further, the upper front movable body 1002 may include a sub display device smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208. Other displays including a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector include a sub-display device. Devices can be used. Further, the sub-display device may be controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500, and may be controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500. A separate display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  Next, the positional relationship between the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable body 1002 will be described using FIG. 19 and FIG. When the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. 19A, the area occupied by the logo movable body 902 is the first area, and is located at the uppermost position shown in FIG. In this case, the area occupied by the logo movable body 902 is defined as a third area. When the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. 24A, the area occupied by the upper front movable body 1002 is a second area, and is located at the lowermost position shown in FIG. In this case, the area occupied by the upper front movable body 1002 is referred to as a fourth area. Further, the area occupied by the lens movable body 1002a when the lens movable body 1002a moves forward and the upper front movable body 1002 moves forward is also included in the fourth area. The fourth area is an area including at least a part of the first area. In this manner, the upper front movable body 1002 can move to the area where the logo movable body 902 was located at the initial position. Thus, the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable body 1002 can perform various operations in association with each other.

  When the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the upper front movable body 1002 is located behind the logo movable body 902, and the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable body are located. The body 1002 overlaps in the front-back direction.

  When the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the fourth area occupied by the upper front movable body 1002 overlaps the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction.

  When the area occupied by the logo movable body 902 is the fifth area when the logo movable body 902 is located at the lowermost position shown in FIG. 19C, at least a part of the fifth area is This includes an area in front of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fifth region includes at least a part of the fourth region.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 may include a sub-display device smaller than the decorative design display device 208. The sub display device may be fixed to the game board 200. Other displays including a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector include a sub-display device. Devices can be used. Further, the sub-display device may be controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500, and may be controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500. A separate display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  The sub display device may be arranged behind the third area occupied by the logo movable body 902. In other words, the third area is an area including at least a part of the area that is ahead of the display area of the sub display device. As a result, since the sub-display device exists at the destination of the upward movement of the logo movable body 902, the upward movement of the logo movable body 902 may be naturally noticed.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may be arranged behind the upper front movable body 1002. In this case, the upper front movable body 1002 may be movable backward.

  Further, the upper front movable body 1002 may be movable upward from the initial position.

  Next, the upper decorative accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. 22 and FIGS. First, the configuration of the upper rear decoration accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 22. FIG. 26 and FIG. 22 are exploded perspective views of the upper decoration accessory 1100. 26 and 22 show a state in which the upper rear decorative accessory 1100 is viewed from the upper right front to the lower left rear. FIG. 22 shows a part of the upper front decoration accessory 1000 described above.

  As shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 22, the upper rear decoration accessory 1100 is roughly composed of an upper rear movable body 1102 and a vertical drive unit 1104.

  First, the upper rear movable body 1102 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 is viewed from the upper right front to the lower left rear. The upper rear movable body 1102 has a front cover 1102a, a rotatable movable section 1102b, a base section 1102c, and a rotary drive section 1102d.

  The front cover 1102a is disposed at the forefront of the upper rear decorative accessory 1100. The front cover is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and has a circular opening 1102a1 in the center.

  A rotatable movable portion 1102b is disposed behind the front cover 1102a. The rotatable movable portion 1102b includes a rotating member with gear 1110, a first gear member 1114, a second gear member 1116, a rotation decoration support member 1118, a metal rod 1120, 1128, 1132, a spur gear 1122, 1130, 1134, and a rotation decoration portion 1124. , A frame member 1126, a light shielding piece 1136, and a lens member 1138.

  First, the function of the rotatable movable portion 1102b will be briefly described. The rotatable movable portion 1102b is used to produce a game by rotating the rotatable decorative portion 1124. The rotating member with gear 1110 is rotatably accommodated in the front cover 1102a. A gear portion 1110b is provided on the outer periphery of the rotating member with gear 1110. Further, a spur gear 1142 fixed to a rotation shaft of a motor 1140 fixed to the base 1102c is meshed with the gear 1110b. Therefore, when the rotation shaft of the motor 1140 rotates clockwise, the spur gear 1142 rotates clockwise, and the rotating member with gear 1110 rotates counterclockwise.

  A first gear member 1114 and a second gear member 1116 are fixed to the rear inside of the rotating member 1110 with gears. A metal bar 1120 is attached to the first gear member 1114, and a spur gear 1122 is fixed to one end of the metal bar 1120. When the first gear member 1114 rotates together with the rotating member with gear 1110, the spur gear 1122 rotationally moves along the gear portion 1102c2 of the base portion 1102c. The spur gear 1122 and the gear portion 1102c2 mesh with each other, and the spur gear 1122 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 as a rotation axis while rotating. Further, since one end of the metal bar 1120 is fixed to the spur gear 1122, the metal bar 1120 rotates with the rotation of the spur gear 1122.

  A rotary decoration support member 1118 is disposed in a substantially hemispherical internal space 1115 (see FIG. 27) surrounded by the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116. Since the other end of the metal bar 1120 is fixed to the rotation decoration support member 1118, the rotation decoration support member 1118 rotates with the rotation of the metal rod 1120.

  Further, metal rods 1128 and 1132 are attached to the rotation decoration support member 1118. Spur gears 1130 and 1132 are fixed to one end of the metal rods 1128 and 1132, and a rotary decoration 1124 is fixed to the other end. With the rotation of the rotation decoration support member 1118, the spur gear 1130 rotates and moves along the first gear 1114e, and the spur gear 1134 rotates and moves along the second gear 1116e. Spur gear 1130 meshes with first gear 1114e, and spur gear 1134 meshes with second gear 1116e. Therefore, the spur gear 1130 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1128 while rotating, and the spur gear 1134 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1132 while rotating. Accordingly, the metal rods 1128 and 1132 rotate, and the rotation decoration portion 1124 rotates with the rotation of the metal rods 1128 and 1132.

  The rotation decoration unit 1124 can perform a complicated rotation operation in a three-dimensional space by driving the motor 1140.

  First, the rotation decoration part 1124 rotates around the center between both supporting ends (between the metal rods 1128 and 1132) of the rotation axis (coinciding with the rotation axis of the metal rod 1120) of the rotation decoration support member 1118. Hereinafter, it is possible to rotate around an axis passing through the rotation center and parallel to the front-rear direction (hereinafter, referred to as “front-rear axis”). When the motor 1140 is driven, the rotation member 1110 with a gear rotates around the front-rear axis with the center of the opening 1110a as the center of rotation (coinciding with the rotation center of the rotary decoration portion 1124 when viewed in the front-rear direction). The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 fixed to the member 1110 also rotate around the longitudinal axis. As a result, the rotary decoration 1124 housed inside the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 rotates around the front-rear axis.

  Second, the rotary decoration 1124 can rotate around an axis (hereinafter, referred to as a “left-right axis”) that passes through the rotation center of the rotary decoration 1124 and is parallel to the left-right direction. The rotation axis of the metal rod 1120 is orthogonal to the front-rear direction. Therefore, after rotating the geared rotating member 1110 around the longitudinal axis to adjust the rotating axis of the metal rod 1120 to be parallel in the left-right direction, the geared rotating member 1110 is restrained from rotating around the longitudinal axis. Then, when the motor 1140 is driven, the base 1102c to which the motor 1140 is attached rotates around the longitudinal axis, and the gear 1102c2 of the base 1102c rotates around the longitudinal axis. The rotation of the spur gear 1122 meshing with the gear portion 1102c2 rotates the metal bar 1120 around the left and right axis, and the rotary decoration support member 1118 connected to the metal bar 1120 rotates around the left and right axis. Thereby, the rotation decoration part 1124 can rotate around the left-right axis.

  Third, the rotating decoration unit 1124 can rotate around an axis that passes through the center of rotation of the rotating decoration unit 1124 and that is parallel to the vertical direction (hereinafter, referred to as “vertical axis”). The extending direction of the metal bars 1128 and 1132 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the metal bar 1120. That is, the rotation axis of the rotation decoration support member 1118 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the metal bar 1120. Therefore, in the state where the rotary decoration portion 1124 is rotated around the left and right axis as described above, the base portion 1102c is rotated at a predetermined rotation speed around the left and right axis, and the extending direction of the metal rods 1128 and 1132 is set in the vertical direction. If it is adjusted so as to be parallel to the vertical axis, the rotary decorative portion 1124 can be rotated around the vertical axis.

  As described above, the rotary decoration unit 1124 can simultaneously perform a rotation operation around three orthogonal coordinate axes in the three-dimensional orthogonal coordinate system with the rotation center of the rotary decoration unit 1124 as the origin.

  The rotating member with gear 1110 is arranged inside the front cover 1102a. The rotating member with gear 1110 has a circular shallow container shape, is arranged so that the bottom surface faces forward, and has a substantially circular opening 1110a in the center of the bottom surface. The opening 1110a is smaller than the opening 1102a1 of the front cover 1102a, and is arranged so as to overlap the opening 1102a1 in the front-rear direction.

  Inside the front cover 1102a, a concave portion (not shown) capable of accommodating the rotating member with gear 1110 is provided, and the rotating member with gear 1110 is arranged in the concave portion. The rotating member with gear 1110 is attached to the front cover 1102a so as to be rotatable around a virtual straight line passing in the front-rear direction through the center of the opening 1110a.

  The four rollers 1112a to 1112d are used for attaching the rotating member with gear 1110 to the front cover 1102a. The rollers 1112a to 1112d are formed of, for example, a resin material and have a circular shape, and are rotatably attached to the four corners on the rear side of the front cover 1102a with screws with washers. The rotation axis of the rollers 1112a to 1112d is parallel to the rotation axis of the geared rotation member 1110. The rollers 1112a to 1112d are in contact with the rear edge of the rotating member with gear 1110 to prevent the rotating member with gear 1110 from being detached from the front cover 1102a.

  On the outer surface of the geared rotating member 1110, there is provided a gear portion 1110b in which teeth of the same shape are carved at the same pitch and arranged circumferentially. The teeth of the gear portion 1110b are parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation member 1110 with gears.

  Further, a first gear member 1114 and a second gear member 1116 are disposed inside the rotating member with gear 1110.

  The first gear member 1114 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a fixing portion 1114a, positioning portions 1114b, 1114c, a side surface portion 1114d, and a first gear portion 1114e. The fixing portion 1114a is arranged on the front side of the first gear member 1114. The positioning parts 1114b and 1114c are arranged on the rear side of the fixing part 1114a. The side surface portion 1114d extends rearward from the fixing portion 1114a, and has a curved shape that is convex rightward in FIG. Further, a circular through-hole (not shown) is provided in the side surface portion 1114d, and the first gear portion 1114e in which teeth of the same shape are formed at the same pitch in an arc shape centering on the through-hole is provided on the side surface portion 1114d. It is arranged on the inner side edge of. The first gear portion 1114e is formed such that the tooth tip faces in a direction opposite to the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1114d. The center of the pitch circle of the first gear portion 1114e is the center of the through hole. The central angle of the arc-shaped first gear portion 1114e is about 210 degrees.

  The second gear member 1116 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a fixed portion 1116a, positioning portions 1116b and 1116c, a side surface portion 1116d, and a second gear portion 1116e. The fixing portion 1116a is arranged on the front side of the second gear member 1116. The positioning parts 1116b and 1116c are arranged on the rear side of the fixing part 1116a. The side surface portion 1116d extends rearward from the fixing portion 1116a, and has a curved shape that is convex to the left in FIG. Further, a circular through hole (not shown) is provided in the side surface portion 1116d, and a second gear portion 1116e in which teeth having the same shape are formed at the same pitch in an arc shape centering on the through hole is provided on the side surface portion 1116d. Is located at the inner end. The second gear portion 1116e is formed such that the tooth tip faces in the opposite direction to the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1116d. The center of the pitch circle of the second gear 1116e is the center of the through hole. The central angle of the second gear portion 1116e is about 210 degrees. The second gear portion 1116e has the same number of teeth as the first gear portion 1114e, and has a longer pitch circle radius than the first gear portion 1114e.

  In addition, the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 are configured such that the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1114d and the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1116d face in opposite directions, in other words, the first gear portion 1114e. The tooth tips and the tooth tip of the second gear portion 1116e are arranged to face each other so as to face each other. The positioning portion 1114b of the first gear member 1114 is arranged to face the positioning portion 1116b of the second gear member 1116, and the positioning portion 1114c of the first gear member 1114 is arranged to face the positioning portion 1116c of the second gear member 1116. Is done. The distal end portions of the positioning portion 1114b of the first gear member 1114 and the positioning portion 1116b of the second gear member 1116 contact each other, and are fixed to each other with screws. Similarly, the distal end portions of the positioning portion 1114c of the first gear member 1114 and the positioning portion 1116c of the second gear member 1116 are in contact with each other and are fixed to each other with screws.

  Thereby, the relative position between the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 is determined. A substantially hemispherical internal space 1115 (see FIG. 27) is formed so as to be surrounded by the side surface portion 1114d of the first gear member 1114 and the side surface portion 1114d of the second gear member 1116. The inner space 1115 has an open front surface, and the outline shape of the open end of the inner space 1115 is defined by the shapes of the inner ends of the fixed portion 1114a and the fixed portion 1116a. It becomes the same as the shape.

  The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 attached to each other are arranged in the same plane where the front surface of the fixing portion 1114a and the front surface of the fixing portion 1116a of the second gear member 1116 are orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The fixing portion 1114a and the fixing portion 1116a are fixed to the geared rotating member 1110 with screws so that the opening end of the internal space 1115 and the opening 1110a of the geared rotating member 1110 coincide. The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 are configured to rotate integrally with the rotating member with gear 1110. The first gear portion 1114e and the second gear portion 1116e are arranged such that the teeth are arranged rearward from the opening end of the internal space 1115. The first gear portion 1114e and the second gear portion 1116e are arranged in a concentric arc shape with a predetermined gap, and the center angle of the arc is approximately 210 degrees.

  In the internal space 1115 between the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116, a rotation decoration support member 1118 is arranged. The rotary decoration support member 1118 has a pair of bases 1118a and a cover 1118b which are molded from a transparent resin material and have an annular shape. The cover 1118b is fixed to the front side of the base 1118a with screws.

  Further, the base 1118a is provided with a columnar mounting portion 1118a1 extending outward from the outer end side. The attachment portion 1118a1 is fitted in the above-described circular through hole provided in the side surface portion 1116d of the second gear member 1116. An imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the mounting portion 1118a1 passes through the center of the annular base 1118a.

  Further, the metal rod 1120 penetrates the above-described circular through hole provided in the side surface 1114d of the first gear member 1114, and one end of the metal rod 1120 is exposed to the outside of the internal space 1115 from the side surface 1114d. are doing. A spur gear 1122 is fixed to one end of the metal bar 1120 exposed from the internal space 1115. The rotation axis of the spur gear 1122 is a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1120.

  The other end of the metal bar 1120 is arranged in the internal space 1115 and fixed to the base 1118a of the rotary decoration support member 1118. The metal bar 1120 is fixed to the opposite side of the mounting portion 1118a1, and the virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1120 passes through the center of the annular base 1118a and coincides with the virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the mounting portion 1118a1. . The rotary decoration support member 1118 is supported by the mounting portion 1118a1 and the metal bar 1120, and is rotatable around a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1120 in conjunction with the rotation of the spur gear 1122.

  Further, inside the rotary decoration support member 1118, a rotary decoration portion 1124 molded in a hemispherical shape with, for example, a transparent resin material is disposed. The rotary decorative portion 1124 has a curved surface at the front and a flat surface at the rear. A predetermined decoration is given to the front part and the rear part of the rotary decoration part 1124. In addition, a frame member 1126 formed of, for example, a transparent resin material and formed into an annular shape having substantially the same diameter as the rotary decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the rear end portion of the rotary decoration portion 1124 with screws.

  Two through holes (not shown) are provided in the base 1118a of the rotary decoration support member 1118. A metal rod 1128 is arranged in one circular through hole (not shown) of the base 1118a. The virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1128 is orthogonal to the virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1120. One end of the metal rod 1128 is exposed to the outside of the rotation decoration support member 1118, and the spur gear 1130 is fixed. The rotation axis of the spur gear 1130 is a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1128. The other end of the metal bar 1128 is arranged inside the rotation decoration support member 1118, and the rotation decoration part 1124 is fixed. The length of a line segment from the spur gear 1130 extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 to the center of the rotary decoration 1124 is substantially equal to the pitch circle radius of the first gear 1114e. Therefore, the spur gear 1130 can mesh with the first gear portion 1114e of the first gear member 1114. In other words, the first gear portion 1114e is formed along the movement locus of the spur gear 1130.

  A metal rod 1132 is disposed in the other circular through hole (not shown) of the base 1118a. The virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1132 coincides with the virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1128, and is orthogonal to the virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1120. One end of the metal rod 1132 is exposed to the outside of the rotary decoration support member 1118, and the spur gear 1134 is fixed. The rotation axis of the spur gear 1134 is a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132. The other end of the metal bar 1132 is arranged inside the rotation decoration support member 1118, and the rotation decoration part 1124 is fixed. The length of a line segment from the spur gear 1134 extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132 to the center of the rotary decoration portion 1124 is substantially equal to the pitch circle radius of the second gear portion 1116e. Therefore, the spur gear 1134 can mesh with the second gear portion 1116e of the second gear member 1116. In other words, the second gear portion 1116e is formed along the movement locus of the spur gear 1134.

  The rotary decoration 1124 is supported by the metal bars 1128 and 1132, and is rotatable around a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bars 1128 and 1132. Further, the spur gear 1130 and the spur gear 1134 have the same pitch radius, the same shape, and the same number of teeth.

  Further, on the rear side of the first gear member 1114, a light shielding piece 1136 molded of, for example, a black resin material is fixed with a screw. The light shielding piece 1136 can be detected by an upper photosensor 1144 and a lower photosensor 1146 described later.

  In addition, a lens member 1138 is disposed at the rear end of the rotatable movable portion 1102b. The lens member 1138 has a circular convex lens disposed at the center, and is fixed to the rear side of the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 with a screw.

  A base portion 1102c is arranged behind the rotatable movable portion 1102b. The rotatable movable portion 1102b is attached to the front cover 1102a, and the front cover 1102a is fixed to the base 1102c with screws. As a result, the rotatable movable portion 1102b is accommodated in the space surrounded by the front cover 1102a and the base portion 1102c.

  The base portion 1102c is formed of, for example, a resin material and has a contour shape that matches the front cover 1102a. A circular opening 1102c1 is provided at the center of the base 1102c. The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 are housed in the opening 1102c1.

  In addition, a gear 1102c2 is formed on the front surface of the base 1102c. The gear 1102c2 is formed such that teeth formed in the same shape and at the same pitch are circumferentially arranged so that the tooth tips face forward. The gear 1102c2 and the opening 1102c1 are arranged concentrically. The pitch circle radius of the gear portion 1102c2 is equal to the length of an imaginary line segment extending from the center of the rotary decoration portion 1124 to the spur gear 1122 extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120, and the spur gear 1122 and the gear portion 1102c2 Are engaged.

  Further, a light-shielding piece 1102c3 formed of a light-impermeable material such as a black resin material is provided at the upper left end of the base portion 1102c. The light shielding piece 1102c3 can be detected by an upper photosensor 1176 and a lower photosensor 1178 described later. Note that the entire base portion 1102c may be integrally formed of a black resin material or the like.

  Next, the rotation drive unit 1102d will be described. The rotation drive unit 1102d is used to rotationally drive the rotation decoration unit 1124 of the rotation movable unit 1102b. The rotation drive unit 1102d includes a motor 1140, a spur gear 1142, an upper photosensor 1144, and a lower photosensor 1146.

  The motor 1140 is a drive source for executing the rotation drive of the rotary decoration unit 1124. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used as motor 1140. The rotation shaft of the motor 1140 extends in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1140 is formed is formed in the base 1102c. The motor 1140 is fixed to the rear side of the base 1102c with a screw so that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. A spur gear 1142 disposed between the front cover 1102a and the base 1102c is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1140. The spur gear 1142 is meshed with the gear portion 1110b of the rotating member with gear 1110.

  When the motor 1140 is driven and the spur gear 1142 rotates, the geared rotating member 1110 provided with the gear portion 1110b meshed with the spur gear 1142 rotates, and the first gear member fixed to the geared rotating member 1110 1114 and the second gear member 1116 also rotate. When the first gear member 1114 rotates, the spur gear 1122 fixed to one end of the metal bar 1120 rotates along the gear 1102c2 of the base 1102c. Since the spur gear 1122 meshes with the gear 1102c2, the spur gear 1122 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 as a rotation axis while rotating along the gear 1102c2. Thereby, the metal rod 1120 to which one end of the spur gear 1122 is fixed rotates, and the rotary decorative support member 1118 to which the other end of the metal rod 1120 is fixed rotates. Thus, the spur gear 1130 rotates and moves along the first gear 1114e, and the spur gear 1134 rotates and moves along the second gear 1116e. When the spur gear 1130 is exposed from the opening end of the internal space 1115 and does not mesh with the first gear 1114e, the spur gear 1134 meshes with the second gear 1116e. When the spur gear 1134 is exposed from the opening end of the internal space 1115 and is not meshed with the second gear 1116e, the spur gear 1130 meshes with the first gear 1114e. The spur gear 1130 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 as a rotation axis while rotating and moving along the first gear portion 1114e. Similarly, the spur gear 1134 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132 as a rotation axis while rotating and moving along the second gear portion 1116e. The rotation of the spur gear 1130 causes the metal rod 1128 to rotate, and the rotation of the spur gear 1134 causes the metal rod 1132 to rotate. A rotating decoration 1124 is fixed to the other end of the metal bar 1128 and the metal bar 1132, and the rotating decoration 1124 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the metal bar 1128 and the metal bar 1132.

  An upper photosensor 1144 is fixed to the rear upper portion of the base portion 1102c with screws, and a lower photosensor 1146 is fixed to the lower rear portion of the base portion 1102c with screws. The upper photosensor 1144 and the lower photosensor 1146 are used to detect whether the rotary decoration 1124 has its front side (curved surface side) facing forward or its rear side (plane side) facing forward. . The upper photosensor 1144 and the lower photosensor 1146 are included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4 and are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG.

  Each of the upper photosensor 1144 and the lower photosensor 1146 has a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction with a space portion therebetween. The light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the upper photo sensor 1144 and the lower photo sensor 1146 are arranged to be exposed in the opening 1102c1.

  When the rotary decoration portion 1124 is stopped with the front side facing forward, the light shielding piece 1136 enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the upper photo sensor 1144, and the rotary decoration portion 1124 moves rearward on the rear side. When it is directed, the light shielding piece 1136 enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the lower photo sensor 1146. In the present embodiment, the orientation of the rotary decoration 1124 is detected by the upper photo sensor 1144 and the lower photo sensor 1146. When the upper photo sensor 1144 detects the light shielding piece 1136, the first sub control unit 400 determines that the rotary decoration part 1124 has the front side facing forward, and when the lower photo sensor 1146 detects the light shielding piece 1136. Determines that the rotary decoration 1124 has the rear side facing forward.

  A substrate 1148 is fixed to the rear side of the base 1102c with screws. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the board 1148, and the plurality of LEDs are arranged so as to overlap the center of the opening 1102c1 in the front-rear direction. In the upper rear movable body 1102, the plurality of LEDs allow the rotatable movable section 1102b, in particular, the rotatable decorative section 1124 to emit light. The LED on the substrate 1148 is included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 4 and is driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

  In addition, a motor 1140, an upper photosensor 1144, and a lower photosensor 1146 are connected to the substrate 1148 by wiring (not shown). The substrate 1148 is connected to a substrate 852 shown in FIG. 22 and described later by a flexible substrate 1150, and the substrate 852 is connected to a substrate 1180 shown in FIG. The motor 1140 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 via the boards 1148, 852, and 1180, and the LED on the board 1148 is connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 shown in FIG. The upper photosensor 1144 and the lower photosensor 1146 are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. 4 via the substrates 1148, 852, and 1180. Accordingly, the wiring connecting the upper rear decoration accessory 1100 and the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 can be integrated.

  Next, the vertical drive unit 1104 will be described with reference to FIGS. The vertical drive unit 1104 is used to move the upper rear movable body 1102 up and down. The vertical drive unit 1104 has a motor 1152, a spur gear 1154, an outer rail 1170, a tension coil spring 1174, an upper photo sensor 1176, and a lower photo sensor 1178 as shown in FIG. It has a crank mechanism 1155.

  First, a driving source of the vertical driving unit 1104 will be described with reference to FIG. The vertical drive unit 1104 has a motor 1152 as a drive source for executing the movement operation of the upper rear movable body 1102. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1152. The rotation shaft of the motor 1152 extends in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1152 is formed is formed in the left base 850c of the upper accessory base 850. The motor 1152 is fixed to the front side of the left base with screws so that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. In addition, a spur gear 1154 disposed on the rear side of the left base 850c is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1152.

  Next, the crank mechanism 1155 will be described with reference to FIG. The crank mechanism 1155 is used for converting the rotational movement of the motor 1152 transmitted via the spur gear 1154 into a linear movement and transmitting the linear movement to the upper rear movable body 1102. As shown in FIG. 26, the crank mechanism 1155 includes a spur gear 1156, a crank 1158, a metal rod 1160, a slide bearing 1162, and a torsion coil spring 1168. In FIG. 26, the upper accessory base portion 850 is illustrated in a simplified manner as compared with FIG.

  The spur gear 1156 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the left base 850c and to the right of the spur gear 1154, and is meshed with the spur gear 1154. A crank 1158 is arranged behind the spur gear 1156. The crank 1158 is formed of, for example, a resin material, and has a circular through hole at the left end. A cylindrical metal rod 1160 extending in the front-rear direction is disposed in the through-hole. The front end of the metal rod 1160 is fixed to the left base 850c, and the rear end of the metal rod 1160 is fixed to the wiring fixing part 854 shown in FIG. Is done. The wiring fixing portion 854 is used to fix a wiring (not shown) for connecting a substrate 852 and a substrate 1180, which will be described later, so that the wiring does not become entangled with the spur gear 1154 or the crank mechanism 1155.

  The crank 1158 is rotatable within a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction around the metal rod 1160 within a predetermined angle range. The crank 1158 is provided with an oval guide hole 1158a and an oval oval hole 1158b in this order from the left.

  At the outer end of the rear surface of the spur gear 1156, a columnar guided shaft (not shown) projecting rearward is provided, and the guided shaft can move in the guide hole 1158a of the crank 1158. ing. The rotation of the motor 1152 is transmitted to the crank 1158 via the guided shaft of the spur gear 1156, and the crank 1158 is rotatable. Further, a slide bearing 1162 is fitted to the guided shaft, and is attached with a screw from the rear side. The slide bearing 1162 is used so that the guided shaft of the spur gear 1156 can move smoothly in the guide hole 1158a. The slide bearing 1162 is formed of, for example, a resin material, has a cylindrical shape with a bottom diameter shorter than the width of the guide hole 1158a, and has a circular flange at the rear end. The diameter of the flange of the slide bearing 1162 is larger than the width of the guide hole 1158a, so that the slide bearing 1162 does not fit into the guide hole 1158a.

  An oval left guide hole 850b1 extending in the vertical direction is provided at the left end of the central base 850b of the upper accessory base 850. In addition, a columnar left guided shaft portion 1102c4 extending rearward from the rear surface is provided at the upper left end of the rear surface of the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102. The base 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 is attached to the central base 850b such that the left guided shaft 1102c4 can move inside the left guide hole 850b1. The rear end of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 is exposed to the rear of the left guide hole 850b1, reaches the long hole 1158b of the crank 1158, and is movable in the long hole 1158b.

  Further, a left sliding bearing portion 1164 is fitted into the left guided shaft portion 1102c4. The left sliding bearing portion 1164 has a front sliding bearing 1164a and a rear sliding bearing 1164b. The front slide bearing 1164a is used to smooth the movement of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 in the left guide hole 850b1. The front sliding bearing 1164a is fitted into the front of the left guided shaft 1102c4. The front slide bearing 1164a is formed of, for example, a resin material, has a cylindrical shape whose bottom surface is shorter in diameter than the width of the left guide hole 850b1, and has a circular flange at the front end. The diameter of the flange is larger than the width of the left guide hole 850b1, so that the front slide bearing 1164a does not fit into the left guide hole 850b1.

  The rear sliding bearing 1164b is used for smoothing the movement of the left guided shaft 1102c4 in the elongated hole 1158b of the crank 1158. The rear sliding bearing 1164a is fitted into the rear of the left guided shaft 1102c4. Like the front slide bearing 1164a, the rear slide bearing 1164b is formed of, for example, a resin material and has a cylindrical shape with a bottom surface having a shorter diameter than the width of the long hole portion 1158b, and a circular flange is provided at the rear end. ing. The diameter of the flange is greater than the width of the slot 1158b so that the rear sliding bearing 1164b does not fit into the slot 1158b. The left sliding bearing portion 1164 is attached to the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 with a screw with a washer from the rear sliding bearing 1164b side.

  A right guide hole 850b2 extending in the front-rear direction is provided at the right end of the central base 850b of the upper accessory base 850. The right guide hole 850b2 is formed to have the same length in parallel with the left guide hole 850b1.

  At the upper right end of the rear surface of the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102, a columnar right guided shaft portion 1102c5 extending rearward from the rear surface is provided. The base 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 is attached to the central base 850b such that the right guided shaft 1102c5 can move in the right guide hole 850b2.

  A right sliding bearing 1166 is fitted into the right guided shaft 1102c5. The right slide bearing 1166 is used for smoothing the movement of the right guided shaft 1102c5 in the right guide hole 850b2. The right sliding bearing portion 1166 has a front sliding bearing 1166a and a rear sliding bearing 1166b. The front slide bearing 1166a is arranged on the front side of the right guide hole 850b2, and the rear slide bearing 1166b is arranged on the right guide hole 850b2 on the rear side.

  The front slide bearing 1166a is fitted into the front of the right guided shaft 1102c5. The front slide bearing 1166a is formed of, for example, a resin material, has a cylindrical shape whose bottom surface is shorter than the width of the right guide hole 850b2, and has a circular flange at the front end. The diameter of the flange is larger than the width of the right guide hole 850b2 so that the front sliding bearing 1166a does not fit into the right guide hole 850b2.

  The rear sliding bearing 1166b is fitted into the rear of the right guided shaft 1102c5. The rear sliding bearing 1166b is formed of, for example, a resin material, has a cylindrical shape whose bottom surface is shorter than the width of the right guide hole 850b2, and has a circular flange at the rear end. The diameter of the flange is larger than the width of the right guide hole 850b2 so that the front sliding bearing 1166a does not fit into the right guide hole 850b2.

  The rotation of the motor 1152 is transmitted to the crank mechanism 1155 via the spur gear 1154. The spur gear 1156 of the crank mechanism 1155 is meshed with the spur gear 1154, and rotates in conjunction with the spur gear 1154. Rotational motion of the spur gear 1156 is transmitted to the crank 1158 via a cylindrical guided shaft that projects rearward from the rear end of the rear surface of the spur gear 1156. Further, the rotational movement of the crank 1158 is transmitted to the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 of the base portion 1102c via the long hole portion 1158b. The left guided shaft portion 1102c4 is guided by the left guide hole portion 850b1, and linearly moves in the vertical direction. At this time, the distance between the rotation center of the crank 1158 and the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 changes, but the long hole portion 1158b serves as an escape hole for the left guided shaft portion 1102c4, and the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 is It moves within the elongated hole 1158b by an amount corresponding to a change in the distance from the rotation center. Thereby, the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 can be moved in the vertical direction.

  The right guided shaft portion 1102c5 of the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 is movable in the vertical direction by being guided by the right guide hole 850b2. The upper rear movable body 1102 is guided by the left guide hole 850b1 and the right guide hole 850b2, and can move up and down stably.

  Further, a torsion coil spring 1168 is arranged on the rear side of the crank 1158. A metal rod 1160 passes through the coil center of the torsion coil spring 1168. One end of the torsion coil spring 1168 is fixed to the rear surface of the left base 850c, and the other end is fixed to the rear surface of the crank 1158. The crank 1158 rotates clockwise when the upper rear movable body 1102 moves downward, and rotates left when the upper rear movable body 1102 moves upward. When the crank 1158 rotates clockwise from the initial position, a force acts on the torsion coil spring 1168 in a direction to wind the spring. The torsion coil spring 1168 rotates counterclockwise to the crank 1158 when the crank 1158 rotates left. A torque is applied to assist the power of a motor 1152 that moves the upper rear movable body 1102 upward.

  As shown in FIG. 22, a metal outer rail 1170 extending in the vertical direction is fixed to the center base 850b to the right of the left guide hole 850b1 with screws. The outer rail 1170 extends in parallel with the left guide hole 850b1 and the right guide hole 850b2. As shown in FIG. 26, a metal inner rail 1172 extending in the vertical direction is fixed to the rear surface of the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 with screws. The inner rail 1172 is mounted inside the outer rail 1170 so as to be movable along the outer rail 1170. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are arranged on a rail contact surface between the outer rail 1170 and the inner rail 1172 so as to reduce friction between the rails and allow the inner rail 1172 to slide smoothly. The outer rail 1170 and the inner rail 1172 are used to guide the upper rear movable body 1102 more stably in the vertical direction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the tension coil spring 1174 has an upper end fixed above the central base 850b so as to be able to expand and contract in the vertical direction, and a lower end on the rear side of the base 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102. Fixed. The extension coil spring 1174 has a natural length when the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the uppermost position (initial position), and has a natural length when the upper rear movable body 1102 is located below the initial position. It will be in a stretched state. The tension coil spring 1174 uses the restoring force to assist the power of the motor 1152 for returning the upper rear movable body 1102 to the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 22, an upper photosensor 1176 and a lower photosensor 1178 are fixed to the left base 850c with screws. The upper photosensor 1176 and the lower photosensor 1178 are used to detect the position of the upper rear movable body 1102. The upper photosensor 1176 and the lower photosensor 1178 are included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG.

  The upper photosensor 1176 has a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit that are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction with a space portion interposed therebetween. As shown in FIG. 26, a light-shielding piece 1102c3 formed of a light-impermeable member is provided on a base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102. When the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the uppermost position (initial position), the light shielding piece 1102c3 enters between the upper photosensor 1176 light receiving unit and the light emitting unit.

  Similarly, the lower photosensor 1178 has a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit that are arranged so as to face each other in the front-rear direction with the space portion interposed therebetween. Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the crank 1158 of the crank mechanism 1155 is provided with a light shielding piece 1158c formed of a light-impermeable member. When the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the lowermost position, the light shielding piece 1158c enters between the light receiving section and the light emitting section of the lower photo sensor 1178.

  In this embodiment, the position of the upper rear movable body 1102 is detected by the upper photosensor 1176 and the lower photosensor 1178. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the initial position when the upper photo sensor 1176 detects the light shielding piece 1102c3, and when the lower photo sensor 1178 detects the light shielding piece 1158c3. Determines that the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the lowermost position.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 22, a substrate 1180 is fixed to the left base 850c with screws. The motor 1152, the upper photosensor 1176, and the lower photosensor 1178 are connected to the substrate 1180 by wiring (not shown). The motor 1152 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 via the substrate 1180, and the upper photosensor 1176 and the lower photosensor 1178 are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. Accordingly, the wiring connecting the upper rear decoration accessory 1100 and the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 can be integrated.

  Next, the operation of the rotatable movable portion 1102b of the upper rear movable body 1102 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 is viewed from the upper right front to the lower left rear. In FIG. 27, the front cover 1102a is detached from the base 1102c, and the rotating member with gear 1110 is detached from the front cover 1102a, the first gear member 1114, and the second gear member 1116. In addition, the rotation decoration support member 1118, the rotation decoration part 1124, the frame member 1126, the metal rod 1128, and the spur gear 1130 are not illustrated.

  As described above, the motor 1140 is used to drive the rotation movable portion 1102b. When the motor 1140 is driven and the rotating shaft of the motor rotates clockwise, for example, as viewed from the front, the spur gear 1142 fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1140 rotates clockwise and meshes with the spur gear 1142. The rotating member with gear 1110 provided with the gear portion 1110b rotates counterclockwise. Since the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 are fixed to the rotating member 1110 with gears, the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 also rotate counterclockwise. Further, a spur gear 1122 is fixed to one end of a metal rod 1120 disposed in a through hole of the side surface portion 1114d of the first gear member 1114, and as the first gear member 1114 rotates, the spur gear 1122 is attached to the base 1102c. Rotationally move along the gear portion 1102c2. The spur gear 1122 is meshed with the gear 1102c2. The spur gear 1122 rotates around the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 while rotating along the gear 1102c2. In addition, a rotating decoration support member 1118 is fixed to the other end of the metal bar 1120. The rotation decoration support member 1118 rotates together with the rotation decoration part 1124 around a virtual straight line passing through the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1120.

  When the motor 1140 is driven, at least one of the spur gear 1130 and the spur gear 1134 meshes with the first gear portion 1114e or the second gear portion 1116e. For example, when the spur gear 1130 is exposed to the openings 1102a1 and 1110a from the internal space 1115 formed by being surrounded by the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116, the spur gear 1134 is It engages with the portion 1116e. FIG. 27 shows a state where the spur gear 1134 is engaged with the second gear 1116e.

  The spur gear 1134 is fixed to one end of the metal rod 1132, and rotates and moves along the second gear portion 1116e with the rotation of the rotary decoration support member 1118. The spur gear 1134 is meshed with the second gear 1116e. The spur gear 1134 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132 as a rotation axis while rotating along the second gear 1116e. In addition, a rotating decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the other end of the metal rod 1132. The rotary decoration 1124 rotates around a virtual straight line passing through the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1132.

  When the spur gear 1134 is exposed from the internal space 1115 formed by being surrounded by the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 toward the openings 1102a1 and 1110a via the opening end, the spur gear 1134 1130 meshes with the first gear 1114e. The spur gear 1130 is fixed to one end of the metal bar 1128, and rotates and moves along the first gear portion 1114e with the rotation of the rotation decoration support member 1118. The spur gear 1130 is meshed with the first gear portion 1114e. The spur gear 1130 rotates around the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 while rotating along the first gear portion 1114e. In addition, a rotary decoration 1124 is fixed to the other end of the metal bar 1128. The rotating decorative portion 1124 rotates around a virtual straight line passing through the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1128.

  A predetermined decoration is provided on the front side and the rear side of the rotary decoration part 1124. The rotatable movable portion 1102b produces a game by rotating the rotatable decorative portion 1124 so that the player can see the front side or the rear side of the rotatable decorative portion 1124. Since the rotation decoration portion 1124 is attached to the rotation decoration support member 1118, it rotates with the rotation of the rotation decoration support member 1118. The rotation decoration unit 1124 rotates around a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1120 as a rotation axis, as the rotation decoration support member 1118 rotates.

  In addition, the rotary decoration 1124 is fixed to the metal rods 1128 and 1132. The rotation of the spur gears 1130, 1134 causes the metal rods 1128, 1132 to rotate, and the rotary decoration 1124 also rotates about a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rods 1128, 1132.

  As described above, the rotary decoration portion 1124 is given three rotational motions by different rotation axes by driving the motor 1140. In some cases, the rotatable movable portion 1102b can cause the player to pay attention to the rotatable decorative portion 1124 by three rotational motions.

  The upper rear movable body 1102 is disposed between the right base 1002b3 and the left base 1002b4 of the base 1002b of the upper front movable body 1002 shown in FIG. When the rotatable movable portion 1102b rotates while the lens movable body 1002a of the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the rearmost position, the spur gear 1130 or the spur gear 1134 exposed forward from the opening 1102a1 moves the upper front movable body. It comes into contact with the lens 1018 of the body 1002. For this reason, the rotatable movable portion 1102b is rotatable when the lens movable body 1002a is located at the forefront position.

  Next, the operation of the upper rear movable body 1102 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is an external view of the upper rear decoration accessory 1100 as viewed from the front side. The upper rear movable body 1102 is driven by a vertical driving unit 1104 and can move in the vertical direction.

  FIG. 28A shows a state where the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at an initial position (upper position). The initial position of the upper rear movable body 1102 is the uppermost position in the moving range of the upper rear movable body 1102.

  FIG. 28B shows a state where the upper rear movable body 1102 has moved to an intermediate position between the uppermost position and the lowermost position. When the upper rear movable body 1102 moves downward, the rotation axis of the motor 1152 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side. Thus, the spur gear 1154 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1152 rotates counterclockwise, and the spur gear 1156 of the crank mechanism 1155 meshed with the spur gear 1154 rotates clockwise. In conjunction with the rotation of the spur gear 1156, the crank 1158 rotates clockwise. Rotational movement of the motor 1152 is converted to linear movement and transmitted to the upper rear movable body 1102 via the crank 1158. The upper rear movable body 1102 linearly moves downward while being guided by the left guide hole 850b1, the right guide hole 850b2, the outer rail 1170 and the inner rail 1172.

  FIG. 28C shows a state where the upper rear movable body 1102 has moved to the lowermost position. The left guide hole 850b1, the right guide hole 850b2, and the outer rail 1170 function as mechanical ends, and the upper rear movable body 1102 is stopped.

  Also, naturally, the upper rear movable body 1102 can move upward from the lowermost position shown in FIG. 28C to the uppermost position (initial position) shown in FIG. When the upper rear movable body 1102 moves upward, the rotation shaft of the motor 1152 and the spur gear 1154 rotate clockwise as viewed from the front side, and the spur gear 1156 of the crank mechanism 1155 rotates counterclockwise, The crank 1158 rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the rotation of the gear 1156. The rotational motion of the motor 1152 is converted to linear motion and transmitted to the upper rear movable body 1102 via the crank 1158. The upper rear movable body 1102 has a left guide hole 850b1, a right guide hole 850b2, and an outer rail 1170. And is guided by the inner rail 1172 to linearly move upward. The left guide hole 850b1, right guide hole 850b2, and outer rail 1170 function as mechanical ends, and the upper rear movable body 1102 stops at the initial position.

  The upper rear movable body 1102 is disposed between the right base 1002b3 and the left base 1002b4 of the base 1002b of the upper front movable body 1002 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the upper rear movable body 1102 moves alone, it contacts the lower decorative portion 1016 of the upper front movable body 1002. In order to avoid this, the upper rear movable body 1102 can move downward together with the upper front movable body 1002, and moves downward when the upper front movable body 1002 is located below the initial position. It is possible. The upper rear movable body 1102 may be arranged at a position where the upper rear movable body 1102 does not come into contact with the upper front movable body 1002. The upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable to the lowest position when the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position. The upper front movable body 1102 and the upper rear movable body 1102 may be independently operable.

  The vertical moving range of the upper rear movable body 1102 is the same as the vertical moving range of the upper front movable body 1002 shown in FIG. When the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. 28A and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. The rear movable body 1102 is located, and the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 overlap in the front-rear direction. When the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the lowermost position shown in FIG. 28C and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position shown in FIG. The upper rear movable body 1102 is located behind the body 1002, and the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 overlap in the front-rear direction.

  When the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 overlap each other in the front-rear direction, the rotary decorative portion 1124 of the upper rear movable body 1102 is visually recognized via the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002. Since a convex lens is used for the lens 1018 and the distance between the lens 1018 and the rotary decoration 1124 is shorter than the focal length of the lens 1018, the player can observe the erect virtual image of the rotary decoration 1124 via the lens 1018. It is.

  The lens movable body 1002a is movable in the front-back direction. By moving the lens movable body 1002a in the front-rear direction, the size of the erected virtual image of the rotary decoration 1124 observed by the player can be made different.

  The upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable in the front-rear direction.

  In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used for the motors 1140 and 1152, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used.

  In the present embodiment, a motor is used as a drive source of the rotatable movable portion 1102b and the upper rear movable body 1102, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various actuators such as solenoids may be used as driving sources for the rotary movable portion 1102b and the upper rear movable body 1102.

  Further, instead of the tension coil spring 1174, an elastic member such as a spiral spring, a plate spring, or rubber may be used.

  Further, the upper rear movable body 1102 may include a sub display device smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208. Other displays including a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector include a sub-display device. Devices can be used. Further, the sub-display device may be controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500, and may be controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500. A separate display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  Further, a logo movable body 902 may be arranged behind the upper rear movable body 1102. In this case, the upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable backward.

  Further, the upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable upward from the initial position.

  Next, FIGS. 29 to 36 show the upper right side accessory 1200, the upper left side accessory 1300, the lower right side accessory 1400, and the lower left side accessory 1500 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It will be described using FIG.

  The upper right side role 1200, the upper left side role 1300, the lower right side role 1400, and the lower left side role 1500 are used to produce a special figure fluctuating game, a general fluctuating game, or a jackpot game. Used in demonstrations and the like. For example, reach effect, special figure 1 small hit production, special figure 2 small hit production, public figure winning election production, look ahead notice production, 2R big hit game production, 15R special big hit game production, operation of the chance button 136 and setting operation section It is used for various other effects such as effects related to the operation of 137. The upper left side accessory 1300 has a symmetrical structure with the upper right side accessory 1200. Therefore, the description of the upper left side accessory 1300 can be described by replacing "right" with "left" in the description of the upper right side accessory 1200. Further, the lower left side accessory 1500 also has a symmetrical structure with the lower right side accessory 1400. Therefore, in the description of the lower right side item 1400, the lower left side item 1500 can be described by replacing “right” with “left”. Therefore, description of the upper left side accessory 1300 and the lower left side accessory 1500 will be omitted below.

  The movable body (hereinafter, also referred to as an “upper right movable body” or “movable body”) 1201 of the upper right side accessory 1200 of the present embodiment is directed to the upper right direction in a plane parallel to the gaming board 200. (Hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “moving operation”). In addition, a part of the upper right side movable body 1201 (movable decorative portion 1203) interlocks with the operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 from the upper right direction to the lower left direction, within a plane parallel to the board surface of the gaming board 200. It is also possible to rotate (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “rotating operation”).

  The movable body (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “lower right movable body” or “movable body”) 1401 of the lower right side accessory 1400 of the present embodiment can move up and down. A movable body 1403 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “movable body front”) included in the lower right side movable body 1401 changes the posture of the movable body 1403 in conjunction with the vertical movement of the movable body 1401. It is possible to change. In addition, the movable body 1425 included in the lower right side movable body 1401 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “moveable body middle part”) 1425 is an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle part 1425 (an outer decoration part 1425a (a decoration part 1425a1). 1425a6) to move radially) and to rotate (rotation of the outer decoration 1425a (decorations 1425a1 to 1425a6) and rotation of the inner decoration 1425b and the middle decoration 1425c). It is.

  Further, the upper right side accessory 1200 may operate in conjunction with the operation of another movable body, or may operate independently of the operation of the other movable body. In addition, the lower right side accessory 1400 may operate in conjunction with the operation of another movable body, or may operate independently of the operation of the other movable body.

  FIGS. 29 and 30 show examples of the movable body 1201 and the movable body 1401 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and show an upper right side accessory 1200 including the movable body 1201 and a lower right side including the movable body 1401. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the accessory 1400. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of a front portion of the upper right side item 1200 and the lower right side item 1400, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of a rear portion of the lower right side item 1400. 29 and 30 show a state where the upper right side accessory 1200 and the lower right side accessory 1400 are viewed from the upper right front to the lower left rear.

  The structure of the upper right side accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. The upper right side accessory 1200 mainly has an upper right side movable body 1201 and an upper right side movable body support unit 1250 for moving the upper right side movable body 1201. The upper right side movable body 1201 mainly includes a movable decorative portion 1203 capable of performing a rotating operation, a decorative portion 1205, a power transmission mechanism 1211 for performing the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203, and a movable decorative portion 1203. And a connection part 1215 for connecting the upper right side movable body 1201 and the upper right side movable body support part 1250 to each other.

  The decoration (or sometimes referred to as a "movable body") 1203a of the movable decorative portion (or sometimes referred to as a "movable body") 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 is capable of rotating. . A substantially cylindrical shaft fixing portion for fixing the shaft 1211d is provided substantially at the center of the rear wall surface of the decoration 1203a. For this reason, the shaft 1211d is fixed to the shaft fixing portion, and the rotation of the shaft 1211d causes the decoration 1203a to rotate. In addition, a through-hole for penetrating a shaft fixing portion of the decoration 1203a is provided at a substantially center end of the decoration (or sometimes referred to as a “movable body”) 1203b of the movable decoration portion 1203. The decoration 1203b is screwed to the rear wall surface of the decoration 1203a. For this reason, the decoration 1203b becomes integral with the decoration 1203a, so that the rotation of the decoration 1203b can be executed. The decorations 1203a and 1203b are formed of a transparent resin material.

  The decorative portion 1205 of the upper right side movable body 1201 is used as a decoration of the upper right side movable body 1201. The decoration part 1205 has a decoration 1205a made of a transparent resin, a decoration 1205b made of a transparent resin, and a decoration 1205c made of a transparent resin. The decoration 1205b is provided with a through hole through which the shaft fixing portion of the decoration 1203a can rotate. The decoration 1205a, the decoration 1205b, and the decoration 1205c are fixed to the front wall surface of the movable body rear cover 1209 via the LED board 1207 with screws.

  The LED substrate 1207 is fixed to the front wall surface of the movable body rear cover 1209 by screws. An LED (not shown) and a driving circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED are mounted on the mounting surface of the LED board 1207. The LED substrate 1207 is formed so as not to interfere with the shaft 1211d.

  The movable body rear cover portion 1209 is used to support the movable decorative portion 1203 and the decorative portion 1205. It is also used to house the LED board 1207. It is also used to support the power transmission mechanism 1211 and the posture holding part 1213. It is also used to execute a movement operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 (details will be described later). Further, the movable body rear cover 1209 is provided with a through hole for enabling the shaft 1211d to rotate. The movable body rear cover 1209 is provided with a substantially plate-shaped initial position detection unit for detecting the initial position of the upper right side movable body 1201 by the photo sensor 1252.

  The power transmission mechanism 1211 is used for rotating the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 by rotating the rotation shaft of the motor 1260. The power transmission mechanism 1211 mainly includes a spur gear 1211a, a spur gear with guide rod 1211b, a spur gear with stopper function part 1211c, and a shaft 1211d. The spur gear 1211a is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear with guide rod 1211b to the spur gear with stopper function part 1211c. The spur gear 1211a and the spur gear with guide bar 1211b are installed adjacent to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover 1209 so that the teeth of the spur gear 1211a and the teeth of the spur gear with guide bar 1211b mesh with each other. The spur gear with stopper function 1211c is installed on the rear wall of the movable body rear cover 1209 adjacent to the spur gear 1211a so that the teeth of the spur gear 1211a and the teeth of the spur gear 1211c with stopper function mesh with each other. . The rear end of the shaft 1211d is fixed to the center of the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function. The shaft 1211d is fixed to the shaft fixing portion of the decoration 1203a of the movable decoration portion 1203 through a through hole provided in the movable body rear cover portion 1209 and the decoration 1205b.

  The spur gear with guide bar 1211b is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear with hole 1256c to the spur gear 1211a. The spur gear with guide bar 1211b mainly has a guide bar 1211b1 and a spur gear 1211b2. The spur gear 1211b2 has a substantially sector shape, and the teeth of the spur gear 1211b2 are formed on a substantially sector-shaped arc. The guide rod 1211b1 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The guide rod 1211b1 and the spur gear 1211b2 are integrally formed near the end of a substantially fan-shaped arc on the rear surface of the spur gear 1211b2 such that one end surface of the substantially cylindrical shape faces rearward. I have. The connecting portion 1215e is fixed to one end surface of the guide rod 1211b1 so as to be slidable (or rollable). Therefore, the rotation of the spur gear with hole 1256c is transmitted to the spur gear with guide rod 1211b (details will be described later).

  The spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1211a to the shaft 1211d. The spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c mainly has a stopper function portion 1211c1 and a spur gear 1211c2. The spur gear 1211c2 has a substantially semicircular shape, and the teeth of the spur gear 1211c2 are formed on a substantially semicircular arc. In addition, the stopper function portion 1211c1 has a substantially triangular plate shape, and one vertex portion of the substantially triangular plate shape has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape (a shape obtained by cutting an end face of a cylinder vertically in half). Further, the stopper function portion 1211c1 is formed integrally with the chord portion (outer peripheral portion having no teeth) of the spur gear 1211c2. Therefore, the substantially semi-cylindrical portion of the stopper function portion 1211c1 rotates in accordance with the rotation of the spur gear 1211c2. Since the radius of the spur gear 1211c2 is smaller than the radius of the spur gear 1256b fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1260, the spur gear 1211c2 rotates at a speed higher than the rotation speed of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260. Yes, but not limited to this. For example, by making the radius of the spur gear 1211c2 larger than the radius of the spur gear 1256b, the spur gear 1211c2 can also rotate at a speed lower than the rotation speed of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260.

  The posture holding part 1213 mainly has a first holding part 1213a, a second holding part 1213b, and a helical spring 1213c. The first holding part 1213a and the second holding part 1213b have shapes that are symmetrical to each other. The first holding unit 1213a is mainly used for holding (or maintaining) the posture (or posture) before the rotation operation of the movable decoration unit 1203 is performed. The second holding unit 1213b is mainly used for holding (or maintaining) the posture after the rotation operation of the movable decoration unit 1203 is performed. The first holding part 1213a and the second holding part 1213b are bilaterally symmetrical and have a substantially arc shape. The lower end portion of the first holding portion 1213a is provided with a movable rear cover so that the first holding portion 1213a can rotate in a plane parallel to the game board 200 with the lower end portion of the first holding portion 1213a in the substantially arc shape as a fulcrum. It is attached to the rear wall of the part 1209. Similarly, the lower end of the second holding portion 1213b is attached to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover 1209. Further, a spring engaging portion for connecting the helical spring 1213c is formed at the upper end of the first holding portion 1213a. Similarly, a spring locking portion for connecting the helical spring 1213c is formed at the upper end of the second holding portion 1213b. Further, one end of the helical spring 1213c is connected to a spring locking portion of the first holding portion 1213a, and the other end of the helical spring 1213c is connected to a spring locking portion of the second holding portion 1213b. In this embodiment, only one helical spring is provided, but a configuration in which a plurality of helical springs are provided may be employed. Further, a leaf spring may be used instead of the helical spring 1213c, or a flexible member such as rubber may be used. The details of the posture holding unit 1213 will be described later.

  The connecting portion 1215 connects the upper right side movable body 1201 and the upper right side movable body support portion 1250 to the guide holes (guide holes 1254a and 1254b) of the base portion 1254 and the guide holes (escape) of the spur gear 1256c with holes. It is used for connection via a force acting hole with hole 1256c1 or a force acting hole with relief hole 1256c2). The connecting portion 1215 has five connecting portions 1215a to 1215e, each having the same shape. The connection portions 1215a to 1215e are formed by integrally forming a substantially cylindrical roller portion and a substantially circular plate-shaped roller exterior. The roller exterior is formed at one end of the roller section. Further, the diameter of the outer peripheral circle outside the roller is longer than the diameter of the outer peripheral circle of the roller portion, and is also longer than the length of the short side of the guide hole of the base portion 1254 and the guide hole of the spur gear 1256c with holes. Further, the diameter of the outer circumferential circle of the roller portion is shorter than the length of the short side of the guide hole of the base portion 1254 and the guide hole of the spur gear with hole 1256c. The connecting portions 1215a to 1215e are provided at predetermined positions on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 and guide the sliding portions (or rollable) in the corresponding guide holes. It is attached to the guide rod 1211b1 of the spur gear with rod 1211b. In addition, the outside of the rollers of the connecting portions 1215a to 1215e is located on the rear outside of the above-described guide holes corresponding to each, and the rollers of the connecting portions 1215a to 1215e are located inside the corresponding guide holes. The connecting portions 1215a to 1215e do not easily come off from the corresponding guide holes. The connection portions 1215a to 1215e can slide (or roll) in the regions of the guide holes corresponding to the rotation shafts of the motor 1260. The details of the connecting portion 1215 will be described later.

  Next, the upper right side movable body support unit 1250 will be described. The upper right side movable body support section 1250 mainly includes a base section 1254 supporting the upper right side movable body 1201, a power transmission mechanism 1256 for operating the upper right side movable body 1201, and an upper right side movable body 1201. Has a motor 1260 as a drive source for operating the.

  The photo sensor 1252 is used to detect an initial position of the upper right side movable body 1201. The photo sensor 1252 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1252 is provided with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and has a configuration in which light emitted from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. The photosensor 1252 has a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that face each other in the front-rear direction, and have a U-shape (a shape whose left side is open) when viewed from above. In addition, the photosensor 1252 has a base 1254 such that the initial position detection unit of the movable body rear cover 1209 is located between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit when the upper right side movable body 1201 is located at the initial position. Is fixed to the upper end of the front wall by screws.

  The base 1254 has a substantially plate shape. The base 1254 is fixed to the upper end of the front base 1456 and the upper end of the middle base 1460 of the lower right side movable body support 1450 by screws. The front base 1456 and the middle base 1460 are fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820 by screws. That is, the base portion 1254 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820.

  The base 1254 is a member related to the movement of the upper right side movable body 1201. The base 1254 includes a guide hole 1254a in which the connecting portion 1215a can slide (or roll), and a guide hole in which the connecting portion 1215b and the connecting portion 1215c can slide (or roll). 1254b. Details of the guide holes 1254a and 1254b will be described later.

  The power transmission mechanism 1256 is used as a power source for executing a moving operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 and a rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 by rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260. . The power transmission mechanism 1256 mainly includes a spur gear 1256a, a spur gear 1256b, and a spur gear 1256c with a hole. The spur gear 1256a has two spur gears of the same shape bonded to each other back and forth to form an integral shape. The spur gear 1256a is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1256b to the spur gear 1256c with holes. The spur gear 1256a and the spur gear 1256b are installed on the rear wall surface of the base 1254 so that the teeth of the spur gear 1256b on the rear side of the spur gear 1256a mesh with the teeth of the spur gear 1256b. The spur gear 1256a and the spur gear with hole 1256c are installed on the rear wall of the base 1254 so that the teeth of the spur gear on the front side of the spur gear 1256a and the teeth of the spur gear 1256c3 of the spur gear 1256c mesh with each other.

  The spur gear 1256b is used to transmit the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 to the spur gear 1256a, and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1260.

  The spur gear 1256c with a hole is used for converting the rotation of the spur gear 1256a into a substantially linear motion and transmitting it to the connecting portion 1251d. The spur gear 1256c with a hole is used for transmitting the rotation of the spur gear 1256a to the connecting portion 1251e. The rotation of the spur gear 1256a is converted into a substantially linear motion and transmitted to the connecting portion 1251d, whereby the moving operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 can be performed. In addition, the rotation of the spur gear 1256a is transmitted to the connecting portion 1251e, so that the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 can be performed (details will be described later). The spur gear 1256c with a hole mainly has a force acting hole with a relief hole 1256c1, a force acting hole with a relief hole 1256c2, and a spur gear 1256c3. The spur gear 1256c3 has a substantially fan shape, and the teeth of the spur gear 1256c3 are formed on a substantially fan-shaped arc. The details of the force acting hole with relief hole 1256c1 and the force acting hole with relief hole 1256c2 will be described later.

  The motor 1260 is a drive source for executing the moving operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 and the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201. The motor 1260 is fixed to the motor mounting portion 1258 with screws so that the spur gear 1256b fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor is located in front of the motor 1260. The motor mounting portion 1258 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 passes. The motor mounting portion 1258 is mounted on the rear wall surface of the base portion 1254. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1260, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but the motor is not limited thereto. The motor 1260 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG.

  Next, the structure of the lower right side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The lower right side accessory 1400 mainly has a lower right side movable body 1401 and a lower right side movable body support unit 1450 for operating the lower right side movable body 1401.

  First, a configuration of a part of the lower right side movable body support unit 1450 will be described with reference to FIG. The guiding section 1452 is used to change the posture of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401 shown in FIG. The guiding section 1452 has a guiding section 1452a and a guiding section 1452b. The guide portion 1452a has a groove that extends linearly in the vertical direction so that the roller 1407f of the posture change mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. 30 can roll (or slide). In addition, the shape of the groove has a U-shape (a shape whose left side is open) when viewed from above. In addition, the guiding portion 1452b has a groove that extends linearly inclining at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction so that the above-described roller 1407f can roll (or slide). When viewed from above, the groove has a U-shape (a shape whose left side is open). Further, the guide groove of the guide portion 1452a and the guide groove of the guide portion 1452b are connected. The guiding portion 1452 is fixed to the front wall surface of the front base portion 1456 by screws.

  The LED board 1454 is fixed to the front wall surface of the front base 1456 by screws. An LED (not shown) and a driving circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED are mounted on the mounting surface of the LED board 1454.

  The front base 1456 is used to support the guide 1452 and the LED board 1454. The front base portion 1456 is also used to house the power transmission mechanism 1458, and a housing that can house the power transmission mechanism 1458 is provided on the rear side of the front base portion 1456. Further, front base portion 1456 is fixed to the front wall surface of middle base portion 1460 by screws. The middle base 1460 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820 by screws. That is, the guiding portion 1452 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820.

  The power transmission mechanism 1458 moves the lower right side movable body 1401 shown in FIG. 30 and the movable body (movable body front part) 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401 shown in FIG. 30 by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1462 shown in FIG. Is used to execute the postural change operation. The power transmission mechanism 1458 mainly includes a belt 1458a, a spur gear 1458b, a spur gear with a pulley 1458c, a pulley 1458d, a shaft 1458e, and a shaft support 1458f.

  The belt 1458a is used for performing a vertical movement operation of the lower right side movable body 1401. The belt 1458a is a resin belt and has flexibility. The belt 1458a has an upper end hung on a pulley 1458c1 of a spur gear 1458c with a pulley, and a lower end hung on a pulley 1458d. Therefore, the belt 1458a rotates in accordance with the rotation of the spur gear with pulley 1458c. Further, a belt fixing portion 1413b of the movable body supporting portion 1413 shown in FIG. 30 is fixed to a predetermined position of the belt 1458a.

  The spur gear 1458b is used to transmit the rotation of the rotating shaft of the motor 1462 to the spur gear with pulley 1458c. The spur gear 1458b is fixed to a rotation shaft of the motor 1462. Further, the spur gear 1458b and the spur gear with a pulley 1458c are adjacently provided on the front wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 so that the teeth of the spur gear 1458b and the teeth of the spur gear 1458c2 of the spur gear with pulley 1458c mesh with each other.

  The spur gear with pulley 1458c and the pulley 1458d are used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1458b to the belt 1458a. In the spur gear with pulley 1458c, the pulley 1458c1 and the spur gear 1458c2 are integrally formed with the front and rear positions. The spur gear with pulley 1458c and the pulley 1458d are provided on the front wall surface of the middle base 1460 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

  The shaft 1458e is used for rotatably supporting the spur gear with pulley 1458c. The rear end of the shaft 1458e is fixed to the upper part of the front wall surface of the middle base 1460, and the front end of the shaft 1458e is provided at the center of the spur gear 1458c with a pulley so that the spur gear 1458c with a pulley can rotate. The shaft 1458e is used for rotatably supporting the pulley 1458d. The rear end of the shaft 1458e is fixed to a lower part of the front wall surface of the middle base 1460, and the front end of the shaft 1458e is provided at the center of the pulley 1458d so that the pulley 1458d can rotate.

  The middle base 1460 is used to support and house the power transmission mechanism 1458. The middle base portion 1460 is used for supporting and storing the guide rail 1464 and the guide rod 1466 shown in FIG.

  Next, the structure of the lower right side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. The lower right side movable body 1401 mainly changes the posture of a movable body (front of movable body) 1403, a movable body (rear of movable body) 1405, a movable body (middle of movable body) 1425, and a movable body 1403. Posture changing mechanism 1407, a movable body 1403, a motor cover 1409 with a guide supporting the movable body 1405 and the movable body 1425, and a motor for executing the operation of opening and rotating the part of the movable body 1425 1411, a movable body support 1413 and a power transmission mechanism 1419.

  The movable body 1403 is a movable body that can perform an operation of changing a posture in addition to a vertical movement operation (details will be described later). The movable body 1403 has a substantially circular front decoration part 1403a and a substantially circular rear decoration part 1403b, and the front decoration part 1403a and the front decoration part 1403b are fixed by screws. The front decoration section 1403a and the front decoration section 1403b are formed of a transparent resin. An LED board (not shown) is provided inside the movable body 1403. On both sides of the LED board, LEDs and driving circuits for lighting the LEDs are mounted, but are not limited thereto. For example, two back surfaces of a single-sided LED board may be overlapped with each other, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Therefore, before the posture change of the movable body 1403 (posture at the initial position of the movable body 1403), the light of the LED mounted on the front surface of the LED board can be visually recognized through the front decoration part 1403a. After the posture change (posture at the target position of the movable body 1403), the light of the LED mounted on the rear surface of the LED substrate becomes visible through the rear decoration part 1403b. The right end of the movable body 1403 formed on the arc has a shaft fixing portion 1403c for fixing the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b of the posture changing mechanism 1407.

  The movable body 1405 is a movable body capable of performing a vertical movement operation (details will be described later). Further, the movable body 1405 has a substantially arc shape. Further, the movable body 1405 is formed of a transparent resin. Further, an LED substrate (not shown) is provided inside the movable body 1405. On the mounting surface of the LED board, an LED and a driving circuit for lighting the LED are mounted. The movable body 1405 is a movable body located behind the movable body 1403. Further, before the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, a part of the movable body 1403 overlaps with a part of the movable body 1405, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the entire movable body 1405. On the other hand, after the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, the movable body 1403 does not overlap with a part of the movable body 1405, so that the player can visually recognize the entire movable body 1405.

  The posture change mechanism 1407 is used to change the posture of the movable body 1403. The posture change mechanism 1407 mainly includes a shaft 1407a, a shaft 1407b, a shaft support 1407c, a pinion 1407d, a rack 1407e with a guide rod, and a roller 1407f.

  The shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b are used to form a rotation axis of the movable body 1403. The right end of the shaft 1407a is fixed to the left end of the shaft fixing portion 1403c of the movable body 1403. On the other hand, the left end of the shaft 1407a is provided in a shaft through hole provided in the shaft support 1407c so that the shaft 1407a can rotate. Further, the left end of the shaft 1407b is fixed to the right end of the shaft fixing portion 1403c of the movable body 1403. On the other hand, the right end of the shaft 1407b is fixed to the center of the pinion 1407d through a shaft through hole provided in the shaft support 1407c.

  The shaft support 1407c is used to support the shafts 1407a and 1407b. In addition, the shaft support 1407c supports the movable body 1403 via the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b. Further, the direction of the rotation axis of the movable body 1403 formed by the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b is determined by the installation direction of the shaft support 1407c. In the present embodiment, the axis support section 1407c is the movable body support section 1413 so that the direction of the rotation axis of the movable body 1403 is inclined at a predetermined angle from upper right to lower left in a plane parallel to the game board 200. It is fixed to the front wall surface with screws, but not limited to this.

  The pinion 1407d is used to convert the longitudinal movement of the rack with guide rod 1407e into a rotational movement and rotate the shaft 1407b (details will be described later). The pinion 1407d is fixed to a shaft 1407b, and the shaft 1407b is provided to be rotatable on a shaft support 1407c. The shaft support 1407c is fixed to a movable body support 1413. That is, the pinion 1407d is rotatably fixed to the movable body support 1413. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the rack and the number of teeth of the pinion are determined so that when the rack with guide rod 1407e moves from the initial position to the target position, the pinion rotates about half a turn. Not limited. For example, by providing a hole in the rear cover 1209 of the movable body or the like that can be rotated by 360 ° without interference of the movable body 1403, when the rack 1407e with guide rods moves from the initial position to the target position, the pinion is reduced by about one. The configuration may be such that the pinion rotates, or the pinion may rotate about one or more rotations. In addition, when the rack with a guide rod 1407e moves from the initial position to the target position and the pinion makes one rotation, the posture of the movable body 1403 at the initial position and the posture of the movable body 1403 at the target position are the same. Become.

  The guide-bar-attached rack 1407e is used to convert the vertical movement caused by the rotation of the belt 1458a shown in FIG. 29 to rotate the pinion 1407d (details will be described later). The rack with guide bar 1407e has a guide bar 1407e1 and a rack 1407e2. The guide rod 1407e1 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The guide rod 1407e1 is provided on the front end face (the end face on which no teeth are formed) of the rack 1407e2 so that the guide rod 1407e1 and the rack 1407e2 are integrated. The rack with guide bar 1407e is slidably mounted on the rack guide 1413a of the movable body support 1413 so that the teeth of the rack 1407e2 and the teeth of the pinion 1407d mesh with each other. Further, a guide portion (not shown) is provided on the wall surface of the rack 1407e2 (the wall surface in contact with the rack guide portion 1409a of the motor cover portion 1409 with a guide portion). Further, a roller portion that can roll can be provided on the sliding surface of the rack with guide rod 1407e. In this embodiment, the pinion 1407d is fixed to the shaft 1407b inclined at the above-mentioned predetermined angle. For this reason, the tooth tip of the rack 1407e2 has a substantially trapezoidal side surface, so that the tooth tip of the rack 1407e2 is parallel to the tooth tip of the pinion 1407d inclined at the above-mentioned predetermined angle. I can't.

  The roller 1407f is used for guiding the rack 1407e with a guide rod to the guide portion 1452 shown in FIG. The roller 1407f is mounted on the end surface of the guide rod 1407e1 of the guide rod-equipped rack 1407e so as to be rollable (or slidable). Further, a rack 1407e with a guide rod is provided on the rack guide portion 1413a of the movable body support portion 1413 so that the roller 1407f can be rolled (or slidable) by the guide portions 1452a and 1452b of the guide portion 1452. .

  The guide-equipped motor cover 1409 is used to guide the movement of the guide-bar-attached rack 1407e provided on the rack guide 1414a of the movable body support 1413. Further, the motor cover 1409 with a guide is used as a cover of the motor 1411 fixed to the movable body support 1413. The motor cover with guide 1409 has a rack guide 1409a and a motor cover 1409b. The motor cover 1409 with a guide is provided so that the rack 1407e with a guide rod can slide in the front-rear direction at the rack guide 1413a of the movable body support 1413 and does not move in the vertical and horizontal directions. It is attached to the front wall surface of the part 1413. Further, the rack guide 1409a has a substantially plate shape, and a groove extending in the front-rear direction is formed on a surface in contact with the rack 1407e with a guide rod. Further, a guide (not shown) formed on the wall surface of the rack 1407e2 is slidable by an upper groove provided in the rack guide 1409a. The width of the upper groove in the up-down direction is a degree obtained by adding a slight allowance (clearance) to the upper and lower widths of a guide portion (not shown) formed on the wall surface of the rack 1407e2. For this reason, the vertical movement of the rack 1407e with a guide bar is restricted by the rack guide 1409a. In addition, the rack 1407e with guide rods is sandwiched between the rack guides 1409a and the rack guides 1413a provided on the movable body support 1413, so that the left and right movement of the rack with guide rods 1407e is restricted.

  The motor 1411 is a drive source for performing an operation of opening a part of the middle part (or movable body) 1425 of the movable body and an operation of rotating (particularly described later). The motor 1411 is fixed to the front wall surface of the movable body supporting portion 1413 with screws so that the rotation axis of the motor (the side to which the spur gear 1419c is attached) faces rearward. Further, the movable body support portion 1413 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1411 passes. The motor 1411 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1411; however, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but the motor is not limited thereto.

  The movable body support portion 1413 is used to support and operate the movable body 1401 (the movable body front portion 1403, the movable body rear portion 1405, and the movable body middle portion 1425). The movable body support 1413 has a substantially plate shape. Further, the movable body support portion 1413 mainly has a rack guide portion 1413a, a belt fixing portion 1413b, an inner rail attachment portion 1413c, and a guide rod slide portion 1413d.

  The rack guide 1413a has a substantially plate shape. Further, two projections are provided at predetermined intervals on the left wall surface (the surface where the rack 1407e2 contacts) of the rack guide 1413a in parallel in the left-right direction. For this reason, the joining surface of the rack 1407e2 and the rack guide 1413a is reduced, and the frictional force between the rack 1407e2 and the rack guide 1413a is reduced. Further, bearings, steel balls, rollers, or the like may be provided on the wall surface of the rack guide 1413a so that the rack 1407e2 can move smoothly.

  The belt fixing portion 1413b is used for fixing the movable body supporting portion 1413 to the belt 1458a shown in FIG. The belt fixing portion 1413b is configured to sandwich a belt portion at a predetermined position of the belt 1458a between two substantially plate-shaped plates.

  The inner rail attachment part 1413c is an attachment part of the inner rail 1464b of the guide rail 1464, and is provided between the belt fixing part 1413b and the guide rod slide part 1413d.

  The guide rod slide portion 1413d is used to enable the movable body support portion 1413 to move along the guide rod 1466. The guide rod slide portion 1413d has a substantially cylindrical shape with an open front. The inner diameter of the guide rod slide portion 1413d is a length obtained by adding a margin (clearance) to the outer diameter of the guide rod 1466. Further, the movable body support portion 1413 is provided with a through hole for passing light of the LED mounted on the LED board 1415 and a through hole for passing the shaft 1419f of the power transmission mechanism 1419.

  The LED board 1415 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body supporting portion 1413 with screws. On the mounting surface of the LED substrate 1415, an LED (not shown) and a driving circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED are mounted. The LED board cover part 1417 is used to house the LED board 1415, and is fixed to the rear wall surface of the LED board 1415 with screws.

  The power transmission mechanism 1419 is a mechanism used to execute an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 and a rotation operation by rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1411. The power transmission mechanism 1419 mainly includes a spur gear 1419a, a spur gear 1419b, a spur gear 1419c, a helical spring 1419d, a spring pressing part 1419e, and a shaft 1419f. The spur gear 1419a is fixed to a rotation shaft of the motor 1411. Also, the spur gear 1419b is installed on the rear wall surface of the LED board cover portion 1417 adjacent to the spur gear 1419a so that the teeth of the spur gear 1419a and the teeth of the spur gear 1419b mesh with each other. Also, the spur gear 1419c is installed on the rear wall surface of the LED board cover 1417 adjacent to the spur gear 1419b so that the teeth of the spur gear 1419b and the teeth of the spur gear 1419c mesh with each other. A hole that penetrates the shaft 1419f is provided in the center of the spur gear 1419c, and the shaft 1419f is passed so as to be rotatable. Further, the front end of the shaft 1419f is fixed to the center of the interior decoration part 1425b. A substantially square groove for rotating the holed rear disk 1425f is formed in the center of the front wall surface of the spur gear 1419c. A helix spring 1419d is provided on the rear side of the spur gear 1419c. A spring pressing portion 1419e is provided on the rear side of the helical spring 1419d. Therefore, the substantially rectangular groove provided at the center of the spur gear 1419c is pressed against the center of the holed rear disk 1425f by the elastic force of the helical spring 1419d. Therefore, the force due to the rotation of the spur gear 1419c is efficiently transmitted to the holed rear disk 1425f. Further, in this embodiment, in order to make the position of the rotation axis of the motor 1411 (position coordinates on a plane parallel to the game board 200) different from the position of the shaft 1419f (position coordinates on a plane parallel to the game board 200). , A power transmission mechanism 1419 is used. Thereby, it is possible to arbitrarily provide an installation space for the motor 1411. In addition, the installation space for the motor 1411 can be arbitrarily provided in consideration of the center of gravity of the movable body 1401. Further, by changing the ratio between the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419a and the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419c, the rotation speed of the rotating shaft of the motor 1411 can be converted to a predetermined rotation speed to rotate the shaft 1419f. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419c is larger than the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419c. For this reason, the power transmission mechanism 1419 is used as a speed reduction mechanism. Further, the torque of the motor 1411 is amplified and transmitted to the shaft 1419f. The power transmission mechanism cover 1421 is used to house the power transmission mechanism 1419, and is fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body support 1413 by screws.

  The movable body middle portion 1425 can execute an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 and an operation of rotating the movable body middle portion 1425 in addition to the vertical movement operation. The movable body middle portion 1425 has a substantially truncated cone shape. The movable body middle part 1425 is arranged at a predetermined position on the front wall surface of the movable body support part 1413 so that an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle part 1425 and an operation of rotating the movable body middle part 1425 can be executed. You. In addition, an outer decoration portion 1425a is provided outside the front surface of the movable body middle portion 1425, an inner decoration portion 1425c is provided inside the outer decoration portion 1425a, and an inner decoration portion 1425b is provided inside the middle decoration portion 1425c. Have. These decorative portions are formed of a transparent resin in order to transmit light of the LEDs mounted on the LED substrate 1415, but are not limited thereto.

  The outer decorative portion 1425a is divided into six decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6. Each of the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 moves radially around the shaft 1419f (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “radial movement”) and rotates around the shaft 1419f (hereinafter, simply referred to as “radial movement”). Rotation operation "). Each of the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 has the same shape and a substantially arc shape. The decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 are fixed to the front surfaces of the support portions 1425d1 to 14256e6 of the support portion 1425d with guide rods by screws. The decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 are arranged such that the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 are arranged in a ring shape with a circular opening inside by arranging the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6.

  The inner decorative portion 1425b rotates around the shaft 1419f. The inner decorative portion 1425b has a substantially disc shape. A shaft fixing portion (not shown) for fixing the front end surface of the shaft 1419f is provided at the center of the circle on the rear surface of the inner decorative portion 1425b. In the vicinity of the circumference of the rear surface of the inner decorative portion 1425b, two substantially cylindrical screwing portions for screwing to the front surface of the front circular plate 1425e with holes are provided with the center of the circle as a diagonal. Further, the middle decorative portion 1425c has a substantially disk shape. A through hole for passing the shaft 1419f is provided at the center of the circle of the middle decorative portion 1425c. At the center of the circle on the front surface of the middle decoration part 1425c, there is provided a circular depression corresponding to the size of the inner decoration part 1425b for fitting the inner decoration part 1425b. In addition, two through-holes are provided in the recessed portion for passing a substantially cylindrical screwing portion provided on the rear surface of the inner decorative portion 1425b. That is, the middle decorative portion 1425c is integrated with the inner decorative portion 1425b, and thus rotates integrally with the inner decorative portion 1425b.

  The support portion with guide rod 1425d is used to execute the above-described radial movement and rotational movement of the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 of the outer decorative portion 1425a. The support part 1425d with a guide rod is divided into six parts (support parts 1425d1 to 1425d6), and is arranged in front of the front disk 1425e with holes. Each of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 has the same shape, and has a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the long side on the outside has an arc shape. In addition, the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are arranged so that the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are arranged in a ring shape having a hexagonal opening on the inside by arranging the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6. The decorative part 1425c is rotatable. A substantially cylindrical guide rod (partially shown) is provided on the rear surface of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6. In addition, the support part 1425d with a guide rod is formed of a non-transparent resin, but may be formed of a transparent resin.

  The perforated front disk 1425e is used for rotating the inner decorative portion 1425b and the middle decorative portion 1425c. The front disk 1425e with a hole is disposed behind the support portion 1425d with a guide rod. Further, the front disk 1425e with holes has a substantially disk shape. A through-hole through which the shaft 1419f is rotatable is provided in the center of the holed front disk 1425e. In addition, six long holes of a predetermined length are provided at intervals of 60 ° in the radial direction from the vicinity of the center of the circle in the front circular plate 1425e with holes. Guide rods of the corresponding support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are movably arranged in these six long holes. When the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 move radially along these long holes, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 exert almost no force on the front disk 1425e with holes. Not to be. Further, the two screwed portions of the front surface of the holed front disk 1425e and the inner decorative portion 1425b are fixed by screws. Therefore, when the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are stopped at the ends (upper and lower ends) of these six long holes, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 rotate to move. Rotational force acts on the perforated front disk 1425e, and the inner decorative portion 1425b and the middle decorative portion 1425c fixed to the perforated front disk 1425e rotate. Further, the front circular plate 1425e with holes is formed of a transparent resin material in order to transmit light of the LED mounted on the LED substrate 1415, but is not limited thereto.

  The perforated rear disk 1425f is used for performing radial movement and rotational movement of the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6, and rotating operations of the inner decorative portion 1425b and the middle decorative portion 1425c. The rear disc 1425f with a hole has a substantially disc shape. The rear disc 1425f with holes is disposed behind the front disc 1425e with holes, and is rotatably disposed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the movable body supporting portion 1413. Further, a through hole for passing the shaft 1419f is provided in the center of the rear disc 1425f with a hole. A substantially square (not shown) fixing portion for fixing to the spur gear 1419c is formed at the center of the rear surface of the holed rear disk 1425f. Therefore, the force due to the rotation of the spur gear 1419c is transmitted to the holed rear disk 1425f. Further, in the rear disk 1425f with holes, substantially arc-shaped long holes having a predetermined length are formed spirally around the center of the circle at intervals of 60 °. Guide rods of the corresponding support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are slidably (or rollable) arranged in these six long holes. In addition, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are guided by the long holes corresponding to the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 by the rotation of the holed rear disc 1425f. In this case, the above-described radial movement can be performed. In addition, the guide portions of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 stop at the ends of the long holes corresponding to the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6, respectively, by the rotation of the holed rear disk 1425f. In this case, the above-described rotational movement can be executed. That is, by performing the above-described radial movement in the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6, the above-described radial movement of the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 of the outer decorative portion 1425a is also performed. Therefore, the operation of opening the movable body middle portion 1425 is performed. In addition, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are rotated as described above, whereby the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 of the outer decorative portion 1425a are rotated as described above. In addition, the rotation operation of the inner decoration portion 1425b and the middle decoration portion 1425c is performed in accordance with the rotation. Therefore, the rotating operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is performed. The rear disc 1425f with holes is formed of a transparent resin in order to transmit light of the LED mounted on the LED board 1415, but is not limited thereto.

  In this embodiment, when the guide rods provided on the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are guided by the corresponding long holes provided on the holed rear disk 1425f and are moving, the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d1 are provided. Each guide rod provided in 1425d6 has a configuration in which almost no force acts on the front disk 1425e with holes. Therefore, when the rotation axis of the motor 1411 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 first (an operation in which the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 move radially). After the completion of the operation of opening the part of the movable body middle portion 1425, the rotation operation is performed clockwise as viewed from the front of the movable body middle portion 1425 (the rotational movement of the outer decoration portion 1425a, the inner decoration portion 1425b, and the middle decoration portion 1425c). Rotation operation) is performed, but is not limited thereto. For example, when the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are guided and moved by the long holes corresponding to each provided in the holed rear disk 1425f, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are A configuration in which a large force acts on the perforated front disk 1425e (for example, six long holes of a predetermined length are provided in a spiral linear shape from the center of the circle toward the outer periphery, each being provided at intervals of 60 °. Configuration). In this case, the opening operation and the rotating operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 are performed simultaneously. After the operation of opening a part of the movable body middle part 1425 is completed (or in the middle), the part of the movable body middle part 1425 is closed by rotating the rotating shaft of the motor 1411 clockwise as viewed from behind. The operation becomes executable. In addition, by rotating the rotation axis of the motor 1411 clockwise as viewed from the rear, the movable body middle portion 1425 performs a counterclockwise rotation operation as viewed from the front. Further, by controlling the number of rotations of the rotating shaft of the motor 1411, only the operation of opening the part of the movable body middle portion 1425 can be executed.

  Next, the remaining configuration of the lower right side movable body support unit 1450 will be described with reference to FIG. The motor 1462 is a drive source for performing the movement operation of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the operation of changing the posture of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401. The motor 1462 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the middle base 1460 by screws so that the spur gear with pulley 1458c (see FIG. 30) fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor is located in front of the motor. The middle base 1460 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1462 passes. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1462, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but the motor is not limited thereto. In addition, the motor 1462 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG.

  The guide rail 1464 is used to guide the direction of movement of the movable body 1401. The guide rail 1464 has an outer rail 1464a and an inner rail 1464b. The inner rail 1464b is fixed to the inner rail mounting portion 1413c of the movable member support portion 1413 by screws in the vertical direction so that the movable member 1401 can move in the vertical direction. Further, the outer rail 1464a is fixed to the center of the rear wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 by screws in the vertical direction so that the movable body 1401 can move in the vertical direction. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are arranged on the rail contact surface between the inner rail 1464b and the outer rail 1464a so as to reduce the friction between the rails and allow the rails to slide smoothly. Further, due to the configuration of the guide rail 1464, the movable body support portion 1413 can operate in the installation direction of the outer rail 1464a fixed to the middle base portion 1460, that is, in the vertical direction. A rail stop (not shown) for stopping the inner rail 1464b is provided at the lower end of the outer rail 1464a.

  The guide rod 1466 is used so that the entire movable body 1401 can be translated along the guide rod 1466. It is also used to reduce the moment of force due to the movement of the movable body 1401. The guide rod 1466 is formed of an iron rod. The guide bar 1466 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the middle base 1460 so as to be parallel to the installation direction of the guide rail 1464 in the vertical direction.

  The helical spring 1468 is used to assist the upward movement of the movable body 1401. In this embodiment, a compression spring is used as the helical spring 1468. The helix spring 1468 is provided on the guide bar 1466 so as to wind around the guide bar 1466. The spring pressing portion 1470 is slidable by a guide rod 1466, and is provided on the guide rod 1466 so as to press the helical spring 1468 from above the helical spring 1468. A guide rod slide portion 1413d of the movable body support portion 1413 is provided on the guide rod 1466 above the spring pressing portion 1470. With this configuration, when the movable body 1401 is located below, the helical spring 1468 is elastically deformed and compressed. Therefore, the upward movement from the initial position (lower end) of the movable body 1401 may be performed smoothly.

  The photo sensor 1472 is used for detecting an initial position of the movable body 1401. The photo sensor 1472 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1472 is provided with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and receives light emitted from the light emitting unit at the light receiving unit. The photosensor 1472 has a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that face each other in the front-rear direction, and have a U-shape (a shape whose left side is open) when viewed from the right side. Further, when the movable body 1401 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1401 is fixed to the front wall surface of the rear base 1474 with screws so that the lower end portion of the movable body support 1413 is located between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. .

  Next, the movement operation of the movable body 1201 of the upper right side accessory 1200 and the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 31A is a schematic front view of the upper right side accessory 1200 in a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, as viewed from the front. FIG. 31A is a schematic rear view of the upper right side accessory 1200 in the state shown in FIG. FIG. 31B is a schematic front view of the upper right side accessory 1200 in a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, as viewed from the front. FIG. 31B shows a state immediately before the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 is executed. FIG. 31B is a schematic rear view of the upper right side accessory 1200 in the state shown in FIG. FIG. 31C is a schematic front view of the upper right side accessory 1200 in a state after the rotation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed after the movable body 1201 reaches the target position. FIG. 31C is a schematic rear view of the upper right side accessory 1200 in the state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 31A shows a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position. Further, the rotating operation of the movable body 1203 is not executed. Further, the movable body 1201 can perform an operation of moving from the initial position to the target position and an operation of moving from the target position to the initial position. Further, in a range where the movable body 1201 can be moved, the upper end position is set as the initial position of the movable body 1201, and the lower end position is set as the target position of the movable body 1201.

  Subsequently, a moving operation from the state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position will be described with reference to FIG. The base portion 1254 is provided with two through holes that are inclined substantially linearly from upper left to lower right at a predetermined interval when viewed from behind. The hole on the right when viewed from behind is the guide hole 1254a, and the hole on the left when viewed from behind is the guide hole 1254b. In the guide hole 1254a, a connecting portion 1215a fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 of the rear cover portion of the movable body 1201 is rollably (or slidably) disposed. . In the guide hole 1254b, a connecting portion 1215b and a connecting portion 1215c fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 are rollably (or slidably) disposed. Further, since the base portion 1254 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820 by screws, the guide hole portions 1254a and 1254b are fixed and do not move. Therefore, the movable body 1201 can be moved in parallel by being guided by the guide holes 1254a and 1254b.

  The power transmission mechanism 1256 (1256a to 1256c) has a mechanism for transmitting the rotation force of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 to the connecting portion 1215d fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover 1209. The rotation of the rotating shaft of the motor 1260 causes the spur gear 1256b to rotate, the spur gear 1256b to rotate, thereby rotating the spur gear 1256a, and the spur gear 1256a to rotate, thereby rotating the spur gear 1256c with a hole. The spur gear 1256c with a hole mainly has a force acting hole with a relief hole 1256c1, a force acting hole with a relief hole 1256c2, and a spur gear 1256c3. When the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, the force acting hole with an escape hole 1256c1 has a long hole in the shape of a hiragana “ku” as viewed from the rear, and is approximately 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the rear. It is rotating around. A slot in the lower part of the “C” shape (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a force acting hole) extends in the rotation axis direction of the spur gear 1256c3, and the slot in the upper part of the “C” shape ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a relief hole.) Extends in the clockwise circumferential direction as viewed from behind the spur gear 1256c3. In addition, when the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, the force acting hole with an escape hole 1256c2 has a long hole in the shape of a hiragana of a hiragana when viewed from behind, and rotates about 180 °. . The “H” -shaped long hole is formed following the locus of movement of the connecting portion 1215e. When the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from behind, the spur gear 1256c with holes rotates counterclockwise when viewed from behind. In this case, the force acting hole 1256c1 with the escape hole rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis of the spur gear 1256c3 as viewed from the rear. The spur gear 1256c has a shape such that the spur gear 1256c is always hidden by the movable body 1201 even if the movable body 1201 is moved by the rotation of the spur gear 1256c, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the spur gear 1256c. It is.

  A connecting portion 1215d fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 is slidably (or slidably) disposed in the force acting hole portion 1256c1 with an escape hole. In a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, the connecting portion 1215d is in contact with the upper or lower wall of the force acting hole of the force acting hole 1256c1 with a relief hole (the connecting portion 1215d is a force acting hole with a relief hole). It does not contact the left and right wall surfaces of 1256c1.) Therefore, when the spur gear 1256c with holes rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, the connecting portion 1215d has an upper wall surface of the force acting hole of the force acting hole with relief hole 1256c1 (a state in which the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position). , A force due to a counterclockwise rotation as viewed from behind acts on a tangential direction of a locus of movement of a contact surface between the connecting portion 1215d and the force acting hole 1256c1 with the relief hole. The connecting portion 1215d is fixed to the rear wall surface of the same movable body rear cover 1209 as the connecting portions 1215a to 1215c. Therefore, when the force acts on the connecting portion 1215d, the connecting portions 1215a to 1215d move.

  In a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, the force-operating hole portion with relief hole 1256c1 is located substantially horizontally leftward when viewed from behind the rotation axis of the spur gear 1256c3 of the spur gear 1256c with hole. Therefore, when the spur gear 1256c3 rotates approximately 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the rear from the state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, the connecting portion 1215d can move downward. . Also, when the spur gear 1256c3 rotates about 90 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the rear from the state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, the connecting portion is formed by the force action hole of the force action hole 1256c1 with the relief hole. Reference numeral 1215d enables the rightward movement when viewed from behind. That is, when the movable body 1201 moves from the initial position to the target position, the connecting portion 1215d can be moved in a substantially lower right direction when viewed from behind by the spur gear 1256c with holes.

  In addition, when the movable body 1201 moves from the initial position to the position immediately before the target position, the force due to the rotation of the spur gear 1256c is arranged in the force acting hole 1256c2. The above-mentioned "heavy" long hole is formed so as not to be transmitted to 1215e. Further, the connecting portion 1215e is fixed to a spur gear with guide rod 1211b fixed to the rear wall surface of the base portion 1254. Therefore, when the movable body 1201 moves from the initial position to the position immediately before the target position, the connecting portion 1215e moves together with the moving of the connecting portions 1215a to 1215d.

  FIG. 31B shows a state where the movable body 1201 has moved to the target position. The lower end position is set as the target position of the movable body 1201 in a range where the movable body 1201 is movable. FIG. 31B shows a state immediately before the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 is executed.

  Next, the movement operation of the movable body 1201 and the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 will be described with reference to FIG. When the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, the connecting portion 1215c hits the lower end wall of the guide hole 1254b of the base 1254 and stops. Similarly, the connecting portion 1215a (not shown) stops at the lower end (not shown) of the guide hole 1254a of the base portion 1254. Therefore, even if the rotation axis of the motor 1260 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from behind, the movable body 1201 cannot move.

  Further, in the state where the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, in order to prevent the force due to the counterclockwise rotation seen from behind the spur gear 1256c with the hole from being transmitted to the connecting portion 1215d, the “く” shape of the force acting hole 1256c1 with the relief hole is formed. A long hole (escape hole) portion in the upper half of the shape is provided. For this reason, from the state where the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, the spur gear with guide rod 1211b can be further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from behind. Further, in a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, the “heavy” shape of the force acting hole 1256c2 with the relief hole is transmitted so that the force due to the counterclockwise rotation seen from behind the spur gear 1256c with the hole is transmitted to the connecting portion 1215e. A wall surface at one end of the shape (a wall surface with which the connecting portion 1215e is in contact) is provided. Therefore, by rotating the motor 1260 counterclockwise as viewed from the rear from the state where the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, a rotational force acts on the connecting portion 1215e in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from behind. Will do. The connecting portion 1215e is fixed to a rotatable spur gear 1211b with a guide rod on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover 1209. Therefore, by rotating the motor 1260 counterclockwise as viewed from the rear from the state where the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, the spur gear with guide rod 1211b rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the rear. Become. In addition, the spur gear with guide rod 1211b rotates counterclockwise when viewed from behind, so that the spur gear 1211a rotates clockwise when viewed from behind, and the spur gear with stopper function unit 1211c rotates counterclockwise when viewed from behind. Will rotate. A shaft 1211d (see FIG. 29) is fixed to the rotation shaft of the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function, and the rotation of the shaft 1211d causes the movable decorative portion 1203 to rotate clockwise as viewed from the front.

  FIG. 31C shows a state after the movable member 1201 has reached the target position and the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 has been performed. The movable decorative part 1203 has been rotated clockwise by about 180 ° as viewed from the front from the state of FIG.

  FIG. 31 (c ′) shows that the spur gear 1211c with the stopper function portion is rotated by about 180 ° when the motor 1260 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle when viewed from behind as shown in FIG. 31 (b ′). This shows a state in which it is rotated counterclockwise. Also, the connecting portion 1215d fixed to the movable body rear cover portion 1209 hits the end wall surface of the upper half long hole portion of the “く” shape of the force acting hole portion 1256c1 with the relief hole of the spur gear 1256c with the hole. Has stopped. For this reason, the spur gear 1256c with a hole cannot rotate counterclockwise when viewed from this state. For this reason, even if the motor 1260 continues to be driven to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from behind, the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c cannot rotate, so that the movable decoration portion 1203 maintains its posture after execution of the rotation operation. Is done.

  Further, the rotation speed of the spur gear 1211c with the stopper function of the power transmission mechanism 1211 of this embodiment is increased in comparison with the rotation speed of the spur gear 1256a fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1260. Further, the torque of the spur gear with stopper function 1211c decreases in inverse proportion to the increase in the rotation speed. For this reason, the decorative portion 1203 is fixed to the shaft 1211d so as to be rotatable with a relatively small torque. On the other hand, since the rotation speed of the spur gear 1211c with the stopper function is increased, even if the spur gear 1211c with the stopper function slightly rotates or swings due to the gap (backlash) of meshing between the gears, the movable decorative portion 1203 can be used. May rotate or shake, making it difficult to maintain posture. For this reason, a posture holding unit 1213 that holds the posture of the movable decoration unit 1203 is provided. The posture holding unit 1213 is used to maintain the posture before the execution of the rotation operation of the decoration unit 1203 before execution of the rotation operation of the decoration unit 1203, and is used to maintain the posture before the execution of the rotation operation of the decoration unit 1203. Used to maintain post-exercise posture.

  Next, the posture holding unit 1213 shown in FIGS. 29 and 31 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 illustrates a state in which the posture holding unit 1213 is installed on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover unit 1209. In addition, the state before the rotation operation of the decoration unit 1203 is executed and the posture before the execution of the rotation operation is maintained is shown.

  The first holding portion 1213a and the second holding portion 1213b are symmetrical with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the spur gear 1211a and the rotation axis of the spur gear 1211c2, and have a substantially arc shape. Further, the movable body rear cover 1209 is rotated such that the fulcrum 1213a1 at one end of the substantially arc shape of the first holding part 1213a becomes a fulcrum of rotation in a plane parallel to the rear wall of the movable body rear cover 1209. It is rotatably screwed to the rear wall. Similarly, the movable body rear cover is set such that the fulcrum 1213b1 at one end of the substantially arc shape of the second holding part 1213b becomes a fulcrum of rotation in a plane parallel to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover 1209. The portion 1209 is rotatably screwed to the rear wall surface. Also, a positioning wall (not shown) is provided one at the lower right when viewed from behind the spring locking portion 1213a2 and one at the upper left as viewed from behind the spring locking portion 1213b2. Further, a force is applied to the spring locking portion 1213a2 at the other end of the first holding portion 1213a in the contraction direction of the helical spring 1213c. Similarly, a force is applied to the spring locking portion 1213b2 at the other end of the second holding portion 1213b in the contraction direction of the helical spring 1213c. For this reason, the other end of the first holding portion 1213a and the other end of the second holding portion 1213b are pressed against the respective positioning walls by the predetermined elastic force of the helical spring 1213c. The 1213a and the second holding unit 1213b are kept stationary without rotating.

  A holding portion 1213a3 for preventing the stopper function portion 1211c1 of the stopper function portion spur gear 1211c from easily moving is provided inside the substantially circular arc shape of the first holding portion 1213a. The holding portion 1213a3 has a substantially semi-circular arc-shaped depression corresponding to the substantially semi-cylindrical outer surface of the stopper function portion 1211c1. Before the rotation operation of the movable decorative part 1203 is performed, the stopper function part 1211c1 is located on the holding part 1213a3. Therefore, the rotation of the spur gear with stopper function 1211c is suppressed by the elastic force of the helical spring 1213c. Therefore, before executing the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203, the posture before the execution of the rotation operation is maintained.

  Similarly, after the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed, the stopper function portion 1211c1 is located in the substantially arc-shaped inner holding portion 1213b3 of the second holding portion 1213b. Therefore, the movement of the stopper function part 1211c1 is restricted by the elastic force of the helical spring 1213c, and the rotation of the spur gear 1211c with the stopper function part is suppressed. Therefore, after the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed, the posture after the execution of the rotation operation is maintained.

  Further, the upper right side accessory 1200 according to the present embodiment sets the lower end position of the moving range of the upper right side movable body 1201 as the target position, but is not limited thereto. By arbitrarily setting the rotation angle of the rotation axis of the motor 1260, the target position of the upper right side movable body 1201 may be arbitrarily set, or the rotational operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 may be set. Whether or not to execute may be determined. For example, the target position of the upper right side movable body 1201 may be set in accordance with the reliability of the big hit in the reach effect, or in accordance with the player's advantage in various big hit games, small hit games, and the like. Alternatively, the target position of the upper right side movable body 1201 may be set. Further, it may be determined whether or not to perform the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 according to the reliability of the big hit in the reach effect, or may correspond to the player's advantage in various big hit games, small hit games, and the like. In this way, it may be determined whether or not the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed. Further, the operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side accessory 1200 may be controlled to be symmetrical with the operation of the upper left side movable body 1301 of the upper left side accessory 1300, or the upper left side may be controlled. The operation may be controlled so as not to be symmetric with the operation of the upper left movable body 1301 of the side accessory 1300.

  Further, according to the upper right side accessory 1200 according to the present embodiment, the movement of the movable body 1201 and the rotation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 can be continuously performed by one drive source. is there. Further, according to the upper right side accessory 1200 according to the present embodiment, the rotation of the movable decorative portion 1203 may be able to be accelerated by the gear used for the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 in some cases. For this reason, since the rotation speed of the rotating operation of the movable decoration portion 1203 can be increased as compared with the moving operation speed of the movable body 1201, by performing these operations in series, unexpectedness is given to the player. May be possible. Further, the upper right side accessory 1200 of the present embodiment has a posture holding unit that holds the posture of the movable decoration unit 1203. For this reason, even in the case of a movable body whose speed is increased by the gear ratio, it may be possible to execute the operation control of the movable body while reliably maintaining the posture of the movable body.

  Further, the movable body 1201 in the present embodiment can operate from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in a plane parallel to the game board 200, but is not limited thereto. For example, the movable body 1201 can perform a moving operation in various directions by installing the installation direction of the upper right side movable body support unit 1250 of the upper right side accessory 1200 in various directions. . In addition, the installation direction of the upper right side movable body support unit 1250 can be arbitrarily changed by using another drive unit (for example, a motor or a gear) for the upper right side movable body support unit 1250.

  Next, an operation of the movable body 1401 of the lower right side accessory 1400 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 33A to 33C are schematic diagrams of the right side surface of the lower right side accessory 1400 in which the state of movement of the movable body 1401 from the initial position to the target position is shown stepwise. FIG. 33A shows a state where the movable body 1401 is located at the initial position. FIG. 33B shows a state where the movable body 1401 has moved upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position. FIG. 33C shows a state where the movable body 1403 has moved upward from the position shown in FIG. 33B and has reached the target position. The movable body 1401 of this embodiment includes a movable body (front of movable body) 1403, a movable body (rear of movable body) 1405, and a movable body (middle of movable body) 1425. In addition, the movable body 1401 moves up and down by driving a motor 1462 shown in FIG.

  In the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 33A, the roller 1407f of the posture change mechanism 1407 is located near the lower end of the guide 1452a of the guide 1452. In addition, the movable body 1403 has a posture in which a substantially circular arc is convex downward.

  The movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 33B is a state in which the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is located near the upper end of the guide 1452a of the guide 1452. In addition, since the guide portion 1452a is not inclined in the front-rear direction, the rack 1407e with guide bars does not move in the front-rear direction in the section of the guide portion 1452a. Therefore, a pinion 1407d fixed to a shaft 1407b (see FIG. 30) serving as a rotation axis for changing the posture of the movable body 1403 does not rotate. Therefore, the posture of the movable body 1403 is maintained such that the substantially circular arc is convex downward.

  The movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 33C is a state in which the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is located near the upper end of the guide 1452b of the guide 1452. In addition, since the guiding portion 1452b is inclined at a predetermined angle in the forward and upward direction, in the section of the guiding portion 1452b, the guide rod-equipped rack 1407e moves forward. For this reason, the pinion 1407d rotates a predetermined angle clockwise as viewed from the right in proportion to the amount of forward movement of the rack 1407e with guide rods. Therefore, the movable body 1403 rotates around the axis 1407b (see FIG. 30) as a rotation axis by a predetermined angle clockwise as viewed from the right. That is, when the movable body 1403 is being guided in the section of the guiding portion 1452b, the moving operation in the up-down direction and the rotating operation in which the posture gradually changes are simultaneously executed. Further, since the guiding section 1452a and the guiding section 1452b are connected, the operation of the movable body 1403 in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided to the guiding section 1452a and the movable body 1403 in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided to the guiding section 1452b. Will be executed continuously. Further, the rotation speed and the rotation angle of the movable body 1403 can be changed by changing the inclination angle of the guiding portion 1452b. For example, when the inclination angle of the guiding portion 1452b is reduced, the rotation speed of the movable body 1403 decreases, and the rotation angle decreases. Conversely, when the inclination angle of the guidance portion 1452b increases, the rotation speed of the movable body 1403 increases. , The rotation angle increases. For this reason, when the guide portion 1452a is provided relatively long and the inclination angle of the guide portion 1452b is increased, the posture of the movable body 1403 changes rapidly immediately before the target position. The rotation speed and rotation angle of the movable body 1403 can be changed by changing the number of teeth of the pinion 1407d. For example, when the number of teeth of the pinion 1407d is increased, the rotation speed of the movable body 1403 decreases, and the rotation angle also decreases. Also, when the number of teeth of the pinion 1407d is reduced, the rotation speed of the movable body 1403 increases, and the rotation angle also increases.

  Further, the movement of the movable body 1401 from the target position (FIG. 33 (c)) to the initial position (FIG. 33 (a)) is in the opposite direction to the upward movement of the movable body 1401 (in the present embodiment, the forward movement). This is executed by rotating the rotation shaft of the motor 1462 shown in FIG. The setting of the initial position of the movable body 1401 is performed using a photo sensor 1472 shown in FIG. In addition, the initial position of the movable body 1401 according to the present embodiment is set as the initial position near the lower end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move, and is set as the target position near the upper end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move. . For example, the initial position may be near the upper end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move, and the target position may be near the lower end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move.

  The guiding portion 1452 used in this embodiment includes a guiding portion 1452a having a groove extending linearly in the vertical direction and a guiding portion having a groove extending linearly at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction. 1452b, but is not limited to this. For example, even if the guide portion 1452 is formed only of the guide portion 1452b having a groove that extends linearly inclining at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction, the movable body 1403 can perform the vertical movement and the posture. The changing operation is performed. The guiding section 1452 may have a configuration including another guiding section in addition to the guiding section 1452a and the guiding section 1452b, or may have a configuration in which a plurality of guiding sections are further added.

  FIGS. 34A to 34D are perspective views of the lower right side object 1400 in which the movable body 1401 moves from the initial position to the target position in a stepwise manner as viewed from the upper right front to the lower left rear. .

  FIG. 34A shows a state where the movable body 1401 is located at the initial position. In this case, the posture (posture) of the movable body 1403 is a state in which the front decoration part 1403a forming one outer surface of the movable body 1403 faces forward, and after the other decorative surface 1403a forms the other outer surface of the movable body 1403. The decorative part 1403b is facing backward. For this reason, the front decorative portion 1403a is in a visible state, and the rear decorative portion 1403b, which is the other outer surface of the movable body 1403, is difficult to visually recognize. Further, since at least a part of the movable body 1403 blocks at least a part in front of the movable body 1405, it is difficult for a player to visually recognize the entire movable body 1405. In this embodiment, the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810 shown in FIGS. 3 and 10 are located in front of the movable body 1401. Therefore, when the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, the movable body 1403 interferes with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810. Therefore, when the movable body 1403 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1403 is in a posture that does not interfere with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 (for example, the front stage 244) and the transparent game board 810. Has been maintained. Further, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the movable body 1401 is visible through the transparent game board, but the movable body 1401 may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the movable body 1401.

  FIG. 34B shows a state in which the entire movable body 1401 has been translated upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position. The upward movement of the movable body 1401 is executed by rotation of a spur gear 1458c with a pulley and a belt 1458a hung on a pulley 1458d. Further, the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 34B is a state in which the roller 1407f of the posture change mechanism 1407 is located near the upper end of the guiding portion 1452a of the guiding portion 1452. In this case, since the movable body 1403 is in a state before the posture changes, the posture in which the movable body 1403 is located at the initial position is maintained. In the present embodiment, in the section where the guiding portion 1452a is provided, the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810 shown in FIGS. 3 and 10 are located in front of the movable body 1401. Therefore, when the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, the movable body 1403 interferes with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810. Therefore, in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided by the guiding portion 1452a, the posture where the movable body 1403 does not interfere with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810 is maintained.

  FIG. 34C shows a state in which the entire movable body 1401 has been translated upward by a predetermined distance from the position of the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. The upward movement of the movable body 1401 is executed by rotation of a spur gear 1458c with a pulley and a belt 1458a hung on a pulley 1458d. Further, the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 34C is a state in which the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is located in the middle of the upper end and the lower end of the guide 1452b of the guide 1452. In this case, the movable body 1403 is rotated about 90 ° clockwise as viewed from the right about the axes 1407a and 1407b of the posture change mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. For this reason, the front decoration part 1403a forming one outer surface of the movable body 1403 is in a state of facing up, and the rear decoration part 1403b forming the other outer surface of the movable body 1403 is in a state of facing down. It is. In addition, due to a change in the posture of the movable body 1403, a region where the movable body 1405 becomes visible is gradually increasing. In addition, due to the change in the posture of the movable body 1403, at least a part of the movable body 1403 blocks at least a part in front of the movable body 1425, and at least a part of the movable body 1425 is difficult to visually recognize. Further, in the present embodiment, in the section where the guiding portion 1452b is provided, the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810 shown in FIGS. 3 and 10 are not located in front of the movable body 1401. Therefore, even if the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, the movable body 1403 does not interfere with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 or the transparent game board 810.

  FIG. 34D illustrates a state where the movable body 1401 has moved upward by a predetermined distance from the position of the movable body 1401 in the state illustrated in FIG. 34C and has reached the target position. The upward movement of the movable body 1401 is executed by rotation of a spur gear 1458c with a pulley and a belt 1458a hung on a pulley 1458d. Further, the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 34D is a state in which the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is located near the upper end of the guiding portion 1452b of the guiding portion 1452. In this case, the movable body 1403 is rotated about 180 ° clockwise as viewed from the right about the axes 1407a and 1407b of the posture change mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. For this reason, the front decoration part 1403a constituting one outer surface of the movable body 1403 is in a state facing rearward, and the rear decoration part 1403b constituting the other outer surface of the movable body 1403 is facing in front. It is. Therefore, a portion of the movable body 1403 where it is difficult to visually recognize the movable body 1403 before the posture change of the movable body 1403 due to the change in the posture of the movable body 1403 can be visually recognized after the posture change of the movable body 1403. Further, when the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, at least a part of the movable body 1403 does not block the front of the movable body 1405 or the movable body 1425.

  FIG. 34D illustrates a state in which an operation of opening a part of the movable body 1425 and an operation of rotating the movable body 1425 are being performed. In the present embodiment, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 is started from a state where the movable body 1401 has reached the target position, but is not limited thereto. For example, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be started from the state where the movable body 1401 is located at the initial position, or the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be performed in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided by the guiding unit 1452a. The operation may be started, or the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be started in synchronization with the start of the posture change operation of the movable body 1403. In addition, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be started during the operation of the posture change of the movable body 1403 (in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided by the guiding unit 1452b). In addition, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be performed regardless of the movement operation of the movable body 1401, but is not limited thereto.

  FIG. 35 shows a state where the movable body 1401 of the lower right side accessory 1400 is viewed from the lower left rear to the upper right rear. However, the description of the power transmission mechanism cover portion 1421 is omitted for ease of description.

  The movable body middle portion 1425 is located between the movable body front portion 1403 and the movable body rear portion 1405 in the position coordinates in the front-back direction. Further, a motor 1411 serving as a drive source for executing the above-described operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is attached to the motor cover portion 1409 with a guide. When the rotation axis of the motor 1411 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from behind, the spur gear 1419a attached to the rear wall surface of the LED board cover 1417 also rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear in accordance with the rotation axis of the motor 1411. Rotate around. In addition, the rotation of the spur gear 1419a causes the spur gear 1419b to rotate clockwise when viewed from behind. In addition, by the rotation of the spur gear 1419b, the spur gear 1419c is reduced to a predetermined rotation speed, rotates counterclockwise when viewed later, and the above-described operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is executed. Become. As described above, the movable body middle portion 1425 of this embodiment is different from the power source (motor 1462) used for the moving operation of the movable body 1401 and the operation of changing the posture of the movable body front portion 1403. 1411) is used, but is not limited to this. For example, a structure may be used in which a spur gear 1419a is rotated by moving the movable body 1401 in the vertical direction by providing a fixed fixed tooth rod at a predetermined position. In this case, the above-described operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is performed by a power source (motor 1462) used for the movement operation of the movable body 1401 and the operation of changing the posture of the movable body front portion 1403.

  Next, using FIGS. 36A to 36F, a guiding portion 1452 for changing the posture of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side accessory 1400 of this embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 33, etc.). Modifications will be described.

  FIGS. 36A to 36F are schematic diagrams of the shape of the guiding portion 1452 viewed from the right side. The guides 1452 shown in FIGS. 36A to 36F have grooves similar to the grooves shown in FIG.

  The guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (a) has a guiding portion a1 having a groove extending linearly and inclined at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction, and a guiding portion having a groove extending linearly in the vertical direction. a2 is connected. For this reason, when the roller 1407f of the posture change mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. 30 moves the guide portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36A upward, the movable body 1403 changes its posture at the same time as starting to move from the initial position. Is started, and further upward movement is executed in the posture in which the posture change has been completed.

  The guide portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (b) has a guide portion b1 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical direction and a guide portion b2 having a groove extending linearly at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction. Are connected to the guiding portion b2, and a guiding portion b3 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical and vertical directions is connected to the guiding portion b2. Therefore, when the roller 1407f is moving upward in the guide portion b1, the movable body 1403 is moved upward in the initial position. When the roller 1407f is moving upward in the guide portion b2, the movable body 1403 simultaneously performs the operation of changing the posture and the upward movement. When the roller 1407f is moving upward on the guide portion b3, the movable body 1403 is moved upward in the posture in which the posture change has been completed.

  In the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (c), a guiding portion c1 having a groove extending in a straight line vertically and vertically is connected to a guiding portion c2 having a substantially arc-shaped groove curved sharply forward and upward. . Therefore, when the roller 1407f is moving upward in the guide portion c2, the upward moving distance of the movable body 1403 is relatively small. For this reason, when the roller 1407f moves through the guiding portions c1 and c2, the posture of the movable body 1403 changes rapidly immediately before reaching the target position.

  The guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (d) includes a guiding portion d1 having a groove extending linearly and inclined at a predetermined angle (for example, 30 °) with respect to the vertical direction in the front upper direction. A guiding portion d2 having a groove extending linearly inclining at a predetermined angle (for example, 45 °) with respect to the vertical direction in the front-upward direction at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the vertical direction above the predetermined angle d1 is connected. Therefore, when the roller 1407f moves the guide portion d1 in the upward direction, the movable body 1403 moves upward relatively slowly in posture. Further, when the roller 1407f moves upward in the guide portion d2, the movable body 1403 moves upward in a relatively fast changing posture.

  The guide portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (e) has a guide portion e1 having a groove which is inclined at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction and extends linearly, and is linearly inclined at a predetermined angle in the rear upper direction. The guiding portion e2 having an extended groove is connected. Therefore, when the roller 1407f moves the guide e1 upward, the movable body 1403 simultaneously performs the operation of changing the posture and the upward movement. Further, when the roller 1407f moves the guiding portion e2 upward, the movable body 1403 moves upward at the same time as the posture change operation in which the posture after the posture change returns to the posture at the initial position. Will do. Further, a configuration may be employed in which a guiding portion e1 is further connected to an upper portion of the guiding portion e2 of the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG.

  The guide portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (f) includes a guide portion f2 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical direction and a guide portion f3 having a groove extending linearly at a predetermined angle in the upper front direction. Are connected in parallel to a guide portion f1 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical direction. The guide part f3 is located in front of the guide part f2. In addition, a wall f4 is provided that is rotatable about a point where the front wall surface of the guiding unit f2 and the rear wall surface of the guiding unit f3 meet. Therefore, by rotating the wall f4 clockwise as viewed from the right and holding it at a predetermined position, the wall f4 functions as a front wall of the guiding portion f2, and the wall f4 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the right. By rotating and holding at a predetermined position, the wall f4 functions as a rear wall surface of the guiding portion f3. Therefore, when the wall f4 functions as the front wall surface of the guide portion f2, the roller 1407f moves from the guide portion f1 to the guide portion f2 (hereinafter, referred to as route 1). On the other hand, when the wall f4 functions as a rear wall surface of the guide portion f3, the roller 1407f moves from the guide portion f1 to the guide portion f3 (hereinafter, referred to as route 2). Therefore, when the roller 1407f moves on the path 1, the operation of changing the posture of the movable body 1403 is not executed, and when the roller 1407f moves on the path 2, the operation of changing the posture of the movable body 1403 is executed. Will be. Therefore, by controlling the rotation of the wall f4, it is possible to determine whether or not the posture of the movable body 1403 changes.

  In addition, the lower right side accessory 1400 of this embodiment includes the guiding portions (guiding portions a1 to f3) of the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIGS. And any combination. For example, a lower portion of the guiding portion 1452b shown in FIG. 29 can be connected to an upper portion of the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. Further, a lower portion of the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36E can be connected to an upper portion of the guiding portion 1452a shown in FIG. In these cases, when the movable body 1403 is guided by the guiding unit 1452 shown in FIG. 36E, the movable body 1403 changes from the posture at the initial position to the posture at the initial position.

  In addition, the movable body 1401 in the present embodiment can move in the vertical direction, but is not limited to this. For example, the movable body 1401 can perform the movement operation of the movable body 1401 in various directions by installing the installation direction of the lower right side movable body support unit 1450 of the lower right side accessory 1400 in various directions. .

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 36 again.
(B1)
A game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) including a movable body (for example, the movable body 1403) capable of executing at least a plurality of operations,
At least one of the plurality of operations includes an operation including at least an operation in which the movable body operates in a first position (for example, an initial position of the movable body 1403) (hereinafter, “first operation”). (See, for example, FIGS. 34A and 34B).
At least one of the plurality of operations includes an operation including at least an operation of changing the movable body from the first posture to a second posture (for example, a posture of the movable body 1403 at a target position) (hereinafter, an operation including the following). This is referred to as “second operation” (see, for example, FIGS. 34C and 34D).
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the movable body (for example, an operation related to connection of the guiding unit 1452a and the guiding unit 1452b) (for example, see FIG. 33). A gaming table characterized by the following.

According to the gaming table, the posture of the movable body may change during the operation of the movable body. In some cases, the posture of the movable body can be changed during the execution of a series of operations of the movable body, so that a gaming table having a feature in the operation of the movable body can be provided.
(B2)
The gaming table according to (B1),
A plurality of guiding units (for example, a guiding unit 1452a and a guiding unit 1452b) capable of guiding at least the operation of the movable body,
The movable body performs the first operation in a state where the movable body is guided by at least one of the plurality of guide units (hereinafter, referred to as “first guide unit (for example, guide unit 1452a)”). A movable body (see, for example, FIGS. 34A and 34B);
The movable body executes the second operation in a state where the movable body is guided by at least one of the plurality of guide units (hereinafter, referred to as “second guide unit (for example, guide unit 1452b)”). A movable body (for example, see FIGS. 34 (c) and (d));
The movable body is a movable body that can change from the first posture to the second posture in association with being guided by the second guiding portion (for example, FIG. 34 (c), ( d)), a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

According to the gaming table, there is a case where the posture of the movable body can be changed in relation to the operation of the guide unit and the movable body.
(B3)
The gaming table according to (B2),
The first guiding unit is a guiding unit that can guide the movable body in a first direction (for example, up and down direction) (for example, see FIG. 33).
The second guide unit is a guide unit that can guide the movable body in a second direction (for example, a rotation direction about the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) (see, for example, FIG. 33).
The movable body is a movable body that is guided at least in the first direction while maintaining the first posture by the first guiding unit (for example, see FIGS. 34A and 34B). ,
The movable body is a movable body that is at least guided in the second direction while being changed from the first posture to the second posture by the second guide unit (for example, FIG. 34C). To (d)), a gaming table.

According to the gaming table, the movement of the movable body in the guiding direction by the guiding unit is related to the posture of the movable body, so that the movable body may have a wider operation.
(B4)
The gaming table according to (B2) or (B3),
A peripheral member (for example, a transparent game board 810) located around the movable body (for example, see FIGS. 3 and 10);
The first guiding unit moves the movable body from a first position (for example, a vertical coordinate position near the lower end of the guiding unit 1452a) to a second position (for example, a vertical position near the upper end of the guiding unit 1452a). (Coordinate position) (for example, see FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b)).
It is difficult for the movable body to assume the second posture in at least a part of the section between the first position and the second position (hereinafter, referred to as “first section”) ( For example, see FIGS. 34A and 34B),
The gaming table, wherein the first section is a section that interferes with the peripheral member when the movable body assumes the second position (for example, see FIGS. 3 and 10).

According to the gaming table, various movements of the movable body can be realized while using the empty space.
(B5)
The gaming table according to the above (B4),
The movable body is a movable body that is at least visually recognizable by the player at the first position (for example, visually recognizable via the transparent game board 810) (for example, see FIGS. 3 and 10),
The gaming table, wherein the movable body is a movable body that is at least visually recognizable by a player at the second position (see, for example, FIGS. 3 and 10).

According to the above-mentioned gaming table, there is a case where the operation in the first posture can be surely shown to the player.
(B6)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B5),
A game console comprising one drive means (for example, a motor 1462 shown in FIG. 30) capable of executing at least the first operation and the second operation.

According to the gaming table, various operations of the movable body can be realized by one driving unit in some cases.
(B7)
A game console including a movable body including a plurality of movable parts,
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a first movable part (for example, a movable body front part 1403),
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a second movable part (for example, a movable body middle part 1425),
The first movable unit is a movable unit capable of executing at least a first operation,
The first movable portion is a movable portion capable of executing at least a second operation,
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable unit (for example, operations related to connection of the guiding unit 1452a and the guiding unit 1452b) (see, for example, FIG. 33). ),
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the first movable unit operates in a first posture (for example, a posture at an initial position) (see, for example, FIGS. 34A and 34B). ),
The second operation is an operation including at least an operation of changing the first movable portion from the first position to a second position (for example, a position at a target position) (for example, FIG. 34 (c)). ), (D)),
The second movable portion is configured to perform a third operation (for example, an operation in which a part of the movable portion 1425 is opened (an operation in which the outer decoration portion 1425a (the decoration portions 1425a1 to 1425a6) moves radially) and a rotation operation (the outer movement). The movable portion is a movable portion capable of at least executing the decoration portion 1425a (the rotation operation of the decoration portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 and the rotation operation of the inner decoration portion 1425b and the middle decoration portion 1425c) (see, for example, FIG. 34D).
The third operation is an operation that can be started at least during execution of the first operation,
The gaming table, wherein the third operation is an operation that can be started at least during execution of the second operation.

According to the gaming table, the second movable portion can be operated at any time while the first movable portion performs various movements, and the movement of the entire movable body can be varied.
(B8)
The gaming table according to the above (B7),
The first movable unit can be operated by a first drive source (for example, a motor 1462 shown in FIG. 30),
A gaming table, wherein the second movable portion is operable by a second drive source (for example, a motor 1411 shown in FIG. 30).
(B9)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B8),
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
(B10)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B9),
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
(B11)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B10),
The second posture is a posture formed by rotating at least a part of the movable body from the first posture (see, for example, FIGS. 34C and 34D). A gaming table that features.
(B12)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B11),
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the movable body returns to the first posture after the posture changes from the first posture (for example, the guiding unit 1452 shown in FIG. 36E). (Operation when lower part of guiding portion 1452b shown in FIG. 29 is connected to the upper part).
(B13)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B12),
The second operation is an operation that includes at least an operation in which the movable body returns to the first posture after the posture changes from the first posture (for example, an upper part of the guiding unit 1452a illustrated in FIG. 29). 36 (e) when the lower portion of the guiding portion 1452 is connected).
(B14)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B13),
The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the second operation may be performed after the first operation (for example, see FIG. 33).
(B15)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B14),
A game console, wherein the first operation may be performed after the second operation (for example, see FIG. 36A).

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  The first posture and the second posture of the movable body need not necessarily be one posture. For example, the first position may include the third position. In addition, the posture of the movable body in the section of the first guiding section and the posture of the movable body in the section of the second guiding section are different, and the posture of the movable body in the section therebetween is such as the first posture or the third posture. A posture other than the second posture may be adopted.

  Further, the movable body may take the first posture in at least a part of the section of the second guiding section, or may take the second posture in at least a part of the section of the first guiding section. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the movable body is configured to change the posture while moving, but may be configured to change from the first posture to the second posture at a predetermined point at a stroke.

  Further, the movable body may have a configuration in which the posture changes from the first posture and returns to the first posture (a configuration in which the posture rotates 360 ° and returns to the original posture).

  Further, the movable body may be configured so as not to interfere with peripheral members in a section between the first position and the second position. In some cases, the player may be surprised by suddenly changing to the second posture while showing a simple moving operation in the section of the first guiding section.

  Further, as long as the posture relationship between the guide portion and the movable body is maintained, a plurality of driving means for operating the movable body may be provided.

  Further, when the movable body returns to the guiding section, it is not necessary to return to the original posture. For example, when the first guide portion and the second guide portion are connected to a symmetric structure, and further connected to the second guide portion and the first guide portion and return to the same posture as the initial position, the initial position is different from the initial position. It may be configured to move to a position (moving from the lower part of the liquid crystal to the upper part of the liquid crystal and returning from the upper part of the liquid crystal to the lower part of the liquid crystal when another operating condition is satisfied).

The present invention according to the above embodiment is summarized as follows.
(Appendix b1)
A game console including a movable body capable of performing at least a plurality of operations,
At least one of the plurality of operations is an operation (hereinafter, referred to as a “first operation”) that includes at least an operation in which the movable body operates in a first posture.
At least one of the plurality of operations is an operation (hereinafter, referred to as a “second operation”) that includes at least an operation in which the movable body changes from the first position to the second position.
The gaming table, wherein the first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the movable body.
(Appendix b2)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note b1,
It comprises a plurality of guiding units capable of at least guiding the operation of the movable body,
The movable body is a movable body that can execute the first operation in a state where the movable body is guided by at least one of the plurality of guide parts (hereinafter, referred to as a “first guide part”).
The movable body is a movable body that can execute the second operation in a state where the movable body is guided by at least one of the plurality of guide parts (hereinafter, referred to as a “second guide part”).
The gaming table, wherein the movable body is a movable body that can change from the first posture to the second posture in association with being guided by the second guiding unit.
(Appendix b3)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note b2,
The first guiding unit is a guiding unit that can guide the movable body in a first direction,
The second guiding unit is a guiding unit that can guide the movable body in a second direction,
The movable body is a movable body that is guided in the first direction while maintaining the first posture by the first guiding unit,
The gaming table, wherein the movable body is a movable body that is guided in the second direction while changing from the first posture to the second posture by the second guiding unit.
(Appendix b4)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note b2 or b3,
Comprising a peripheral member located around the movable body,
The first guiding unit is a guiding unit that can guide the movable body from a first position to a second position,
It is difficult for the movable body to assume the second posture in at least a part of the section between the first position and the second position (hereinafter, referred to as a “first section”).
The gaming table, wherein the first section is a section that interferes with the peripheral member when the movable body assumes the second posture.
(Appendix b5)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note b4,
The movable body is a movable body that is at least visually recognizable by a player at the first position,
The gaming table, wherein the movable body is a movable body that is at least visible to a player at the second position.
(Appendix b6)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes b1 to b5,
A game console comprising one drive means capable of executing at least the first operation and the second operation.
(Appendix b7)
A game console including a movable body including a plurality of movable parts,
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a first movable part,
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a second movable part,
The first movable unit is a movable unit capable of executing at least a first operation,
The first movable portion is a movable portion capable of executing at least a second operation,
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable unit,
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the first movable unit operates in a first position,
The second operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the first movable portion changes from the first position to the second position,
The second movable section is a movable section capable of at least performing the third operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be started at least during execution of the first operation,
The gaming table, wherein the third operation is an operation that can be started at least during execution of the second operation.
(Appendix b8)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes b1 to b7,
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.
(Appendix b9)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes b1 to b7,
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine.

  Next, a central lower part 1600 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The central lower part 1600 is used for producing a special figure variable game, a general figure variable game, a big hit game, a demonstration, and the like. For example, reach effect, special figure 1 small hit production, special figure 2 small hit production, public figure winning election production, look ahead notice production, 2R big hit game production, 15R special big hit game production, operation of the chance button 136 and setting operation section It is used for various other effects such as effects related to the operation of 137. In addition, a movable body (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “central lower movable body” or a “movable body”) 1601 of the central lower part 1600 of this embodiment can move in the vertical direction, and can move in the lower central part. Part of the body 1601 can also rotate in a plane parallel to the board of the gaming board 200 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotational operation”). In addition, the lower central movable body 1601 may operate in conjunction with the operation of another movable body, or may operate independently of the operation of the other movable body.

  FIG. 37 is an example of the movable body 1601 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the central lower part 1600 including the movable body 1601. FIG. 37 shows a state where the central lower part 1600 is viewed from the upper right front to the lower left rear.

  The central lower part 1600 mainly includes a central lower movable body 1601 and a movable body supporter 1650 for moving the central lower movable body 1601. Further, the lower center movable body 1601 mainly has a front part 1601a and a rear part 1601b related to the vertical movement of the movable body 1601. The front part 1601a has a decoration part 1601a1 and a circular display part 1601a2.

  First, the decorative part 1601a1 of the front part 1601a of the lower center movable body 1601 will be described. The movable body front side decorative portion 1603a is a decorative portion on the front side of the central lower movable body 1601. Further, an opening is formed in the movable body front side decorative portion 1603a so that the circular film 1605 can be visually recognized by a player. The movable body front decorative portion 1603a is fixed to the front wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1603b at the rear portion 1601b by screws. The movable body upper decorative part 1603d is an upper decorative part of the center lower movable body 1601. The movable body upper decorative part 1603d is fixed to the upper part of the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover part 1603b with screws.

  Next, the circular display section 1601a2 will be described. The circular film 1605 is used as a film-shaped circular display unit that performs a rotating operation. The circular film 1605 is attached to the front surface of the circular object 1607. The circular object 1607 is a transparent resin disk, and has a fixing hole for fixing one end of the shaft 1615d at the center of the circle. Therefore, the circular object 1607 is fixed to the shaft 1615d, and the circular object 1607 is rotated by rotating the shaft 1615d. In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the circular object 1607 rotates after the center lower movable body 1601 reaches a target position described later, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control may be performed such that the circular object 1607 rotates from a state in which the lower center movable member 1601 is located at an initial position described later, or any position between the lower center movable member 1601 and the target position from the initial position. Control may be performed such that the circular object 1607 rotates from the position where the circular object 1607 is located. Alternatively, control may be performed so that the rotation of the circular object 1607 is stopped after the center lower movable body 1601 reaches the target position.

  The circular object cover 1609 is used to accommodate the circular object 1607 to which the circular film 1605 is attached. Further, the circular object cover portion 1609 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body front side decorative portion 1603a by screws. In the center of the circular cover 1609, a through hole is formed to pass the shaft 1615d in the front-rear direction. Further, the movable body front side decorative portion 1603a, the circular film 1605, the circular object 1607, and the circular object cover portion 1609 have high light transmittance in order to transmit light of an LED (not shown) mounted on the LED board 1611. It is composed of members.

  The LED substrate 1611 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the circular object cover part 1609, the rear wall surface of the movable body front decoration part 1603a, and the rear wall surface of the circular object cover part 1609 by screws. On the mounting surface of the LED substrate 1611, an LED (not shown) and a drive circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED are mounted. The LED board 1611 has a through hole for passing the shaft 1615d and an opening for securing a space for accommodating the motor 1613 in the front portion 1601a.

  The motor 1613 is a drive source for executing a rotation operation of the circular object 1607. The motor 1613 is fixed to the lower front wall surface of the circular object cover portion 1609 by screws so that the rotation axis of the motor (the side to which the spur gear 1615a is attached) faces rearward. The circular object cover 1609 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1613 passes. The motor 1613 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1613, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but the motor is not limited thereto.

  The power transmission mechanism 1615 is a mechanism used to rotate the circular object 1607 by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1613, and mainly includes a spur gear 1615a, a spur gear 1615b, a disc 1615c with a spur gear, and a shaft 1615d. are doing. The spur gear 1615a is fixed to a rotation shaft of a motor 1613. Further, the spur gear 1615b is installed adjacent to the spur gear 1615a so that the teeth of the spur gear 1615a and the teeth of the spur gear 1615b mesh with each other. The spur gear 1615b is installed adjacent to the spur geared disk 1615c such that the teeth of the spur gear 1615b mesh with the teeth of the spur gear 1615c1 (not shown) of the spur geared disk 1615c. A shaft 1615d is fixed to the center of the disk 1615c with a spur gear. In addition, the disk 1615c with a spur gear 1615c2 having a notch 1615c3 formed in a part of the outer circumference and a spur gear 1615c1 (not shown) are integrated.

  In this embodiment, the position of the rotation axis of the motor 1613 (position coordinates on a plane parallel to the game board 200) and the position of the rotation axis of the circular object 1607 (position coordinates on a plane parallel to the game board 200) are made different. For this purpose, a power transmission mechanism 1615 is used. Thereby, it is possible to arbitrarily provide an installation space for the motor 1613. In addition, the installation space for the motor 1613 can be arbitrarily provided in consideration of the center of gravity of the lower central movable body 1601. In addition, by changing the ratio between the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615a and the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615c1, the rotation speed of the rotation shaft of the motor 1613 can be converted to a predetermined rotation speed to rotate the circular object 1607. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615a and the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615c1 are the same. For this reason, the rotation speed of the rotating shaft of the motor 1613 and the rotation speed of the circular object 1607 are almost the same. Further, since there is a spur gear 1615b between the spur gear 1615a and the disk 1615c with a spur gear, the rotation direction of the rotation shaft of the motor 1613 and the rotation direction of the circular object 1607 are the same. The power transmission mechanism 1615 is also used to transmit the torque of the rotating shaft of the motor 1613 to the circular object 1607.

  The photo sensor 1617 is used for detecting an initial position of the circular object 1607. The photo sensor 1617 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1617 is provided with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and has a configuration in which light emitted from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. The photosensor 1617 has a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion facing each other in the front-rear direction, and has a U-shape (a shape whose lower side is open) when viewed from the right side. The photo sensor 1617 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the circular object cover 1609 by screws so that the outer peripheral portion of the spur gear 1615c1 of the disc 1615c with spur gear is located between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. When the notch 1615c3 of the disk 1615c2 of the disk 1615c2 of the spur gear 1615c is located between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the photo sensor 1617, the light emitted from the light emitting part emits the disk with the spur gear. The light is not shielded by the disk 1615c2 of 1615c. Therefore, the position is set as the initial position of the circular film 1605.

  Next, the rear part 1601b of the lower center movable body 1601 will be described. The movable body rear cover 1603b is a member related to the vertical movement of the lower central movable body 1601. As the movable body rear cover part 1603b moves in the vertical direction, the front part 1601a screwed to the movable body rear cover part 1603b moves in the vertical direction. Further, an inner rail 1660a of the guide rail 1660 of the movable body support portion 1650 is fixed to the center of the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1603b by screwing vertically.

  The lower movable body 1603c is a member related to the vertical movement of the lower central movable body 1601. The movable body lower part 1603c has a substantially rectangular guide hole part 1603c1 (not shown). The guide hole 1603c1 penetrates in the left-right direction, and the through-hole is formed to be elongated in the front-rear direction. The length of the short side of the guide hole 1603c1 is a length obtained by adding a slight allowance (clearance) to the diameter of the outer circumferential circle of the roller portion 1658a of the connecting portion 1658. The length of the long side is a length obtained by adding a margin to the length of a straight line from the center of the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 to the circumferential end of the roller portion of the connecting portion 1658 through the center of the connecting portion 1658. . The front and rear ends of the guide hole 1603c1 have a semicircular arc shape in accordance with the circumference of the roller portion of the connecting portion 1658. The front end of the guide hole 1603c1 may function as a restricting portion (or a restricting portion) for restricting (or restricting) the lower central movable member 1601 to the initial position, and a target position of the lower central movable member 1601. In some cases (details will be described later). Further, the movable body lower part 1603c is attached to the front wall surface of the movable body rear cover part 1603b so that the horizontal position coordinate of the guide hole part 1603c1 and the horizontal position coordinate of the center part of the central lower movable body 1601 are the same. It is fixed with screws at the bottom. Further, in the regulation portion of the present embodiment, a member having a relatively high rigidity (for example, a member made of resin, metal, or ceramics) is used as a wall, but is not limited thereto. For example, a cushioning member (for example, soft resin, rubber, cotton, cloth, styrofoam, or foam cushioning material) that softens the contact with the mechanical end may function as the restricting portion.

  Further, a spring locking portion 1603c2 for locking one lower end of the helical spring 1664 is formed in the lower portion of the movable body 1603c above the rear end of the guide hole 1603c1. Further, in the present embodiment, only one spring locking portion is formed in the movable body lower portion 1603c, but a configuration in which a plurality of spring locking portions are formed may be employed. Further, a plate-shaped light shielding portion 1603c3 used for detecting the initial position of the lower central movable member 1601 is formed in the lower movable member 1603c.

  Next, a movable body support unit 1650 for moving the lower center movable body 1601 will be described. The motor 1652 is a driving source for moving the lower central movable body 1601 in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but the motor is not limited thereto.

  The motor 1652 is fixed to the motor mounting portion 1654 with screws so that the side of the motor rotation shaft to which the crank 1656 is fixed faces right. The motor mounting portion 1654 is fixed to the front wall surface of the base portion 1662 by screws. The base portion 1662 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820 by screws. That is, the motor 1652 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820. In addition, the motor 1652 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG.

  The crank 1656 is used as a link mechanism that connects the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 and the movable body lower part 1603c. One end of the crank 1656 is fixed to a rotating shaft of the motor 1652, and the other end of the crank 1656 is fixed to the connecting portion 1658 so that the connecting portion 1658 can roll. In this embodiment, the crank 1656 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1652. However, the crank 1656 is fixed to a rotating shaft (shaft) different from the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 by using a plurality of spur gears or the like. It may be. As a result, the rotation speed or torque of the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 may be converted into a predetermined rotation speed or torque to rotate the crank 1656 in some cases.

  The connecting portion 1658 is used to connect the other end of the crank 1656 and the lower portion 1603c of the movable body via the guide hole 1603c1. The connecting portion 1658 is formed by integrally forming a substantially cylindrical roller portion 1658a and a substantially circular plate-shaped roller outer portion 1658b. The roller exterior 1658b is formed at one end of the roller portion 1658a. The diameter of the outer circumference of the roller outer portion 1658b is longer than the diameter of the outer circumference of the roller portion 1658a, and is longer than the length of the short side of the guide hole 1603c1. Further, the diameter of the outer circumferential circle of the roller portion 1658a is shorter than the length of the short side of the guide hole portion 1603c1. For this reason, the connecting portion 1658 is attached to the crank 1656 such that the roller outer portion 1658b is located on the right outside of the guide hole portion 1603c1 and the roller portion 1658a is located within the guide hole portion 1603c1. 1603c1 is not easily removed. The connecting portion 1658 can roll (or move) in the area of the guide hole 1603c1 by rotating the crank 1656 (details will be described later).

  The guide rail 1660 is used to guide the direction of movement of the lower central movable body 1601. The guide rail 1660 has an inner rail 1660a, a middle rail 1660b, and an outer rail 1660c. The inner rail 1660a is fixed to the center of the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover 1603b by screws in the vertical direction so that the movable body 1601 can move in the vertical direction. The outer rail 1660c is fixed to the upper center of the front wall surface of the base portion 1662 by screws in the vertical direction so that the movable body 1601 can move in the vertical direction. The middle rail 1660b is provided inside the outer rail 1660c so as to be movable along the rail of the outer rail 1660c. An inner rail 1660a is provided inside the middle rail 1660b so as to be movable along the rail of the middle rail 1660b. In addition, a plurality of steel balls (not shown) are arranged on the rail contact surfaces of the inner rail 1660a and the middle rail 1660b so as to reduce friction between the rails and allow the rails to slide smoothly. In addition, a plurality of steel balls (not shown) are also arranged on the rail contact surface between the middle rail 1660b and the outer rail 1660c so as to reduce friction between the rails and allow the rails to slide smoothly. Due to the configuration of the guide rail 1660, the movable body rear cover 1603b can operate in the installation direction of the outer rail 1630c fixed to the base 1662, that is, in the vertical direction. A rail stop 1660c1 that stops the middle rail 1660b and the inner rail 1660a is provided at the lower end of the outer rail 1660c. Further, the outer rail 1660c may be provided in a direction other than the vertical direction. For example, the direction may be from a lower rear direction to a front upper direction, or may be a lower front direction to a rear upper direction. The outer rail 1660c is a combination of a vertical rail, a rear-upward front-upward rail, a front-downward rear-upward rail, a front-upward curved rail, a rear-upwardly curved rail, and the like. It may be a configuration. In this case, the movable body 1601 can move not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-back direction.

  The base portion 1662 is used as a support portion that moves the movable body 1601 in the up-down direction. The base portion 1662 has a substantially plate shape, and a spring locking portion 1662a for locking one end on the upper side of the helical spring 1664 is provided on the upper portion of the rear wall surface. One end (upper side) of the helical spring 1664 is connected to the spring locking part 1662a, and the other end (lower side) of the helical spring 1664 is connected to the spring locking part 1603c2 of the movable body lower part 1603c. The installation direction of the helical spring 1664 and the installation direction of the guide rail 1630 are the same direction (vertical direction), and the horizontal position coordinates of the installation position of the helical spring 1664 and the horizontal direction of the installation position of the guide rail 1660. A spring locking portion 1662a of the base portion 1662 and a spring locking portion 1603c2 of the movable body lower portion 1603c are formed so that the position coordinates are the same. With this structure, the movable direction of the lower central movable body 1601 and the extending and contracting direction of the helical spring 1664 are the same. Further, since the horizontal position coordinates of the installation position of the helix spring 1664 and the horizontal position coordinates of the installation position of the guide rail 1660 are the same, a moment of force in the horizontal direction is generated in the central lower movable body 1601. This is a difficult configuration, and there are cases where the center lower movable body 1601 can be moved efficiently. Further, in this embodiment, only one spring locking portion is formed on the base portion 1662, but a plurality of spring locking portions may be formed.

  In this embodiment, a tension spring is used for the helical spring 1664. When the movable body 1601 is located at the lower end (initial position), the helical spring 1664 elastically deforms and expands. When the movable body 1601 is located at the upper end (target position), the helical spring 1664 expands. However, the state is not limited to this, and the state is not elastically deformed by shrinking from the state in which it is performed (details will be described later). For example, even when the movable body 1601 is located at the upper end (target position), the helical spring 1664 may be in a state of being elastically deformed and expanded, or the helical spring 1664 may be in a state of being elastically deformed and contracted. It may be. In this embodiment, only one helical spring is provided, but a configuration in which a plurality of helical springs are provided may be employed. Further, a leaf spring may be used instead of the helical spring 1664, or a flexible member such as rubber may be used. Further, instead of the helical spring 1664, a linear reciprocating solenoid or other linear actuator may be used.

  The photo sensor 1666 is used to detect that the movable body 1601 is located near the initial position (the details of the initial position of the movable body 1601 will be described later). The photo sensor 1666 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photo sensor 1666 has a configuration in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are provided, and light emitted from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. Further, the photosensor 1666 has a U-shape (a shape in which the left side is open) when the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit face each other in the front-rear direction and are viewed from above. The photosensor 1666 is fixed to the lower portion of the front wall of the base portion 1662 by screws so that the light blocking portion 1603c3 of the lower movable portion 1603c is located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion.

  The flexible board 1668 is used for electrically connecting the LED board 1611 and the game board lamp drive circuit 530. One end of the flexible board 1668 is connected to the LED board 1611, and the other end of the flexible board 1668 is connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 through the base portion 1662.

  Next, the operation of the center lower movable body 1601 of the center lower part 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 38A to 38D are right side views of the central lower part 1600 in which the lower central movable body 1601 moves from the initial position to the target position in stages. FIG. 38A shows a state in which the lower central movable body 1601 is located at the initial position. FIG. 38B shows a state immediately after the center lower movable body 1601 starts moving from the initial position. FIG. 38C shows a state where the lower center movable body 1601 has moved upward from the position shown in FIG. 38B. FIG. 38D shows a state where the lower center movable body 1601 has moved further upward from the position shown in FIG. 38C and has reached the target position. In the description with reference to FIG. 38, the center of the connecting portion 1658 is located directly below the rotation axis of the motor 1652 (the position coordinates of the center of the connecting portion 1658 in the front-rear direction and the position coordinates of the rotation axis of the motor 1652 in the front-rear direction). The rotation angle of the crank 1656 in the state of the same is defined as 0 °. The direction in which the crank 1656 rotates in the order of upward, rearward, and downward is expressed as clockwise (or clockwise), and the opposite direction is expressed as counterclockwise (or counterclockwise). The clockwise rotation angle of the crank 1656 is represented by a negative number, and the counterclockwise rotation angle is represented by a positive number. For example, a rotation angle of the crank 1656 rotated clockwise by 10 ° from 0 ° is represented by −10 °, and an angle obtained by rotating the crank 1656 counterclockwise by 10 °, for example, is represented by + 10 °.

  First, items common to the operation of the lower center movable body 1601 shown in FIGS. 38A to 38D will be described. Part of the torque of the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 is transmitted to the central lower movable body 1601 by the crank 1656 and the connecting portion 1658 through the guide hole 1603c1 of the movable body lower part 1603c. That is, a force is applied to the connecting portion 1658 by driving (rotation) of the motor 1652, and a driving (rotating) force of the motor 1652 is applied to the lower central movable body 1601 by the connecting portion 1658. Also, the joint between the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 and the crank 1656 is the point of force, and the contact between the connecting portion 1658 and the guide hole 1603c1 is the point of action of the force. When the connecting portion 1658 is not located at the front and rear ends of the guide hole 1603c1, the contact portion between the connecting portion 1658 and the guide hole 1603c1 is the upper or lower portion of the connecting portion 1658. No force acts. Note that when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 rotates counterclockwise from 0 ° to + 180 °, the connecting portion 1658 does not contact the front and rear ends of the guide hole 1603c1 (details will be described later). Therefore, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 rotates counterclockwise between 0 ° and + 180 °, a vertically upward force due to the driving (rotation) of the motor 1652 acts on the movable body 1601, and conversely. When the crank 1656 rotates clockwise from + 180 ° to 0 °, a vertically downward force is applied to the movable body 1601 by the drive (rotation) of the motor 1652. The vertically upward force acting on the lower central movable body 1601 by the drive of the motor 1652 is proportional to the vertically upward component of the tangent line in the movement locus of the contact portion (upper portion) of the connecting portion 1658 which is the point of application of the force. . That is, assuming that the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is x °, the vertically upward force applied to the lower central movable body 1601 by the driving of the motor 1652 is proportional to sin (x °). For example, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, the tangent line in the movement trajectory of the contact portion (upper part) is parallel to the front-rear direction, so that the vertically upward component is 0 (= sin (0 °)). is there. Therefore, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, the vertically upward force by the driving of the motor 1652 does not act on the lower central movable body 1601. When the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 90 °, the vertical upward component of the tangent in the movement trajectory of the contact portion (upper portion) serving as the point of action of the force of the connecting portion 1658 has a maximum value of +1 (= sin (+90 °)). Therefore, assuming that the torque of the motor 1652 is constant, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 90 °, the vertically upward force generated by the driving of the motor 1652 acts on the central lower movable body 1601 to the maximum.

  The motor 1652 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820. For this reason, the center of the rotation axis of the motor 1652 functions as a fulcrum that is fixed and does not move. On the other hand, the connecting portion 1658 is displaced in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction with the center of the rotation axis of the motor 1652 as a fulcrum due to the rotation of the crank 1656 fixed to the rotation axis of the motor 1652. Further, the lower central movable body 1601 is movable in the vertical direction which is the installation direction of the guide rail 1660, and the lower central movable body 1601 is connected to the connecting portion 1658 via the guide hole 1603c1. For this reason, the center lower movable body 1601 is vertically displaced by the vertical displacement of the connecting portion 1658.

  The spring locking portion 1662a of the base portion 1662 functions as a fulcrum of the helical spring 1664 (the one where the tip of the spring does not move). The tip of the spring moves). Since the spring locking portion 1603c2 is displaced by the vertical displacement of the connecting portion 1658, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, the helical spring 1664 is in a state of being expanded to the maximum. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 180 °, the helical spring 1664 is configured to have a natural length. Therefore, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, the vertically upward force of the helical spring 1664 acts on the central lower movable body 1601 to the maximum, and when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 180 °, The vertically upward force of the helical spring 1664 does not act on the lower central movable body 1601.

  Next, the state of the lower center movable body 1601 shown in FIG. FIG. 38A shows a state in which the lower central movable body 1601 is located at the initial position. When the center lower movable body 1601 is located at the initial position, the connecting portion 1658 is half of the front end portion of the guide hole portion 1603c1 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "restriction portion" or "restriction portion") 1603c4. Stopped against the arc-shaped wall of the circle. In this case, the mounting position of the motor 1652 and the movable body lower part 1603c is adjusted so that the crank 1656 rotates at a predetermined angle clockwise from 0 ° and stops.

  When the lower center movable body 1601 is located at the initial position, the motor 1652 is not driven. For this reason, the force of the motor 1652 does not act on the connecting portion 1658. On the other hand, since the helical spring 1664 is in a state of being elastically deformed and expanded, a vertically upward force acts on the movable body 1601 by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664. If the moment of force is ignored, a force (f1) obtained by subtracting the weight of the lower central movable body 1601 from the vertically upward force due to the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 acts on the connecting portion 1658. In the present embodiment, when the lower center movable member 1601 is located at the initial position, the spring coefficient of the helical spring and the lower center portion are adjusted so that the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 is greater than the weight of the lower center movable member 1601. Although the initial position of the movable body 1601 is set, it is not limited to this. In addition, since the connecting portion 1658 is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 via the crank 1656, the trajectory of the movement of the connection portion 1658 describes an arc with the center of the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the upward force f1 described above can be decomposed into a tangential force (f2) of the trajectory of the movement of the connecting portion 1658 and a force (f3) in the center of the arc of the trajectory of the movement of the connecting portion 1658. Assuming that the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is x °, f2 is represented by f2 = f1 × sin (x °).

  In this embodiment, since the rotation angle of the crank 1656 at the initial position of the lower center movable body 1601 is a negative angle, the connecting portion 1658 causes the force of f2 to act on the restricting portion 1603c4. On the other hand, the movable body lower part 1603c including the regulating part 1603c4 is fixed to the movable body rear cover part 1603b, and the movable body rear cover part 1603b is provided to the base part 1662 via the guide rail 1660. With this configuration, the restricting portion 1603c4 cannot move in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the connecting portion 1658 is pressed against the restricting portion 1603c4 with the force of f2, and the connecting portion 1658 is kept in contact with the restricting portion 1603c4. When the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is a negative angle, the direction of the force f2 is opposite to the direction of the force acting on the connecting portion 1658 when the rotation axis of the motor 1652 rotates counterclockwise. . As described above, even when the motor 1652 is not driven, the helical spring 1664 can effectively suppress the center lower movable body 1601 to the initial position in some cases. In addition, even when the motor 1652 is excited, the connecting portion 1658 may be able to maintain a state in which the connecting portion 1658 has stopped against the restricting portion 1603c4. In some cases, even when the motor 1652 is not excited, the helix spring 1664 can effectively suppress the lower central movable body 1601 to the initial position. For this reason, the rotation angle of the crank 1656 at the initial position of the lower center movable body 1601 may be set to 0 ° or may be set to a positive angle.

  A method of setting the initial position of the lower center movable body 1601 will be described. In this embodiment, the state in which the connecting portion 1658 is stopped by hitting the regulating portion 1603c4 is set as the initial position of the lower central movable body 1601. The setting of the initial position is performed by rotating the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 clockwise until the connecting portion 1658 hits the restricting portion 1603c4 and stops. In this case, the light-blocking portion 1603c3 of the movable body lower part 1603c and the photo sensor 1666 (see FIG. 37) detect that the central lower movable body 1601 is located near the initial position, and thereafter, the rotation axis of the motor 1652 is changed. The initial position of the lower center movable body 1601 is set by rotating it clockwise at a predetermined angle. The length of the short side of the guide hole 1603c1 is a length obtained by adding a margin (clearance) to the diameter of the roller portion of the connecting portion 1658, and is located at the initial position of the lower center movable body 1601. In this state, the rail stop 1660c1 may be provided so that the inner rail 1660a hits the rail stop 1660c1 of the outer rail 1660c and stops. In this case, the lower center movable body 1601 is not located below the initial position. Further, a rail stop 1660c1 may be provided so that the inner rail 1660a does not hit the rail stop 1660c1 of the outer rail 1660c when the lower center movable body 1601 is located at the initial position. In this case, the lower center movable body 1601 may be located below the initial position.

  Next, the state of the central lower movable body 1601 shown in FIG. 38B will be described. This shows a state immediately after the center lower movable body 1601 starts moving from the initial position. The rotation angle of the crank 1656 is almost 0 °, but shows a slightly positive angle. Therefore, the direction of the force acting on the connecting portion 1658 by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 and the direction of the force acting on the connecting portion 1658 by the driving (rotation) of the motor 1652 match.

  Further, since the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is almost 0 °, the upward force acting on the lower central movable body 1601 by driving the motor 1652 is small. On the other hand, since the helical spring 1664 is elastically deformed and expanded, the upward force acting on the lower central movable body 1601 by the helical spring 1664 increases. For this reason, the upward movement of the lower central movable body 1601 is promoted by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664, and the initial lowering of the lower central movable body 1601 may smoothly move. In addition, even when the torque generated by driving the motor 1652 is small, the movable body 1601 can be moved upward by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664. Next, the central lower movable body shown in FIG. The state of 1601 will be described. FIG. 38C shows a state in which the lower central movable body 1601 has moved upward from the state of FIG. 38B, and the crank 1656 has been rotated by about + 90 °. The length of the long side of the guide hole portion 1603c1 has some allowance for the length of a straight line from the center of the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 to the circumferential end of the roller portion of the connecting portion 1658 through the center of the connecting portion 1658. Because of the added length, the connecting portion 1658 does not contact the rear end 1603c5 of the guide hole 1603c1. Thus, the crank 1656 can rotate at least 180 °. Further, the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 is reduced by the amount by which the spring locking portion 1603c2 of the movable body lower portion 1603c moves upward. On the other hand, since the crank 1656 has been rotated by about + 90 °, the upward force generated by the driving of the motor 1652 largely acts on the central lower movable body 1601.

  Next, the state of the lower center movable body 1601 shown in FIG. FIG. 38D shows a state in which the lower center movable body 1601 has moved upward and reached the target position from the state of FIG. 38C. The connecting portion 1658 stops at the restricting portion 1603c4 of the movable body lower portion 1603c. In this case, the angle of the crank 1656 is an angle obtained by adding + 180 ° to the angle of the crank at the initial position of the lower center movable body 1601. Further, since the restricting portion 1603c4 functions as a mechanical end of the connecting portion 1658, even when the motor 1652 continues to be driven, the connecting portion 1658 hits the restricting portion 1603c4 and stops. On the other hand, since the crank 1656 is positioned substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the motor, a force in the backward direction of the connecting portion 1658 due to the gravity of the lower central movable body 1601 hardly acts. Therefore, the lower central movable body 1601 may be able to be held at the target position by excitation of the motor 1652. Further, when the power to the motor 1652 is stopped and the central lower movable body 1601 can be held at the target position by the friction of the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 or the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 even when the motor 1652 is not excited. There is.

  When the lower center movable body 1601 moves from the target position (FIG. 38D) to the initial position (FIG. 38A), the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 is rotated clockwise. The method of setting the initial position of the lower center movable body 1601 is as described above.

  The center lower movable body 1601 can move upward when the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial positions. This is in preparation for the case where the motors 1070, 1152, and 1652 step out, although the operating ranges of the center lower movable body 1601 and the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 do not overlap. Based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 turns on the upper photo sensor 1084 and the upper front movable body 1002 at the initial position, as shown in FIG. After confirming that the photosensor 1176 is in the ON state and the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the initial position, the motor 1652 is driven to move the lower central driver 1601 upward. The center lower movable body 1601 may move upward from the initial position when the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the lowest position or during the movement to the lowest position. Good (see FIG. 41 (h)).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to move the lower center movable body 1601 from the initial position to the target position, control for continuously driving the motor 1652 is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the lower center movable body 1601 is driven at the start of movement from the initial position and the crank 1656 rotates counterclockwise from 0 ° by a predetermined angle, the supply of power to the motor 1652 is stopped, and the elasticity of the helical spring 1664 is reduced. Control for moving the lower center movable body 1601 to the target position only by force may be executed. When the photo sensor or the like detects that the lower central movable body 1601 has reached the vicinity of the target position, the supply of electric power to the motor 1652 starts, and the lower central movable body 1601 is driven by the driving force or the exciting force of the motor 1652. Control for stopping at the target position may be executed, or control for not starting to supply electric power to the motor 1652 may be executed even when the lower central movable body 1601 reaches near the target position.

  In the present embodiment, the position of the center lower movable body 1601 in a state where the crank 1656 is rotated + 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial position of the center lower movable body 1601 is changed to the center lower movable body 1601. The target position is 1601, but is not limited to this. For example, the position of the center lower movable body 1601 in a state where the crank 1656 is rotated + 90 ° counterclockwise from the state where the lower center movable body 1601 is located at the initial position may be set as the target position. Also, the target position of the lower center movable body 1601 may be set arbitrarily by setting the rotation angle of the crank 1656 arbitrarily. For example, the target position of the central lower movable body 1601 may be set in accordance with the reliability of the big hit in the reach effect, or in correspondence with the player's advantage in various big hit games, small hit games, and the like, The target position of the lower center movable body 1601 may be set.

  In addition, the movable body 1601 in the present embodiment can perform a vertical movement operation, but is not limited to this. For example, the movable body 1601 can perform a movement operation of the movable body 1601 in various directions by installing the movable body support unit 1650 of the central lower part 1600 in various directions.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 38 again.
(C1)
A movable body (for example, a movable body 1601);
A first member (for example, a helical spring 1664 shown in FIG. 37) related to the operation of the movable body, and a game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100),
The movable body is a movable body that is at least movable from a first position to a second position (for example, a target position (see FIG. 38D)) (for example, see FIGS. 38A to 38D). ),
The first position is an initial position of the movable body (see, for example, FIG. 38A),
The first member can at least restrict the movement of the movable body located at the first position (for example, the connecting portion 1658 at the end of the crank 1656 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 is connected to the A member that is positioned diagonally forward and downward with respect to the rotation axis and can be prevented from moving by contacting the restricting portion 1603c4 of the guide hole portion 1603c1 (for example, see FIG. 38A).
When the movable body starts moving from the first position (for example, when the crank 1656 rotates backward by 0 ° or more with respect to a vertically downward direction), the first member may move the movable body. A gaming table, which is a member capable of promoting movement (for example, promoting upward movement of the movable body 1601) (see, for example, FIGS. 37 and 38).

According to the gaming table, the first member regulates the operation of the movable body when the movable body is located at the initial position, and promotes the operation of the movable body after the movable body starts moving. You may be able to jump out. The first member maintains the initial position of the movable body when the movable body is at the initial position, and assists the operation of the movable body after the movable body starts operating. May be performed smoothly.
(C2)
The gaming table according to (C1),
Driving means (for example, a motor 1652 shown in FIG. 37) capable of driving the movable body,
A second member (for example, a crank 1656 and a connecting portion 1658 shown in FIG. 37) for connecting the driving means and the movable body,
In the movable body, in a state where the movable body is located at the first position (hereinafter, referred to as a “first state”), the driving member causes the second member to move in the first direction (for example, rightward). It is a movable body that can start moving when a force is applied in a counterclockwise rotation direction (see FIG. 38 (a) to (d)).
The movable body does not start moving in the first state when the second member is applied with a force in a second direction (for example, a clockwise rotation direction as viewed from the right). (For example, see FIG. 38A)
The first member is a member that acts in the first state so that the second member applies a force in the second direction (for example, see FIG. 38A). A gaming table that features.

According to the gaming table, the operation of the movable body can be effectively suppressed in a state where the driving unit is not driven.
(C3)
The gaming table according to (C2),
The movable body is a movable body provided with a regulation part (for example, regulation part 1603c4 of guide hole part 1603c1 shown in FIG. 38) for regulating the movement of the second member,
The gaming table, wherein the restricting portion restricts movement of the second member in the second direction in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 38A).
(C4)
The gaming table according to the above (C3),
When the movable body is located at the first position, the force of the first member is applied to the second member in the second direction, and the second member is A game console wherein the operation of the movable body is regulated by the contact (for example, see FIG. 38 (a)).

According to the gaming table, there is a case where the operation of the movable body can be surely restricted by the configuration of the restricting portion even if a force is applied to the second member in the second direction.
(C5)
The gaming table according to any one of (C2) to (C4),
The driving means is a motor (for example, a motor 1652 shown in FIG. 37),
The second member is a member to which a force is applied by rotation of the motor,
The first direction is one rotation direction (for example, a counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from the right),
The gaming table, wherein the second direction is the other rotation direction (for example, a clockwise rotation direction as viewed from the right) (for example, see FIG. 38).

According to the above-mentioned gaming table, when the second member is applied with a force in the second direction by the first member, the movement is regulated by the motor while the movement is regulated by the regulating portion. Therefore, there are cases where the movable body can be reliably kept at the initial position.
(C6)
The gaming table according to any one of (C2) to (C5),
The movable body is a movable body that is movable in a vertical direction,
The movable body (for example, a scotch yoke mechanism) whose height is changed by displacing a connecting portion (for example, a connecting portion 1658 shown in FIG. 37) of the second member with the movable body in the vertical direction. (For example, see FIG. 38).
The first member is an elastic member (for example, a helical spring 1664 shown in FIG. 37),
The movable body is a movable body in which the movement in the vertical direction may be promoted by the elastic force of the first member (for example, see FIGS. 38B to 38D). A gaming table to play.
(C7)
The gaming table according to any one of (C1) to (C6),
The first member is in a state of being elastically deformed at least when the movable body is located at the first position (for example, a state in which the helical spring 1664 is extended from its natural length and deformed). (For example, see FIG. 38 (a))
The movable body is a movable body in which the elastically deformed first member may be facilitated to move by a force that returns to the original state (for example, see FIGS. 38B to 38D). A gaming table that features.
(C8)
The gaming table according to any one of (C1) to (C7),
The direction in which the first member returns from the elastically deformed state is the same as the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position (see, for example, FIG. 38). A gaming table that features.

According to the gaming table, the force of the first member can be used to the maximum in the operation direction of the movable body. In some cases, depending on the elastic force of the first member, the first member can contribute to the movement of the movable body more than the driving means.
(C9)
The gaming table according to any one of (C1) to (C8),
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
(C10)
The gaming table according to any one of (C1) to (C8),
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  In this embodiment, the moving direction of the movable body is up and down, and the first direction and the second direction are different in the rotation direction, but may be the same direction. For example, a plurality of second members are used to convert the rotational operation of the motor into a linear motion (for example, a linear gear formed on a long side of a rectangle is engaged with a first gear formed on a circumference). Then, the operation direction of the driving unit may be adjusted to the operation direction of the movable body.

  Further, as the driving means, an object other than the motor may be employed. For example, a linear reciprocating solenoid may be used.

  Further, the movable body may have a configuration in which the first position (initial position) is upward and move downward, or the movable body may have a configuration in which the first position (initial position) is rearward and move forward. Alternatively, the first position (initial position) may be a front part and move rearward, or the first position (initial position) may be a right part and move leftward. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the first position (initial position) is the left part and moves to the right.

  In addition, the first member may be other than the elastic member. For example, a linear reciprocating solenoid or linear actuator may be used.

  Further, the first position (initial position) of the movable body does not always have to be a fixed position.

The present invention according to the above embodiment is summarized as follows.
(Appendix c1)
With a movable body,
And a first member related to the operation of the movable body,
The movable body is a movable body that is at least movable from a first position to a second position,
The first position is an initial position of the movable body,
The first member is a member that can at least regulate the operation of the movable body located at the first position,
The gaming table, wherein the first member is a member capable of promoting the movement of the movable body when the movable body starts moving from the first position.
(Appendix c2)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note c1,
The gaming table according to claim 1,
Driving means capable of driving the movable body,
A second member that connects the driving unit and the movable body,
In the state where the movable body is located at the first position (hereinafter, referred to as a “first state”), the second member applies a force in the first direction by the driving unit. It is a movable body that can start moving when it is
The movable body is a movable body that does not start moving when the second member is applied with a force in the second direction in the first state,
The gaming table, wherein the first member is a member that acts in the first state so that the second member applies a force in the second direction.
(Appendix c3)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note c2,
The movable body is a movable body provided with a regulating portion that regulates the movement of the second member,
The gaming table, wherein the regulation unit regulates the movement of the second member in the second direction in the first state.
(Appendix c4)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note c2 or c3,
The driving means is a motor,
The second member is a member to which a force is applied by rotation of the motor,
The first direction is one rotation direction,
The gaming table, wherein the second direction is the other rotation direction.
(Appendix c5)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes c2 to c4,
The movable body is a movable body that is movable in a vertical direction,
The movable body is a movable body whose height is changed by displacing the connecting portion of the second member with the movable body in the up-down direction,
The first member is an elastic member,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable body is a movable body in which the vertical movement may be promoted by an elastic force of the first member.
(Appendix c6)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes c1 to c5,
The first member is at least elastically deformed when the movable body is located at the first position,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable body is a movable body in which the elastic deformation of the first member may be promoted by a return force.
(Appendix c7)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes c1 to c6,
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.
(Appendix c8)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes c1 to c6,
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine.

  Next, an effect example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 39 (a) to 41 (l) show the effect example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 in this order in chronological order. First, a configuration commonly used among the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 39 to 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 39A as an example. FIG. 39 (a) shows the decorative pattern display device 208, the special figure 1 display apparatus 212, the special figure 2 display apparatus 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the logo character 900 shown in FIG. Logo movable body 902, upper front movable body 1002 of upper front decoration accessory 1000, upper right side movable body 1201 of upper right side accessory 1200, upper left side movable body 1301 of upper left side accessory 1300, lower right side A lower right side movable body 1401 of the accessory 1400, a lower left side movable body 1501 of the lower left side accessory 1500, and a center lower movable body 1601 of the center lower accessory 1600 are schematically shown.

  The special figure 1 display 212, the special figure 2 display 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown at the lower right of the decorative symbol display 208, and the special figure 2 display 214 is a special figure. 1 is shown on the right side of the display device 212. The special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 is shown above the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 is shown above the special figure 2 display device 214. In addition, the light-off portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighted portions are shown in black. In addition, since up to four reservations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in this embodiment can be stored, four LEDs of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 are provided.

  39A, the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, the upper right side movable body 1201, the upper left side movable body 1301, the lower right side movable body 1401, and the lower left side movable body 1501 are shown. , And the lower center movable body 1601 are located at the initial position. When the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the center lower movable body 1601 are located at the initial positions, they are hidden by the center decoration member 806 and the game board decoration member 808, and these movable bodies Is difficult for the player to visually recognize. 39 to 41, for the sake of explanation, the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the center lower movable body 1601, which are originally difficult for the player to see when located at the initial position, are described. Is illustrated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), symbol display areas 208a to 208c for performing a variable display and a stop display of the decorative symbols are assigned to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In a case where a predetermined effect is performed by enlarging the effect display region 208d, the symbol display regions 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed as necessary, in an area other than the center of the image display area, for example, in the lower left corner. In some cases.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided on the lower right side in the effect display area 208d. The left side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1 and the right side is the fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2. If the result of the floating game of the immediately preceding special figure 1 is out of order while the special figure 1 variable game is not operating, an image representing "x" is displayed as the special figure 1 fourth symbol for the special figure 1 fourth symbol. It is displayed in the display area t1. Also, while the special figure 1 variable game is inactive, if the result of the last special figure 1 variable game is a hit, an image representing “A” is displayed as the special figure 1 fourth symbol for the special figure 1 It is displayed in the four symbol display area t1. If the result of the floating game of the immediately preceding special figure 2 is out of order while the special game 2 variable game is not operating, an image representing “x” is displayed as the special symbol 2 fourth symbol for the special figure 2 fourth symbol. It is displayed in the display area t2. In addition, while the special game 2 variable game is inactive, if the result of the last special game 2 variable game is a hit, an image representing “A” is displayed as the special figure 2 fourth symbol. It is displayed in the four symbol display area t2. Further, during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, an image representing "-" as the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1, and during execution of the special figure 2 variable game, "-" is displayed as the fourth symbol. Is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t2.

  A horizontally long special figure 1 reservation icon display area A is provided on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d. In the special figure 1 reservation icon display area A, the special figure 1 reservation icons a1, a2, etc., corresponding to the number of reservations of the special figure 1 are displayed. In addition, the display status of the special figure 1 hold icon enables notification of the result of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold with a predetermined reliability (prefetch notice). In this example, a white circular hold icon is displayed as the display mode with the lowest reliability (see the special figure 1 hold icon a1 in FIG. 39 (a)), and the display mode with the relatively high reliability is the display mode of the character number. A hold icon representing the face is displayed (see special figure 1 hold icon a3 in FIG. 39 (c)). In this embodiment, a maximum of four special figure 1 hold icons can be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area A. The plurality of special figure 1 reservation icons are displayed in order from right to left in the special figure 1 reservation icon display area as the reservation order becomes lower.

  Further, a special figure 2 reserved icon display area may be provided in which a number of special figure 2 reserved icons corresponding to the number of reserved special figure 2 are displayed. In that case, for example, a vertically long special figure 2 reserved icon display area is provided adjacent to the right side of the effect display area 208d. The special figure 2 reservation icon display area is not provided when there is no reservation of the special figure 2 and is provided only when the reservation of the special figure 2 is accumulated, but may be always provided. In addition, the special figure 2 reservation icon display area may be arranged to the right of the special figure 1 reservation icon display area A, or may be arranged above the special figure 1 reservation icon display area A. In addition, since the game ball can easily enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 during the positive transformation support, the player can easily visually recognize the special figure 2 hold icon displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. Alternatively, the display position of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area A and the display position of the special figure 2 reserved icon display area may be switched.

  Further, the state where all the segments are displayed in white on the special figure 1 display device 212 indicates that the special figure 1 variable display is being performed (see FIG. 39B). The same applies to the special figure 2 display device 214. Further, during the execution of the special figure variable game, the variable display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is indicated by a downward arrow (see FIG. 39 (b)).

  FIG. 39 (a) shows a state in which the variable game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is not operating. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. On the special figure 2 display device 214, the first special design "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. “X” is displayed as the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed as a combination of decoration symbols, and it is notified that the result of the right / wrong judgment of the immediately preceding special figure fluctuating game has been lost. I have.

  The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 informs that there are two special figure 1 holdings. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 informs that there is no special figure 2 holding. Two special figure 1 reservation icons a1 and a2 are displayed in the special figure 1 reservation icon display area A of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a white circular display mode.

  The logo movable body 902 emits white light. The logo movable body 902 emits white light at normal times when no notice is given.

  FIG. 39 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been started. In this example, the start order of the special figure 1 variable game is that one LED of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned off, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display, and the fourth figure display area for the special figure 1 The fourth symbol at t1 starts variable display, and then a reduction animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon is displayed, and then the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The order of the start of these operations may be changed.

  Further, prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 39 (b), the main control unit 300 uses a hit / fail judgment table (not shown) in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231, see FIG. 7). A decision is made as to whether or not the result is that the result of the special figure fluctuating game is out of order. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 symbol determination table (not shown), “special figure I” is selected. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table (not shown), the variable time is determined. In addition, the main control unit 300 transmits a symbol variation start command including the information of the lottery result to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 7).

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol change start command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S309, see FIG. 8), and performs the special figure 1 variable game. Decide not to perform the notice production of.

  In the display of the decrease animation of the special figure 1 reservation icon, the special figure 1 reservation icon a1 having the first reservation order is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 reservation icon a2 moves rightward. Note that the special figure 1 reservation icon a1 having the first place in the reservation order may be displayed as a variable icon. The change icon is displayed as a notice effect of the special figure change game being executed.

  FIG. 39C shows a state in which only one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 increases to two. The second LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on, and it is displayed that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 1 to 2. In addition, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information related to the suspension of the special figure 1 and preliminarily determines a stop symbol or the like of the special figure 1 variable game before determining whether or not the special figure related lottery process is appropriate. The figure pre-reading process (step S224, see FIG. 7) is executed, and the pre-reading result information command including the result of the preliminary determination is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 7). In this example, the result of the pre-judgment is a big hit of “Tokuzu A”.

  The first sub-control unit 400 receives the pre-read result information command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S309, see FIG. 8), and holds the increased special figure 1 on hold. The display mode of the special figure 1 reserved icon shown is determined to be a mode representing the face of the character's number. As a result, a special figure 1 hold icon a3 representing the face of the character's number is newly displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area A. The decorative symbol display device 208 gives a preliminary look-ahead with a relatively high degree of reliability as to the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuating game has the second place in the special figure 1 hold icon a3.

  FIG. 39D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swinging state in the left symbol display area 208a. FIG. 39 (e) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swinging state in the right symbol display area 208c. FIG. 39 (f) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a swinging state. As a result, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a swinging state. As described above, the variation display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol (first symbol), the right symbol (second symbol), and the middle symbol (third symbol).

  FIG. 39 (g) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is out of play is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3" indicating a loss as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the completed special figure 1 variable game is correct is incorrect.

  FIG. 39 (h) shows a state where the next special figure 1 variable game has been started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 39 (h), the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 is in a lottery process (step S231, see FIG. 7) by using a determination table (not shown). Then, it is determined that the result of the special figure fluctuating game is out of order. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 symbol determination table (not shown), “special figure I” is selected. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table (not shown), the variable time is determined. In addition, the main control unit 300 transmits a symbol variation start command including the information of the lottery result to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 7).

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S309, see FIG. 8), Decides to execute a look-ahead preview effect using the logo movable body 902 for the second special figure 1 variable game. Note that it may be determined that the pre-reading notice is to be executed in advance at the time when the suspension of the special figure 1 variable game to be pre-reading notice is started.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 floating game, a decrease animation of the special figure 1 reservation icon is executed, the special figure 1 reservation icon a2 having the first place in the reservation order is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 reservation icon a3 Moves to the right.

  FIG. 39 (i) shows a state in which a prefetch notice using the logo movable body 902 has been started during the special figure 1 variable game. The logo movable body 902 performs up-and-down vibration that moves minutely repeatedly up and down to give a prefetch notice. FIG. 39 (i) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 has been lowered from the initial position. The light emitting mode of the logo movable body 902 changes from white to blue. In this example, the logo movable body 902 emits white light at normal times when no notice or the like is executed, and changes its color to blue or the like when a pre-read notice or the like is executed. In addition, the pre-reading notice may be a fake notice (false notice) in which the special-figure variable game targeted for the pre-reading notice is lost.

  FIG. 39 (j) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 vibrates up and down. In FIG. 39 (j), the logo movable body 902 has risen from the position shown in FIG. 39 (i) and has returned to the vicinity of the initial position.

  FIG. 39 (k) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 has been lowered again. The vertical oscillation of the logo movable body 902 ends with this lowering. In addition, the logo movable body 902 continues to emit blue light even after the vibration stops, and executes a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 39 (l) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 has moved to the uppermost position. As described above, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the photo sensor 984 shown in FIG. 18 detects the light shielding piece (not shown) of the sector gear 976, so that the first sub control unit 400 It can be determined that the movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position. The logo movable body 902 is lowered from the uppermost position by a predetermined number of steps and returns to the initial position. In addition, when the logo movable body 902 moves to the uppermost position, the rotary decorative portion 1124 of the upper rear movable body 1102 becomes visible. As described above, even when the upper rear movable body 1102 is not operating, the rotating decoration portion 1124 may be visible to the player.

  FIG. 40A, which is a continuation from FIG. 39L, shows a state in which the logo movable body 902 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 40 (b) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swinging state in the left symbol display area 208a. FIG. 40 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swinging state in the right symbol display area 208c. FIG. 40D shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swinging state in the middle symbol display area 208b. Accordingly, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a swinging state.

  FIG. 40 (e) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is out of play is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" indicating a loss as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the completed special figure 1 variable game is correct is incorrect.

  FIG. 40 (f) shows a state where the next special figure 1 variable game has been started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 40 (f), the main control unit 300 determines whether the special figure 1 is in a lottery process (step S231, see FIG. 7) using a hit / fail determination table (not shown). Then, it is determined that the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 symbol determination table (not shown), “special figure A” is selected. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table (not shown), the variable time is determined. In addition, the main control unit 300 transmits a symbol variation start command including the information of the lottery result to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 7).

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol change start command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S309, see FIG. 8), and executes the special figure change during execution. It is determined that a step-up notice, a notice using a character image of a buncho, and a super reach effect are executed as a notice of a game.

  Further, with the start of the special figure 1 floating game, a decrease animation of the special figure 1 reservation icon is executed, and the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is deleted.

  FIG. 40 (g) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 has started vertical vibration. FIG. 40 (g) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 has been lowered from the initial position. In addition, the emission color of the logo movable body 902 changes from blue to red with the start of vibration. In FIG. 39 (i), the logo movable body 902 has started the first vibration, and in FIG. 40 (g), the logo movable body 902 has started the second vibration. The logo movable body 902 changes the emission color every time the vibration starts, thereby increasing the expectation of the notice target. Further, the logo movable body 902 changes the emission color for each special figure variable game, and executes a continuous notice. The change in the emission color also functions as increasing the expectation of the continuous notice. In addition, when the logo movable body 902 is lowered, a part of the upper rear movable body 1102 (for example, the rotary decoration 1124) may be visible to the player.

  FIG. 40 (h) shows a state where the upper left side movable body 1301 has moved obliquely downward to the right from the initial position and stopped. In this example, the first stage of the step-up notice is executed by moving the upper left side movable body 1301 obliquely downward to the right from the initial position. In addition, the vertical vibration of the logo movable body 902 is continuing, and in FIG. 40 (h), the logo movable body 902 has risen and returned near the initial position. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area.

  FIG. 40 (i) shows a state where the upper right side movable body 1201 has moved diagonally downward and leftward from the initial position and stopped. When the upper right side movable body 1201 moves diagonally downward and leftward from the initial position, the second stage of the step-up notice is executed. Further, the vertical movement of the logo movable body 902 is continuing, and the logo movable body 902 is moving downward from the initial position. Further, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a in a swinging state. In the effect display area 208d enlarged in the center of the display area, an animation of the character's chief breaking out of clothes and a character string of "chance" are displayed, and a notice of the change is executed.

  FIG. 40 (j) shows a state in which the rotating operation of the movable body front part 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 and the rotating operation of the movable body front part 1303 of the upper left side movable body 1301 have been executed. The third stage of the step-up notice is executed by the clockwise rotation of the movable body front part 1203 and the clockwise rotation of the movable body front part 1303.

  In addition, the vertical vibration of the logo movable body 902 ends, and the logo movable body 902 has moved to the uppermost position. After moving to the uppermost position, the logo movable body 902 is driven by a predetermined number of steps and returns to the initial position. In the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swaying state, and in the effect display area 208d, the animation in which the character's clerk breaks his clothes and the character string of "chance" are erased and replaced. Is displayed, and the start effect of the reach is executed.

  FIG. 40 (k) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c in which the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged in the center of the display area. At the start of the reach effect, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and displayed at the center of the display area, and it is notified that the decorative symbols are aligned in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c.

  In addition, the logo movable body 902 moves downward and returns to the initial position. Also, the movable body front part 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 rotates clockwise, the movable body front part 1303 of the upper left side movable body 1301 rotates counterclockwise, and the movable body front part 1203 and the movable body front part. 1303 has returned to the initial position. Further, a part of the "decoration 3" in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c is hidden by a part of the upper right side movable body 1201 and a part of the upper left side movable body 1301.

  FIG. 40 (l) shows a state in which the upper right side movable body 1201 moves diagonally right upward and returns to the initial position, and the upper left side movable body 1301 moves diagonally left upward and returns to the initial position. ing. At the start of the reach effect, all of the movable bodies temporarily return to the initial positions.

  FIG. 41 (a), which is a continuation of FIG. 40 (l), shows that the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the center lower movable body 1601 move upward from the initial position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 The state of being located ahead is shown. Further, the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the movable body 1503 of the lower left side movable body 1501 are rotated about the left and right directions from the initial position, and their postures are changed. In addition, an animation of the effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and an advanced effect to a super reach effect is executed.

  FIG. 41B shows a state where the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the center lower movable body 1601 have moved downward and returned to the initial position. In addition, the positions of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the movable body 1503 of the lower left side movable body 1501 have returned to their original positions. Further, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area, and a super reach effect is started. In the effect display area 208d, an animation of the effect is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 41C shows a state in which the super reach effect has been started. The effect display area 208d is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display area, an image of the hero character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, an image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and a character string of "reach reach" is displayed in the center. Is displayed. In the super reach effect of this example, an animation of a scene where the main character and the enemy character cut each other is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 41D shows a state in which the super reach effect continues. In the effect display area 208d, the character string of "rejection reach" is deleted, and instead, the character string of "hit!" Is displayed, suggesting that slashing is started.

  FIG. 41E shows a state in which the super reach effect is continuing. In the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed above the character string "blow!" The image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed to prompt the player to operate the chance button 136 when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts. During the operation valid period of the chance button 136, an image (for example, a meter image, a number indicating the number of seconds remaining, or the like) indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period may be displayed.

  FIG. 41F shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 136 during the operation period of the chance button 136. On the right side of FIG. 41 (f), a chance button 136 and a hand of a player who operates the button 136 are schematically illustrated. By operating the chance button 136, a cutting animation is started.

  FIG. 41 (g) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position. The operation of moving the logo movable body 902 to the uppermost position is an operation for causing the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 arranged behind the logo movable body 902 to appear in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. For this reason, the upward movement of the logo movable body 902 may be a sign that the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move downward. When the logo movable body 902 moves to the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move downward, and it may be possible to expect that the effect will be further developed.

  FIG. 41H shows a state in which a moving operation of a movable body other than the logo movable body 902 has been performed. The lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the center lower movable body 1601 move upward from the initial position and stop in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The postures of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the lower left side movable body 1501 are changing. In addition, the upper right side movable body 1201 moves from the initial position in the diagonally lower left direction and stops, and the movable body front portion 1203 executes a rotation operation and stops. Similarly, the upper left side movable body 1301 moves obliquely downward to the right from the initial position and stops, and the movable body front portion 1303 performs a rotation operation and stops. Also, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move downward and stop at the lowest position. After the upper front movable body 1002 moves to the lowest position, the lens movable body 1002a moves forward. In addition, via the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002, the rotating decorative part 1124 that is rotating is enlarged and visually recognized.

  In the effect display area 208d, the image of the hero character and the image of the enemy character are deleted, and an animation of the effect is displayed on almost the entire surface.

  FIG. 41 (i) shows a state in which an effect (premier effect) for notifying the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable game has been executed during the super reach effect. The operation of opening and rotating the decorative part of the movable body 1425 of the lower right side movable body 1401 is performed, and the operation of opening and rotating the decorative part of the movable body 1525 of the lower left side movable body 1501 is performed. In addition, the rotation operation of the circular film 1605 of the lower center movable body 1601 is performed. In addition, the rotating operation of the rotating decorative portion 1124 of the upper rear movable body 1102 is being performed. A seven-color effect (rainbow effect) is displayed on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 41 (j) shows a state where an animation for notifying the result of the cutting is displayed. In the effect display area 208d, the animation of the seven-color effect is deleted, and an image of the protagonist character who has won each other on the right side and an image of an enemy character that has been cut and fell on the left side are displayed on the right side. Character strings are displayed. Also, “decoration 3” is displayed below the character string of “win”, suggesting that “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the super reach effect ends.

  With the end of the super reach effect, each movable body returns to the initial position. After the lens movable body 1002a of the upper front movable body 1002 moves to the rear, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move upward to return to the initial position, and then the logo movable body 902 moves downward. Move and return to initial position. The moving order of the other movable bodies to the initial position may be simultaneous or may be set in an arbitrary order.

  In FIG. 41 (k), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original positions in the center of the image display area, and “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in a swinging state as a combination of decoration symbols. This shows the displayed state. In addition, the logo movable body 902 moves downward and returns to the initial position.

  FIG. 41 (l) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. On the special figure 1 display device 212, "Special figure A" of the 15R special big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol "A" indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. “Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3” indicating a special jackpot as a combination of decoration patterns is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that the end result of the special figure 1 variable game is a special jackpot (probably variable jackpot).

  Next, an effect example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 to be described later, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the upper right side accessory 1200, The illustration of the upper left side accessory 1300, the lower right side accessory 1400, the lower left side accessory 1500, and the center lower accessory 1600 is omitted.

  FIG. 42A shows a state in which the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial position. When the lens movable body 1002a moves forward after moving to the lowermost position, the logo movable body 902 moves to the uppermost position to avoid contact between the lens movable body 1002a and the logo movable body 902. After that, the lens movable body 1002a moves forward and the lens movable body 1002a moves forward. However, when the lens movable body 1002a does not move forward, the lens movable body 1002a and the logo movable body 902 do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, as shown in FIG. The upper front movable body 1002 may move downward while remaining at the position. Further, the upper rear movable body 1102 may move downward together with the upper front movable body 1002, or may not move.

  Also, the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side role 1200, the upper left side movable body 1301 of the upper left side role 1300, the lower right side movable body 1401 of the lower right side role 1400, the lower left side role 1500 The lower left side movable body 1501 and the central lower movable body 1601 of the central lower part 1600 do not come into contact with other movable bodies, and thus can move at any timing.

  FIG. 42C shows a state where the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial position. FIG. 42D continued from FIG. 42C shows a state where the logo movable body 902 has moved to the uppermost position. FIG. 42E continued from FIG. 42D shows a state where the upper front movable body 1002 has moved to the lowest position. As described above, only the upper front movable body 1002 of the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 may be moved downward. Thereby, the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be shown to the player via the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002.

  Even when the lens movable body 1002a is located at the forefront position, the distance between the lens 1018 and the display surface of the decorative design display device 208 is shorter than the focal length of the lens 1018. For this reason, various displays (for example, a hold icon, a change icon, a cut-in image, a character image, a conversation image, a decoration pattern, a fourth pattern, and a normal figure decoration pattern) displayed on the decoration pattern display device 208 via the lens 1018 , Effect image, tutorial display explaining effects, tutorial display explaining operations, button image, meter image, error display (e.g., bottom plate full error), alert notification (e.g., alert notification to prevent forgetting of prepaid card) In this case, the player can observe the erect virtual image of the display, which is enlarged at a predetermined magnification, to make the display stand out.

  Next, an effect example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A shows a state where the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, and the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the lowermost position. An erect virtual image of the rotary decoration 1124 is visually recognized through the lens 1018.

  FIG. 43B continued from FIG. 43A shows a state in which the lens movable body 1002a of the upper front movable body 1002 has moved to the forefront. Since the distance between the lens 1018 and the rotary decoration 1124 approaches the focal length of the lens 1018 due to the forward movement of the lens movable body 1002a, in FIG. 43B, the distance is enlarged as compared with FIG. 43A. The erect virtual image of the rotated decorative part 1124 can be observed. As a result, in some cases, it is possible to make the rotating decorative portion 1124 look enlarged and to make the rotating operation of the rotating decorative portion 1124 stand out.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows that the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial position, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c in a swinging state. The medium symbol display area 208b shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed at a relatively low speed. “Decoration 3” is aligned in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and a reach effect (normal reach effect) is being executed. In FIG. 43C, “decoration 2” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 43 (d), which is a continuation of FIG. 43 (c), shows that the decorative symbols are continuously displayed at a relatively low speed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows the state where it was turned on.

  FIG. 43 (e), which follows FIG. 43 (d), shows that the decorative symbol is continuously displayed at a relatively low speed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 4” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows the state where it was turned on.

  In this example, the decorative pattern is not shown to the player via the lens 1018. For example, when the result of the special figure fluctuating game is out of order, the upper front movable body 1002 does not move from the initial position, and the decorative pattern may not be enlarged and displayed by the lens 1018 to the player.

  FIG. 43F shows that the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is located at the forefront position, and the upper rear movable body is located. This shows a state where the body 1102 is located at the initial position. A part of the upper movable body 1102 (the rotary decoration 1124) is visible. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swinging fluctuation state, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, the decoration symbol is fluctuated and displayed at a relatively slow speed, thereby achieving a reach effect (normal reach effect). ) Is running. As shown in FIG. 43F, an enlarged erect virtual image of “decoration 2” displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is observed via the lens 1018.

  FIG. 43 (g) subsequent to FIG. 43 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a swinging state. Through the lens 1018, an enlarged erect virtual image of "decoration 3" displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is observed. Thereby, for example, at the time of a big hit, there is a case where it is possible to enlarge and show the middle symbol aligned at the end of the reach effect, thereby increasing the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 43H continued from FIG. 43G shows a state where the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable body 1002 have returned to the initial positions. The order of returning each movable body to the initial position is as follows. After the lens movable body 1002a moves to the rear, the upper front movable body 1002 moves upward to return to the initial position, and then the logo movable body 902 moves downward. Move and return to initial position.

  As described above, in some cases, the game effect can be sharpened by using the upper front movable body 1002 in the reach effect at the time of the big hit without using the upper front movable body 1002 in the reach effect at the time of the loss.

  Next, an effect example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 44 (a) shows that the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is located at the forefront position, and the upper movable part is movable. This shows a state where the body 1102 is located at the initial position. In addition, during the execution of the special figure variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is visually recognized through the lens 1018. In addition, the game state at the present time is during the probability change (during the probability change support), and a character string of “during probability change” is displayed below the effect display area 208d. Further, an image of the hero character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and an image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and an effect at the time of a probability change is executed.

  As described above, in the probable change state, the decorative design may be visually recognized through the lens 1018, so that the variable display of the decorative design may be emphasized. Note that the game state in which the decorative symbol is visually recognized through the lens 1018 may be a latent state (a special figure high-probability general figure low probability state) or a time reduction state (a special figure low-probability general figure high probability state).

  44B, the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is located at the foremost position, and the upper rear movable body is located. This shows a state where the body 1102 is located at the initial position. In addition, the special figure fluctuating game is not being executed (symbol stop display is being performed), and “decoration 2−decoration 3−decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is visually recognized through 1018. In addition, the game state at the present time is during the probability change (during the probability change support), and a character string of “during probability change” is displayed below the effect display area 208d. Note that a character string such as "hidden", "hidden", or "monster" may be displayed during the hidden state. Further, a character string indicating the current effect mode may be displayed. Further, an image of the hero character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and an image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and an effect at the time of a probability change is executed.

  As described above, in the probable change state, the stop display of the decorative symbol may be emphasized by visually recognizing the decorative symbol via the lens 1018. In addition, the game state in which the decorative pattern is visually recognized through the lens 1018 may be a latent state (a special figure high-accuracy normal figure low-accuracy state) or a time-saving state (a special figure low-accuracy ordinary figure high-accuracy state).

  FIG. 44C shows that the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is located at the forefront position, and the upper rear movable body is attained. This shows a state where the body 1102 is located at the initial position. In addition, the special figure variable game is being executed. In addition, the game state at the present time is during the probability change (during the probability change support), and a character string of “during probability change” is displayed below the effect display area 208d. Further, an image of the hero character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and an image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and an effect at the time of a probability change is executed.

  In addition, the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the entire surface of the image display area, and “heat” is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and a notice effect (a notice of the change or a notice of the pre-reading) is executed. . The character “heat” is magnified and visually recognized through the lens 1018. As a result, the notice effect may be noticeable.

  FIG. 44D shows that the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move slightly downward from the initial position, and the lens movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position. Is shown. In addition, the special figure variable game is being executed. In addition, the game state at the present time is during the probability change (during the probability change support), and a character string of “during probability change” is displayed below the effect display area 208d. Further, an image of the hero character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and an image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and an effect at the time of a probability change is executed. In addition, the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the entire surface of the image display area, and “heat” is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and a notice effect (a notice of the change or a notice of the pre-reading) is executed. .

  In FIG. 44 (d), a part of the rotary decoration 1124 is visually recognized via the lens 1018. This may make it possible for the player to notice that something is hidden behind the upper front movable body 1002 and to pay attention to the upper rear movable body 1102.

  FIG. 44E shows a state where the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial position. Also, during the execution of the special figure variable game, the effect display area 208d is enlarged over the entire image display area, an image of the hero character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and an image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side. It is displayed, and a character string of "reach reach" is displayed in the center, and reach effect is executed.

  As described above, when the reach effect is executed, the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 may be stopped at the initial position. As a result, an animation or the like can be displayed by widely using the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute a reach effect.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment allows a player to visually recognize various displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 via the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002. The display to be visually recognized by the player via the lens 1018 includes a re-lottery effect display, a promotion effect display, a probable change notification effect display, an icon display such as a hold icon or a change icon, a game state notification display, and various types of information. Notification display and the like. The pachinko machine 100 may be able to magnify these displays via the lens 1018 and make them visible to the player to emphasize these displays.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 44 again.
(D1)
First display means capable of displaying at least a display (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A movable body (for example, a logo movable body 902) capable of executing at least the first operation,
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the movable body moves upward from a first position (for example, an initial position) (see, for example, FIG. 19B).
The movable body located at the first position is a movable body at least a part of which is positioned higher than the first display means (for example, see FIG. 39A). Stand.

According to the above-mentioned gaming table, there is a case where a gaming table having characteristics of a movable body can be provided. In some cases, it is possible to use a large display area of the first display means to show the player to the player while making the operation of the movable body stand out.
(D2)
The gaming table according to (D1),
The movable body is a movable body that can execute at least the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 19C).
The second operation is an operation that moves downward from the first position (see, for example, FIG. 19C).
After the second operation is performed, at least a part of the movable body is located in front of the first display means (for example, see FIG. 39 (i)). .

According to the above-mentioned gaming table, the movable body can be moved to a position overlapping the first display means in the front-rear direction, and the variation in the relationship between the movable body and the first display means can be increased in some cases.
(D3)
The gaming table according to (D2),
The first operation is an operation that is movable from the first position to a second position (for example, the uppermost position) (see, for example, FIG. 19B).
The second operation is an operation of moving from the first position to a third position (for example, a lowermost position) (see, for example, FIG. 19C).
A game console wherein the movable amount in the first operation is larger than the movable amount in the second operation (for example, see FIG. 19).

According to the gaming table, there is a case where the effect can be performed by widely using the display area of the first display means while making the moving operation of the movable body look large. Further, even when the movable body is located at the second position and is separated from the first display means, the movable body can sometimes be noticed. Further, even when the movable body is located at the third position and overlaps the first display means in the front-rear direction, the movable body may be noticed by the third operation.
(D4)
The gaming table according to (D3),
A detection unit (for example, a photo sensor 984) capable of detecting at least the position of the movable body;
The detecting means is means capable of detecting at least the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the second position,
When the movable body returns to the first position after the second operation is performed, the movable body returns to the first position after moving from the third position to the second position ( For example, refer to FIG. 39 (i) to FIG. 40 (a)).

According to the gaming table, the movable body is returned to the first position without hiding the display displayed on the first display means with the movable body, so that the player who is paying attention to the display is not disturbed. You may be able to. For example, when the movable body moves to the third position during the execution of the symbol variation display and the notice is executed, and when the notice ends at the end of the symbol variation display, the movable body moves to the second position. Since it returns to the first position, it may be possible to prevent the movable body from disturbing the player who pays attention to the symbol change display next to the symbol change display.
(D5)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D4),
The movable body is a movable body including at least a rotating mechanism (for example, a rotating link mechanism 902b) capable of executing a rotating operation,
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves upward in association with the rotation operation being performed (for example, see FIG. 20B).
The movable body is a movable body configured at least by a plurality of movable parts (for example, a second character part 912 to a sixth character part 920),
At least one of the plurality of movable parts (hereinafter, referred to as “second movable part”).
(For example, the fourth character portion 916) is at least one of the plurality of movable portions different from the second movable portion (hereinafter, referred to as a “first movable portion”).
(For example, the second character portion 912) is a movable portion provided at a position farther from the rotation center in the rotation operation,
The first operation is an operation in which the upward movable amount of the second movable unit is larger than the upward movable amount of the first movable unit (see, for example, FIG. 19B). A gaming table characterized by that.

According to the gaming table, there are cases where a plurality of portions of the movable body can be moved regularly. Further, the rotary motion by the motor can be converted into linear motion by the rotary mechanism and transmitted to a plurality of portions of the movable body.
(D6)
The gaming table according to (D5),
The gaming table, wherein the first operation is an operation in which at least one of the plurality of movable units (for example, the fourth character unit 916) moves upward.

According to the gaming table, the player may be able to pay attention to a particularly moved part of the movable body.
(D7)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D6),
The gaming table, wherein the first position is a position where at least a part of the movable body is located in front of the first display means.

According to the above gaming table, the movable body overlaps the first display means that the player usually pays attention to, so that the first operation of the movable body may not be overlooked.
(D8)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D7),
A game console, wherein the movable body is a movable body including at least a second display unit (for example, a sub display device) capable of displaying a display.

According to the gaming table, since the movable body includes the second display unit, the movable body after the operation may be noticed in some cases (D9).
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D8),
The movable body is a movable body including at least a character portion having a character shape (for example, a first character portion 910 to a seventh character portion 922),
A game console, wherein the movable body is a movable body capable of emitting the character portion by a light emitting unit (for example, an LED mounted on an LED board 910c or the like).

According to the gaming table, the character portion of the movable body can sometimes be made to stand out.
(D10)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D9),
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
(D11)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D9),
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).

  When the movable body is located at the first position, at least a portion may overlap the first display means in the front-rear direction, or the whole may not overlap the first display means in the front-rear direction. Good.

  The first display means and the second display means include a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, and a plasma. Other display devices, including displays and projectors, can be used.

  The movable body may be configured to be able to perform a movement operation other than the parallel movement and the rotational movement, or may be configured to be capable of performing the first operation, the second operation, or the third operation from a plurality of operation modes. May be.

  The second operation may be an operation of moving to a position beyond the lower limit position of the first display means.

  The movable body may move less in a direction away from the first display means than in a direction overlapping the first display means.

  The initial position of the movable body need not be in front of the first display means.

  The movable body may be an integral movable body having a plurality of movable parts. For example, a movable sub liquid crystal and another movable body that is movable in the vicinity of the sub liquid crystal may be formed as an integral movable body.

  Characters represented by the character shape include title logo characters that include at least a part of the game console model name and the like, and characteristic characters related to the characteristics of the game console and the title and motif of the game console (for example, a latent probability change). For example, if the game is a game console having "", "submarine" or "monster", and if a historical drama is used as a motif, "war" or "fight" is used. The number of characters may be two or more.

  The movable body does not have to include the light emitting means. Further, at least one of the plurality of character portions may emit light.

  The movable body is configured not to execute the multi-step operation, and may be able to execute only the movement operation.

In the present example, the detection means can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the second position. The movable body returns to the initial position once the position is detected by the detecting means. In this example, when the detection means can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the second position, the movable body is moved to the second position, which is a position above the first display means. After moving, it returns to the initial position. Further, for example, when the detection means can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the third position, the movable body is moved to the third position which is a position in front of the first display means. After moving, it returns to the initial position. For this reason, when the detecting means can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the second position, the detecting means changes the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the third position. The movable body can return to the initial position without hiding the display of the first display means, as compared with the case where detection is possible. The detecting means may detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the third position, or may detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the first position. It may be possible.
(E1)
A gaming table with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is at least movable from a first area (for example, see FIG. 19A) to a third area (for example, see FIG. 19B). Hereinafter, referred to as a “first movable body”) (for example, a logo movable body 902),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies may be a second region (for example, see FIGS. 24A and 28A) to a fourth region (for example, FIGS. 24C and 28C). c)) (hereinafter referred to as a “second movable body”) (for example, an upper front movable body 1002, a lens movable body 1002a, and an upper rear movable body 1102).
The fourth region is a region including at least a part of the first region,
The first area is an area occupied by the first movable body in a state before the first movable body moves (for example, a state where the first movable body is located at an initial position),
The fourth area is an area occupied by the second movable body in a state after the second movable body has moved (for example, a state after moving to a lowermost position). A gaming table to play.

According to the above-mentioned gaming table, there is a case where a gaming table having characteristics of a movable body can be provided. In addition, a variety of operations may be possible in association with a plurality of movable bodies.
(E2)
The gaming table according to (E1),
The second movable body is a movable body located at least in the front-rear direction with respect to the first movable body (see, for example, FIGS. 16 and 17),
The gaming table, wherein the second movable body is a movable body that is movable at least in the front-rear direction when moving to the fourth area (for example, see FIG. 25).

According to the gaming table, the second movable body that moves forward may be able to impact the player.
(E3)
The game console according to (E1) or (E2),
The second region is a region occupied by the second movable body in a state before the second movable body moves (for example, a state where the second movable body is located at an initial position) (see, for example, FIG. 24A). ),
A gaming table, wherein the second area is an area where at least a part of the area is in the front-rear direction of the first area (see, for example, FIGS. 16 and 17).

According to the above-mentioned gaming table, there are cases in which a plurality of movable bodies can be seen from the player side during normal times, thereby allowing the player to expect the operation of the movable bodies.
(E4)
The gaming table according to any one of (E1) to (E3),
A first display unit capable of displaying at least a display (for example, a decorative design display device 208);
The gaming table, wherein the fourth area is an area including at least a part of an area in front of the first display means (see, for example, FIG. 41 (h)).

According to the gaming table, there is a case where the second movable body can be operated in association with the display of the first display means.
(E5)
The gaming table according to (E4),
The first movable body is a movable body that is at least movable from the first region to a fifth region (for example, see FIG. 19C),
The fifth region is a region including a region in which at least a part of the region is in front of the first display unit (for example, see FIG. 39 (i)).
The gaming table, wherein the fifth area is an area including at least a part of the fourth area (for example, see FIG. 39 (i)).

According to the gaming table, the first movable body may be able to perform an operation other than the operation that is a precursor to the operation of the second movable body.
(E6)
The gaming table according to (E5),
The third region is a region shifted upward from the first region,
The gaming table, wherein the fifth region is a region shifted downward from the first region.

According to the gaming table, unexpected movement may be performed by moving the first movable body upward away from the display area of the first display means. In some cases, the expectation that the second movable body appears in front of the display area of the first display means can be increased.
(E7)
(E4) The gaming table according to any one of (E6),
A gaming table, wherein the first area is an area including at least a part of an area in front of the first display means.

According to the gaming table, the first movable body is located in front of the display area in the initial state, so that the operation of the first movable body in a direction away from the display area can be prevented from being overlooked. There is.
(E8)
The gaming table according to any one of (E1) to (E7),
A second display unit capable of displaying at least a display (for example, a sub display device),
A gaming table, wherein one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body including the second display means.

According to the gaming table, there is a case where the operation itself of the movable body including the second display means can be noticed by paying attention to the display content of the second display means.
(E9)
The gaming table according to any one of (E1) to (E7),
A second display unit capable of displaying at least a display (for example, a sub display device),
The gaming table, wherein the third area is an area including at least a part of an area in front of the second display means.

According to the gaming table, the movement of the first movable body may be naturally noticed by the presence of the second display means at the destination of the first movable body.
(E10)
The gaming table according to any one of (E1) to (E9),
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
(E11)
The gaming table according to any one of (E1) to (E9),
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).

The first area is an area occupied by the first movable body when the first movable body is located at the first position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body.

  The second movable body is movable to a position including the initial position of the first movable body.

  The first movable body is, for example, a logo movable body 902. The second movable body is the upper front movable body 1002, the lens movable body 1002a, or the upper rear movable body 1102.

  The first area and the second area do not have a common area and may overlap in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the first region and the fourth region do not have a common region and may overlap in the front-back direction.

  The first movable body may be arranged behind the second movable body, and the second movable body may be movable backward.

The gaming table is
The first movable body is a movable body that can be visually recognized by a player in a state where the first movable body is located at an initial position,
The second movable body is a movable body that can be visually recognized by a player in a state where the second movable body is located at an initial position.

The gaming table is
Symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of at least performing symbol variation display;
Holding means (for example, RAM 308) capable of holding at least the start of the symbol change display,
A notice (hereinafter, referred to as a “first notice”) for the running symbol change display is configured to be at least executable,
A notice for the pending symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as a “second notice”) is configured to be at least executable,
At least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body that can be used to execute the first notice,
At least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body that can be used to execute the second notice.

The gaming table,
The first movable body is a movable body that is at least movable from the first area to a fifth area,
The fifth region is a region that does not include at least a part of the region in front of the first display unit,
The fifth region is a region that does not include at least a part of the fourth region.

  The fifth area is an area below the first display means.

One or both of the first movable body and the second movable body may include at least the second display means.
The second movable body may be arranged in a direction other than the front-back direction with respect to the first movable body, for example, in a position shifted in the left-right direction. When the second movable body is positioned in the front-back direction with respect to the first movable body, the movable body may be compactly stored.

  The fourth area may be an area that does not include an area in front of the first display means, or may be an area in which all of the fourth area is in front of the first display means.

  The first movable body may be capable of moving outside the operation range of the second movable body (for example, a sixth region).

  The first movable body may be configured to be movable in a direction approaching the first display means.

  The second movable body may be movable at a position farther from the first display means than the first movable body.

  When the first movable body is located at the initial position, the first movable body may not overlap the display area of the first display means in the front-rear direction and may not hide the display area.

  In an initial state, a configuration in which a plurality of movable bodies do not overlap in the front-rear direction may be employed. For example, one of the first movable body and the second movable body is located above the first display means, the other movable body is located below the first display device, and one movable body A configuration in which the operation range of the body is moved to the operation range of the other movable body to perform the operation of retracting the other movable body may be performed.

  The first movable body may include a main display device (for example, the decorative design display device 208).

  The first movable body may include a sub display device (for example, a sub display device).

  The second movable body may include a main display device (for example, the decorative design display device 208).

  The second movable body may include a sub display device (for example, a sub display device).

  The first movable body and the second movable body may be configured by the main display device and the sub display device.

  The effect display displayed on the main display device and the sub-display device is a decorative symbol change display, a hold display such as a hold icon (an example of a pre-reading notice), a change icon (an example of a notice), a fourth symbol, a game, and the like. It is information display such as state, etc., what may be displayed on either display device, the same information may be displayed on both display devices, or with the main display device when predetermined conditions are satisfied, etc. A configuration in which the display on the sub display device is switched may be employed.

A gaming table with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one movable body of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
At least one movable body of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The first movable body is movable from a first position to a third position,
The second movable body is movable from a second position to a fourth position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The third position is a position above the first position,
The gaming table, wherein the fourth position is a position below the second position.

A gaming table with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one movable body of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
At least one movable body of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The first movable body is movable from a first position to a third position,
The second movable body is movable from a second position to a fourth position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The third position is a position below the first position,
The gaming table, wherein the fourth position is a position above the second position.
(F1)
A gaming table with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter, referred to as “first movable body”).
(For example, the upper front movable body 1002 and the lens movable body 1002a) are moved from a first position (for example, an initial position, an uppermost position, see FIG. 24A) to a third position (for example, a lowermost position). Position, see FIG. 24 (c)).
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter, referred to as a "second movable body").
28 (from the second position (for example, the initial position, the uppermost position, see FIG. 28A)) to the fourth position (for example, the lowermost position, FIG. 28 ( c) a movable body that is at least movable to
The second movable body located at the second position is a movable body that at least partially overlaps the first movable body located at the first position in the front-rear direction (for example, FIGS. 17),
The second movable body located at the fourth position is a movable body that at least partially overlaps the first movable body located at the third position in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. 41 (h )), A game console characterized by the following.

According to the above-mentioned gaming table, a gaming table having characteristics of a movable body can be provided. Further, there are cases where the operation can be performed while maintaining the positional relationship between the plurality of movable bodies.
(F2)
The gaming table according to (F1),
The first movable body is a movable body located in front of the second movable body (see, for example, FIGS. 16 and 17),
The first movable body is a movable body provided with at least a viewing area (for example, openings 1012a, 1014d, and 1002b5) in which the back of the first movable body can be seen,
At least a part of the second movable body located at the second position is configured to be visible from the visible area of the first movable body located at the first position (for example, FIG. 40 (j)),
At least a part of the second movable body located at the fourth position is visible from the visible area of the first movable body located at the third position (for example, (See FIG. 41 (h)).

According to the gaming table, since the second movable body can be seen from the visual recognition area of the first movable body, even if the second movable body moves to a position overlapping the first movable body in the front-rear direction. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced.
(F3)
The gaming table according to (F2),
The first movable body (for example, the lens movable body 1002a) moves from the third position (for example, the rearmost position, see FIGS. 23A and 24C) to a fifth position (for example, A movable body that can move at least to the forefront position (see FIGS. 23B and 25);
The fifth position is a position in front of the third position (for example, see FIG. 25),
The viewing area is an area including a lens (for example, lens 1018),
At least a part of the second movable body located at the fourth position is visible from the visible area of the first movable body located at the third position (for example, FIG. 43 (a)),
The second movable body is a movable body that can be more visually recognized in the visual recognition area when the first movable body is located at the fifth position than when the first movable body is located at the third position. (See, for example, FIG. 43 (b)).

According to the gaming table, there are cases where the relative positional relationship between the first movable body and the second movable body can be changed to change the appearance of the movable body. In some cases, the second movable body can be enlarged and shown to a player.
(F4)
The gaming table according to any one of (F1) to (F3),
Display means (for example, decorative design display device 208) capable of displaying at least a display,
The third position is a position where at least a part of the first movable body is in front of the display means (for example, see FIG. 43 (a)).
The gaming table, wherein the fourth position is a position where at least a part of the second movable body is in front of the display means (for example, see FIG. 43 (a)).

According to the gaming table, the movable body may be able to perform various operations in front of the display means.
(F5)
The gaming table according to any one of (F1) to (F4),
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first driving unit (for example, a motor 1070),
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second driving unit (for example, a motor 1152),
The second movable body is a movable body that may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position,
The gaming table, wherein the second movable body is a movable body that may not be located at the fourth position when the first movable body is located at the third position.

According to the gaming table, the first movable body and the second movable body can operate at the same position in the vertical direction, and the first movable body and the second movable body can operate independently. In some cases, variations in the operation of the movable body can be increased.
(F6)
The gaming table according to any one of (F1) to (F5),
The first movable body is a movable body that can move in a vertical direction (for example, see FIG. 24).
A gaming table, wherein the second movable body is a movable body that can move in a vertical direction (for example, see FIG. 28).
(F7)
The gaming table according to any one of (F1) to (F6),
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
(F8)
The gaming table according to any one of (F1) to (F6),
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).

  The first movable body and the second movable body have substantially the same operating range in the vertical direction, but may have a configuration operable in different ranges. The rotation operation of the decoration unit 1124) can also be replaced with an operation involving movement to a different range.

  The drive source of the first movable body and the drive source of the second movable body may be the same, and the operation start timing and relative position of the first movable body and the second movable body may be controlled by a link mechanism or the like. The relationship may be changed so that the first movable body and the second movable body appear to be operable independently by separate driving sources.

  The second position and the fourth position may not be in front of the display means. In this case, in some cases, the effect can be performed by using the display area widely in addition to the operation of the first movable body and the second movable body.

  The first position and the third position may be positions on the front side of the display means or may not be positions on the front side of the display means. Further, it is preferable that at least one of the first position and the third position is located in front of the display means, but it is not always necessary.

  The first movable body does not have to include a visual recognition area in which the second movable body can be visually recognized. If the driving sources of the first movable body and the second movable body are different, the first movable body and the second movable body can be individually operated, so that the position deviated from the third position By operating the second movable body, the second movable body may be able to be shown to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the fifth position is on the front side of the third position, but the fifth position may be on the rear side of the third position. The position in the direction in which the space between the first movable body and the second movable body is closed may be the sixth position, and the first movable body may be movable to the sixth position. Thereby, the appearance of the movable body may be changed by changing the relative positional relationship between the first movable body and the second movable body.

  The viewing area may employ a configuration other than a lens. For example, a mere transparent plate having no function of a lens may be used, and an opening or a notch with no space may be adopted as the above-mentioned viewing area.

  The second movable body is at least rotatable in a state where the second movable body is visible from the visual recognition area of the first movable body at the second position, but the second movable body is rotated outside the visual recognition area. May be. Further, the rotation of the second movable body may be different from or different from the drive source for moving the second movable body from the second position to the fourth position. May be.

  In addition, as the first display, a hold icon, a change icon, a cut-in image, a character image, a conversation image, a decorative design, a fourth design, a general design decoration, an effect image, a tutorial display for explaining the effects, and an operation are described. Tutorial display, button image, meter image, error display (for example, lower plate full error), alert notification (for example, alert notification for preventing forgetting of a prepaid card), and the like.

  The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second area. The second region may be the same as the first region, may be different, or at least partially overlap. In addition, as the second display, a hold icon, a change icon, a cut-in image, a character image, a conversation image, a decorative design, a fourth design, a general design decoration design, an effect image, a tutorial display for explaining the effect, and an explanation of the operation. Tutorial display, button image, meter image, error display (for example, lower plate full error), alert notification (for example, alert notification for preventing forgetting of a prepaid card), and the like. The second display may be the same as the first display, or may be different.

  Note that the configuration described as “at least possible” can be interpreted by replacing the part with “only possible”. For example, a movable body described as “at least the first operation can be performed” can be interpreted as being replaced with a movable body that can perform only the first operation.

  In addition, in the above, a configuration described as “possible” can be interpreted as replacing the relevant portion with “may or may not be included”. You can also. For example, the configuration described as "at least the first operation can be performed" means that "the first operation may not be performed in some cases, or the configuration always includes the configuration performing the first operation." ].

The present invention according to the above embodiment is summarized as follows.
(Appendix d1)
First display means capable of displaying at least a display,
A movable body capable of at least performing the first operation,
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the movable body moves upward from a first position,
The gaming table, wherein the movable body located at the first position is a movable body at least a part of which is positioned higher than the first display means.
(Appendix d2)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note d1,
The movable body is a movable body capable of at least performing the second operation,
The second operation is an operation to move downward from the first position,
A gaming table, wherein after the second operation is performed, at least a part of the movable body is located in front of the first display means.
(Appendix d3)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note d2,
The first operation is an operation that is movable from the first position to a second position,
The second operation is an operation that is movable from the first position to a third position,
A gaming table, wherein the movable amount in the first operation is larger than the movable amount in the second operation.
(Appendix d4)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note d3,
A detection unit that can detect at least the position of the movable body,
The detecting means is means capable of detecting at least the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the second position,
When the movable body returns to the first position after the second operation is performed, the movable body returns to the first position after moving from the third position to the second position, A gaming table characterized by the following.
(Appendix d5)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes d1 to d4,
The movable body is a movable body including at least a rotation mechanism capable of performing a rotation operation,
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves upward in relation to the rotation operation being performed,
The movable body is a movable body configured at least by a plurality of movable parts,
At least one of the plurality of movable parts (hereinafter, referred to as “second movable part”) is at least one of the plurality of movable parts (hereinafter, referred to as “second movable part”). A movable portion provided at a position farther from the rotation center in the rotation operation than the “first movable portion”).
The gaming table, wherein the first operation is an operation in which an upward movable amount of the second movable unit is larger than an upward movable amount of the first movable unit.
(Appendix d6)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note d5,
The game console according to claim 1, wherein the first operation is an operation in which at least one of the plurality of movable units moves upward.
(Appendix d7)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes d1 to d6,
The gaming table, wherein the first position is a position where at least a part of the movable body is located in front of the first display means.
(Appendix d8)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes d1 to d7,
A game console, wherein the movable body is a movable body including at least a second display means capable of displaying a display.
(Appendix d9)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes d1 to d8,
The movable body is a movable body including at least a character portion having a character shape,
The gaming table, wherein the movable body is a movable body in which the character portion can emit light by light emitting means.
(Appendix d10)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes d1 to d9,
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.
(Appendix d11)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes d1 to d9,
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine.
(Appendix e1)
A gaming table with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a movable body that is at least movable from a first region to a third region (hereinafter, referred to as a “first movable body”),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a movable body that is at least movable from a second area to a fourth area (hereinafter, referred to as a “second movable body”),
The fourth region is a region including at least a part of the first region,
The first area is an area occupied by the first movable body in a state before the first movable body moves,
The gaming table, wherein the fourth area is an area occupied by the second movable body in a state after the second movable body has moved.
(Appendix e2)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note e1, wherein
The second movable body is a movable body located at least in the front-rear direction with respect to the first movable body,
The gaming table, wherein the second movable body is a movable body that is movable at least in the front-rear direction when moving to the fourth area.
(Appendix e3)
The gaming table according to attachment e1 or e2,
The second area is an area occupied by the second movable body in a state before the second movable body moves,
The gaming table, wherein the second area is an area where at least a part of the area is in the front-rear direction of the first area.
(Appendix e4)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes e1 to e3,
Comprising a first display means capable of displaying at least a display,
The gaming table, wherein the fourth area is an area including at least a part of an area in front of the first display means.
(Appendix e5)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note e4,
The first movable body is a movable body that is at least movable from the first region to a fifth region,
The fifth region is a region including a region at least a part of which is in front of the first display unit,
The gaming table, wherein the fifth area is an area including at least a part of the fourth area.
(Appendix e6)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note e5,
The third region is a region shifted upward from the first region,
The gaming table, wherein the fifth region is a region shifted downward from the first region.
(Appendix e7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e4 to e6,
A gaming table, wherein the first area is an area including at least a part of an area in front of the first display means.
(Appendix e8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
A second display means capable of displaying at least a display,
A gaming table, wherein one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body including the second display means.
(Appendix e9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
A second display means capable of displaying at least a display,
The gaming table, wherein the third area is an area including at least a part of an area in front of the second display means.
(Appendix e10)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes e1 to e9,
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.
(Appendix e11)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes e1 to e9,
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine.
(Appendix f1)
A gaming table with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter, referred to as “first movable body”) is a movable body that is at least movable from a first position to a third position,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter, referred to as a “second movable body”) is a movable body that is at least movable from a second position to a fourth position,
The second movable body located at the second position is a movable body at least partially overlapping the first movable body located at the first position in the front-back direction,
The game, wherein the second movable body located at the fourth position is a movable body at least partially overlapping the first movable body located at the third position in the front-rear direction. Stand.
(Appendix f2)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note f1,
The first movable body is a movable body located in front of the second movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body provided with at least a viewing area in which the back of the first movable body can be viewed,
At least a part of the second movable body located at the second position is to be visible from the visible area of the first movable body located at the first position,
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the fourth position is one that can be visually recognized from the visible region of the first movable body located at the third position. A gaming table that features.
(Appendix f3)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note f2,
The first movable body is a movable body that is at least movable from the third position to a fifth position,
The fifth position is a position in front of the third position,
The viewing area is an area including a lens,
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the fourth position is to be visible from the viewing area of the first movable body located at the third position,
The second movable body is a movable body that can be more visually recognized in the visual recognition area when the first movable body is located at the fifth position than when the first movable body is located at the third position. A gaming table, characterized in that:
(Appendix f4)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes f1 to f3,
Display means capable of displaying at least a display,
The third position is a position where at least a part of the first movable body is in front of the display unit,
The gaming table, wherein the fourth position is a position where at least a part of the second movable body is in front of the display means.
(Appendix f5)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes f1 to f4,
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first driving unit,
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second driving unit,
The second movable body is a movable body that may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position,
The gaming table, wherein the second movable body is a movable body that may not be located at the fourth position when the first movable body is located at the third position.
(Appendix f6)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes f1 to f5,
The first movable body is a movable body that can move in a vertical direction,
A gaming table, wherein the second movable body is a movable body operable in a vertical direction.
(Appendix f7)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes f1 to f6,
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.
(Appendix f8)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes f1 to f6,
The gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine.

  Note that what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light, such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  For example, the above-described embodiment can be applied to an enclosed game machine that recirculates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, a pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball inside the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed ball as a launch sphere, The payout of the ball may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description can be combined.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine is used as an example of the gaming table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG. FIG. 45 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 2000 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 45 includes a main body 2001 and a front door 2002 attached to the front of the main body 2001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 2001. Inside the center of the main body 2001, three reels (left reel 2010, middle reel 2011, right reel 2012) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed, and can be rotated inside the slot machine 2000. Have been. These reels 2010 to 2012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 2000, each symbol is printed on a band-shaped member at an appropriate interval at an appropriate number, and the band-shaped member is affixed to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to constitute each of the reels 2010 to 2012. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 2010 to 2012 are displayed in a vertical direction from the symbol display window 2013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating each of the reels 2010 to 2012, the combination of symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 2010 to 2012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted as such a display unit in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 2000, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 2000, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited thereto.

  On the back of each of the reels 2010 to 2012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 2013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. In the vicinity of each of the reels 2010 to 2012 inside the slot machine 2000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided, and the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured such that a light-shielding piece of a fixed length provided on a reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 2010 to 2012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The pay line display lamp 2020 is a lamp that indicates a valid pay line 2014. The activated pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five pay lines 2014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is valid, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are activated and three medals are bet, five lines in which the rightward prize line and the upper right prize line are added become valid as the prize line. Note that the number of the pay lines 2014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one medal is bet, a horizontal pay line in the middle, an upper horizontal pay line, a lower horizontal pay line, a right Five lines, a down line and an upper right line, may be made effective as pay lines. Hereinafter, the activated pay line may be referred to as an activated line.

  The notification lamp 2023 is, for example, a lamp that notifies a player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertion possible lamp 2024 is a lamp for notifying that a player can insert a game medal. The re-game lamp 2022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (there is no need to insert medals) when a re-game which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 2028 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 2000. In the slot machine 2000, each time the medal insertion button 2030 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards. When the medal insertion button 2031 is pressed, two cards are inserted. It is designed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 2032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 2029 turns on a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and, when a specified number of medals have been inserted, notifies that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 2021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 2041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert medals when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically by the medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 2041, and the insertion includes both. It is. The stored number display 2025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2000. The game information display 2026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical values. The number-of-payouts display 2027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 2025, the game information display 2026, and the payout number display 2027 are configured by 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 2035 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 2010 to 2012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 2041 or the start lever 2035 is operated by operating the medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032, the reels 2010 to 2012 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 2035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 2036 is provided with stop buttons 2037 to 2039. The stop buttons 2037 to 2039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 2010 to 2012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 2035, and are associated with the respective reels 2010 to 2012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 2037 to 2039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 2037 to 2039. When the stop buttons 2037 to 2039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 2033 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 2034 is a button for adjusting medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2000 and bets, and discharging the medals from the medal payout exit 2055. The door key hole 2040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 2002 of the slot machine 2000 is inserted. The medal payout port 2055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 2032, a chance button 2100 is provided. The chance button 2100 can perform an operation related to the operation of the reels 2010 to 2012 or an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 2057. The chance button 2100 can take a plurality of states (for example, a light emitting state, a rotating state, a vibration state, or a combination thereof) as in the case of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment. The state may be changeable during the period.

  The information display button unit 2050 is provided with an information display button 2046. The information display button 2046 is an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of the individual player), and includes a plurality of buttons. The configuration and operation of the information display button 2046 will be described later.

  Below the stop button unit 2036, a title panel 2062 for displaying a model name and attaching various types of certificate stamps is provided. A title panel lamp 2064 is a lamp for turning on the title panel 2062. Below the title panel 2062, a medal payout port 2055 and a medal tray 2061 are provided.

  The sound hole 2081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 2000 to the outside. Side lamps 2044 provided at left and right portions of the front door 2002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 2060 is provided above the front door 2002, and a sound hole 2043 is provided above the rendering device 2060. The effect device 2060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 2063 composed of two right shutters 2063 a and a left shutter 2063 b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 2057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 2063. When the right shutter 2063a and the left shutter 2063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 2057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 2057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 2000 (game machine). Side).

  It should be noted that the display device may be configured to display various effect images and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen is formed in a rectangular shape, and the entirety thereof is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, an ornament (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the ornament, so that the display screen may appear odd. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  FIG. 46 (a) is an external perspective view of the information display button 2046, and FIG. 46 (b) is a top view of the information display button 2046. As shown in FIG. 46, the information display button 2046 includes a plurality of buttons on a substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 2050. That is, the information display button 2046 is a general term for a plurality of buttons provided on the information display button unit 2050, and more specifically, a decision (call) button 2046O provided substantially at the center of the information display button unit 2050, and a decision ( An upper selection button 2046U, a lower selection button 2046D, a left selection button 2046L, and a right selection button 2046R provided separately to the left of the (call) button 2046O, and a cancel provided separately to the right of the determination (call) button 2046O. Button 2046C.

  In the slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 45, each of the reels 2010 to 2012 is driven to rotate by the driving means of the stepping motor, but may be driven to rotate by the driving means of the DC motor.

  While the DC motor has the advantage of being able to rotate at a higher speed than the stepping motor, it has the disadvantage of spending much more time producing drive data than the stepping motor. Therefore, by employing the motor control IC 719, it is possible to perform the effect rotation with a variety in the internal state in advance or the like. For example, in the slot machine 2000, when the start lever 2035 is operated, the reels 2010 to 2012 start to rotate (forward rotation). However, for a predetermined period (for example, three seconds) after the start, the effect rotation is performed. Is also good. In the effect rotation, there are one that alternately performs forward rotation and reverse rotation, one that performs forward rotation at low speed, and one that stops at a position where a specific symbol combination is shown.

In the case where the effect rotation including the reverse rotation in addition to the normal rotation is performed, (1) the setting of the register A is used to prevent the rotation of the reels 2010 to 2012 from being shifted.
(2) By using the setting of the register B, the rotation of the reels 2010 to 2012 does not shift.
(3) By utilizing the setting of the register D, there is no deviation in the rotation of the reels 2010 to 2012 after the reverse rotation.
(4) By using the setting of the register E, no deviation occurs when the rotation of the reels 2010 to 2012 ends.
(5) By using the setting of the register F described above, no deviation occurs when the rotation of the reels 2010 to 2012 ends.
(6) By using the setting of the register G described above, it is possible to set an allowable range of a deviation between the actual stop position of the reels 2010 to 2012 and the target stop position. By increasing the allowable range of the shift when it is determined that the shift operation is to be performed once, the next operation can be smoothly performed without spending time for correcting the shift. As a result, the reels 2010 to 2012 do not shift.
(7) By using the above-described setting of the register H, it is possible to make a setting in which the lock state can be determined in a short time. For example, when it is determined that the forward rotation and the reverse rotation are performed plural times, Acceleration for the operation of (1) can be executed smoothly. As a result, the reels 2010 to 2012 do not shift.
(8) By utilizing the setting of the register I, no deviation occurs when the reels 2010 to 2012 are stopped halfway.
(9) By using the settings of the registers A, B, and D to I described above, a synergistic effect is generated by the settings of the registers, and the operation can be performed more accurately.

  In addition, the present invention can be applied to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In this case, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of a gaming table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball gaming machine, a rock ball gaming machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  Hereinafter, another embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a view showing another example of the prize means provided below the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 3, (a) is a front view of the prize means 717, and (b) is (a). 3 is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a broken line A, and FIG. 4C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A′-A ′ of FIG.

  48 is a rear perspective view of the winning means 717 shown in FIG. 47. FIG. 48A is a view showing the decoration means 715 removed, and FIG. 48B is a view showing the decoration means 715 and the solenoid 717e removed. FIG.

  The winning means 717 is, for example, a member replacing the game board decoration member 808 shown in FIG. 10, and may have the same configuration as the game board decoration member 808. The winning means 717 is provided with the above-mentioned electric chew 232 and attacker 234. In the winning means 717, a decoration means 715 is provided on the front surface 717a of the winning means 717 above the electric chew 232 and the attacker 234. The winning means 717 inserts a screw (not shown) into the screw hole 717b from the front side and is fixed to the front surface of the transparent game board 810 shown in FIG. In this case, the winning means 717 may be removable from the front side of the gaming board 200 in some cases. In other words, the winning means 717 with the decoration means 715 removed is detachable from the front side of the gaming board 200 after removing the wiring (for example, a connector or the like connected to the relay board) relating to the winning means. It is.

  The decorating means 715 may, for example, have its front face 715a decorated with various patterns. A substantially circular opening 715b is provided on the front surface 715a of the decorating means 715, and a game nail 716 disposed on the front surface of the game board 200 fits in the opening 715b (see FIG. 47B). As described above, the winning means 717 and the decoration means 715 are attached to the game board 200. At this time, the winning means 717 is aligned with the opening 810b (see FIG. 10) of the gaming board 200, and the rear face 717c (see FIG. 48) of the winning means 717 is positioned on the front of the gaming board 200 (the transparent gaming board shown in FIG. 10). 810). A plurality of game nails are disposed on the front surface of the game board 200, and one or more of the game nails 716 to be stored in the opening 715b may be provided therein, and a plurality of openings 715b for storing the game nails may be provided. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 47C, the nail head 716a, which is the tip of the gaming nail 716, is located between the end 715c, which is one end of the opening 715b, and the end 715d, which is the other end. In the case of the normal adjustment shown in the first diagram of FIG. 47 (c), the nail head 716a is located at the center between the end 715c and the end 715d, and the second diagram of FIG. In the case of the leftward adjustment shown in FIG. 47, the game nail 716 is bent to the left, and the nail head 716a abuts on the end 715c. In the case of the rightward adjustment shown in the third diagram of FIG. Nail 716 is bent to the right and nail head 716a abuts end 715d. As described above, the movable range of the game nail 716 (for example, the nail head 716a) is limited by the end of the opening 715b, for example, the end 715c or the end 715d. The game nail 716 is driven not at a right angle to the surface of the game board 200 (transparent game board 810) but at an angle of about 5 ° upward from the right angle.

  In the case of the leftward adjustment shown in the second diagram of FIG. 47 (c), the winning rate at which the game ball wins the electric chute 232 or the attacker 234 is adjusted to the normal adjustment shown in the first diagram of FIG. 47 (c). In the case of the rightward adjustment shown in the third row of FIG. 47 (c), the winning rate at which the game ball wins the electric chew 232 or the attacker 234 is higher than the first row of FIG. 47 (c). Is lower than the case of the normal adjustment shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 47 (c), the nail head 716a of the game nail 716 is at the same position as the end 715c and the end 715d of the opening 715b in the vertical position in the figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some cases, the nail head 716a of the game nail 716 may protrude upward from the end 715c or the end 715d. It should be noted that the nail adjustment described above may be easier for the player to confirm by comparing the relative positional relationship between the ends 715c and 715d of the opening 715b and the game nail 716, and the opening 715b may be used to avoid this. The front side of the device may be blindfolded with a seal or the like so that the gaming nail 716 disposed in the opening 715b is difficult to see.

  As shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, the decorating means 715 has a separating member 715e. When the decorating means 715 is attached to the winning means 717, the separating member 715e and the front face 715a of the decorating means 715 win. The front surface 717a of the means 717 is separated, and a ball passage through which the game ball passes is formed during the separation. The game ball hitting the game nail 716 may flow down this ball passage.

  The decorative means 715 is fixed to the front face 717a of the winning means 717 by inserting screws 717d and 717e from the back side (back side) of the winning means 717. In this case, the decoration means 715 may be detachable from the game board 200 from the rear side of the game board 200 in some cases. The decoration means 715 may be integrally formed with the winning means 717.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the accessory unit 820 is attached to the rear side of the transparent game board 810. The winning means 717 may be fixed to the front surface of the transparent game board 810 by inserting a screw (not shown) into the screw hole 717b from the rear side of the transparent game board 810. In this case, the accessory unit Since the screw cannot be operated because of the obstacle 820, the winning unit 717 can be attached to and detached from the transparent game board 810 after the accessory unit 820 is removed from the transparent game board 810.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), a solenoid 717f capable of driving a movable means (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the winning means 717. When the solenoid 717f is attached to the winning means 717, as shown in FIGS. The screw 717d for fixing the decoration means 715 cannot be operated because the solenoid 717f interferes, and the screw 717e is difficult to operate. By removing the solenoid 717f from the winning means 717, the screw 717d can be operated, and the screw 717e can be easily operated.

  All the screws fixing the decoration means 715 may not be operable when the solenoid 717f is attached. All the screws fixing the decorating means 715 may be difficult to operate when the solenoid 717f is attached. The member that makes the operation of the screw impossible or difficult is not limited to the solenoid 717f, and the operation of the screw may become impossible or difficult due to the attachment of another member.

  Next, a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention, which is different from FIG. 4, will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 49 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100 different from FIG. 49, the same components as those in FIG. 4 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  To the basic circuit 402 of the first sub control unit 400, a game board side movable body control IC 718 for controlling a motor control IC 719 described later in detail is connected. Communication between the game board side movable body control IC 718 and the motor control IC 719 is performed by serial communication. The communication between the game board side movable body control IC 718 and the motor control IC 719 may be one-way communication from the game board side movable body control IC 718 to the motor control IC 719, or may be two-way communication. The motor control IC 719 is connected to various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of various movable bodies 550 included in various accessories.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the motor control IC 719 shown in FIG.

  The motor control IC 719 has a plurality of terminals for connection to the outside.

  The terminals S1, S2, S3 are input / output terminals for serial communication with the game board side movable body control IC 718. The terminal S1 is a serial data input terminal from the game board side movable body control IC 718, the terminal S2 is a serial clock input terminal from the game board side movable body control IC 718, and the terminal S3 is a game board side movable body. This is a serial data output terminal to the body control IC 718.

  The terminal CE is a chip enable terminal. When the signal input to the terminal CE is L (low), communication of the terminals S1, S2, and S3 is enabled.

  The terminals AD1, AD2, and AD3 are terminals used to specify a control target at the time of serial communication. When a plurality of motor control ICs 719 are provided, different addresses are set in advance, and their own set addresses and the terminals AD1, AD2 are set. , And AD3, the serial communication with the game board side movable body control IC 718 is accepted.

  The terminals SET1 and SET2 are terminals for inputting designation of control of an operation path that rotates or moves linearly in accordance with a movable body driven by a motor to be controlled.

  The terminal OUT1 is a terminal for controlling the motor output from the motor control circuit 1 shown in FIG. 50 to the motor to be controlled, and outputs control signals such as forward rotation, reverse rotation, and brake. This terminal may be plural.

  The terminal IN1 is a terminal for position information of a motor to be controlled, which is input from an encoder (for example, various movable body sensors 430) to the encoder input circuit 1 shown in FIG. This terminal may be plural.

  The terminal INS1 is a terminal for inputting the origin sensor of the motor to be controlled, which is input from the origin sensor (for example, various movable body sensors 430) to the sensor input circuit 1 shown in FIG.

  The terminal OUT2 is a terminal for controlling the motor output from the motor control circuit 2 shown in FIG. 50 to the motor to be controlled, and outputs control signals such as idle (open), forward rotation, reverse rotation, and brake. This terminal may be plural.

  The terminal IN2 is a terminal for position information of a motor to be controlled, which is input from an encoder (for example, various movable body sensors 430) to the encoder input circuit 2 shown in FIG. This terminal may be plural.

  The terminal INS2 is a terminal for inputting the origin sensor of the motor to be controlled, which is input from the origin sensor (for example, various movable body sensors 430) to the sensor input circuit 2 shown in FIG.

  The speed control circuit 719a is, for example, a PWM control circuit that performs PWM control of the motor, and mainly controls the rotation speed of the motor by changing the duty ratio of the pulse width.

  A drive voltage (for example, 3.3 V) of the motor control IC 719 is applied between the terminal VDD and the terminal GND.

  51A and 51B are diagrams illustrating a connection example of the motor control IC 719 illustrated in FIG. 50. FIG. 51A is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of the motor control IC 719, and FIG. FIG.

  A plurality of motor control ICs 719 may be connected to the game board side movable body control IC 718. In FIG. 51, the motor control IC1 (719), the motor control IC2 (719), the motor control IC3 (719), and the motor Four motor control ICs 719 of the control IC 4 (719) are connected. A plurality of motors may be connected to each of the four motor control ICs 719 (FIGS. 50 and 51 show a case where two motors are connected to each of the motor control ICs 719). Each of the motors drives a movable part.

  The motor 11 and the motor 12 are connected to the motor control IC 1 (719). The motor 11 drives the movable unit 11, and the motor 12 drives the movable unit 12. The motor 21 and the motor 22 are connected to the motor control IC 2 (719). The motor 21 drives the movable unit 21, and the motor 22 drives the movable unit 22. The motor 31 and the motor 32 are connected to the motor control IC 3 (719). The motor 31 drives the movable unit 31, and the motor 32 drives the movable unit 32. The motor 41 and the motor 42 are connected to the motor control IC 4 (719). The motor 41 drives the movable unit 41, and the motor 42 drives the movable unit 42.

  The motor 11, the motor 12, the motor 21, the motor 22, the motor 31, the motor 32, the motor 41, and the motor 42 are, for example, DC motors.

  The game board side movable body control IC 718 selects an IC (IC for controlling the movable body) to which the movable body to be controlled this time is connected from among the plurality of connected motor control ICs 719, and selects the selected motor control IC 719. , Terminal S1, terminals S1, S2, terminals AD1, AD2, AD3, and terminals SET1, SET2. The motor control IC 719 that receives this controls the motor through the terminals OUT1, IN1, and INS1, or the terminals OUT2, IN2, and INS2.

  The item of “control specification” in FIG. 51B indicates a value input to the terminals AD1, AD2, and AD3.

  When the “control specification” is 001 (for example, the terminal AD1 is 0, the terminal AD2 is 0, and the terminal AD3 is 1), the motor control IC 1 (719) that controls the motor 11 and the motor 12 is specified, and the “control specification” is specified. In the case of 010 (for example, the terminal AD1 is 0, the terminal AD2 is 1, and the terminal AD3 is 0), the motor control IC 2 (719) for controlling the motor 21 and the motor 22 is specified, and the “control specification” is 011 (for example, the terminal AD1). Is 0, the terminal AD2 is 1, and the terminal AD3 is 1), the motor control IC 3 (719) that controls the motor 31 and the motor 32 is specified, and “control specification” is 100 (for example, the terminal AD1 is 1, the terminal AD2 is Is 0 and the terminal AD3 is 0), the motor control IC 4 (719) for controlling the motor 41 and the motor 42 is specified. When “control specification” is 111, it may be a communication instruction to all the motor control ICs 719.

  The item of “control setting” in FIG. 51B indicates a value input to the terminals SET1 and SET2.

  When the “control setting” is 01 (for example, the terminal SET1 is 0 and the terminal SET2 is 1), the control of the operation path that rotates (control of the movable body that rotates) is set, and the “control setting” is 10 (for example, In the case where the terminal SET1 is 1 and the terminal SET2 is 0), control of a motion path that moves linearly (control of a movable body that moves linearly) is set. It is possible to move each other by setting internal parameters. The “control setting” may enable setting of control of an operation path other than the rotational movement and the linear movement.

  Hereinafter, examples of the movable body that rotates and the movable body that linearly moves will be described.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an example of a movable body that rotates and a movable body that linearly moves, and is an external view of the accessory unit 820 illustrated in FIG. 16 as viewed from the front side. The same components as those in FIG. 16 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.

  The accessory unit 820 has the lower right side accessory 1400 and the central lower accessory 1600 as described above.

  As described above with reference to the exploded perspective view of the central lower part 1600 in FIG. 37, the circular object 1607 to which the circular film 1605 is attached performs a rotating operation. That is, this circular object 1607 is an example of a movable body that rotates.

  Further, as described above with reference to the external view of the lower right side accessory 1400 in FIG. 33, the movable body 1401 performs a linear motion (for example, a vertical motion). That is, the movable body 1401 is an example of a movable body that operates linearly. The control of the linear operation of the movable body 1401 will be described in detail below.

  As an example of the movable body that is controlled by the motor control IC 719 to perform a linear motion (performs a linear motion), there is also a character decoration portion 902a that performs a linear motion by a rotational motion of a motor 970. That is, the motor control IC 719 may be set to linearly move the character decoration unit 902a. In this case, it is further possible to set registers A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, and L in a register 719b of the motor control IC 719, which will be described later. The movements of the movable bodies that perform linear motion (or circular motion) controlled by the motor are controlled by the motor control IC 719, and the movements of the movable bodies that perform linear motion (or circular motion) are controlled by the motor control IC 719. Can be easily adjusted. In other words, since a plurality of types of setting items are prepared in the motor control IC 719, setting according to the movable body is easy, and the movable body can be smoothly operated without setting all the setting items. Can be done.

  FIGS. 53A to 53C are diagrams for explaining the control of the movable body 1401 that moves linearly. FIGS. 53A to 53C illustrate lower portions in which the state of movement of the movable body 1401 from the initial position to the target position is stepwise. It is a schematic diagram of the right side of the right side accessory 1400. The same components as those in FIG. 33 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.

  The movable body 1401 is guided and moved by the derivative 1452 by driving the motor 1462 shown in FIG.

  In the case of controlling the linear motion (for example, corresponding to the motor 21 shown in FIG. 51), the data of “control identification” (terminals AD1, AD2, AD3) from the game board side movable body control IC 718 is 010, The motor 21 corresponds to the motor control circuit 1 (see FIG. 50) of the motor control IC 2 (719) corresponding to 010. Referring to the "control setting" for the motor 21 in FIG. 51B, since it is set to 10, it can be understood that the control is a linear operation.

  In this case, the motor position in the movable range can be set as coordinates (upper limit 0 to +4095, lower limit -4095 to 0). This value is set by the rotation of the motor and the movable range of the movable body. In the example of FIG. 53, it is assumed that the motor moves from 0 to +4095 when the motor makes one rotation.

  Information (command, command) for controlling the operation includes, for example, information such as repetition / number of repetitions / reciprocation / coordinate designation / coordinate. It should be noted that other information may be included, or a configuration in which a series of operations are executed by a plurality of instructions may be employed. FIGS. 54, 55, and 56 are diagrams showing examples of information for controlling this operation.

54, 55, and 56,
In the item of “repeat”, 0 indicates no repetition, and 1 indicates repetition (repetition of movement between the current position and the position specified in the item of “coordinate”). ,
The item of “number of repetitions” indicates the number of repetitions only when “repetition” is set to 1,
The item of “reciprocation” indicates that there is no reciprocation if 0, 1 indicates that repetition is repetition of reciprocation,
The item of “coordinate specification” indicates whether the coordinates specified in the item of “coordinates” are relative coordinates from the current position or absolute coordinates from a predetermined reference position (for example, initial position). If present, indicates absolute coordinates, 1 indicates relative coordinates,
The item of “coordinate” indicates a position to be moved (in the case of absolute coordinates) and a moving amount (in the case of relative coordinates).

  FIG. 54A shows information for controlling the operation 1 for the lower right side accessory 1400 shown in FIG. 53, and FIG. 54B shows information for controlling the operation 2 following the operation 1. 54 (c) shows information for controlling operation 3 following operation 2 and FIG. 54 (d) shows information for controlling operation 4 following operation 3.

  FIG. 53 (a) is a diagram at the coordinate position 0 (lower limit) in absolute coordinates, FIG. 53 (b) is a diagram at the coordinate position +2500 in absolute coordinates, and FIG. 53 (c) is It is a figure when it is in a coordinate position + 4095 (upper limit value) in absolute coordinates.

  In the operation 1 of FIG. 54A, the robot moves to the coordinate position +2400 in absolute coordinates (coordinate 100 lower than FIG. 53B).

  In the operation 2 of FIG. 54B, the reciprocating movement between the current position (coordinate position +2400) and the absolute coordinate position +2600 (coordinate 100 higher than that of FIG. 53B) is repeated five times. According to this reciprocating movement, it may be possible to make the movable body appear to be vibrating.

  In the operation 3 in FIG. 54C, the robot moves to the coordinate position +4095 (FIG. 53C) in absolute coordinates.

  In operation 4 in FIG. 54D, the robot moves to the coordinate position 0 (FIG. 53A) in absolute coordinates.

  FIG. 55 (a) shows information for controlling the operation 1 for the lower right side accessory 1400 shown in FIG. 53, and FIG. 55 (b) shows information for controlling the operation 2 following the operation 1. 55 (c) shows information for controlling operation 3 following operation 2, and FIG. 55 (d) shows information for controlling operation 4 following operation 3. FIG. 55 shows a case of designation using relative coordinates. When the coordinate is +, it indicates upward movement, and when the coordinate is-, it indicates downward movement.

  In the operation 1 of FIG. 55 (a), when in the state of FIG. 53 (a), it moves to the position of +2400 (relative coordinates by 100 below the coordinate of FIG. 53 (b)).

  In the operation 2 of FIG. 55B, the reciprocating movement between the current position and the position of +200 relative coordinates (100 coordinates higher than FIG. 53B) is repeated five times. According to this reciprocating movement, it may be possible to make the movable body appear to be vibrating.

  In the operation 3 in FIG. 55 (c), the movement is performed to the position of +1695 in relative coordinates (FIG. 53 (c)).

  In the operation 4 in FIG. 55D, the robot moves to the position of −4095 in relative coordinates (FIG. 53A).

  FIG. 56 (a) shows information for controlling the operation 1 with respect to the circular object 1607 (see FIG. 37) of the central lower part 1600 shown in FIG. 52, and FIG. 56 (b) shows the operation following the operation 1 FIG. 56 (c) is information for controlling operation 3 following operation 2 and FIG. 56 (d) is information for controlling operation 4 following operation 3. FIG. 56 shows a case of designation using relative coordinates. When the coordinate is +, it indicates clockwise, and when the coordinate is-, it indicates counterclockwise.

  In the operation 1 of FIG. 56A, when at the reference position (initial position, origin position), it moves to a position of +20 in relative coordinates (rotates clockwise by 20).

  In the operation 2 of FIG. 56B, the reciprocating movement between the current position and a position of −40 in relative coordinates (a position rotated 40 times counterclockwise) is repeated 10 times. According to this reciprocating movement, it may be possible to make the movable body appear to be vibrating.

  In the operation 3 of FIG. 56C, the movement to the position of +4095 in relative coordinates (rotation by 4095 clockwise, ie, one rotation of normal rotation) is repeated ten times without reciprocating (ie, 10 rotations of normal rotation).

  In the operation 4 in FIG. 56D, the movement to the position of −4095 in relative coordinates (rotation by 4095 in the counterclockwise direction, that is, one reverse rotation) is repeated 10 times without reciprocating (ie, 10 reverse rotations). Thereafter, the position may be returned to the origin position, or the position may be adjusted at the next operation.

Further, the present invention is summarized as follows.
(Appendix g1)
Movable means (for example, a circular object 1607, a movable body 1401) capable of executing the first operation;
A DC motor (for example, the motor 11, the motor 12, the motor 21, the motor 22, the motor 31, the motor 32, the motor 41, and the motor 42 in FIG. 51) serving as a drive source of the movable unit;
An IC capable of controlling the DC motor (for example, a motor control IC 719).
The IC includes a control circuit (for example, the motor control circuit 1 and the motor control circuit 2 in FIG. 50),
The control circuit is configured to control the DC motor when the movable unit performs an operation including a rotation operation as the first operation (hereinafter, referred to as “first control”); Is a circuit capable of executing the control of the DC motor (hereinafter, referred to as “second control”) in a case where the operation includes a linear operation.
It is possible to select whether to cause the control circuit to execute the first control or to execute the second control, because it was a gaming table, characterized by,
-It is possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic of an IC.
・ In addition,
The control circuit is not limited to a circuit capable of executing only the first control and the second control,
For example, the control circuit is a circuit that can execute the first control, the second control,..., And the n-th control (n is an integer of 3 or more), and the control circuit In some cases, it is possible to select to execute any of the controls from the first control to the n-th control. Here, the n-th control is control of the DC motor when the movable unit performs an operation including an operation other than the rotation operation and the linear operation.
(Appendix g2)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note g1,
The IC includes a plurality of the control circuits,
The plurality of control circuits are circuits in which one DC motor is associated with each control circuit,
At least one of the plurality of control circuits is a first control circuit,
At least one different from the first control circuit of the plurality of control circuits is a second control circuit,
It is possible to select whether to cause the DC motor associated with the first control circuit to execute the first control or to execute the second control,
It is possible to select whether to cause the DC motor associated with the second control circuit to execute the first control or to execute the second control. ,
-In some cases, optimal control can be performed for each DC motor.
(Appendix g3)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note g1 or g2,
The control circuit is a circuit capable of managing a current position of the DC motor and a position after the DC motor operates (hereinafter, referred to as a “target position”) as absolute coordinates,
The absolute coordinates are coordinates composed of at least a sign and a value,
The control circuit, when executing the first control, is a circuit that specifies the target position by the code and the value,
The control circuit, when performing the second control, is a circuit that specifies the rotation direction of the DC motor by the code, and specifies the target position by the value,
Since the movable means is a means capable of executing the first operation by the DC motor being controlled to the target position, the gaming table, characterized in that,
-The position of the DC motor (position of the movable body) may be easily managed.
The absolute coordinates may include elements other than the sign and the value, or may include any elements for representing coordinates.
(Appendix g4)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note g1 or g2,
The control circuit is a circuit capable of managing a position (hereinafter, referred to as a “target position”) after the operation of the DC motor as relative coordinates,
The relative coordinates are coordinates composed of at least a sign and a value,
The control circuit, when executing the first control, is a circuit that specifies the rotation direction of the DC motor by the code, and specifies the amount of movement of the DC motor by the value,
When executing the second control, the control circuit is a circuit that specifies the rotation direction of the DC motor by the code, and specifies the amount of movement of the DC motor by the value. Playing table,
・ In some cases, it is easier to manage the amount of movement.
The relative coordinates may include other elements other than the code and the value, or may include any element for representing the coordinates.
(Appendix g5)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note g3,
The control circuit is a circuit that can manage the target position as relative coordinates,
The relative coordinates are coordinates composed of at least a sign and a value,
The control circuit, when executing the first control, is a circuit that specifies the rotation direction of the DC motor by the code, and specifies the amount of movement of the DC motor by the value,
When executing the second control, the control circuit is a circuit that specifies the rotation direction of the DC motor by the code, and specifies the amount of movement of the DC motor by the value. Playing table,
・ In some cases, it is easier to manage the amount of movement.
The relative coordinates may include other elements other than the code and the value, or may include any element for representing the coordinates.
(Appendix g6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine, characterized in that it is a gaming machine.
(Appendix g7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The game console is a slot machine.

Further, the present invention is summarized as follows.
(Appendix h1)
A game board (for example, game board 200),
A plurality of game nails (for example, game nails 716) provided on the game board;
And a prize means (for example, a prize means 717) capable of winning a game ball.
Movement restricting means (for example, an end portion) capable of restricting movement of a tip (for example, a nail head 716a) of a part of the plurality of game nails (hereinafter, referred to as "first game nail"). 715c, end 715d) is provided,
Since the movement restricting means is a means detachable from the rear side of the gaming board,
-It is possible to provide a gaming table characterized by a means for restricting the movement of the gaming nail.
(Appendix h2)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note h1,
The movement restricting means is means for restricting movement of the tip of the first game nail by a front face,
Since the launched game ball is configured to be able to flow down between the surface of the game board and the front portion,
In some cases, excessive movement of the game nail can be restricted while allowing the passage of the game ball (the limit of the nail adjustment may be adjusted).
(Appendix h3)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note h2,
The front portion includes a first restricting portion (for example, an end portion 715d) that restricts the tip portion of the first game nail from moving in a first direction,
The front portion includes a second restricting portion (for example, an end portion 715c) that restricts the tip portion of the first game nail from moving in a second direction different from the first direction. Things,
The launched game ball has a configuration in which it is easier to win the winning means in the second state than in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the front end and the tip of the first game nail are in contact with each other and the movement of the first game nail in the first direction is restricted. Yes,
The second state is a state in which the front end and the tip of the first game nail are in contact with each other and the movement of the first game nail in the second direction is restricted. There was a gaming table that was characterized by
-In some cases, the easiness of winning the prize means can be adjusted within a predetermined range. For example, the first game nail is an important nail, and the position of the nail greatly affects the winning of the winning means.
In addition, "the fired game ball has a configuration in which it is easier to win the prize means in the second state than in the first state." The second state is easier to flow in the direction in which the prize means can easily win than the second state.
(Appendix h4)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note h2 or h3,
The front portion has a substantially circular opening (for example, opening 715b),
Since the tip of the first gaming nail is located at the opening, the gaming table, characterized in that,
-In some cases, the restrictions on the movement of the game nail in each direction can be equalized.
(Appendix h5)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes h1 to h4,
The movement restriction unit is a unit configured integrally with the winning unit,
The movement restricting means is means that can be attached to the winning means from the rear side,
The winning means to which the movement restricting means is attached is a means that is difficult to remove from the front side of the game board,
Since the winning means is a means detachable from the front side of the game board after removing the movement restricting means from the rear side, the gaming table, characterized in that
The attachment / detachment of the winning means is easy as before, but there are cases where the decorative means relating to the nail adjustment cannot be easily attached / detached.
(Appendix h6)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes h1 to h5,
The first gaming nail is one of the plurality of gaming nails, and is a gaming table.
(Appendix h7)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes h1 to h6,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine, characterized in that it is a gaming machine.

  Hereinafter, another embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  In the present embodiment, a further control operation of the motor control IC 719 shown in FIG. 50 will be described.

  The motor control IC 719 can execute the control described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 56 described above. For example, the motors 970, 1020, 1070, 1140, 1152, 1260, 1411, 1462, 1613, When DC motors 1652 are used, control of these motors or DC motors (not shown) can be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the control described below can be further performed. The motor control IC 719 generates a signal having a pulse width having a duty ratio determined as described later by a speed control circuit 719a, which is a PWM control circuit, and outputs the generated signal to the motor as a drive signal. The rotation speed of the motor can be adjusted by the duty ratio of the drive signal output to the motor. The motor controlled by the motor control IC 719 is provided with an encoder (for example, various kinds of movable body sensors 430). The encoder detects the position of the motor, that is, the rotational position. The detection result is input to the motor control IC 719. You.

  In FIG. 50, a register 719b in the motor control IC 719 stores a value related to motor drive control.

  The register 719b has registers A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, and L described later. The motor control IC 719 performs control based on the values set in the registers A to L, as described later in detail. The setting of the values in the registers A to L is performed by the first sub control unit 400 shown in FIG. 49 via the game board side movable body control IC 718.

  FIG. 57A is a diagram showing a configuration of the register A in the register 719b.

  The register A can set one of 256 values from 0 to 255. For example, when the value of 200 is set in the register A, the reference speed is set to 1200 rpm, and when the value of 240 is set in the register A, the reference speed is set to 4000 rpm. Is possible. Here, the reference speed refers to the maximum speed when the motor is rotated, and when the value of 240 is set in the register A and the reference speed is set to 4000 rpm, the motor is rotated at a rotation speed between 0 and 4000 rpm. It is possible to rotate.

  FIG. 57B is a diagram for describing the designation of the rotation speed of the motor based on the setting of the register A shown in FIG.

  The rotation speed of the motor can be designated in 16 stages of speed 0 and speed 1 to speed 15. The reference speed based on the value set in the register A is assigned to the speed 15 (maximum speed), the speed 0 is stopped, the speed 1 is the lowest speed, the speeds 2 and 3 are sequentially increased, and the speed 15 is the highest speed. . The designation of the speed 0 and the speed 1 to the speed 15 is performed by the first sub control unit 400 shown in FIG.

  Conventionally, it is common to change the movable body for each model, and speed data is created for each changed movable body. For example, if it is a large and heavy movable body, it is assumed that it is not necessary to operate at high speed, so create speed data that operates at a relatively low speed, and conversely, if it is a small and lightweight movable body, Since it is assumed that it is necessary to operate at high speed, speed data operating at relatively high speed has been created. In that case, there is a problem that a great deal of time is required to generate speed data according to the movable body. In this case, since the speed can be set in the motor control IC 719, the production period for each model can be shortened.

  FIGS. 58A, 58B, and 58C are diagrams showing the configuration of register B in register 719b.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the register B can set the acceleration when the motor starts rotating from a stopped state. In the register B, one of four values of value 00, value 01, value 10, and value 11 can be set.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the value B is set to 00 in the register B, the intensity of the acceleration setting is “fine”, and when the value B is set to 01, the intensity of the acceleration setting is Is "weak", the acceleration setting intensity is "medium" when the value 10 is set in the register B, and the acceleration setting intensity is "strong" when the value 11 is set in the register B. It becomes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), when the intensity of the acceleration setting is “fine”, the DUTY addition amount is 10%, and when the acceleration setting intensity is “weak”, the DUTY addition amount is 20%. When the acceleration setting intensity is “medium”, the DUTY addition amount is 35%, and when the acceleration setting intensity is “strong”, the DUTY addition amount is 50%. The case where the strength of the acceleration setting is “fine” is the weakest acceleration, and the case where the strength of the acceleration setting is “strong” is the strongest acceleration.

  Note that the duty ratio of the pulse width by the speed control circuit 719a, which is a PWM control circuit that performs PWM control of the motor, is called DUTY here, and the DUTY addition amount shown in FIG. Shows the added amount of the duty ratio.

  The motor control IC 719 changes the duty ratio at a predetermined cycle from the motor stop state (duty ratio 0%) to the duty ratio corresponding to the speed specified as described in FIG. increase. The increase in the duty ratio in one cycle at this time is the DUTY addition amount shown in FIG. That is, for example, when the strength of the acceleration setting is “fine” and the DUTY addition amount is 10%, the duty ratio is increased in the order of 0%, 10%, 20%,. If the strength of the acceleration setting is "weak" and the duty addition amount is 20%, the duty ratio is increased in the order of 0%, 20%, 40%,.

  The value 00 may be set as the initial value or default value of the register B. By doing so, if the register B is not set, the motor is prevented from suddenly rotating and the movable body moved by the motor is prevented from performing a sudden operation, and the player feels uncomfortable. Can never be.

  Conventionally, the movable body is generally changed for each model, and acceleration data is created for each changed movable body. For example, acceleration data of a large torque is created for a large and heavy movable body, and acceleration data of a weak torque is created for a small and lightweight movable body. In that case, there is a problem that a great deal of time is required to create acceleration data corresponding to the movable body. In this case, since the acceleration setting can be performed on the motor control IC 719, the production period for each model can be shortened.

  FIGS. 59A, 59B and 59C are diagrams showing the configuration of the register C in the register 719b.

  For example, when the motor is rotated at a low speed, a self-excited vibration state generally called a stick-slip may occur due to the influence of friction or the like. Specifically, when operating at a low speed, there is a state where it is difficult to perform a series of smooth movements by repeatedly performing the operation and the stop. The motor control IC 719 allows the setting to escape from this state and rotate the motor smoothly.

  As shown in FIG. 59A, the register C can be set for acceleration when the motor is smoothly rotated from the self-excited vibration state. In the register C, one of four values of value 00, value 01, value 10, and value 11 can be set.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the value C is set to the register C, the acceleration setting intensity is “fine”, and when the value C is set to 01, the acceleration setting intensity is “0”. Is "weak", the acceleration setting strength is "medium" when the value 10 is set in the register C, and the acceleration setting strength is "strong" when the value 11 is set in the register C. It becomes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the acceleration setting intensity is “fine”, the DUTY addition amount is 7%, and when the acceleration setting intensity is “weak”, the DUTY addition amount is 20%. When the acceleration setting intensity is “medium”, the DUTY addition amount is 36%, and when the acceleration setting intensity is “strong”, the DUTY addition amount is 56%. When the strength of the acceleration setting is “fine”, it is the weakest acceleration, which is suitable when the movable body driven by the motor can start moving with a light and weak force, and when the strength of the acceleration setting is “strong”. Is the strongest acceleration, and is suitable when the movable body driven by the motor can start moving with heavy and strong force.

  The DUTY addition amount shown in FIG. 59 (c) also indicates the addition amount of the duty ratio when the motor is accelerated, as in FIG. 58 (c). However, different addition amounts prepared for different accelerations are used.

  The motor control IC 719 increases the duty ratio at a predetermined cycle from the self-excited vibration state of the motor to the duty ratio corresponding to the speed specified as described in FIG. 57B. The increase in the duty ratio in one cycle at this time is the DUTY addition amount shown in FIG. That is, for example, when the strength of the acceleration setting is “fine” and the DUTY addition amount is 8%, the duty ratio is increased in the order of 0%, 8%, 16%,. If the strength of the acceleration setting is "weak" and the duty addition amount is 20%, the duty ratio is increased in the order of 0%, 20%, 40%,. Incidentally, in order to escape from the self-excited vibration state of the motor, a drive signal having a duty ratio exceeding the duty ratio corresponding to the designated speed may be output as described with reference to FIG.

  The value 00 may be set as the initial value or the default value of the register C. By doing so, if the register C is not set, the motor is prevented from suddenly rotating and the movable body moved by the motor is prevented from performing a sudden operation, and the player feels uncomfortable. Can never be.

  Conventionally, the movable body is generally changed for each model, and acceleration data is created for each changed movable body. However, even if it is known that the friction increases with time when the movable body moves, it takes a lot of time to prepare in advance the setting for rotating the motor smoothly in anticipation of this. There was a problem to spend. In this case, since the motor control IC 719 can be set for acceleration to get out of the self-excited vibration state, the production period for each model can be shortened.

  FIGS. 60A, 60B and 60C are diagrams showing the configuration of the register D in the register 719b.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, in the register D, it is possible to set an acceleration when the motor is rotated at a higher speed from a state where the motor is rotating at a certain speed. Note that the setting of the deceleration when the motor is rotated at a lower speed from the state where the motor is rotating at a certain speed can be similarly set, and the description of the deceleration is omitted here. In the register D, one of two values, a value 0 and a value 1, can be set.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), when the value 0 is set in the register D, the acceleration setting is “no sudden acceleration”, and when the value 1 is set in the register D, the acceleration setting is “sudden acceleration”. Yes ".

  As shown in FIG. 60 (c), when the acceleration setting is “no sudden acceleration”, the DUTY addition amount is 8%, and when the acceleration setting is “sudden acceleration”, the DUTY addition amount is 25%. . The acceleration setting “do not suddenly accelerate” is suitable, for example, when the inertia of a movable body operated by a motor is small. The acceleration setting “rapid acceleration” is suitable, for example, when the inertia of a movable body operated by a motor or the like is large. The greater the inertia, the longer it takes to switch the speed. For example, it is possible to output a DUTY higher than the target speed and make the speed follow the speed earlier.

  A value 0 may be set as the initial value or the default value of the register D. By doing so, if the register D is not set, it is possible to prevent a sudden rotation of the motor and a sudden movement of the movable body moved by the motor, thereby giving the player an uncomfortable feeling. Can never be.

  Conventionally, the movable body is generally changed for each model, and acceleration data is created for each changed movable body. For example, acceleration data is created for a feature of a movable body having a large inertia (not immediately stopped when acceleration is stopped), and acceleration data is created for a feature of a movable body having a small inertia (immediately stopped when acceleration is stopped). Was. In that case, there is a problem that a great deal of time is required to create acceleration data corresponding to the movable body. In this case, since the acceleration setting can be performed on the motor control IC 719, the production period for each model can be shortened.

  FIGS. 61A, 61B, and 61C are diagrams showing the configuration of the register E in the register 719b.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, the register E can be set to decelerate when stopping the motor from rotating at a certain speed. In the register E, one of two values, a value 0 and a value 1, can be set.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), when the value 0 is set in the register E, the deceleration setting is "no deceleration", and when the value 1 is set in the register E, the deceleration setting is "decelerate". It becomes.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (c), when the deceleration setting is "no deceleration", the DUTY addition amount is not set, and when the deceleration setting is "decelerate", the DUTY addition amount is -25%. The deceleration setting “do not decelerate” is suitable, for example, when the inertia of a movable body operated by a motor is small. For example, the smaller the inertia, the more the inertia does not go too far from the target stop position.Therefore, there is no need to decelerate before the target stop position. This is suitable for a case where a sudden stop is a result of stopping without a sense of incongruity. The deceleration setting “decelerate” is suitable, for example, when inertia of a movable body operated by a motor is large. For example, as the inertia is larger, the actual stop position is too far from the target stop position due to inertia. By decelerating early, the actual stop position can be adjusted to the target stop position. The DUTY addition amount in the case of the deceleration setting “decelerate” (in this case, the minus sign because of the deceleration, ie, the subtraction amount) is not limited to the above-mentioned -25%, but another DUTY addition amount Alternatively, selection may be made by a value set in the register E.

  The value 0 may be set as the initial value or the default value of the register E. In this way, if the register E is not set, the motor is prevented from decelerating unexpectedly and the movable body moved by the motor is prevented from performing an unexpected operation. In some cases, it is possible to avoid discomfort.

  The value 1 may be set as the initial value or the default value of the register E. By doing so, if the register E is not set, it is possible to stop at the target stop position even if the inertia is large, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. May be able to.

  Conventionally, it is common to change the movable body for each model, and deceleration data is created for each changed movable body. For example, acceleration data is created for a feature of a movable body having a large inertia (not immediately stopped when acceleration is stopped), and acceleration data is created for a feature of a movable body having a small inertia (immediately stopped when acceleration is stopped). Was. In that case, there is a problem that a great deal of time is required to create deceleration data corresponding to the movable body. In this case, since the deceleration setting can be performed on the motor control IC 719, the production period for each model can be shortened.

  FIGS. 62A and 62B are diagrams showing the configuration of the register F in the register 719b.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, in the register F, it is possible to set coordinates at which deceleration is started when deceleration is set when the motor is stopped from rotating at a certain speed. In the register F, one of 1024 types of values 0, 1 to 1023 can be set.

  When the value 0 is set in the register F, the deceleration setting is “do not decelerate”, and when any of the values 1 to 1023 is set in the register F, the value is the coordinate to start deceleration. Even if the value 1 to the value 1023 are set in the register F, if the value 0 (the deceleration setting is "do not decelerate") is set in the register E shown in FIG. If the value 1 to the value 1023 is set in the register F, deceleration is performed even if the value 0 (the deceleration setting is "do not decelerate") is set in the register E shown in FIG. Is also good.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (b), when the inertia is large, if there is no deceleration, there is a possibility that the target stop position may be excessively passed.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (b), for example, when the motor is rotated from the current position to the target stop position, the value from 1 to 1023 set in the register F decelerates from any position before the target stop position. This is a value for designating whether or not to start, and corresponds to the coordinates of a position in front of the target stop position by distance L1. That is, when the value 1023 is set in the register F, deceleration is started at the position of the coordinates 1023 before the target stop position. The value set in the register F need not be the coordinates themselves, but may be a value corresponding to the coordinates.

  The value 0 may be set as the initial value or the default value of the register F. By doing so, if the register F is not set, it is possible to prevent the motor from decelerating unexpectedly and prevent the movable body moved by the motor from performing an unexpected operation. In some cases, it is possible to avoid discomfort.

  Further, any one of the values 1 to 1023 may be set as the initial value or the default value of the register F. By doing so, if the register F is not set, even if the inertia is large, it is possible to stop at the target stop position, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. May be able to.

  Conventionally, the movable body is generally changed for each model, and acceleration data is created for each changed movable body. For example, if the movable position is not suitable for suggesting the game result unless the stop position is accurate, deceleration data is created so that the stop position does not shift, and the stop position does not have to be accurate. If the movable body is good, the deceleration data is created so that the stop position may be shifted. In that case, there is a problem that a great deal of time is required to create deceleration data corresponding to the movable body. In this case, since the deceleration setting can be performed on the motor control IC 719, the production period for each model can be shortened.

For example, in this embodiment,
Operable movable means (for example, a circular object 1607, a movable body 1401);
A DC motor (for example, the motor 11, the motor 12, the motor 21, the motor 22, the motor 31, the motor 32, the motor 41, the motor 42, and the motor 970 in FIG. 51) serving as a drive source of the movable unit;
An IC capable of controlling the DC motor (for example, a motor control IC 719).
The IC includes a control circuit (for example, the motor control circuit 1 and the motor control circuit 2 in FIG. 50),
The control circuit is a circuit that can output a drive signal for driving the DC motor,
The control circuit is a circuit capable of outputting a deceleration signal for decelerating the rotation of the DC motor before reaching the target stop position to the DC motor as the drive signal when the DC motor is stopped from a rotating state,
The control circuit is a circuit including a plurality of types of the deceleration signal,
The control circuit is a circuit capable of setting which of the plurality of types of deceleration signals is output to the DC motor.

Also, for example, in the present embodiment,
The control circuit is a circuit including a deceleration signal storage area (for example, a register E) for storing a value for setting a signal to be output to the DC motor among the plurality of types of deceleration signals,
The deceleration signal storage area is an area capable of storing an initial value for a deceleration signal (for example, a value of 0 stored in a register E) which is an initial value when the deceleration signal is set,
The deceleration signal initial value is a value for setting a signal that does not decelerate among the plurality of types of deceleration signals.

Also, for example, in the present embodiment,
The control circuit is configured to output a deceleration signal for decelerating the rotation of the DC motor to the DC motor at the deceleration timing before reaching the target stop position as the drive signal when the DC motor is stopped from a rotating state. And
The control circuit is a circuit including a plurality of types of the deceleration timing,
The control circuit is a circuit capable of setting at which timing among the plurality of types of deceleration times the deceleration signal is output to the DC motor.

Also, for example, in the present embodiment,
The control circuit is a circuit including a deceleration timing storage area (for example, a register F) that stores a value that sets a timing of outputting the deceleration signal to the DC motor among the plurality of types of deceleration timing,
The deceleration time storage area is an area capable of storing an initial value for deceleration timing (for example, a value of 0 stored in the register F) which is an initial value when setting the deceleration timing,
The initial value for deceleration timing is a value for setting a timing at which deceleration is not performed among the plurality of types of deceleration timing.

  FIGS. 63A and 63B are diagrams showing the configuration of the register G in the register 719b.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the register G can set a shift correction for correcting a shift from a target stop position when the motor is stopped. In the register G, one of eight values of a value 000, a value 001, a value 010, a value 011, a value 100, a value 101, a value 110, and a value 111 can be set.

  When the value 000 is set in the register G, the shift correction setting is “do not use shift correction”, and the shift stop setting is kept even if the actual stop position is shifted from the target stop position when the motor is stopped. .

  When the value 001 is set in the register G, if the deviation between the actual stop position and the target stop position when the motor is stopped is not within ± 0, the deviation is corrected and the motor is stopped at the target position. The operation is performed so as to approach the position, and deviation correction is performed until the deviation between the coordinates of the actual stop position and the target stop position is within ± 0.

  When the value 010 is set in the register G, if the deviation between the actual stop position and the target stop position when the motor is stopped is not within ± 1, the deviation is corrected and the motor is stopped at the target position. The operation is performed so as to approach the position, and the deviation correction is performed until the deviation between the coordinates of the actual stop position and the target stop position is within ± 1.

  When the value 011 is set in the register G, if the deviation between the actual stop position and the target stop position when the motor is stopped is not within ± 2, the deviation is corrected and the motor is stopped at the target position. The operation is performed so as to approach the position, and the deviation correction is performed until the deviation between the coordinates of the actual stop position and the target stop position is within ± 2.

  When the value 100 is set in the register G, if the deviation between the actual stop position and the target stop position when the motor is stopped is not within ± 3, the deviation is corrected and the motor is stopped at the target position. The operation is made to approach the position, and the deviation correction is performed until the deviation between the coordinates of the actual stop position and the target stop position is within ± 3.

  When the value 101 is set in the register G, if the deviation between the actual stop position and the target stop position when the motor is stopped is not within ± 7, the deviation is corrected and the motor is stopped at the target position. The operation is made closer to the position, and deviation correction is performed until the deviation between the coordinates of the actual stop position and the target stop position is within ± 7.

  When the value 110 is set in the register G, if the deviation between the actual stop position and the target stop position when the motor is stopped is not within ± 15, the deviation is corrected and the motor is stopped at the target position. The operation is made closer to the position, and the deviation is corrected until the deviation between the coordinates of the actual stop position and the target stop position is within ± 15.

  When the value 111 is set in the register G, if the deviation between the actual stop position and the target stop position when the motor is stopped is not within ± 31, the deviation is corrected and the motor is stopped at the target position. The operation is made to approach the position, and the deviation correction is performed until the deviation between the coordinates of the actual stop position and the target stop position is within ± 31.

  In other words, among the values 001 to 111 set in the register G, when the value 001 is set, the deviation is not allowed and the correction is performed. When the value 111 is set, the maximum deviation is allowed. Settings.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), if the deviation of the coordinates between the actual stop position and the target stop position when the motor is stopped becomes ± 511 or more, the register G is set to the value 001 to the value 001. Even if 111 is set, the deviation correction is not executed and is kept as it is. When the correction is performed even when the deviation is as large as ± 511 or more, the correction operation is conspicuous, and the player may feel uncomfortable, and the correction is performed for a long time. Therefore, in this embodiment, the deviation correction is not performed. Although not shown, a threshold for not performing the deviation correction may be set in a register. One value selected from a plurality of types of values may be set. It is possible to set a stop mode according to the purpose of providing the movable body.

  The value 000 may be set as the initial value or the default value of the register G. By doing so, if the register G is not set, it is possible to prevent the motor from performing an unexpected displacement correction operation and prevent the movable body moved by the motor from performing an unexpected operation, In some cases, it is possible to prevent a person from feeling uncomfortable.

  FIG. 64A is a diagram showing a configuration of the register H in the register 719b. FIG. 64B is a diagram showing the configuration of the register I in the register 719b. The register H and the register I continuously output a drive signal so as to reach the target position, for example, in a state where the motor physically locks and cannot reach the target position. This is a register for setting for preventing generation of excessive heat.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), although the drive signal is output to the register H so that the motor reaches the target position, how much time elapses without the motor reaching the target position. It is possible to set whether or not to determine the locked state in the event of this. In the register H, one of four values of value 00, value 01, value 10, and value 11 can be set.

  If the value H is set in the register H, the motor is output so as to reach the target position, and if the target position is not reached even after one second, it is determined that the motor is in the locked state. Then, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  When the value H is set in the register H, the drive signal is output so that the motor reaches the target position, and if the target position is not reached within 2 seconds, it is determined that the motor is in the locked state. Then, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  If a value of 10 is set in the register H, the drive signal is output so that the motor reaches the target position, and if the target position is not reached within 3 seconds, it is determined that the motor is in the locked state. Then, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  If the value 11 is set in the register H, the drive signal is output so that the motor reaches the target position, and if the motor does not reach the target position even after one second elapses, it is determined that the motor is in the locked state. However, the output of the drive signal continues.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the result determined as the locked state can be set in the register I. When it is determined that the locked state is established based on the setting of the register H in FIG. 64A, the value 1 is set in the register I. If the locked state is not determined, the value 0 is set in the register I. After the value 1 is set in the register I, the condition for clearing the value (that is, setting the value 0 in the register I) may be, for example, reading the value set in the register I. By doing so, the motor control IC 719 recognizes that the motor is currently in the locked state, whereby the first sub-control unit 400 can also recognize that the motor is currently in the locked state. A corresponding process (for example, notification of the locked state) can be performed.

  The value 00 may be set as the initial value or the default value of the register H. By doing so, if the register H is not set, it may be possible to determine that the lock state is established in a shorter time and to further prevent ignition or the like due to heat generation of the motor.

  The value 0 may be set as the initial value or the default value of the register I. By doing in this way, it may be possible to prevent the locked state from being determined even though the locked state has not been determined.

  FIG. 65A is a diagram showing a configuration of the register J in the register 719b. FIG. 65B is a diagram showing a configuration of the register K in the register 719b. FIG. 65C is a diagram showing a configuration of the register L in the register 719b. The register J, the register K, and the register L are registers for setting when it is desired to hold the motor at the stop position. For example, when the movable body driven by the motor moves due to its own weight, the motor may not be able to hold the stop position when no drive signal is output to the motor. Therefore, a drive signal is output so that the motor is held at the stop position.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), it is possible to set in the register J whether to perform a short brake (that is, to output a drive signal so that the motor is held at the stop position). In the register J, one of two values, a value 0 and a value 1, can be set.

  When the value 0 is set in the register J, the short brake is enabled (that is, a drive signal is output). When the value 1 is set in the register J, the short brake is invalidated (that is, the drive signal is not output). For example, if the movable body driven by the motor slides in the horizontal direction and does not move under its own weight, the stop position can be held without the need to perform a short brake. May be set to the value 1 in the register J.

  Note that a lock mechanism that slides and secures a latch may be employed so that the movable body driven by the motor does not move from the stop position.In this case, the short brake may be disabled, The short brake may be made effective in order to surely hold the stop position.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), a period during which the motor maintains the torque after reaching the target position (that is, a period during which the output of the drive signal is continued) can be set in the register K. In the register K, one of two values, a value 0 and a value 1, can be set.

  When the value 0 is set in the register K, the torque is held for one second as a short brake after the motor reaches the target position. When the value 1 is set in the register K, the torque is always held as a short brake after the motor reaches the target position. Setting the value of the register K to 0 and holding the torque for one second after the motor reaches the target position is effective for surely stopping the motor. By setting the value of the register K to 1 and always maintaining the torque after the motor reaches the target position, the motor may be prevented from moving due to the weight of the movable body.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (c), the duty of the short brake can be set in the register L. In the register L, one of seven values, that is, value 011, value 010, value 001, value 000, value 111, value 110, and value 101 can be set.

  When the value 011 is set in the register L, a drive signal of DUTY of + 37.5% is output as a short brake.

  When the value 010 is set in the register L, the DUTY outputs a drive signal of + 25.0% as a short brake.

  When the value 001 is set in the register L, DUTY outputs a drive signal of + 12.5% as a short brake.

  When the value 000 is set in the register L, a drive signal whose DUTY is 0% is output. That is, this is equivalent to not outputting a drive signal.

  When the value 111 is set in the register L, the DUTY outputs a drive signal of -12.5% as a short brake.

  When the value 110 is set in the register L, a drive signal of DUTY of −25.0% is output as a short brake.

  When the value 101 is set in the register L, the DUTY outputs a drive signal of -37.5% as a short brake.

  The value 1 may be set as the initial value or default value of the register J. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the motor from abnormally generating heat by performing the short brake when the short brake should not be performed.

  The value 0 may be set as the initial value or the default value of the register K. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the motor from abnormally generating heat due to the short brake being continued when the short brake should not be performed.

  The value 000 may be set as the initial value or the default value of the register L. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the motor from abnormally generating heat by performing the short brake when the short brake should not be performed.

  Next, an example of an effect using control by the motor control IC 719 in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (f) are schematic diagrams showing examples of effects using control by the motor control IC 719. FIG.

  In this example, for example, in a configuration in which the logo accessory 900 is provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) as shown in FIG. The effect of moving up and down will be described.

  The character decoration section 902a is moved up and down by the motor 970 as described above. The motor 970 is driven by the motor control IC 719.

  In FIG. 66A, the character decoration unit 902a does not overlap the display of the decoration design display device 208. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image 208m1. FIG. 66D is a diagram illustrating a state where the character decoration portion 902a is removed from FIG. 66A.

  In FIG. 66 (b), a drive signal is output from the motor control IC 719 to the motor 970 to lower the character decoration portion 902a, and a part of the character decoration portion 902a overlaps the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. I have. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image 208m2. FIG. 66 (e) is a diagram showing a state where the character decoration portion 902a is removed from FIG. 66 (b). As shown in FIG. 66 (e), an image 208m2a is displayed at a position on the display of the decorative pattern display device 208 that overlaps the character decoration section 902a. The image 208m2a moves together with the movement of the character decoration unit 902a like a shadow of the character decoration unit 902a, and is always displayed at a position overlapping the character decoration unit 902a.

  In FIG. 66 (c), a drive signal is output from the motor control IC 719 to the motor 970 to further lower the character decoration portion 902a, and all of the character decoration portions 902a overlap the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. I have. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image 208m3. FIG. 66 (f) is a diagram showing a state in which the character decoration portion 902a is removed from FIG. 66 (c). As shown in FIG. 66 (f), an image 208m3a is displayed at a position of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 that overlaps the character decoration portion 902a. The image 208m3a moves like the shadow of the character decoration unit 902a together with the movement of the character decoration unit 902a, and is always displayed at a position overlapping the character decoration unit 902a.

  By the control by the motor control IC 719 described above, even when the motor 970 is a DC motor, precise drive control can be performed, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the position of the character decorative portion 902a are matched. The effect can be executed.

In the effects shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (f), (1) the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decoration pattern are displayed while the character decoration unit 902a is moving by using the setting of the register A described above. There is no deviation from the display of the image 208m2a and the image 208m3a of the device 208.
(2) By using the setting of the register B described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a is started, the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the image 208m2a and the image 208m3a of the decoration design display device 208 are generated. There is no.
(3) By using the setting of the register C described above, a shift occurs between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the image 208m2a and the image 208m3a of the decoration design display device 208 during the movement of the character decoration unit 902a. There is no.
(4) By using the setting of the register E described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a is completed, the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the image 208m2a and the image 208m3a of the decoration design display device 208 are generated. There is no.
(5) By using the setting of the register F described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a is completed, a shift occurs between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the images 208m2a and 208m3a of the decorative design display device 208. There is no.
(6) By using the setting of the register G described above, it is possible to set an allowable range of a deviation between the actual stop position of the character decoration unit 902a and the target stop position. For example, after the character decoration unit 902a stops, If it is decided that the next operation is to be performed, by increasing the allowable range of the deviation, the next operation can be performed smoothly without spending time for correcting the deviation. As a result, there is no shift between the position of the character decoration section 902a and the display of the image 208m2a and the image 208m3a of the decorative pattern display device 208.
(7) The setting of the register H can be used to determine the lock state in a short time. For example, it has been determined that the following operation is performed after the character decoration unit 902a stops. In such a case, acceleration for the next operation can be smoothly performed. As a result, there is no shift between the position of the character decoration section 902a and the display of the image 208m2a and the image 208m3a of the decorative pattern display device 208.
(8) By utilizing the setting of the register I, when the character decoration unit 902a is stopped halfway, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208. As a result, there is no shift between the position of the character decoration section 902a and the display of the image 208m2a and the image 208m3a of the decorative pattern display device 208.
(9) By using the settings of the registers A to C and E to I described above, a synergistic effect is generated by the settings of the registers, and the operation can be performed more accurately.

  Note that FIG. 66 shows an example in which the character decoration portion 902a, which is a movable body, moves up and down. However, the movement of the movable body may be horizontal, diagonal, or back and forth in addition to vertical movement. Or a combination of these.

  FIGS. 67A to 67H are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of an effect using control by the motor control IC 719. FIG.

  In this example, for example, in a configuration in which the logo accessory 900 is provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) as shown in FIG. The effect of moving up and down will be described.

  FIG. 67 (e) is a diagram showing an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. 67 (a), and FIG. 67 (f) is a diagram showing the drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. 67 (b). FIG. 67 (g) shows an example of drive data (drive signal). FIG. 67 (g) shows an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. 67 (c). FIG. 67) illustrates an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation illustrated in FIG. 67 (d).

  When the drive data d1 (data for driving for one second) shown in FIG. 67 (e) is output to the motor 970, the character decoration section 902a is turned on by the decoration pattern display device 208 as shown in FIG. 67 (a). It descends to the position that overlaps the display. At this time, an image 208m4, which is a display when the character decoration unit 902a is lowered, is displayed on the decoration design display device 208.

  After that, the drive data d2 (data for driving for one second) shown in FIG. 67 (f) is output to the motor 970, and the character decoration unit 902a is turned on by the decoration design display device as shown in FIG. 67 (b). It rises to a position that does not overlap with the display of 208. At this time, an image 208m5, which is a display for ascending the character decoration portion 902a, is displayed on the decoration design display device 208.

  Thereafter, the drive data d3 (data for driving for one second) shown in FIG. 67 (g) is output to the motor 970, so that the character decoration unit 902a displays the decoration design display device as shown in FIG. 67 (c). It descends to the position which overlaps the display of 208. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image 208m6 which is a display for when the character decorative portion 902a is lowered.

  After that, the drive data d4 (data for driving for one second) shown in FIG. 67 (h) is output to the motor 970, so that the character decoration unit 902a can display the decoration design display device as shown in FIG. 67 (d). It rises to a position that does not overlap with the display of 208. At this time, an image 208m7, which is a display for when the character decoration unit 902a is raised, is displayed on the decoration design display device 208.

  In this example, when displaying the image of the decorative design display device 208, the image is not switched while determining the position of the character decoration portion 902a. However, since the motor control IC 719 controls the operation as scheduled, the display image of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the character decoration unit 902a can cooperate well.

  When the character decoration portion 902a, which is a movable body, is moved linearly in a reciprocating manner, the operation is switched, so that the operation delay of the movable body affected by the inertia of the movable body may occur. By setting an appropriate acceleration setting, the movable body can move as scheduled, and can cooperate with another effect device such as the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (h), (1) the position of the character decoration section 902a and the display of the decoration pattern are displayed while the character decoration section 902a is moving by using the setting of the register A described above. There is no deviation from the display of the device 208.
(2) By using the setting of the register B described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a is started, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208. Also, at the start of the repeated movement of the character decoration unit 902a (at the start of the repeated acceleration), there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(3) By using the setting of the register C described above, the position of the character decoration unit 902a does not deviate from the display of the decoration design display device 208 during the movement of the character decoration unit 902a.
(4) By using the setting of the register E described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a is completed, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(5) By using the setting of the register F described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a ends, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(6) By using the setting of the register I, when the character decoration unit 902a is stopped halfway, there is no shift between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(7) By using the settings of the registers A to C, EF, and I described above, a synergistic effect is generated by the settings of the registers, and the operation can be performed more accurately.

  In the example of FIG. 67 as well, as in the example of FIG. 66, the image 208m2a or the image 208m3a that is linked to the movement of the character decoration unit 902a may be displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIGS. 68 (a) to (l) are schematic diagrams showing an example of an effect using control by the motor control IC 719. FIG.

  In this example, for example, in a configuration in which the logo accessory 900 is provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) as shown in FIG. The effect of moving up and down will be described. FIG. 67 described above is an effect when the player does not win in an advantageous state, and FIG. 68 is an effect when the player wins in an advantageous state, for example. When winning in an advantageous state, the number of movements of the movable body may be increased as compared to the effect in the case where the advantageous state is not won. In FIG. 67, the character decoration unit 902a moves up and down twice, whereas in FIG. 68, the character decoration unit 902a moves up and down three times.

  Conventionally, if the number of vertical movements is large, even a slight shift is accumulated once, and there is a risk that the position of the character decoration portion 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208 may shift. However, according to the present embodiment, the above-described control by the motor control IC 719 can provide a cooperative effect even when the number of vertical movements increases, so that the game can be played in a situation where the interest level of the player increases. It is possible to make the production that attracts the attention of the person uncomfortable.

For example, in this embodiment,
The movable unit (for example, the character decoration unit 902a) may move to a position that overlaps the display unit (for example, the decorative design display device 208).
When the movable means is at a position overlapping the display means, the display means performs a display on the assumption that the movable means is at a position overlapping the display means,
The movable means may move to a position that does not overlap the display means,
When the movable means is at a position that does not overlap the display means, the display means performs display on the assumption that the movable means is at a position that does not overlap the display means.

For example, in this embodiment,
The movable body (for example, the character decoration unit 902a) may move in front of the display device (for example, the decorative design display device 208), and when the movable body moves in front of the display device, the display device includes the movable body. An effect of displaying an image on the premise of moving to the front of the display device,
In the case of increasing the expectation of a big hit (for example, winning in a state where the player is in an advantageous state), the number of times the movable body moves in front of the display device is reduced to the content of decreasing the expectation of the big hit. In the case where the number of times the movable body moves forward of the display device is set to be larger than the number of times the movable body moves in front of the display device, the movement of the movable body and the image of the display device may be in timing even when the content of the content with a high expectation to the big hit is increased. Since the players cooperate without shifting, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as intended without giving a sense of incongruity.

  If the timing of the movement of the movable body and the image of the display device is shifted when the number of times of movement of the movable body to the front of the display device is large, the player sees a poor performance. There is a possibility that it will make an impression and you will not have the expectation of the jackpot.

  In the above-described example, the case where the number of movements of the movable body is increased as an effect with an increased degree of expectation of the big hit has been described. May be made faster. For example, in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, each drive data is set to data for one second, but the execution time of the data d1, d3, and d5 is set to 0.5 second so as to shorten the time required for the movable body to move forward of the display device. It may be. The image of the display device may be prepared correspondingly. Even if the operation speeds up, there is no time lag between the movement of the movable body and the image on the display device if there is an appropriate setting in the control IC (for example, the motor control IC 719). Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect that further excites the player's expectation due to the quick operation.

  Note that, as an effect with an increased degree of expectation for a big hit, a combination of a large number of movements and a high speed may be combined.

  The movement of the movable body is not limited to linear movement but may be rotational movement (forward rotation / reverse rotation) or the like, and can be appropriately moved by setting the control IC.

  Note that the drive data may be changed to the next drive data based on a player's operation reception (for example, input of an operation button for operation (for example, operation of the chance button 136)) while the movable body is moving. Conventionally, since the player operation is performed at an arbitrary timing, processing such as stopping and accelerating according to the moving speed at the time of the operation has conventionally been complicated, but in the present embodiment, it is easily performed by setting the register. Changes in behavior can be made.

  In addition, controlling the operation of the motor by outputting the drive signal from the control IC means that the motor drives the movable body, so that the operation of the movable body is controlled by outputting the drive signal from the control IC. It is equivalent.

In the effects shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to (l), (1) the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decoration pattern are displayed while the character decoration unit 902a is moving by using the setting of the register A described above. There is no deviation from the display of the device 208.
(2) By using the setting of the register B described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a is started, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208. Also, at the start of the repeated movement of the character decoration unit 902a (at the start of the repeated acceleration), there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(3) By using the setting of the register C described above, the position of the character decoration unit 902a does not deviate from the display of the decoration design display device 208 during the movement of the character decoration unit 902a.
(4) By using the setting of the register E described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a is completed, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(5) By using the setting of the register F described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a ends, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(6) By using the setting of the register I, when the character decoration unit 902a is stopped halfway, there is no shift between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(7) By using the settings of the registers A to C, EF, and I described above, a synergistic effect is generated by the settings of the registers, and the operation can be performed more accurately.

  In the example of FIG. 68 as well, similarly to the example of FIG. 66, the image 208m2a or the image 208m3a linked to the movement of the character decoration unit 902a may be displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIGS. 69A to 69H are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of an effect using the control by the motor control IC 719.

  In this example, for example, in a configuration in which the logo accessory 900 is provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) as shown in FIG. The effect of moving up and down will be described.

  FIG. 69E shows an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. 69A. FIG. 69F shows an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. FIG. 69 (g) is a diagram showing an example of drive data (drive signal), and FIG. 69 (g) is a diagram showing an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. 69 (c). () Is a diagram showing an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. 69 (d).

  By outputting the drive data d11 (data for driving for 0.5 seconds) shown in FIG. 69 (e) to the motor 970, a part of the character decoration portion 902a is decorated as shown in FIG. 69 (a). It falls to the position which overlaps the display of the symbol display device 208. At this time, an image 208m14, which is a display for when the character decoration unit 902a is lowered, is displayed on the decoration design display device 208.

  Thereafter, the drive data d12 (data for driving for 0.2 seconds) shown in FIG. 69 (f) is output to the motor 970, so that all of the character decoration portions 902a are changed as shown in FIG. 69 (b). It descends to the position which overlaps the display of the decorative design display device 208. At this time, an image 208m15, which is a display when the character decoration unit 902a is lowered, is displayed on the decoration design display device 208.

  After that, the drive data d13 (data for driving for 0.5 seconds) shown in FIG. 69 (g) is output to the motor 970, so that a part of the character decoration portion 902a becomes part as shown in FIG. 69 (c). , Rises to a position overlapping the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, an image 208m16 that is a display for ascending the character decoration unit 902a is displayed on the decoration design display device 208.

  After that, the drive data d14 (data for driving for 0.2 seconds) shown in FIG. 69 (h) is output to the motor 970, so that all of the character decoration portions 902a become as shown in FIG. 69 (d). It rises to a position that does not overlap the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, an image 208m17, which is a display when the character decoration unit 902a is raised, is displayed on the decoration design display device 208.

  Thus, even in the case of performing the effect of changing the moving speed of the character decoration unit 902a in multiple stages, the motor control IC 719 can be controlled so as to perform the expected operation, and the display image of the decoration design display device 208 and the character decoration can be controlled. The operation of the unit 902a can cooperate well. Therefore, in a situation in which the degree of interest of the player increases, it is possible to make the effect noticed by the player uncomfortable.

In the effects shown in FIGS. 69 (a) to (h), (1) the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decoration pattern are displayed while the character decoration unit 902a is moving by using the setting of the register A described above. There is no deviation from the display of the device 208.
(2) By using the setting of the register B described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a is started, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(3) By using the setting of the register C described above, the position of the character decoration unit 902a does not deviate from the display of the decoration design display device 208 during the movement of the character decoration unit 902a.
(4) By using the setting of the register D described above, when the moving speed of the character decoration unit 902a is switched, there is no shift between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(5) By using the setting of the register E described above, when the movement of the character decoration section 902a is completed, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration section 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(6) By using the setting of the register F described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a ends, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(7) By using the settings of the registers A to C and D to F, a synergistic effect is generated by the setting of the registers, and the operation can be performed more accurately.

  In the example of FIG. 69 as well, similarly to the example of FIG. 66, the image 208m2a or the image 208m3a linked with the movement of the character decoration unit 902a may be displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIGS. 70A to 70C are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of an effect using control by the motor control IC 719. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), when the movable body is driven by the drive data d21 and an abnormality occurs as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the movable body is controlled to move to the retreat position. It is desirable to do. In this example, when an abnormality occurs in the middle of the driving data d21, the driving data d21 is interrupted, the driving data d31 which is the deceleration data shown in FIG. 70 (c) is output, and then the driving data which is the evacuation movement data is outputted. The data d32 is output.

  When an abnormality occurs, it is desirable to immediately display an image for notifying a player or the like that the abnormality has occurred on the screen of the display device (for example, the decorative design display device 208). At this time, if the movable body overlaps the display on the display device, the image becomes difficult to see. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs, the movable body is immediately moved to the retreat position (at the maximum speed). If the movement of the movable body to the retreat position is slow, the display on the display device will not be accurate. However, in the present embodiment, the movable body can be immediately moved to the retreat position by setting the motor control IC 719.

  Further, as another example, if an effect button (for example, a chance button 136) is operated and an effect is rewritten, the next effect is an effect that does not require a movable body, as shown in FIG. 70. The movable body is forcibly moved.

  Also, in the case where the gaming table is a slot machine, if there is a game proceeding operation, even if the effect based on the game proceeding operation is an effect that does not require a movable body, the moving body as shown in FIG. You will be forced to retreat.

In the effects shown in FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (c), (1) the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decoration pattern are displayed while the character decoration unit 902a is moving by using the setting of the register A described above. There is no deviation from the display of the device 208.
(2) By using the setting of the register B described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a is started, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(3) By using the setting of the register C described above, the position of the character decoration unit 902a does not deviate from the display of the decoration design display device 208 during the movement of the character decoration unit 902a.
(4) By using the setting of the register D described above, when the moving speed of the character decoration unit 902a is switched, there is no shift between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(5) By using the setting of the register E described above, when the movement of the character decoration section 902a is completed, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration section 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(6) By using the setting of the register F described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a ends, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decorative design display device 208.
(7) By using the setting of the register G described above, it is possible to set the allowable range of the deviation between the actual stop position of the character decoration portion 902a and the target stop position. If it is desired to stop the unit 902a quickly, the tolerance of the shift is increased, so that the unit 902a can be stopped immediately without taking time for the shift correction (without moving for a long distance shift correction). it can.
(8) The setting of the above-described register H can be used to set the lock state in a short time. For example, in a case where the character decoration unit 902a is to be stopped quickly in an emergency, Sets the setting of the register H to "3 seconds" or "notification only", and controls the control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has received the determination result of the locked state to stop the character decoration unit 902a. If the character decoration unit 902a is to be moved to the retreat position quickly, the setting of the register H is set to "1 second" or "2 seconds", and the control unit (for example, The first sub-control unit 400) can perform control such as further accelerating the character decoration unit 902a to release the lock with momentum.
(9) By using the settings of the registers A to H described above, a synergistic effect is generated by the setting of the registers, and the operation can be performed more accurately. Even when the gaming table is a pachinko machine, the movable body may be forcibly retracted as shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (h) are schematic diagrams showing an example of an effect using control by the motor control IC 719. FIG.

  In this example, for example, in a configuration in which the logo accessory 900 is provided in front of (the player side of) the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3, the character decoration portion 902 a of the logo movable body 902 is positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect of moving up and down will be described. In each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol is displayed as described above.

  FIG. 71 (e) is a diagram showing an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. 71 (a), and FIG. 71 (f) is a diagram showing an example of drive data for the operation shown in FIG. 71 (b). FIG. 71 (g) is a diagram showing an example of drive data (drive signal), and FIG. 71 (g) is a diagram showing an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. 71 (c). () Is a diagram showing an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. 71 (d).

  By outputting the drive data d41 (data for one-second drive, high-speed drive data) shown in FIG. 71 (e) to the motor 970, the character decoration unit 902a changes the decoration as shown in FIG. 71 (a). It descends at a high speed to a position overlapping the display of the symbol display device 208. At this time, 7 is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, 7 is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and 6 are displayed side by side in the middle symbol display area 208b on the decorative symbol display area 208b. .

  After that, the drive data d42 (data for one-second drive, high-speed drive data) shown in FIG. 71 (f) is output to the motor 970, and the character decoration unit 902a is turned on as shown in FIG. 71 (b). , At a high speed so as not to overlap the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, 7 is displayed on the left symbol display area 208a, 7 is displayed on the right symbol display area 208c, and 7 are displayed side by side while swinging on the middle symbol display area 208b on the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  Thereafter, the drive data d43 (data for one-second drive, high-speed drive data) shown in FIG. 71 (g) is output to the motor 970, and the character decoration unit 902a is turned on as shown in FIG. 71 (c). , Descends at a high speed to a position overlapping the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, 7 is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, 7 is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and 6 are displayed side by side in the middle symbol display area 208b on the decorative symbol display area 208b. .

  Thereafter, the drive data d44 (data for driving for 5 seconds, low-speed drive data) shown in FIG. 71 (h) is output to the motor 970, and the character decoration unit 902a is turned on as shown in FIG. 71 (d). , Slowly rises to a position that does not overlap the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, 7 is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, 7 is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the character decoration that slowly rises over 5 seconds in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display moves from 6 to 7 in 5 seconds in cooperation with the unit 902a. When the character decoration section 902a moves slowly, the player may be nervous and wait for the result, and may be more interesting.

  As described above, there is a demand for the gaming machine to move the movable means slowly. For example, an amusement console may perform a stir-up effect, which is a big hit or not, so that the player does not get bored, and in a stir-up effect, which result will be, if the climax of the showground, it will be fast Switching options at a lower speed than switching options can increase the expectation until the results are obtained. In the present embodiment, control for slowly moving the movable body can be easily performed by setting the motor control IC 719.

In the effects shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (h), (1) the movement of the character decoration unit 902a and the decoration pattern display during the movement of the character decoration unit 902a by using the setting of the register A described above. The display movement of the middle symbol display area 208b of the device 208 can be linked.
(2) By using the setting of the register B, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a starts, the movement of the character decoration unit 902a and the movement of the display of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 are linked. be able to.
(3) By using the setting of the register C, the movement of the character decoration unit 902a and the movement of the display of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decoration symbol display device 208 are linked while the character decoration unit 902a is moving. be able to.
(4) By using the setting of the register D described above, the movement of the character decoration unit 902a and the movement of the display in the middle design display area 208b of the decoration design display device 208 when the moving speed of the character decoration unit 902a is switched. Can work together.
(5) By using the setting of the register E described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a ends, the movement of the character decoration unit 902a and the display movement of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decoration symbol display device 208 are linked. be able to.
(6) By using the setting of the register F described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a ends, the movement of the character decoration unit 902a and the movement of the display of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decoration symbol display device 208 are linked. be able to.
(7) By using the setting of the register I described above, even when the character decoration unit 902a is stopped halfway, the movement of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decoration symbol display device 208. Movement can be linked.
(8) By using the settings of the registers A to F and I described above, a synergistic effect is generated by the settings of the registers, and the operation can be performed more accurately.

  FIGS. 72A to 72H are schematic diagrams showing examples of effects using the control by the motor control IC 719.

  This example further describes a case where the character decoration portion 902a shown in FIGS. 71 (d) and (h) rises at a low speed.

  FIG. 72 (e) is a diagram showing an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 72 (f) is a diagram showing an example of the drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. FIG. 72 (g) shows an example of drive data (drive signal). FIG. 72 (g) shows an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG. 72 (c). 72) shows an example of drive data (drive signal) for the operation shown in FIG.

  When the drive data d44 shown in FIG. 72 (e) (similar to the drive data d44 in FIG. 71 (h)) is output to the motor 970, the character decoration section 902a changes the decoration pattern as shown in FIG. 72 (a). It gradually rises from a position overlapping the display of the display device 208. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c in FIG. 71 (d), and further supports and lifts the character decoration portion 902a. An image 208m18, which is an image of a visible palm, is displayed. The image 208m18 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 at a position where the player can see the palm as if lifting the character decorative portion 902a.

  As the process proceeds from FIG. 72 (a) to FIG. 72 (b), FIG. 72 (c), and FIG. 72 (d), the display position of the image 208m18 also rises in cooperation with the rise of the character decoration portion 902a. Makes it appear that the image 208m18 is in contact with the character decoration portion 902a. At this time, if the position of the character decoration portion 902a is displaced from the display position of the image 208m18, a sense of incongruity is given to the player. However, in the present embodiment, control for slowly moving the movable body by setting the motor control IC 719 is also possible. It can be easily implemented, and can appropriately move the movable body.

In the effects shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (h), (1) the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display of the decoration pattern are displayed while the character decoration unit 902a is moving by using the setting of the register A described above. There is no deviation from the display position of the image 208m18 of the device 208 (the erroneous state in which the character decoration portion 902a overlaps the image 208m18).
(2) By using the setting of the register B described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a starts, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display position of the image 208m18 of the decoration design display device 208. (There is no erroneous state that the character decoration section 902a overlaps the image 208m18.)
(3) By using the setting of the register C, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display position of the image 208m18 of the decoration design display device 208 during the movement of the character decoration unit 902a. (There is no erroneous state that the character decoration section 902a overlaps the image 208m18.)
(4) By using the setting of the register D described above, when the moving speed of the character decoration unit 902a is switched, a difference between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display position of the image 208m18 of the decoration design display device 208 occurs. (There is no erroneous state that the character decoration portion 902a overlaps the image 208m18.)
(5) By using the setting of the register E described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a is completed, there is no deviation between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display position of the image 208m18 of the decoration design display device 208. (There is no erroneous state that the character decoration section 902a overlaps the image 208m18.)
(6) By using the setting of the register F described above, when the movement of the character decoration unit 902a ends, there is no shift between the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display position of the image 208m18 of the decoration design display device 208. (There is no erroneous state that the character decoration section 902a overlaps the image 208m18.)
(7) By using the setting of the register I described above, even when the character decoration unit 902a is stopped halfway, the position of the character decoration unit 902a and the display position of the image 208m18 of the decoration design display device 208 are displayed. No misalignment occurs (an erroneous state in which the character decoration portion 902a overlaps the image 208m18).
(8) By using the settings of the registers A to F and I described above, a synergistic effect is generated by the settings of the registers, and the operation can be performed more accurately.

Further, the present invention is summarized as follows.
(Appendix i1)
Operable movable means (for example, a circular object 1607, a movable body 1401, a character decoration unit 902a);
A DC motor (for example, the motor 11, the motor 12, the motor 21, the motor 22, the motor 31, the motor 32, the motor 41, the motor 42, and the motor 970 in FIG. 51) serving as a drive source of the movable unit;
An IC capable of controlling the DC motor (for example, a motor control IC 719).
The IC includes a control circuit (for example, the motor control circuit 1 and the motor control circuit 2 in FIG. 50),
The control circuit is a circuit that can output a drive signal for driving the DC motor,
The control circuit can output any one of a first speed signal for rotating the DC motor at a first speed and a second speed signal for rotating the DC motor at a second speed as the drive signal. Circuit
The second speed is a speed higher than the first speed,
When the control circuit changes the signal output to the DC motor from the first speed signal to the second speed signal, the control circuit changes a speed change acceleration signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “first acceleration signal”). ) Can be output as the drive signal.
The control circuit stores a first storage area (for example, a register D) for storing either a value for setting an output of the first acceleration signal or a value for setting non-output of the first acceleration signal. Is a circuit that comprises
The control circuit outputs the first acceleration signal after outputting the first speed signal when a value for setting the output of the first acceleration signal is stored in the first storage area. Means for outputting the second speed signal after outputting the first acceleration signal,
The control circuit outputs the first acceleration signal after outputting the first speed signal when a value for setting the non-output of the first acceleration signal is stored in the first storage area. It is a means for outputting the second speed signal without doing, a gaming table, characterized in that,
-It is possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic of an IC.
・ Smooth speed change according to movable means is possible.
(Appendix i2)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note i1, wherein
The control circuit uses a rising acceleration signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “second acceleration signal”) as the drive signal when accelerating the rotation speed of the DC motor from speed 0 to a predetermined speed. It is a circuit that can output to the motor,
The control circuit is a circuit that can output a plurality of types of the second acceleration signals having different DUTY addition amounts,
Since the control circuit is a circuit capable of setting which of the plurality of types of second acceleration signals is to be output to the DC motor, the gaming table,
-Even if the movable means has various weights, a smooth operation can be started according to the movable means.
Also, since the setting of the second acceleration signal is enabled in addition to the setting of the first acceleration signal in the appendix i1, a synergistic effect is generated, and the DC motor can be operated more accurately.
(Appendix i3)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note i2,
The control circuit is a circuit that can set a reference speed that defines the maximum speed of rotating the DC motor,
The control circuit is a circuit having a plurality of types of the reference speed,
The control circuit is a circuit capable of setting which of the plurality of types of reference speeds defines the speed at which the DC motor is rotated,
The control circuit is a circuit capable of setting a duty addition amount,
The control circuit is a circuit including a plurality of types of DUTY addition amounts,
The control circuit is a circuit capable of setting which of the plurality of types of DUTY addition amounts defines an acceleration amount for rotating the DC motor,
Since the control circuit is a circuit that sets the second acceleration signal to be output to the DC motor based on DUTY that maintains the set reference speed,
・ Acceleration setting corresponding to the operation speed is possible.
In addition, since the reference speed can be set in addition to the setting of the first acceleration signal in Appendix i1 and the setting of the second acceleration signal in Appendix i2, a synergistic effect occurs and the DC motor It is possible to operate more accurately.
(Appendix i4)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note i2 or i3,
The control circuit is a circuit including a second storage area (for example, a register B) that stores a value that sets a signal to be output to the DC motor among the plurality of types of second acceleration signals,
The second storage area is an area capable of storing a first initial value (for example, a value of 00 stored in the register B) which is an initial value when setting the second acceleration signal,
Since the first initial value is a value for setting a signal for rotating the DC motor with the smallest acceleration of the plurality of types of second acceleration signals,
Even if a value is not stored for some reason, the DC motor starts moving by the second acceleration signal based on the first initial value, so that the movable means starts moving smoothly.
(Appendix i5)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes i1 to i4,
The control circuit is a circuit that can output an acceleration signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “third acceleration signal”) for reducing the self-excited vibration to rotate the DC motor as the drive signal to the DC motor,
The control circuit is a circuit including a plurality of types of the third acceleration signal,
Since the control circuit is a circuit capable of setting which of the plurality of types of third acceleration signals is to be output to the DC motor,
In addition to the setting of the first acceleration signal in Appendix i1, in addition to the setting of the second acceleration signal in Appendix i2, the setting of the third acceleration signal is possible in addition to the setting of the reference speed in Appendix i3. Therefore, a synergistic effect is generated, and the DC motor can be operated more accurately.
(Appendix i6)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note i5,
The control circuit is a circuit including a third storage area (for example, a register C) that stores a value that sets a signal to be output to the DC motor among the plurality of types of second acceleration signals,
The third storage area is an area capable of storing a second initial value (for example, a value of 00 stored in the register C), which is an initial value when setting the second acceleration signal,
Since the second initial value is a value that sets a signal for rotating the DC motor with the smallest acceleration of the plurality of types of second acceleration signals,
Even if a value is not stored for some reason, the DC motor keeps moving by the third acceleration signal based on the second initial value, so that the movable means keeps moving smoothly.
(Appendix i7)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes i1 to i6,
The control circuit is a circuit capable of outputting a deceleration signal for reducing the speed of rotating the DC motor to the DC motor as the drive signal when the DC motor is stopped,
The control circuit is a circuit including a fourth storage area (for example, a register E) that stores either a value for setting the output of the deceleration signal or a value for setting non-output of the deceleration signal. Because it was a gaming table,
・ Smooth speed change according to movable means is possible.
In addition to the setting of the first acceleration signal in Appendix i1, the setting of the second acceleration signal in Appendix i2, the setting of the reference speed in Appendix i3, and the setting of the third acceleration signal in Appendix i5. In addition, since the output of the deceleration signal can be set, a synergistic effect is generated, and the DC motor can be operated more accurately.
(Appendix i8)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note i7,
Since the control circuit is a circuit capable of setting a deceleration start position when the DC motor is stopped,
-The movable body can be stopped at a desired stop position.
In addition to the setting of the first acceleration signal in Appendix i1, the setting of the second acceleration signal in Appendix i2, the setting of the reference speed in Appendix i3, and the setting of the third acceleration signal in Appendix i5. In addition, since the deceleration start position can be set in addition to the output of the deceleration signal in Appendix i7, a synergistic effect is produced, and the DC motor can be operated more accurately.
(Appendix i9)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note i8,
The control circuit is a circuit capable of outputting a correction operation signal for correcting a shift of a stop position of the DC motor to the DC motor as the drive signal when the DC motor is stopped,
The control circuit is a circuit including a fifth storage area (for example, a register G) capable of storing either a value for setting an output of the correction operation signal or a value for setting non-output of the correction operation signal. There was a gaming table that was characterized by
・ Setting according to the movable body is possible.
In addition to the setting of the first acceleration signal in Appendix i1, the setting of the second acceleration signal in Appendix i2, the setting of the reference speed in Appendix i3, and the setting of the third acceleration signal in Appendix i5. In addition, in addition to the setting of the output of the deceleration signal in Appendix i7, the output of the correction operation signal can be set in addition to the setting of the deceleration start position in Appendix i8. It can be operated accurately.
(Appendix i10)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note i9,
Since the value for setting the output of the correction operation signal is a value for setting one correction range from a plurality of types of correction ranges, the gaming table,
・ Setting according to the movable body is possible.
In addition to the setting of the first acceleration signal in Appendix i1, the setting of the second acceleration signal in Appendix i2, the setting of the reference speed in Appendix i3, and the setting of the third acceleration signal in Appendix i5. In addition to the setting of the output of the deceleration signal in Appendix i7, in addition to the setting of the deceleration start position in Appendix i8, and the setting of the output of the correction operation signal in Appendix i9, the setting of the correction range is enabled. , A synergistic effect is produced, and the DC motor can be operated more accurately.
(Supplementary Note i11)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes i1 to i10,
Display means (for example, decorative design display device 208) that can be displayed,
Since the movable means is a means for performing an operation in cooperation with the display of the display means, the gaming table, characterized in that,
-Coordination with other effect devices such as display means works well.

  The embodiments of the present invention are not limited to the above-described individual embodiments, but include any combination of the elements of the individual embodiments in the present invention, and also include various modifications that can be conceived by those skilled in the art. However, the effects of the present invention are not limited to the contents described above. That is, various additions, changes, and partial deletions can be made without departing from the concept and spirit of the present invention derived from the contents defined in the claims and equivalents thereof.

<Embodiment B>
The slot machine of the present embodiment is configured such that a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied start rotating by receiving a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, it is determined by lottery whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is performed, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, The conditions determined by the combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels are stopped meet the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out if the condition is met, and the game medium is ended if not matched. It is a game console that advances a series of games that end without payout.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG. 73 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 74 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened.

  A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 73 is equivalent to an example of a gaming table, and includes a main body 101, and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 101. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112), each of which is a rotating body having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on an outer peripheral surface, are housed. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a reel drive unit 10 described later.

  When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in a vertical direction from the reel window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. . More specifically, with reference to FIG. 75, the symbol displayed on the upper part of the left reel 110 (the position of 1 shown in the drawing; also referred to as symbol position 1) is the upper symbol of the left reel and the middle part of the left reel 110 (shown in the figure). The symbol displayed at the position of No. 2; also referred to as symbol position 2) is the middle symbol of the left reel, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the lower symbol of the left reel. The symbol displayed on the upper part of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 4) is the upper symbol of the middle reel, and the middle part of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5). The symbol displayed on the middle reel is a middle symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower portion of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the drawing; also referred to as symbol position 6) is the lower symbol on the middle reel and the upper portion of the right reel 112 (shown in the drawing) 7 position; symbol position 7 ) Is the upper symbol of the right reel, and the symbol displayed in the middle of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the middle symbol of the right reel, and the lower symbol of the right reel 112 (in the figure). The symbol displayed at the position shown at 9 (also referred to as symbol position 9) is referred to as the lower symbol of the right reel, and the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are vertically attached to the respective reels 110 to 112 through the reel window 113. Nine are displayed.

  By rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition, as such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited thereto.

  The winning line will be described. The winning line is a line set at a stop position of a symbol that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a line for determining whether a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination described later is displayed. is there. Of the five pay lines, the valid pay lines are predetermined in accordance with the number of medals bet as game media. In the case of the present embodiment, there are five pay lines. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line (symbol position: 2-5-8) is valid, and two medals are bet. In this case, when the upper horizontal pay line (symbol position: 1-4-7) and the lower horizontal pay line (symbol position: 3-6-9) are added, three medals are bet. The five lines to which the rightward winning line (symbol position: 1-5-9) and the upper rightward winning line (symbol position: 3-5-7) are added become effective as the winning lines.

  The number of winning lines is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, a middle horizontal winning line, an upper horizontal winning line, a lower horizontal winning line, and a lower right Five pay lines, the pay line and the upper right pay line, may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines irrespective of the number of bets.

  Hereinafter, in the reel window 113, the symbol position on the winning line may be referred to as a "winning position", and other symbol positions may be referred to as "non-winning positions". That is, the winning position means a position on the winning line where symbols constituting a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination stop.

  Returning to FIGS. 73 and 74, for example, the notification lamp 123 indicates that a specific winning combination (specifically, special combination 1 to 3) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or a special game described later. This is a lamp that informs a player that the player is in a state. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that a player can insert a game medal. The re-game lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be re-gamed when the player has won a re-game role (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game (there is no need to insert medals). This is a ramp that informs the player of the fact.

  The medal insertion buttons (also called bet buttons) 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, one bet is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on a number of lamps in accordance with the number of inserted medals, and, when a specified number of medals have been inserted, notifies that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and insertion means both. is there.

  The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to a player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the following, in the same meaning as being paid out to a player, it may be expressed that it is given to a player. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 each including a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 whose rotation has been started by the operation of the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. In the present embodiment, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 is operated. Thus, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

  Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. In the present embodiment, a light-emitting body is provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for adjusting medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals bet, and discharging the medals from the medal payout opening 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

  Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying a model name and pasting various certification stamps is provided. A medal payout slot 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162. The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting a sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on each of the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decoration lamps for exciting games. A title panel 160 and a sound hole 143 are provided above the front door 102.

  A liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 is provided in a region including the reel window 113 and the periphery thereof.

  Referring to FIG. 74, main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by upper surface plate 261, left side plate 260, right side plate 260, lower surface plate 264, and back plate 242, and that opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board is disposed at a position not overlapping with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Below, three reels 110 to 112 are arranged. On the side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, there is provided a sub control board storage case 220 in which a sub control board constituting the sub control unit 400 is stored. I have. An external centralized terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information on the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the right side plate 260.

  On the lower surface plate 264, a medal payout device 180 (device for paying out medals stored in a bucket) is provided. Above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112, a power supply board is provided. A power supply 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when closed.

  The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply externally supplied to the slot machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the DC power to each control unit such as a main control unit 300 and sub-control units 400 and 500 described later, and to each device. I do. Furthermore, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. I have.

  A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected thereto extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. I have.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a board case 230 accommodating a sub-control board constituting the sub-control unit 500, An upper speaker 272 is provided. A medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like into the medal tray 161 are provided below the liquid crystal display device 157. I have. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

  73 and 74, a liquid crystal display device 157 includes a transmissive color liquid crystal panel 157A having a color filter and a backlight 157 for illuminating the color liquid crystal panel 157B with white light from the back side. It is a display. The liquid crystal panel 157 </ b> A is a rectangular panel extending to both the region inside and outside the reel window 113, and a well-known liquid crystal panel can be employed. The liquid crystal panel 157A includes, for example, R, G, and B (red, green, and blue) filters for each pixel, and applies a liquid crystal between transparent substrates such as glass on which signal lines, switching elements, and pixel electrodes are formed. The liquid crystal layer is formed by being sealed, and the liquid crystal layer is formed by being sandwiched between polarizing plates. The liquid crystal panel 157A may be a normally white type, but is a normally black type in the present embodiment.

  The backlight 157 includes a light guide plate, a light source such as an LED that irradiates the light guide plate with light, an optical member such as a diffusion sheet, and the like. The light source is arranged, for example, along the end of the light guide plate, and the light propagating inside the light guide plate is reflected to the liquid crystal panel 157A. In the case of the present embodiment, the backlight 157B has an opening 157b formed in a region inside the reel window 113 so as to penetrate in the thickness direction, so that the player can control each of the reels 110 to 112 without passing through a light guide plate or the like. Are visible. In the present embodiment, the backlight provided on each of the reels 110 to 112 is used for lighting from behind the portion where the liquid crystal panel 157A and the opening 157b overlap. Since the reel band has white (or milky white), illumination that is not much different from the backlight 157B can be realized by each of the reels 110 to 112, and the backlight of each of the reels 110 to 112 is one of the backlights 157B. The units or all of them can be called a backlight unit.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the opening 157b is a single rectangle whose contour is adapted to the reel window 113. However, three openings corresponding to the reels 110 to 112 are filled so as to fill gaps between the reels 110 to 112. It may be two rectangles. The sharpness of the image displayed at the position of the gap between the reels can be improved.

  The device for displaying images is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix A display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. The display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that a player can visually recognize the entire screen. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, an ornament (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the ornament, so that the display screen may appear odd. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

<Reel drive unit>
The structures of the reels 110 to 112 and their peripheral components will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 is a partially exploded perspective view of the reel drive unit 10, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of each reel and peripheral components.

  The reel drive unit 10 includes a reel case 11 made of a box-shaped metal plate. The reel case 11 includes three reels 110 to 112 (referred to collectively as a reel R), a drive motor 2 for rotating and driving each of the reels 110 to 112, and rotation of each of the reels 110 to 112. An index sensor 3 for detecting a position, and a backlight module 4 for projecting light toward the back side of a reel band T0 to T2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as a reel band T) of each of the reels 110 to 112. Is housed.

  The reel R includes an annular reel band T through which light can pass, and is rotatably provided to the drive motor 2. The backlight module 4 is arranged inside the annular reel band T, and has a light emitting unit (here, an LED) 44A. The reel R includes reel frames 12 and 14 for holding a reel band T. The reel frame 12 supports the left side surface of the reel band T, and the reel frame 14 supports the right side surface of the reel band T. The reel frames 12 and 14 are made of a material capable of transmitting light (such as a transparent or translucent plastic).

  The reel frame 12 includes an annular frame portion 12A and four support portions 12B extending from the frame portion 12A toward the center of the frame portion 12A. An L-shaped light-shielding piece 12D is attached to one of the four support parts 12B by a screw 12E so that the light-shielding piece 12D passes between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the index sensor 3. Will be arranged. The position of the symbol on the reel R in the rotation direction is determined based on the detection result of the index sensor 3, and the reels 110 to 112 can be stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The reel frame 14 is formed of an annular member having substantially the same diameter as the frame portion 12A of the reel frame 12, and is disposed on the opposite side of the reel frame 12 across the reel band T.

  The drive motor 2 is a DC motor serving as a drive source of the reel R, and is, for example, a brushless DC motor. The drive motor 2 is fixed to a pedestal formed on the mounting plate 32, and the motor shaft of the drive motor 2 is fixed to the mounting portion 12C of the reel R. Note that the motor shaft may be attached to the reel R via a speed reducer. In the case of the present embodiment, the mounting portion 12C is formed on the reel frame 12. The drive of the drive motor 2 causes the reel R to rotate around the Z axis which is coaxial with the motor shaft. The Z-axis direction is the left-right direction in this embodiment.

  The index sensor 3 is fixed to the mounting plate 32 via an L-shaped mounting base 34. The backlight module 4 includes a reflector 42 fixed to the mounting plate 32, and an illumination board 44 provided with a light emitting unit 44A for projecting light from behind the reflector 42. Three light emitting portions 44A are provided corresponding to three symbol positions per reel R, and can illuminate individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113. The harness connected to the drive motor 2, the index sensor 3, and the backlight module 4 is connected to the relay board 12 through a through hole 32A formed in the mounting plate 32.

<Symbol array>
On the reel band T, a proper number of symbols of a plurality of types are printed at equal intervals by a predetermined number of frames. Thus, the reel R constitutes a rotating body in which a symbol display section is set by a plurality of frames along the rotation direction. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing, in a planar manner, an arrangement of symbols applied to each of the reels (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

  On each of the reels 110 to 112, a plurality of types (10 types in this embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the drawing are arranged by a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in this embodiment). Frame numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the drawing are numbers for identifying the display sections of the symbols, and are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the “bell design” is assigned to the 19th frame of the left reel 110, the “replay symbol” is assigned to the 20th frame of the middle reel 111, and the “seven 1” is assigned to the 2nd frame of the right reel 112. Symbol "is arranged. The frame number may be called a symbol number.

  The total number of frames on each reel can be other than 21 frames. For example, it is possible to set the outer diameter of the reel R to 20 frames while keeping the same outer diameter.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control units of the slot machine 100 can be roughly classified into main effects in accordance with a main control unit 300 for controlling the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. , And a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-controller 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 is a control unit that controls the progress of the game, and includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, ROM 306 storing lottery data used in the internal lottery of the role, symbol arrangement of reels, etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times And the like, and a counter timer 312 for measuring the like and the like, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. ROM, which is a storage device having a storage area for temporarily storing data, and RAM, which is a storage device having a storage area for temporarily storing data.

  The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 executes monitoring of each sensor and the like and transmission of a driving pulse in response to the interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that varies a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when power is turned on. The CPU 304 includes a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a (reset signal). When a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (the main control unit main process described later is performed). Start).

  The main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320. The CPU 304 sends various sensors 318 (a bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, a bet button 132 sensor, and a medal insertion slot 141) at every interruption time. Medal acceptance sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, left reel 110 , The index sensor 3 of the middle reel 111, the index sensor 3 of the right reel 112, the opening detection sensor of the front door 102, etc.) are monitored.

  When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating the detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in the register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

  Two medal reception sensors are provided in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not medals have passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are provided inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed in the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted into the game. Detects the input operation when inputting as. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

  The index sensor 3 of the left reel 110, the index sensor 3 of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor 3 of the right reel 112 go to the L level each time the corresponding light shielding piece 12D passes. When detecting the L-level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero. This rotation position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 for driving a motor provided in a medal payout device 180, and various lamps 339 (notification lamp 123, A drive circuit 328 for driving the game medal insertion enable lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129, the game start lamp 121, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127). I have.

  The motor control board 20 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 controls the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 via the motor control board 20. The motor control board 20 is a control circuit that controls the drive motor 2 to rotate the reels 110 to 112 based on the detection result of the encoder 2 a that detects the rotation amount of the drive motor 2. By using the motor control board 20, the processing load of the rotation control of the reels 110 to 112 of the main control unit 300 can be reduced.

  A setting board 21 is connected to the motor control board 20 so that various settings relating to control of the drive motor 2 can be performed. With the setting board 21, the setting unique to the model can be performed by the hardware configuration without going through the processing of the main control unit 300, and the processing load of the main control unit 300 can be reduced. Details of the motor control board 20 and the setting board 21 will be described later.

  An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating a game state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 When the value is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400. In the case of the present embodiment, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be unable to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the whole of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 is used to temporarily store data with the CPU 404. RAM 408, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entirety of the first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling the lighting pattern of the reel backlight and various displays, and the like.

  The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via a data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 according to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing audio data is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data obtained from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (side lamps 144, title panel 162 lamps, game medal insertable lamps 124, bet buttons) via an input / output interface. Lamps, reel backlights, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

  Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 423, and the CPU 404 monitors the detection result of the door sensor 421 that detects the opening of the front door 102.

  The CPU 404 sends and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 controls the display of the effect image display device 157 according to the instruction of the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and controls the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. And a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entirety of the second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 504 transmits the data for frequency division stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and the VDP 534 is connected to the ROM 506 and the VRAM 536 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157. The CPU 504 can clear the RAM of the VRAM 536.

<Types of winning combinations and game status>
Next, the types of winning combinations (winning winning combinations) of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the number of winning combinations (payout number of game media). The transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.

  The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination (special combination 1 to special combination 3) and a general combination (re-game combination, small combination 1 to small combination 3). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and may be arbitrarily adopted.

  Of the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combinations 1 to 3 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the re-gaming role is a role that enables a re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be referred to as “operators”. The “winning” in the present embodiment also includes a case where a symbol combination of an actor without a medal payout (without a medal payout) is displayed on the activated line. The winning of the special combination 3 and the replaying combination is included.

  The special combination 1 to the special combination 3 are combinations (operating combinations) that shift to a special game state upon winning. However, no medal will be paid out for winning the role. As for the corresponding symbol combinations, the special role 1 is “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1”, the special role 2 is “Seven 2-Seven 2—Seven 2”, and the special role 3 is “BAR-BAR-BAR”. ".

  The re-gaming combination is a winning combination (operating combination) in which a player can play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning, and the medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is “replay-replay-replay”. The re-gaming combination may be any combination that enables the player to play the next game without inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, when the player wins the re-game, the medal insertion may be automatically inserted (the medal insertion number is reset in a medal insertion number storage area described later) in the next game, or the player may win the re-game. The medals inserted in the completed game may be carried over and used as they are in the next game.

  “Small win (small win 1 to small win 3)” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “small win 1”, “small win 2”, and “small win 3”), a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for small part 1, "cherry-ANY-ANY" for small part 2, and "bell-bell-bell" for small part 3. The corresponding numbers are as shown in FIG. In the case of “Cherry-ANY-ANY”, the symbol on the left reel 110 may be “Cherry”, and the symbols on the center reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

  Next, the type and transition of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described. The slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment is roughly classified into a normal gaming state (may be referred to as RT0), a special internal winning state (may be referred to as RT1), and a special gaming state (referred to as RT2). There are a total of three game states.

  The normal gaming state (RT0) is a gaming state that is set first (default) after power-on. When a special combination 1 or a special combination 2 or a special combination 3 is internally won in the normal gaming state, a special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). Is stored within).

  When this flag is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination internal winning state. This flag is kept on until the internally won combination is won, so that the internally won combination can be easily won in the next and subsequent games. In other words, even if a special combination 1 or a special combination 2 or a special combination 3 does not win a special combination in a game internally won, the special combination will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (For example, when the special role 1 is internally won, "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1", when the special role 2 is internally won, "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2", when the special role 3 is internally won. Is a symbol combination of "BAR-BAR-BAR").

  The main controller 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, the special combination 2, or the special combination 3. The special game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In the special game state, for example, it is possible to internally win the small win 3 with a high probability (for example, 100%). In this special game state, when the end condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined number (for example, 300) of payout of game media), the game is shifted to the normal game state.

  The lottery of the role is performed based on a lottery table (lottery data) prepared for each gaming state. The internal winning probability of the hand in each game state is determined by selecting, from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each hand, and the range of the random number value acquired at the time of the internal lottery. It is determined by a value obtained by dividing by numerical data (for example, 65535). For example, if the lottery value of a certain combination is 512, the winning probability of that combination is 512/65536 × 100 ≒ 0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each character range and loss are associated with each numerical range. It determines whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which combination, and determines the internal lottery combination. This lottery data is provided with settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probabilities of at least one role are different, and a game store attendant or the like can arbitrarily select and set any one of the set values.

<Reel stop control>
Next, an outline of stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of a plurality of predetermined reel stop control data based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of the internal winning process of the winning combination described above), and stopping the selected reel stop. This is performed based on the control data.

  In the reel stop control, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) may be performed. The pull-in control is control for shifting the stop positions of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (the number of symbols) (within a maximum of four frames) after the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. Say. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data includes an allowance control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that prevents any combination of winning combinations from being displayed on the winning line. , Are roughly divided into

  Examples of the allowable control are performed, for example, when a certain winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (flag is being carried over), and the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. The control is performed such that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed together within the range of the number of frames even if the number of frames is poor. However, since it is only "permissible", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, there may be a case where 100% are aligned.

  On the other hand, an example in which the prohibition control is performed is, for example, a case where the internal lottery result is lost, and the special winning combination is not being internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. Even if the number of frames is good, the control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the number of frames.

<Slot machine control processing>
Hereinafter, processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. The main control section main processing is processing relating to control of game progress.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal performs a reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 81 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of inhibition of interrupt, initial setting of I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, permission of operation to the WDT 314, and initial setting Set values, etc.

  In step S102, a game start process is performed. In this game start processing, it is checked whether or not an operation by the start lever 135 or an operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 (betting number setting operation) has been accepted, a check whether or not the betting number has reached a specified number, a betting number When a setting operation is received, preparations are made for transmitting a bet amount setting command and a start lever receiving command to the first sub-control unit 400. When the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, a process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. If there is such an operation, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the number of inserted medals is determined, and a pay line determination process is performed to determine an effective pay line. In step S104, a random number acquisition process for acquiring the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is performed.

  In step S105, a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, a winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104. The preparation for transmitting the internal lottery command indicating the result to the first sub control unit 400 is performed. As a result of the internal lottery, when any of the winning combinations (including the operating combinations) is internally won, the flag of the winning combination is turned on.

  In step S106, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data candidates is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main controller 300. In step S106, preparation is made to transmit a reel stop data command including information on the selected reel stop data to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S107, a reel rotation / stop control process is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110 to 112. In addition, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be received. When any one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped in accordance with the number of drawn frames set in the table. When all the reels 110 to 112 stop, the process proceeds to step S108.

  In this step S107, a stop button acceptance command relating to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been operated to stop for each stop operation (specifically, a stop button acceptance 1 command for the first stop operation, a second stop operation For the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, a stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400. Stop command related to the stop position of the first stop reel (specifically, a reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, a reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, and a reel stop command for the third stop operation). 3) to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S108, a display determination process is performed. In this display determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. In this step S108, preparations are made to transmit a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S109, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if a certain winning combination with a medal has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

  In step S110, a game state control process is performed. In the game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. Also, a preparation is made to transmit a gaming state command including information indicating the current gaming state to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Thus, one game is completed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S102, and the above-described processing is repeated, whereby the game proceeds.

  The various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in a command setting transmission process (step S1006 in FIG. 82) of a main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in the present embodiment, about once every 2 ms). The main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S1001, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S1002, the WDT 314 is periodically (to be detected) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (in order not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed about once every about 2 ms which is the cycle of the main control section timer interrupt.

  In step S1003, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and are partitioned in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

  In step S1004, various game processes are executed, and a process according to the interrupt status is executed.

  In step S1005, a timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in units of time.

  In step S1006, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S1007, an external output signal setting process is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S1008, a reel control process is performed. In this control process, control information is output to the motor control board 20.

  In step S1009, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S1003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read, and the presence or absence of an error related to a medal insertion abnormality, a medal payout abnormality, and the like is monitored. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker in which a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various seven-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state. When an L-level signal is output from the reel index sensor 3, the rotation position information is reset to zero.

  In step S1010, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S1012. If the low-voltage signal is off (the power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S1011.

  In step S1011, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S1001 are set in the original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in step S1012, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit>
Next, the process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 83 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 83 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is performed in step S3001. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, an area for storing internal winning information that is information indicating the result of the internal winning and an area for storing RT update information that is information indicating the gaming state are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

  In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from main control unit 300, is executed.

  In step S3005, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect preparation is performed in accordance with the effect reservation information in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if the effect data read in step S3005 includes a command to the sound source IC 418, the command is output to the sound source IC 418.

  In step S3007, a lamp control process is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if the effect data read in step S3005 includes a command to various lamps 420, the command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S3008, information output processing for setting transmission of a command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S3005 is performed. For example, if the effect data read in step S3005 includes a command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S3002.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of

  In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-controller main processing shown in FIG. 83A, and the original value is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S3202, transmission of the command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3008, updating of the effect random number value, and the like are performed. In step S3203, effect suspension processing is executed. The effect interruption process is a process executed when an interruption reason such as a power interruption occurs, and performs a process of interrupting the effect being executed. Specifically, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure upon power recovery are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and power failure processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. .

<Process of Second Sub-Control Unit>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 84 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 84 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 84D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

  When the power is turned on, first, initial setting is performed in step S5001 in FIG. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization, storage area initialization processing in the RAM 508, storage area initialization processing in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed. In the initialization of the RAM, “0” is generally stored in the storage area.

  In step S5002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5003.

  In step S5003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S5004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S5005, effect control processing is performed. More specifically, if there is a new command in step S5004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, it also includes a process of reading other effect data from the ROM 506 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S5006, an image control process (to be described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S5005. For example, if the effect data read in step S5005 includes an image control command, image control corresponding to the command is performed. For example, image control relating to a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control processing ends, the flow returns to step S5002.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S5101 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt triggers the timer interrupt processing. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S5201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S5002 in the second sub-controller main processing shown in FIG. 84A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S5002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S5202, an effect of updating the effect random number is performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S5006 in the main process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S5301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the display area A and the drawing area of the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table and the like. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on a command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S5302, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 534 has been input. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the flow advances to step S5303; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

  In step S5303, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S421, the CPU 504 sets information on image data (coordinate axes, image size of the VRAM 536) constituting the display image. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transmittance, etc.) to the VDP 534. The VDP 534 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the command stored in the attribute register.

  In step S5304, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S5305, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the drawing end of the image has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S5306; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal has been input. Wait for is entered.

  In step S5306, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Reel rotation control>
The rotation control of the reels 110 to 112, that is, the drive control of the drive motor 2 will be described. FIG. 85 is a circuit block diagram showing the main control unit 300 and the motor control board 20. One motor control board 20 is provided for one drive motor 2. In the case of the present embodiment, since three drive motors 2 are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112, three motor control boards 20 are also provided.

  The motor control board 20 includes a control IC 201 and a driver 202. The control IC 201 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer and includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input / output interface, a counter / timer, a signal processing circuit, and the like. The ROM stores a control program related to control of the drive motor 2. Controls the drive motor 2 by executing the control program. The driver 202 includes a plurality of switching elements such as transistors and FETs, and supplies power to the drive motor 2. The control IC 201 outputs a drive signal to the driver 202 based on a signal from the encoder 2a of the drive motor 2, and controls the rotation amount, rotation direction (forward rotation / reverse rotation), and rotation speed of the drive motor 2. The control IC 201 corrects the relationship between the rotation amount of the reel R rotated by the drive motor 2 and the control amount for the driver 202 based on the signal from the index sensor 3. Note that the control IC 201 may be an IC that does not include a CPU or the like and includes a plurality of types of registers.

  The setting board 21 is an electric circuit board for presetting setting information relating to the rotation of the reel R to the control IC 201 by outputting a setting signal, and is configured to be detachable from the motor control board 20 via the connector 22. ing. A method in which the setting information is incorporated in the control program of the control IC 201 can also be adopted. However, this method is disadvantageous in that a control program for the control IC 201 must be created for each model when it is desired to use the control IC 201 between different models of game consoles. The setting information may be incorporated in a control program executed by the main control unit 300, and a method in which the main control unit 300 sets the control IC 201 when the power is turned on may be adopted. However, this method is disadvantageous when the capacity of the control program of the main control unit 300 is increased and the small-capacity ROM 306 is employed. According to the present embodiment, by setting information using the setting board 20, such a problem can be solved.

  FIG. 86A shows an example of a circuit configuration of the setting board 21. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of setting information can be set, and FIG. 86 (a) shows an example of a circuit for setting information 1 among them. Has the same configuration.

  The circuit of the setting information 1 is a circuit that can output 2-bit information to the control IC 201. In the case of the illustrated example, a pull-down resistor (outputs an L setting signal) that pulls down a wiring connected to the input port of the control IC 201 via the connector 22 and a pull-up resistor (outputs an H setting signal) that pulls up And a relatively simple circuit. The control IC 201 can set the setting information by reading the signal of the input port connected to the setting board 21 at the time of turning on the power and storing the signal in a register, for example. FIG. 86B shows an example of a register, and illustrates information stored in each register (2 bits) of setting information 1 to 3. As for the setting information 1, information of LH (01) is stored corresponding to the example of the setting information 1 circuit of FIG.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the output information of the setting information of the setting board 21 is fixed. Instead of the example of the setting information 1 circuit in FIG. 86 (a), a method in which output information is easily changed by using a DIP switch or the like can be adopted. However, when the setting information of the setting board 21 is information unique to the model of the gaming table, there is a risk that the setting information may be set to incorrect information that the setting information can be changed. By employing a circuit configuration in which the output information of the setting board 21 is fixed as in the present embodiment, such an erroneous setting can be reliably avoided.

  FIG. 87 shows an example of the type of setting information. The setting information 1 is information on the total number of frames (total number of symbols) on the reel R. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that 21 frames are set. However, for example, 20 frames can be set, and a reel R of 20 frames may be used.

  The setting information 2 is information on the number of steps described later. The number of steps corresponds to the rotation resolution of one frame, and one step is the minimum unit of the amount of rotation of the reel R under the control of the control IC 201. When the reel R is rotated by the set number of steps, the reel R is rotated by one frame. Although the number of steps is 5 in the example described later, 7 or 9 may be set.

  The setting information 3 is a reference speed of the rotation speed of the reel R. This reference speed is, for example, the maximum rotation speed. The reference speed may be a minimum rotation speed or an intermediate rotation speed. The controllable rotation speed range of the reel R is set based on the reference speed. The setting information 4 is information on an adjustment rotation amount described later. The adjustment rotation amount is information for adjusting the reference stop position.

  Assuming that the circumference of the reel R is the same between different models, the control IC 201 calculates the total number of steps for one rotation of the reel R from the setting information 1 and the setting information 2 by the following expression: total step number = total frame number × It is calculated by the number of steps. The control IC 201 determines the minimum controllable rotation amount by the following formula: minimum rotation amount = 360 degrees / total number of steps. From the relationship between the total number of steps and the resolution of the encoder 2a, a detection value (for example, the number of output pulses) of the rotation amount of the encoder 2a per step can be specified. It becomes possible. The control IC 201 can manage the rotation position of one rotation of the reel R by the number of steps. For example, each time the detection value of the encoder 2a for one step is output, one is added to the rotation position counter and the index is incremented. The rotation position counter is reset upon detection of the light shielding piece 12 by the sensor 3.

  Next, the main controller 300 (basic circuit 302) and the control IC 201 are communicably connected. As shown in FIG. 88, the main control unit 300 transmits control information relating to the rotation control of the reels 110 to 112 to the control IC 201, and the control IC 201 controls the drive motor 2 based on the received control information. Further, the control IC 201 transmits the state of the drive motor 2 to the main control unit 300 as state information, and the main control unit 300 can control the progress of the game based on the received state information.

  An example of the control information and the state information and an example of the rotation control of the reel R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing the change over time of the control information and the state information.

  In the example of FIG. 89, rotation instruction information, rotation speed instruction information, and rotation direction instruction information are illustrated as the control information. The rotation speed instruction information is a command for instructing the rotation speed of the reel R at a constant speed, and in the example shown in the drawing, indicates that the reel R rotates at 80 rpm at the constant speed. The control IC 201 controls the drive motor 2 to accelerate the reel R to the rotation speed indicated by the rotation speed instruction information and maintain the rotation speed. The main control unit 300 can select the rotation speed at the constant speed from a plurality of types of rotation speeds. When the speed instruction information indicating the selected rotation speed is transmitted to the control IC 201, the control IC 201 uses the rotation speed to perform the reel rotation. R is rotated at a constant speed.

  The rotation direction instruction information is a command for instructing the rotation direction of the reel R, and in the case of the illustrated example, indicates that the reel R is to be rotated in a forward rotation (forward rotation). The forward rotation is the direction in which the symbols move in the order indicated by the arrow in the “rotation direction” in FIG. 78, and the reverse rotation (reverse rotation) is the reverse movement direction. The rotation direction instruction information can also indicate reverse rotation. The control IC 201 switches the rotation direction of the drive motor 2 according to the rotation direction specified by the rotation direction instruction information.

  The rotation speed instruction information and the rotation direction instruction information may be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the control IC 201 when starting the rotation control of the reel R, or may be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the control IC 201 together with the rotation instruction information. You may.

  The rotation instruction information is a command for instructing the rotation amount of the reel R, and is information for instructing the rotation of the reel R for one frame. The control IC 201 rotates the reel R by one frame each time the rotation instruction information is received. When the total number of frames is 21, the control IC 201 controls the drive motor 2 so that the reel R rotates 360 degrees ÷ 21 ÷ 17 degrees according to one rotation instruction information.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the rotation instruction information is a periodic pulse signal transmitted at a predetermined time interval T, and the control IC 201 rotates the reel R by one frame with a rising edge (OFF → ON) of the signal as a trigger. . The interval T is an interval shorter than the time required for rotation of one frame when the reel R is rotating at a constant speed. When rotating the reel R by two or more frames, the main control unit 300 can continue the rotation of the reel R by transmitting the rotation instruction information at intervals T.

  For example, assuming that the rotation speed of the reel R at a constant speed is Nrpm, the time t0 (ms) required for one rotation of the reel R is t0 = 60000 / N. When the total number of frames is 21, the time t1 (ms) required for rotation for one frame is t1 = t0 / 21. Therefore, T ≦ t1 is set. Preferably, T <t1 and T ≒ t1. For example, 0.95 × t1 ≦ T ≦ 0.99 × t1. When the reel R is rotated at 100 rpm, the interval T can be set to about 28 to 29 ms. Since the interval T is close to the time t1, the transmission of the rotation instruction information can be synchronized with the frame number of the symbol displayed at the reference stop position, and the stop control of the symbol can be easily performed. The reference stop position is, for example, the middle position (symbol position 2, 5, 8) in FIG.

  The control IC 201 rotates the reel R by one frame every time the rotation instruction information is received. Therefore, when receiving the next rotation instruction information within the interval T after receiving the rotation instruction information, the control IC 201 continues to rotate the reel R. Then, the reel R is further rotated by one frame. If the next rotation instruction information is not received within the interval T after receiving the rotation instruction information, the reel R is stopped. In the example of FIG. 89, after the rotation instruction information is received four times, the rotation of the reel R is stopped because there is no reception of the rotation instruction information.

  The main control unit 300 can manage the interval T in the timer update process of S1005 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 82, and can transmit control information such as rotation instruction information in the reel control process of S1008. The main control unit 300 adds one rotation position information each time the rotation instruction information is transmitted, and resets the rotation position information to zero upon detection of the L level of the index sensor 3 (the processing of S1009 in FIG. 82). . As a result, the symbol (frame number) located at the reference stop position can be managed. When the rotation position information is zero, the reference stop position is designed so that, for example, the frame of the frame number 0 is located.

  The state information is information transmitted from the control IC 201 to the main control unit 300, and is information indicating the state of the rotation control of the reel R. The status information is transmitted to, for example, a predetermined input port of the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 confirms it in the device monitoring process of S1009 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the example of FIG. 89, the acceleration state, the constant speed state, and the stop state of the reel R are illustrated as the state information. For example, the main control unit 300 enables a stop operation when acquiring state information indicating a constant speed state, and determines a symbol combination when acquiring state information indicating a stopped state, for example.

  When receiving the rotation instruction information while the reel R is stopped, the control IC 201 controls the reel R so that the reel R rotates at the rotation speed and the rotation direction specified by the rotation speed instruction information and the rotation direction instruction information. Start rotation. The acceleration control of the reel R is performed according to the control program of the control IC 201, so that the main control unit 300 does not need the program for the acceleration control, and the capacity of the control program can be reduced.

  During the acceleration of the reel R, the rotation amount of the reel R at the interval T is smaller than during the constant-speed rotation. If the difference between the rotation amounts is large, the relationship between the interval T and the rotation amount of the reel R may be broken. FIG. 90 (a) is an explanatory diagram thereof. In the figure, the reel R (that is, the drive motor 2) is accelerated within a time period of the first two intervals T at a predetermined acceleration up to the rotation speed (instructed rotation speed) specified by the rotation speed instruction information. . The rotation amount of the reel R after reaching the designated rotation speed is represented by the interval T × the designated rotation speed. During the acceleration period, the rotation amount decreases by the area R1.

  Therefore, when accelerating to the rotation speed (instruction rotation speed) indicated by the rotation speed instruction information, the control IC 201 of the present embodiment accelerates the reel R to a rotation speed higher than the instruction rotation speed and then increases the reel R to the instruction rotation speed. Decelerate and rotate at a constant speed. FIG. 90 (b) is an explanatory diagram thereof. In the figure, within the time of the first two intervals T, the reel R is accelerated to a rotation speed higher than the indicated rotation speed, then reduced to the indicated rotation speed, and is rotated at a constant speed at the indicated rotation speed. The area R1 indicates the amount of rotation of the reel R, which is smaller than at the time of constant speed rotation, and the area R2 indicates the amount of rotation of the reel R, which is larger than at the time of constant speed rotation. By controlling the acceleration, the maximum speed, and the deceleration so that the area R1 and the area R2 become equal, the relationship between the interval T and the rotation amount of the reel R can be maintained.

  In some cases, a deviation may occur between the interval T and the rotation amount of the reel R even when the reel R is rotating at a constant speed. However, the detection of the light shielding piece 12 by the index sensor 3 causes the reel R to be added by a small amount. After deceleration, the control IC 201 can match the rotational position of the reel R with the ON timing of the rotation instruction information.

  Next, the relationship between the interval T and the rotation amount of the reel R can be maintained by increasing and decreasing the interval T in accordance with the increase and decrease in the instruction rotation speed. FIG. 91 and FIG. 92 show one example. In the example of FIG. 91, the designated rotation speed is doubled as compared with the example of FIG. In this case, the interval T is に 対 し て of the interval T in FIG. In the example of FIG. 92, the instructed rotation speed is １ ／ times that of the example of FIG. In this case, the interval T is twice as large as the interval T in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the rotation instruction information and the rotation speed instruction information are different information. However, the rotation instruction information may include the rotation speed instruction information. For example, the rotation speed may be specified by the ON time (pulse width) of the rotation instruction information. The main control unit 300 sets the length of the ON time of the pulse signal (OFF → ON) of the rotation instruction information to the ON time having a length corresponding to the rotation speed. For example, the pulse width is shortened when the designated rotation speed is increased, and the pulse width is increased when the designated rotation speed is decreased. The control IC 201 may measure the pulse width of the rotation instruction information (time the ON time). Since the rotation instruction information and the rotation speed instruction information can be one pulse signal, the number of signal lines can be reduced.

  Next, control of the control IC 201 when the reel R is stopped will be described. As described above, when the rotation instruction information is not received, the control IC 201 stops the rotation of the reel R. At this time, the control is performed such that the target symbol is stopped at the reference stop position, and it is desirable that the stop position can be finely adjusted in the rotation direction. This is advantageous when the reel drive unit 10 and the motor control board 20 are diverted between models. Since the configuration of the reel window 113 differs depending on the model, the upper middle symbol position (symbol positions 2, 5, and 8 in FIG. 75) may be slightly better, or the lower middle symbol position may be slightly better. It is.

  In this embodiment, an adjustment rotation amount, which is the rotation amount of the reel R for one frame or less, can be set as the setting information 4 in FIG. 87, and the position of the symbol at the reference stop position is finely adjusted by the adjustment rotation amount. be able to. In other words, fine adjustment of the reference stop position is possible. Specifically, when the rotation instruction information is not received, the control IC 201 rotates the reel R by the adjustment rotation amount and stops. In the case of the present embodiment, the adjustment rotation amount can be set in units of equally divided steps of the rotation amount for one frame. This step is also information that can be set as the number of steps in the setting information 2 in FIG.

  FIG. 93 shows an example of the steps. The example in the figure illustrates an example in which the rotation amount per frame is divided into five steps. In other words, the total number of steps for one round of the reel R is 5 steps × 21 frames = 105 steps, and the stop position of the reel R can be selected in 105 steps.

  FIG. 94 shows a setting example of the adjustment rotation amount. FIG. 94A at the center shows an example in which the adjustment rotation amount is set to three steps, which is a standard adjustment rotation amount. FIG. 94B on the left side is an example in which the adjustment rotation amount is set to one step. As compared with the example of FIG. 94 (a), the symbol is shifted upward and stopped. FIG. 94C shows an example in which the adjustment rotation amount is set to 5 steps. As compared with the example of FIG. 94 (a), the symbol is shifted downward and stopped. In each case, it is assumed that the reel R is rotated in the forward direction.

  A specific example of stop control will be described. It is assumed that the main control unit 300 determines that the rotation of the reel R is stopped three frames ahead by the stop operation during the rotation of the reel R. The third frame is stopped based on the adjustment rotation amount. Therefore, the main control unit 300 transmits the rotation instruction information to the control IC 201 twice (3-1 = 2). The control IC 201 rotates the reel R by two frames by receiving the rotation instruction information twice, and if there is no reception of the rotation instruction information, rotates the reel R by the adjustment rotation amount and stops. This is the third rotation. Thereby, the target symbol can be stopped at the reference stop position corresponding to the structure of the model.

  The same applies to the case where there is no stop operation during the rotation of the reel R and the rotation of the reel R is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. After a predetermined time has elapsed, main controller 300 determines the number of frames to be rotated thereafter, and transmits to control IC 201 rotation instruction information that is one less than the determined number of frames. The control IC 201 rotates the reel R by the number of frames corresponding to the number of rotation instruction information, and then rotates and stops the reel R by the adjustment rotation amount.

  Next, an effect example of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95A shows a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped before the start lever 135 is operated. At the symbol positions 2, 5, and 8 (see FIG. 75) serving as the reference stop positions, the symbol of the frame number 15 (left reel 110), the symbol of the frame number 16 (middle reel 111), and the symbol of the frame number 19 ( The right reel 112) is stopped.

  The main controller 300 starts the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 in response to the operation of the start lever 135. As an effect example, the main control unit 300 determines, for example, a temporary stop position, and calculates the number of moving symbols (the number of frames) from the current position to the temporary stop position. The rotation instruction information is transmitted to the control IC 201 by the calculated number of frames.

  For example, when the symbol on the left reel 110 is determined to be moved by six frames, the rotation instruction information is transmitted six times. Note that the reel R may be stopped at a desired position after being rotated once. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a longer time at which position to stop. For example, if the user wants to move six symbols after rotating the reel R once, the rotation instruction information may be transmitted 27 times. The amount of rotation (the number of moving frames) can be made different between the three reels 110 to 112.

  The main controller 300 stops transmitting the rotation instruction information. Then, the reels 110 to 112 can be temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. In the example of FIG. 95, the left reel 110 is rotating for six frames, the middle reel 111 is rotating for six frames, and the right reel 112 is rotating for nine frames from the state of FIG. 95 (a). Thereby, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 as the effect ends. No stop operation is accepted during this effect period.

  Subsequently, game rotation is started as shown in FIG. 95 (d). At this time, when shifting the rotation start timing of the reels 110 to 112, the main control unit 300 counts, for example, a delay time for shifting the rotation start timing of each reel, and rotates the second and third reels. The transmission of the instruction information is executed on condition that the corresponding delay time has elapsed. Thereafter, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in response to a stop operation of the player or after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In this embodiment, the rotation control of the reels 110 to 112 is the same as the rotation control for the effect and the rotation control for the game progress, but may be different. That is, in the rotation control for the progress of the game, since it is not possible to know in advance when the player will perform the stop operation, the rotation instruction information is generated at random by transmitting the rotation instruction information for each frame at intervals T. Although it is possible to cope with a stop operation, in the case of rotation control for production, the rotation amount and the stop position can be determined in advance. For this reason, in the rotation control for the effect, for example, a configuration in which the rotation instruction information is transmitted to the control IC 201 without an interval T or a control information for instructing the total rotation amount, instead of the rotation instruction information for each frame, is used. The control IC 201 transmits once, and the control IC 201 performs control corresponding thereto, or transmits once the control information of the number of moving symbols (the number of moving frames) (for example, control information for moving five symbols), and performs control. The configuration in which the IC 201 performs control corresponding thereto may be employed. This may reduce the load on the main control unit 300 in some cases.

  Note that the rotation control of the reel R and the circuit configuration thereof according to the present embodiment can be applied to other rotating bodies such as a rotating body for effects not related to the symbol display for winning determination. Further, the present invention is not limited to the slot machine, and can be applied to various types of rotating bodies provided in a pachinko machine.

<Summary of Embodiment>
A1. The gaming table of the above embodiment (for example, 100)
A rotator (for example, 110-112) in which a display section of a symbol is set by a plurality of frames along the rotation direction,
A DC motor (e.g., 2) as a drive source of the rotating body,
DC motor control means (e.g., 201) for controlling the DC motor to rotate the rotating body,
Game progress control means for controlling the game progress (for example, 300),
A gaming table with
The game progress control means is means for transmitting rotation instruction information for rotating the rotating body to the DC motor control means,
The rotation instruction information is information for instructing rotation of one frame of the rotating body,
The game progress control means is means for transmitting the rotation instruction information to the DC motor control means at predetermined intervals (for example, T) when rotating the rotating body by two or more frames,
The DC motor control means is means for rotating the rotating body by one frame each time the rotation instruction information is received,
The DC motor control unit is a unit that, when receiving the rotation instruction information while rotating the rotating body, continues rotating the rotating body and further rotates the rotating body by one frame. .

  According to this embodiment, there is a case where a gaming table having a feature in controlling the DC motor can be provided. Further, the load on the game progress control means may be reduced, or the capacity of the control program of the game progress control means may be reduced, and the amount of rotation of the rotating body may be easily recognized by the game progress control means. There is.

A2. In the above embodiment,
The predetermined interval is an interval that is equal to or less than a time required for rotation of one frame when the rotating body is rotating at a constant speed.

  According to this embodiment, there are cases where the rotation of the rotating body can be smoothly continued, and cases where it is possible to cope with a random stop of the rotating body.

A3. In the above embodiment,
The DC motor control means is means for rotating the rotating body at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed,
When accelerating the rotating body to the predetermined rotation speed, the DC motor control means accelerates the rotating body at a constant speed at the predetermined rotation speed after accelerating the rotation body to a rotation speed higher than the predetermined rotation speed. It is a means to make it.

  According to this embodiment, in some cases, the load on the game progress control means can be reduced, and the capacity of the control program can be reduced. In addition, it is easy to synchronize the predetermined interval with a change in the rotational position of the rotating body. There are cases.

B1. The gaming table of the above embodiment (for example, 100)
A rotator (for example, 110-112) in which a display section of a symbol is set by a plurality of frames along the rotation direction,
A DC motor (e.g., 2) as a drive source of the rotating body,
DC motor control means (e.g., 201) for controlling the DC motor to rotate the rotating body,
Game progress control means for controlling the game progress (for example, 300),
A gaming table with
The game progress control means is means for transmitting rotation instruction information for rotating the rotating body to the DC motor control means,
The rotation instruction information is information for instructing rotation of one frame of the rotating body,
The game progress control means is means for transmitting speed instruction information for instructing the rotation speed of the rotating body to the DC motor control means,
The game progress control means is means for transmitting the rotation instruction information to the DC motor control means at a predetermined interval (for example, T) when rotating the rotator by two frames or more,
The DC motor control means is means for rotating the rotating body by one frame each time the rotation instruction information is received,
The DC motor control unit is a unit that, when receiving the rotation instruction information while rotating the rotating body, continues rotating the rotating body and further rotates the rotating body by one frame. ,
The DC motor control means is means for, upon receiving the speed instruction information, rotating the rotating body at the rotation speed indicated by the speed instruction information.

  According to this embodiment, there is a case where a gaming table having a feature in controlling the DC motor can be provided. Further, the load on the game progress control means may be reduced, or the capacity of the control program of the game progress control means may be reduced, and the amount of rotation of the rotating body may be easily recognized by the game progress control means. In some cases, the rotation speed of the rotating body can be set.

B2. In the above embodiment,
The game progress control means is means for transmitting one of the plurality of types of the speed instruction information to the DC motor control means.

  According to this embodiment, the game progress control means may be able to easily set the rotation speed.

B3. In the above embodiment,
The predetermined interval is an interval that is equal to or less than a time required for rotation of one frame when the rotating body is rotating at a constant speed.

  According to this embodiment, there are cases where the rotation of the rotating body can be smoothly continued, and cases where it is possible to cope with a random stop of the rotating body.

B4. In the above embodiment,
The DC motor control means is means for rotating the rotating body at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed,
The predetermined rotation speed is a rotation speed indicated by the speed instruction information,
When accelerating the rotating body to the predetermined rotation speed, the DC motor control means accelerates the rotating body at a constant speed at the predetermined rotation speed after accelerating the rotation body to a rotation speed higher than the predetermined rotation speed. It is a means to make it.

  According to this embodiment, the load on the game progress control means may be reduced, or the capacity of the control program of the game progress control means may be reduced, and the predetermined interval and the rotational position of the rotating body may be reduced. Sometimes it is easy to synchronize changes.

B5. In the above embodiment,
The rotation instruction information is a pulse signal,
The speed instruction information is a pulse width of the pulse signal.

  According to this embodiment, information transmitted from the game progress control means to the DC motor control means may be reduced.

C1. The gaming table of the above embodiment (for example, 100)
A rotator (for example, 110-112) in which a display section of a symbol is set by a plurality of frames along the rotation direction,
A DC motor (e.g., 2) as a drive source of the rotating body,
DC motor control means (e.g., 201) for controlling the DC motor to rotate the rotating body,
Game progress control means for controlling the game progress (for example, 300),
A gaming table with
The game progress control means is means for transmitting, to the DC motor control means, rotation instruction information for rotating the rotator by a rotation amount based on the number of frames,
The DC motor control unit is a unit that can set in advance a rotation amount of the rotating body for one frame or less (hereinafter, referred to as “adjustment rotation amount”),
The DC motor control means is means for rotating and stopping the rotating body by a rotation amount based on the rotation instruction information and the adjustment rotation amount.

  According to this embodiment, there is a case where a gaming table having a feature in controlling the DC motor can be provided. In some cases, the reference stop position of the rotating body can be easily changed depending on the gaming table.

C2. In the above embodiment,
The adjustment rotation amount can be set in advance by a setting board (for example, 21) that supplies a setting signal to the DC motor control unit.

  According to this embodiment, when changing the reference stop position, it may be possible to avoid increasing the load on the game progress control unit or increasing the capacity of the control program of the game progress control unit. .

D1. The gaming table of the above embodiment (for example, 100)
A rotator (for example, 110-112) in which a display section of a symbol is set by a plurality of frames along the rotation direction,
A DC motor (e.g., 2) as a drive source of the rotating body,
DC motor control means (e.g., 201) for controlling the DC motor to rotate the rotating body,
Game progress control means for controlling the game progress (for example, 300),
A gaming table with
The game progress control means is means for transmitting, to the DC motor control means, rotation instruction information for rotating the rotator by a rotation amount based on the number of frames,
The DC motor control unit is a unit that can preset information on rotation of the rotating body (hereinafter, referred to as “setting information”),
The DC motor control unit is a unit that controls rotation of the rotating body based on the setting information and the rotation instruction information.

  According to this embodiment, there is a case where a gaming table having a feature in controlling the DC motor can be provided. By setting information unique to the gaming table as setting information, it may be possible to avoid increasing the load on the game progress control means or increasing the capacity of the control program.

D2. In the above embodiment,
The setting information includes at least frame number information indicating the total number of frames of the rotating body (for example, setting information 1),
The DC motor control means is means for rotating the rotating body based on a rotation amount of the rotating body per one frame specified based on the frame number information.

  According to this embodiment, there are cases where the number of frames can be set according to the plan of the gaming table, and in which the DC motor control means can be used for a different gaming table.

D3. In the above embodiment,
The setting information includes at least resolution information indicating the resolution of rotation for one frame,
The DC motor control unit is a unit that can determine a minimum rotation amount of the rotating body based on the frame number information and the resolution information.

  According to this embodiment, there is a case where the rotation of the rotating body can be controlled according to the plan of the gaming table, and the DC motor control means can be diverted to a different gaming table.

D4. The motor control IC (for example, 201) of the above embodiment is
A game console for controlling a DC motor (e.g., 2) serving as a drive source of a rotator (e.g., 110-112) in which a symbol display section is set by a plurality of frames along a rotation direction to rotate the rotator. A motor control IC,
The motor control IC is an IC capable of presetting information on rotation of the rotating body (hereinafter, referred to as “setting information”).
The motor control IC is an IC that rotates the rotator based on reception of the setting information and rotation instruction information for rotating the rotator with a rotation amount based on the number of frames.

  According to this embodiment, by setting the information unique to the game console as the setting information, it is possible to avoid increasing the load on the game progress control means of the game console, or to increase the capacity of the control program of the game progress control device. In some cases can be avoided.

Claims (5)

A rotating body in which the display section of the symbol is set by a plurality of frames along the rotating direction,
A DC motor serving as a drive source of the rotating body;
DC motor control means for controlling the DC motor to rotate the rotating body,
Game progress control means for controlling game progress,
A gaming table with
The game progress control means is means for transmitting rotation instruction information for rotating the rotating body to the DC motor control means,
The rotation instruction information is information for instructing rotation of one frame of the rotating body,
The game progress control means is means for transmitting speed instruction information for instructing the rotation speed of the rotating body to the DC motor control means,
The game progress control means is means for transmitting the rotation instruction information to the DC motor control means at predetermined intervals when rotating the rotator by two frames or more,
The DC motor control means is means for rotating the rotating body by one frame each time the rotation instruction information is received,
The DC motor control unit is a unit that, when receiving the rotation instruction information while rotating the rotating body, continues rotating the rotating body and further rotates the rotating body by one frame. ,
The DC motor control unit is a unit that, upon receiving the speed instruction information, rotates the rotating body at the rotation speed indicated by the speed instruction information.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1,
The game progress control means is means for transmitting one of the plurality of types of the speed instruction information, the speed instruction information, to the DC motor control means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The predetermined interval is an interval equal to or less than a time required for rotation of one frame when the rotating body is rotating at a constant speed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
The DC motor control means is means for rotating the rotating body at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed,
The predetermined rotation speed is a rotation speed indicated by the speed instruction information,
The DC motor control means, when accelerating the rotating body to the predetermined rotation speed, after accelerating the rotating body to a rotation speed higher than the predetermined rotation speed, rotating the rotating body at the predetermined rotation speed at a constant speed. Means to make
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
The rotation instruction information is a pulse signal,
The speed instruction information is a pulse width of the pulse signal,
A gaming table characterized by the following.